Gothic

22/11/2018 The Linguistics Research Center
Gothic Online
Series Introduction
Todd B. Krause and Jonathan Slocum
Gothic is the language of the earliest literary documents of the Germanic peoples as a whole. The only
linguistic remnants of Germanic peoples which antedate Gothic remains are some of the Runic
inscriptions, with which the Gothic language shares not a few characteristics because of its general
linguistic conservatism. The language itself belongs to what is termed the East Germanic branch of
languages, and is in fact the sole documented survivor of the branch. Other languages presumed to have
belonged to this group, such as Vandalic, have left no written records. The primary source of linguistic
data for the Gothic language is what remains of a translation of the Bible made sometime in the 4th
century AD. Aside from a few other remains, however, this period furnishes the only remains of the Gothic
language. Gothic may have survived near the Black Sea, though in altered form, until at least the 16th
century as a nonliterary language now termed Crimean Gothic.
1. Location of the Goths

Precise location of the Gothic homeland is di cult for two principal reasons:
1. the Goths left no clear written or archaeological records which may be used to pinpoint their location;
2. they seem not to have remained in one region for any lengthy period of time, being driven to migration
by stimuli both internal and external.
From later sources, the general consensus is that the earliest known location of the Goths was
somewhere in the reaches of northern or northeastern Europe. This may have included parts of
Scandinavia, as well as the northern reaches of modern Poland. The Goths appear to have subsequently
migrated to the regions bordering the Black Sea to the north, and to the east of the Danube river, which
formed the border of the Roman empire.
From this region, the Goths ventured out in the mid-3rd century AD on a series of raids which marked the
beginning of a centuries' long struggle between the Gothic peoples and the Roman empire. The Goths
crossed the Danube into Roman territory in 376 AD.
At no point in their mention in the history books do the Goths seem to have been a completely uni ed
people. In the period of their earliest raids, they seem to have been broken into several factions. By the
time they became an overarching threat to the empire, they seem to have coalesced into two main groups,
eventually termed the Visigoths and Ostrogoths.
https://lrc.la.utexas.edu/eieol_printable/gotol 1/309
Though the term Visigoth may have originated in an embellished rendering of an earlier appellation, Vesi,
it soon came to connote 'west'; its counterpart Ostrogoth seems always to have connoted 'east', both
terms agreeing with the relative locations of the tribes. The latter tribe eventually fought alongside the
Huns as they ravaged Europe. The former eventually pushed its way through Italy and seized Rome itself.
Their subsequent migrations and settlements have left linguistic remnants in regional names throughout
Europe.
2. Position of Gothic in the Germanic Family

2.1 Characteristic Features of Gothic
The Gothic language has several characteristics which distinguish it from other languages of the
Germanic family. The most salient of these are discussed in the following two sections.
2.1.1 Phonological Characteristics
The Proto-Germanic vowel *e1, probably pronounced [ǣ], became Gothic ē, though other Germanic
languages have ā or ō. Compare the following forms:
Gothic Sound Gothic Old High Old Old Meaning

Change German English Norse

*e1 > ē qēmun kāmun cwōmon kvāmu 'they came'
mēna māno mōna māne 'moon'
Though Gothic follows Greek orthographic practice in using a doubled-g to write the sound of Modern
English ng in sing, i.e. gg = [ŋg], there are some instances of a true double consonant gg [gg]. These are
always found before -w- and are re exes of a general sound development in Gothic called
Verschaerfung, or Sharpening. According to this rule, Proto-Germanic *ww became Gothic ggw; a similar
development changed Proto-Germanic *jj to Gothic ddj. This sharpening is a feature Gothic shares with
Old Norse. Compare the examples in the following table:


*ww > ggw triggws triuwi trīewe tryggr 'true, faithful'
glaggwus glau glēaw gluggr 'accurate; wise'

*jj > ggj twaddjē zwei(i)o twēg(e)a tveggja 'of two'
-waddjus veggr 'wall'
Gothic alone does not show the effects of rhotacism which other Germanic languages display. Through
this change, Proto-Germanic *z became r in most of the Germanic daughter languages (this *z
sometimes appears as s in Gothic). The terminology derives from the Greek name for the equivalent of
the letter r, i.e. rho. Consider the following examples:


*z > z láisjan lēren lǣran 'teach'
huzd hort hord hodd 'hoard'
wēsun wārun wǣron váru 'they were'
Gothic displays the change of initial Proto-Germanic *fl- to þl-, which does not occur in other Germanic
languages. But this seems only to have occured in the environment of -h, -hs, or *-kw. Consider the
table below:
Gothic Gothic Old High Old Old Meaning

Sound German English Norse
Change

*fl- > þl- þliuhan fliohan flēon flýja ' ee'
*þlahsjan flīeman flæma 'frighten, drive, chase'

*fl- > fl- flōdus flōt flōd flōð ' ood'
flōkan fluohhōn flōcan flōkinn 'bewail, strike, curse,

(ptcple.) distress'
Gothic did not undergo the i-umlaut and u-umlaut found in several other Germanic languages. Through
this change, an i or j contained in one syllable would serve to front the vowel of the immediately
preceding syllable, leaving its roundness unaffected; analogously an u or w in a given syllable would serve
to round the vowel in the immediately preceding syllable, leaving frontness or backness unaffected.
Consider the following examples:
PGmc Gothic Old High Old Old Meaning

German English Norse

*gastiz gasts gast giest gestr 'stranger, guest'
*nasjan nasjan nerren nerian 'save'
*handus handus hant hond hǫnd 'hand'
2.1.2 Morphological Characteristics
Gothic has retained the original nominative singular masculine ending of a-stem nouns, PGmc *-az, more
or less intact as nal -s:


*dagaz dags tac dæg dagr 'day'
*gastiz gasts gast giest gestr 'stranger, guest'
Gothic likewise retains the Proto-Indo-European accusative plural ending *-ns, which elsewhere in
Germanic loses the nasal, and sometimes the sibilant as well:


*dagans dagans taga dagas daga 'days' (acc. pl.)
Gothic is unique among the Germanic languages in retaining a functioning morphological passive.
Compare Gothic baírada 'is borne' to Greek phéretai and Sanskrit bhárate. This passive conjugation is
only found in the present tense. The only remnants of such forms in other Germanic languages are
possibly Runic haite, Old Norse heiti, Old English hātte 'I am called'.
Gothic is also unique in preserving a full class of reduplicating verbs, the seventh class of strong verbs.
Strong verbs across the Germanic languages generally use vocalic alternation to signal a change in tense,
but Gothic possesses in addition a fairly large number of verbs that reduplicate the root syllable to mark
the past tense. Thus the 3rd person singular preterite indicative of háitan 'call (by name)' is haíháit.
Compare Greek dé-dōka and Latin de-dī 'I have given'. Remnants of such a system survive in other
Germanic languages, but the instances are few and far between: Old English hēt '(he) called' < he-ht,
reduplicated preterite of hātan 'name'. Generally such verbs have shifted to a different strong verb class
in the other Germanic languages, e.g. Old High German 3rd singular preterite hiaz from eizan 'be called'.
Gothic displays the ending -t in the second person singular preterite indicative of strong verbs. This
feature is also found in Old Norse, but generally lost elsewhere in Germanic. In preterite-present verbs,
however, the form survives across the Germanic languages. Compare the following examples of cognate
strong verbs and cognate preterite-present verbs:
Verb Type Gothic Old High Old Old Meaning


Strong namt nāmi nōme namt 'thou didst take'

Preterite-Pres. þarft darft þearft þarft 'thou needest'
Gothic is the only language of the Germanic family to employ a polysyllabic dental su x in forming the
preterite of weak verbs. For example, where Old English has neredon 'we saved', Gothic has nasidēdum
'we saved'. While there is a single dental in the Old English su x, Gothic shows the sequence -dēd- in
plural forms.
2.2 Gothic and the Germanic Family Tree
The Germanic family tree is traditionally divided into three branches: North, West, and East Germanic. Of
North Germanic, Old Norse is the primary exemplar; of West Germanic, Old English and Old High German
are exemplars; of East Germanic, Gothic is the sole remnant. The three branches are not, however, as
distinct as the terminology might rst suggest. Gothic shares separate features with various languages in
each of the other two branches.
Gothic shows several features in common with North Germanic (some of which have been discussed
above), including the following:
1. sharpening of *ww and *jj;
2. the sound change *ngw > ng;
3. a number of verbs of the -nan class;
4. a 2nd person singular preterite ending -t;
5. the lack of short forms, i.e. non-in xed forms, for 'stand' and 'go';
6. the lack of a gerund.
Gothic and Old Norse also share a feminine participle formation in -īn, rather than the -jō formation
found in West Germanic. For these reasons, and others, some scholars have argued that Gothic and Old
Norse early formed a single branch of Germanic, which subsequently divided. This has the added bene t
of geographical support. In particular, ancient sources describing the earliest locations of the Goths place
them in the vicinity of Scandinavia. Such a location at an early date would surely have led to a period of
common development.
There are, however, counterarguments to the close association of Gothic and North Germanic. Among
these counterarguments is the fact that sharpening is the only clear common innovation within Gothic
and Old Norse. All of the other commonalities can potentially be explained as facets of Proto-Germanic
which all the Germanic languages would have shared, but which subsequently only Gothic and Old Norse
retained. All other Germanic languages simply lost those features. What is more, the form of sharpening
in the two languages differs: NGmc *jj > Gothic ddj, but Old Norse ggj. And it is not altogether clear that
North Germanic had no short forms for the verbs 'stand' and 'go'. The earliest texts of Old Swedish do in
fact show short forms stā 'stand' and gā 'go'.
To add to the mystery of how East Germanic is related to the other branches of the family, there is the fact
that Gothic shares some common features with Old High German, in the West Germanic branch, to the
exclusion of Old Norse. These include:
1. third person pronoun, masculine nominative singular stem in i-, rather than h-: Gothic is and Old High
German er as against Old Norse hinn, Old English hē, Old Saxon hē;
2. third person singular present indicative form of 'to be' with nal -t: Gothic ist and Old High German ist
as against Old Norse er, Old English is, Old Saxon is, ist.
Such features suggest the possibility of close interaction between Goths and Germans of the
southeastern regions. If these features can be dated to an early period, as some scholars argue, then this
casts some doubts on a protracted period of common development between Gothic and Old Norse, and
even on the grouping of the West Germanic dialects itself.
3. The Gothic Corpus

The corpus of the Gothic language consists chie y of large portions of a translation of the New
Testament Gospels and Epistles; the only surviving remnants of the Old Testament are chapters 5-7 of
Nehemiah. This translation is generally ascribed to the bishop Wul la in the middle of the 4th century AD,
though there is no direct evidence that the translation that survives is actually in his words; the major
manuscripts themselves all date from the late 5th to middle 6th century. What remain are references to
the fact that Wul la did in fact translate the Bible in its entirety, save for the Book of Kings. There are,
however, no other references to a biblical translator among the Goths, so that the association of the
surviving text with Wul la is not likely to be far off the mark.
The Gothic biblical translation is apparently based on the Antiochene-Byzantine recension of Lucian the
Martyr (c. 312), which was a Greek text dominant in the diocese of Constantinople. This exact version of
the biblical writings does not survive, though some scholars have attempted to delimit the places in which
it differs from the Greek manuscripts on which the modern received text is based. There are also apparent
traces of in uence from Latin translations of the Bible from the pre-Vulgate era.
Of the codices that contain the Gothic translation of the Bible, the Codex Argenteus, or Silver Codex, is by
far the most impressive. The name comes from the binding, which is made of silver. Within this are
contained 187 leaves out of a presumed original 336. The pages are purple parchment, though now a
faded red, with letters of silver and gold. The beginnings of gospels, the rst lines of sections and the
Lord's Prayer, and the gospel symbols at the bottom of the pages are all in gold letters; the rest is written
in silver. The codex was discovered in the abbey at Werden in the 16th century. It was subsequently taken
to Prague; when the city fell to the Swedes in 1648, the codex was taken to Stockholm. After being
transferred to Holland and then purchased again by the Swedish chancellor de la Gardie, it now resides in
the library of the University of Uppsala. Another leaf was discovered in 1970 in the cathedral of Speyer on
the Rhine.
The Codex Gissensis was found in Egypt in 1907. This consisted of four pages containing verses from
Luke 23-24 in Latin and Gothic. It was subsequently ruined by water damage.
The Codex Carolinus is a palimpsest consisting of 4 leaves and containing verses from the Epistle to the
Romans in both Latin and Gothic. It was found in the abbey of Weissenburg, though it originally belonged
to the monastery at Bobbio in Liguria. It now resides in the Wolfenbuettel library.
The Codices Ambrosiani are likewise palimpsests. There are ve of these codices, labelled A-E. Codex A
contains 102 leaves, of which 6 are blank and another illegible. This contains various segments of the
Epistles, as well as one page of a calendar. Codex B contains 78 leaves, which have the complete text of II
Corinthians as well as parts of other Epistles. Codex C has two leaves, containing Matthew 25-27. Codex
D contains 3 leaves, showing part of the book of Nehemiah.
The last of the Codices Ambrosiani, Codex E, contains eight leaves. In these survive a document, given the
title Skeireins
aíwaggēljons þaírh Iōhannēn 'Explanation of the Gospel according to John' by the editor
Massmann in 1834, generally referred to simply as the Skeireins. The author of this commentary is not
known; though possibly written by Wul la, there is no evidence of this.
In addition there are very sparse remnants of other documents: a fragment of a calendar of martyrs,
marginal notes in a Veronese manuscript, a Latin title deed from Ravenna written c. 551, and another
Latin deed from Arezzo which has subsequently been lost. There are also examples of the letters of the
Gothic alphabet written with their associated names. In addition, there are transcriptions of numerals in a
Salzburg-Vienna manuscript of the 9th-10th centuries. A few phrases remain elsewhere in an almost
phonetic Latin transcription.
One letter by the diplomat Ogier Ghislain de Busbecq is believed to contain the most recent traces of the
Gothic language. It describes his encounter, sometime between 1555 and 1562, with two envoys from the
Crimea who spoke a language presumed to be Gothic, or a closely related language. This letter was
subsequently printed in Paris in 1589. The identi cation is not however air-tight, as the letter has only
about 100 Gothic words, most of them grammatically isolated, and suffers from many problems of
orthography and transmission.
Related Language Courses at UT
Most but not all language courses taught at The University of Texas concern modern languages;
sometimes courses are offered in ancient languages, though more often at the graduate level. Germanic
language courses, except for English, are taught in the Department of Germanic Studies
(http://www.utexas.edu/cola/depts/germanic/) (link opens in a new browser window). Other online
language courses for college credit are offered through the University Extension
(http://www.utexas.edu/ce/uex/online/) (new window).
East Germanic Resources Elsewhere
Our Web Links (https://liberalarts.utexas.edu/lrc/extras/links.php) page includes pointers to East

Germanic resources elsewhere (https://liberalarts.utexas.edu/lrc/extras/links.php#EGmc).
Gothic Online
Lesson 1
Literary Origins of the Goths
The earliest literary references to the Goths are found in the works of Pliny, Strabo, and Tacitus. In his
Natural History, Pliny the Elder mentions a certain Pytheas of Messalia, a Greek historian who records his
observations on a journey through the 'parts near Ocean', sometime around the time of Alexander the
Great. Pliny states that Pytheas believed a tribe called Gutones inhabited regions of Germania. Pliny's
statement of Pytheas' ndings concerning the Goths, however, presents scholars with two di culties: (1)
that the statement in question actually contains Guiones, which must be emended to Gutones to bring it in
line with other presumed references to the Goths in Pliny; (2) the reference to Germania is clearly Pliny's
own, since no such province was in existence in the time of Pytheas. Hence we cannot be sure what
Pytheas himself said about their location. Pliny later mentions the Gutones as one of ve tribes of the
Germani.
Strabo, in his Geography, mentions the Gutones in a discussion of the Hercynian Forest. Once again,
however, such an association rests on textual emendment: the manuscript reads Boutones, which
scholars emend to Goutones. The location is not speci ed, which is not unexpected, since few authors
could claim to know anything certain about regions beyond the Danube in this period.
Tacitus, in his work the Germania, written sometime around 98 AD, says in chapter 43: "beyond the Lugii,
the Gotones are ruled by kings..., and next, close to the Ocean, the Rugii" and others. According to his
account, the Suebi are in northern Europe, the Lugii beyond them, and the Gotones beyond them; but the
latter must not quite be on the Baltic coast, since the Rugii and others are closer to the Baltic than the
Gotones. Tacitus also mentions in his later work the Annales, chapters 2.62-63, that a certain Catualda
was a noble among the Gotones.
In his Geography, Ptolemy locates the Guthones near the Vistula river. He elsewhere lists the Goutai as
one of the seven tribes inhabiting Skandiai, presumably Sweden. It is not clear if both of these terms refer
to the same tribe. If so, these are perhaps re exes of strong and weak forms of the name. If not, one is
not sure which ones are 'the' Goths. Some link the Goutai to the Geats of Beowulf, whose history
thereafter is know from other medieval sources. But it is not clear that these are the Goths of
Scandinavia.
The late 4th century, non-Christian author Ammianus Marcellinus is an important source for our
understanding of the early movements of the Gothic tribes and their interaction with imperial forces. But
he mentions nothing of Gothic origins, even though he mentions origins of others, such as the Alans, who
descended from the Massagetae, and the Persians from the Scythians. Ammianus focuses on the
movements of individual Gothic groups, most importantly the Tervingi and the Greuthungi.
Bishop Ambrose of Milan, in composing his work De Fide sometime around 380 AD for the emperor
Gratian, links the Gothi with the Biblical Gog, ruler of the land Magog, which is perhaps set to the north,
and maybe connected with islands. Ambrose seems to have taken the occasion to place Gratian's
struggle with the Goths in a more divine setting, since in Revelations 20.7-10, Gog is destined to compass
'the camp of the saints'. The genealogist Josephus, earlier writing the Antiquitates in 93-94 AD, links
Magogites with Scythians; Josephus is directly quoted by the later Gothic historian Jordanes.
Jerome, writing sometime c. 390, challenges the identi cation of the Goths with Gog and his people. He
identi es Getae and Gothi. Orosius, writing the Historia adversum paganos in 417 AD and seeking to play
down the prophetic overtones of a link between Goths and Gog, follows Jerome's association. The
association was a simple one, since the Getae had lived along the lower Danube, and this was the origin
of the Gothi in their attack on Rome. Augustine, however, writing De civitate Dei between 413 and 427 AD,
denies the equation of Goths and Scythians, as well as that of Goths and Getae.
One of our most important sources of Gothic history is Jordanes, who wrote the Origins and Acts of the
Goths or Getica in 550 AD in Constantinople. Though he wrote in Latin, Jordanes is unique among our
sources because he is the only one who is himself a Goth. He states in his work that he relies on Gothic
oral tradition, but nevertheless claims some personal acquaintance with the material he treats. He also
mentions that he closely follows the written work of another historian, the Gothic History written by
Cassiodorus, a Roman Senator in the 520s in the court of Theodoric the Great, the Ostrogothic king of
Italy. He thrice mentions another historian, Ablabius, who perhaps wrote in the court of a Visigothic king.
The Getica gives an account of Gothic history from its inception, i.e. from the origin of the Gothic people
to the time of writing, providing several concepts central to modern attempts to reconstruct Gothic
history:
a. the Goths were originally in Scandinavia (more speci cally, an island in or near Scandinavia),
subsequently crossed the Baltic, migrated through Poland, and settled near the Black Sea;
b. by the time of the 3rd century, the Goths were divided into two groups: Visigoths and
Ostrogoths;
c. the two groups of Goths were each led by royal families, the Balthi and the Amals.
Under the assumption that there are no new peoples, just the same peoples with new names and new
locations (a typical motif of ancient history writing), Cassiodorus, and hence Jordanes, were able to
equate the Goths with Scythians, Amazons, Getes, and Dacians: the Gothic kingdom was founded before
Rome, and the Goths fought in the Trojan war. Under Berig the Goths crossed the Baltic in 1490 BC, and
under Filimer they moved to the Black Sea only ve generations later, i.e before any of the earliest
mentions of the Goths.
As modern scholarship sifts through the ancient sources it becomes clear that, by the time of the fourth
century, some twelve or thirteen groups of Goths are known from the records. Five coalesce in the fth
century to form the well-known Visigoths and Ostrogoths, while the others remain distinct (after Heather,
1996):
Visigoths: 1 the greater part of the Tervingi
2 the Greuthungi under Ermenaric
3 Goths led by Radagaisus

Ostrogoths: 4 Amal-led Goths
5 Goths under Theodoric Strabo

Others: 6 the remaining Tervingi, perhaps the same as those led by Arimer
7 Greuthungi led by Farnobius
8 Greuthungi led by Odotheus
9 Goths under Bigelis
10 Goths under Dengizich
11 Crimean Goths
12 Goths near the Sea of Azov
Ammanianus mentions that the Tervingi, groups 1 and 6, formed one unit; the Greuthungi under Ermenaric
were another important political group of the 4th century. If the other groups eventually came under the
control of Ermenaric, this might fall in line with the history of Jordanes; but the latter's account of
Ermenaric is believed by some scholars to be more an embellished version of Ammianus' history rather
than a previously attested tradition, and so Ermenaric's conquests have been exaggerated by Jordanes to
put the Gothic leader on par with the later Attila.
In 399 the Roman poet Claudian wrote (In Eutropium, 2.152-153):
Ostrogothis colitur mixtisque Gruthungis Phryx ager

The Phrygian plain is inhabited by Ostrogoths and mixed Greuthungi.
If not merely a rhetorical device, this would make a further distinction between Ostrogoths and
Greuthungi, both separate from the Tervingi, and thus adding to the number of Gothic tribes known in the
4th century.
Reading and Textual Analysis

The following passage is the nativity scene found in Luke 2:1-14. The Gothic text has somewhat
redundant material in Luke 2.2: at [wisandin kindina Swriais] raginondin Saurim Kwreinaiau, leading
scholars to believe that a marginal gloss has crept into the text during its transmission. This particular
phrase shows the common construction at + substantive + participle, an absolute construction in Gothic
similar to the genitive absolute in Greek, or the ablative absolute in Latin.
The text also contains other notable grammatical features. Luke 2.3 shows the occasional use in Gothic
of ei + subjunctive for purpose clauses: iddjēdun allái, ei melidái wēseina. The demonstrative þō
appears in Luke 2.6 to refer to Joseph and Mary; Gothic uses the neuter plural to refer to individuals of
different genders. This however is not exclusive: compare ins in Luke 2.9. Luke 2.7 gives an example of
the use of the genitive in negated clauses: ni was im rumis, literally 'there was not for them of room'.
In Luke 2.14 we nd an instance of the Gothic translation remaining more faithful to the Greek than the
English of the King James Version. Where the English is 'and on earth peace, good will toward men', with
'peace' and 'good will' in apposition, Gothic in fact preserves the Greek genitive in godis
wiljins 'of good
will', qualifying the phrase 'among men': 'among men of good will'. Compare the Vulgate in hominibus
bonae voluntatis, which is elaborated in the Spanish en la tierra paz, a los hombres que aman el
Senor 'on earth peace to those men who love the Lord.'
2:1 - Warþ þan in dagans jainans, urrann gagrefts fram kaisara Agustau, gameljan allana
midjungard.
warþ -- strong verb class 3; third person singular preterite of <waírþan> to become, to happen -- it
came to pass... (that)
þan -- conjunction; <þan> when, as (long as); then, at that time; but, and, however -- and
in -- preposition; <in> into, towards; on account of; in, among, by -- in
dagans -- strong noun, masculine; accusative plural of <dags> day -- days
jainans -- demonstrative pronoun used as adjective; accusative plural masculine of <jáins> that --
those
urrann -- strong verb class 3; third person singular preterite of <urrinnan> to rise, come from, go
forth -- there went out
gagrefts -- strong noun, feminine; nominative singular of <gagrēfts> decree -- a decree
fram -- preposition; <fram> from, by, since, on account of -- from
kaisara -- strong noun, masculine; dative singular of <káisar> Caesar -- Caesar
Agustau -- strong proper noun, masculine; dative singular of <Agustus> Augustus -- Augustus
gameljan -- weak verb class 1; in nitive of <gamēljan> to write, enroll -- (that... should) be taxed
allana -- adjective; accusative singular masculine of <alls> all, every -- all
midjungard -- strong noun, masculine; accusative singular of <midjungards> earth, world -- the
world
2 - soh þan gilstrameleins frumista warþ at [wisandin kindina Swriais] raginondin Saurim
Kwreinaiau.
soh -- demonstrative used as adjective; nominative singular feminine of <sa, so, þata> this, that +
enclitic conjunction; <-uh> but, and, now, therefore -- this
gilstrameleins -- strong noun, feminine; nominative singular of <gilstramēleins> taxation, taxing --
taxing
frumista -- intensive adjective; nominative singular feminine of superlative of <fruma> former, rst
-- rst
warþ -- strong verb class 3; third person singular preterite of <waírþan> to become, to happen --
was... made
at -- preposition; <at> at, by, to, with, of -- when
wisandin -- strong verb class 5; dative singular masculine of present participle of <wisan> to be --
(was) # wisandin kindina Swriais -- a marginal gloss that has crept into the text
kindina -- strong noun, masculine; dative singular of <kindins> governor -- (governor)
Swriais -- strong proper noun, feminine; genitive singular of <Swria> Syria -- (of Syria)
raginondin -- weak verb class 2; dative singular masculine of present participle of <raginōn> to
rule -- was governor
Saurim -- strong proper noun, masculine; dative plural of <Saúr> Syrian -- of Syria # literally 'among
the Syrians'
Kwreinaiau -- strong proper noun, masculine; dative singular of <Kwreinaíus> Cyrenius -- Cyrenius
3 - jah iddjedun allai, ei melidai weseina, ƕarjizuh in seinai baurg.
jah -- conjunction; <jah> and, also -- and

iddjedun -- strong verb class 7; third person plural suppletive preterite of <gaggan> to come, go --
went
allai -- adjective used as substantive; strong nominative plural masculine of <alls> all, every -- all
ei -- conjunction; <ei> that, so that; whether; (relative particle) -- to
melidai -- weak verb class 1; nominative plural masculine of preterite participle of <mēljan> to
register, to enroll -- taxed
weseina -- strong verb class 5; third person plural past subjunctive of <wisan> to be -- be
ƕarjizuh -- inde nite pronoun; nominative singular masculine of <ƕarjizuh> each, every -- every
one
in -- preposition; <in> into, towards; on account of; in, among, by -- into
seinai -- possessive adjective; dative singular feminine of <*seins> one's own -- his own
baurg -- strong noun, feminine; dative singular of <baúrgs> city, town -- city
4 - Urrann þan jah Iosef us Galeilaia, us baurg Nazaraiþ, in Iudaian, in baurg Daweidis sei
haitada Beþlahaim, duþe ei was us garda fadreinais Daweidis,
forth -- went up
jah -- conjunction; <jah> and, also -- also
Iosef -- strong proper noun, masculine; nominative singular of <Iōsēf> Joseph -- Joseph
us -- preposition; <us> out, out of, from -- from
Galeilaia -- proper noun, feminine; dative singular of <Galeilaia> Galilee -- Galilee
us -- preposition; <us> out, out of, from -- out of
baurg -- strong noun, feminine; dative singular of <baúrgs> city, town -- the city
Nazaraiþ -- indeclinable noun; <Nazaraíþ> Nazareth -- of Nazareth
Iudaian -- proper noun, feminine; accusative singular of <Iudaia> Judea -- Judea
in -- preposition; <in> into, towards; on account of; in, among, by -- unto
Daweidis -- strong proper noun, masculine; genitive singular of <Daweid> David -- of David
sei -- relative pronoun; nominative singular feminine <saei> who, he who, which -- which
haitada -- strong verb class 7; third person singular present passive of <háitan> to call -- is called
Beþlahaim -- indeclinable noun; <Bēþlahaím> Bethlehem -- Bethlehem
duþe -- conjunction; <duþē> therefore, because, besides, on that account -- because
ei -- conjunction; <ei> that, so that; whether; (relative particle) -- ...
was -- strong verb class 5; third person singular preterite of <wisan> to be -- he was
us -- preposition; <us> out, out of, from -- of
garda -- strong noun, masculine; dative singular of <gards> house, household -- the house
fadreinais -- strong noun, feminine; genitive singular of <fadreins> family, lineage -- (and) lineage
# literally 'of the lineage', the Gothic lacking the conjunction of the English translation
5 - anameljan miþ Mariin sei in fragiftim was imma qeins, wisandein inkilþon.
anameljan -- weak verb class 1; in nitive of <anamēljan> to enroll -- to be taxed

miþ -- preposition; <miþ> with, among, together with, through, by, near -- with
Mariin -- proper noun, feminine; dative singular of <Maria> Mary -- Mary
sei -- relative pronoun; nominative singular feminine of <saei> who, he who, which -- ... # sei in
fragiftim was imma qeins, literally 'who was wife to him in espousal'
in -- preposition; <in> into, towards; on account of; in, among, by -- ...
fragiftim -- strong noun, feminine; dative singular of <fragifts> a giving away, espousal -- espoused
was -- strong verb class 5; third person singular preterite of <wisan> to be -- ...
imma -- personal pronoun; dative singular masculine of <is> he, she, it -- his
qeins -- strong noun, feminine; nominative singular of <qeins> wife -- wife
wisandein -- strong verb class 5; nominative singular feminine of present participle of <wisan> to
be -- being
inkilþon -- adjective; dative singular feminine of <inkilþō> with child -- (great) with child
6 - warþ þan, miþþanei þo wesun jainar, usfullnodedun dagos du bairan izai.
warþ -- strong verb class 3; third person singular preterite of <waírþan> to become, to happen -- so
it was (that)
miþþanei -- conjunction; <miþþanei> while, during, when -- while
þo -- demonstrative used as person pronoun; nominative plural neuter of <sa, so, þata> this, that --
they # neuter plural referring to individuals of different genders
wesun -- strong verb class 5; third person plural preterite of <wisan> to be -- were
jainar -- adverb; <jáinar> yonder, there -- there
usfullnodedun -- weak verb class 4; <usfullnan> to be ful lled -- were accomplished
dagos -- strong noun, masculine; nominative plural of <dags> day -- the days
du -- preposition; <du> to, towards; against; in -- ...
bairan -- strong verb class 4; in nitive of <baíran> to bear, to carry -- should be delivered
izai -- personal pronoun; dative singular feminine of <is> he, she, it -- she
7- jah gabar sunu seinana þana frumabaur jah biwand ina jah galagida ina in uzetin, unte ni
was im rumis in stada þamma.

gabar -- strong verb class 4; third person singular preterite of <gabaíran> to bring forth -- she
brought forth
sunu -- strong noun, masculine; accusative singular of <sunus> son -- son
seinana -- possessive adjective; accusative singular masculine of <*seins> one's own -- her
þana -- demonstrative used as article; accusative singular masculine of <sa, so, þata> this, that --
...
frumabaur -- adjective; strong accusative singular masculine of <frumabaúr> rst-born -- rst-
born
biwand -- strong verb class 3; third person singular preterite of <biwindan> to wrap -- wrapped (in
swaddling clothes)
ina -- personal pronoun; accusative singular masculine of <is> he, she, it -- him
galagida -- weak verb class 1; third person singular preterite of <galagjan> to lay, put -- laid
uzetin -- weak noun, masculine; dative singular of <uzēta> manger -- a manger
unte -- conjunction; <untē> for, because, since, until -- because
ni -- adverb; <ni> not -- no
was -- strong verb class 5; third person singular preterite of <wisan> to be -- there was
im -- personal pronoun; dative plural masculine of <is> he, she, it -- for them
rumis -- strong noun, masculine; genitive singular of <rūms> room -- room # literally 'of the room',
the genitive because of the negation
stada -- strong noun, masculine; dative singular of <staþs> place; land -- inn
þamma -- demonstrative used as article; dative singular masculine of <sa, so, þata> this, that --
the
8 - jah hairdjos wesun in þamma samin landa, þairhwakandans jah witandans wahtwom nahts
ufaro hairdai seinai.

hairdjos -- strong noun, masculine; nominative plural of <haírdeis> herdsman -- herdsmen
wesun -- strong verb class 5; third person plural preterite of <wisan> to be -- there were
þamma -- demonstrative used as article; dative singular neuter of <sa, so, þata> this, that -- the
samin -- adjective; dative singular neuter of <sama> same -- same
landa -- strong noun, neuter; dative singular of <land> land, country -- country
þairhwakandans -- strong verb class 6; nominative plural masculine of present participle of
<þaírhwakan> to stay awake -- abiding in the eld
witandans -- weak verb class 3; nominative plural masculine of present participle of <witan> to
keep watch, observe -- keeping
wahtwom -- weak noun, feminine; accusative singular of <wahtwō> watch -- watch
nahts -- weak noun, feminine; genitive singular of <nahts> night -- by night
ufaro -- preposition; <ufarō> above, upon, over -- over
hairdai -- strong noun, feminine; dative singular of <haírda> herd -- ock
seinai -- possessive adjective; dative singular feminine of <*seins> one's own -- their
9 - iþ aggilus fraujins anaqam ins jah wulþus fraujins biskain ins, jah ohtedun agisa mikilamma.
iþ -- conjunction; <iþ> but, however, if -- and lo

aggilus -- strong noun, masculine; nominative singular of <aggilus> angel, messenger -- the angel
fraujins -- weak noun, masculine; genitive singular of <fráuja> lord, master -- of the Lord
anaqam -- strong verb class 4; third person singular preterite of <anaqiman> to approach -- came
upon
ins -- personal pronoun; accusative plural masculine of <is> he, she, it -- them
wulþus -- strong noun, masculine; nominative singular of <wulþus> splendor, glory -- the glory
fraujins -- weak noun, masculine; genitive singular of <fráuja> lord, master -- of the Lord
biskain -- strong verb class 1; third person singular preterite of <biskeinan> to shine around --
shone round about
ohtedun -- preterite present verb; third person plural preterite of <*ōgan> to fear, to be afraid -- they
were afraid
agisa -- strong noun, neuter; dative singular of <agis> fear -- ...
mikilamma -- adjective; dative singular neuter of <mikils> great -- sore
10 - jah qaþ du im sa aggilus: ni ogeiþ, unte sai, spillo izwis faheid mikila, sei wairþiþ allai
managein,

qaþ -- strong verb class 5; third person singular preterite of <qiþan> to say, speak -- said
du -- preposition; <du> to, towards; against; in -- unto
im -- personal pronoun; dative plural masculine of <is> he, she, it -- them
sa -- demonstrative used as article; nominative singular masculine of <sa, so, þata> this, that -- the
aggilus -- strong noun, masculine; nominative singular of <aggilus> angel, messenger -- angel
ni -- adverb; <ni> not -- not
ogeiþ -- preterite present verb; second person plural imperative of <*ōgan> to fear, to be afraid --
fear
unte -- conjunction; <untē> for, because, since, until -- for
sai -- interjection; <sái> lo, behold -- behold
spillo -- weak verb class 2; rst person singular of <spillōn> to tell, relate -- I bring... (good tidings
of)
izwis -- personal pronoun; dative plural of <þu> thou, you -- you
faheid -- strong noun, feminine; accusative singular of <fahēds> joy -- joy
mikila -- adjective; accusative singular feminine of <mikils> great -- great
sei -- relative pronoun; nominative singular feminine of <saei> who, he who, which -- which
wairþiþ -- strong verb class 3; third person singular of <waírþan> to become, to happen -- shall be
allai -- adjective; dative singular feminine of <all> all, every -- to all
managein -- weak noun, feminine; dative singular of <managei> crowd, multitude -- people
11 - þatei gabaurans ist izwis himma daga nasjands, saei ist Xristus frauja, in baurg Daweidis.
þatei -- conjunction; <þatei> that, because, if -- for

gabaurans -- strong verb class 4; nominative singular masculine of preterite participle of
<gabaíran> to bring forth -- born
ist -- strong verb class 5; athematic third person singular of <wisan> to be -- is
izwis -- personal pronoun; dative plural of <þu> thou, you -- unto you
himma -- demonstrative adjective; dative singular masculine of <*his> this -- this
daga -- strong noun, masculine; dative singular of <dags> day -- day
nasjands -- weak verb class 1; nominative singular masculine of present participle of <nasjan> to
save -- a Saviour
saei -- relative pronoun; nominative singular masculine of <saei> who, he who, which -- which
Xristus -- strong proper noun, masculine; nominative singular of <Xristus> Christ -- Christ
frauja -- weak noun, masculine; nominative singular of <fráuja> lord, master -- the Lord
12 - jah þata izwis taikns: bigitid barn biwundan jah galagid in uzetin.

þata -- demonstrative used as pronoun; nominative singular neuter of <sa, so, þata> this, that --
this
taikns -- strong noun, feminine; nominative singular of <táikns> sign, wonder -- a sign
bigitid -- strong verb class 5; second person plural of <bigitan> to nd, meet -- ye shall nd
barn -- strong noun, neuter; accusative singular of <barn> child -- the babe
biwundan -- strong verb class 3; accusative singular neuter of preterite participle of <biwindan> to
wrap -- wrapped (in swaddling clothes)
galagid -- weak verb class 1; accusative singular neuter of preterite participle of <galagjan> to lay,
put -- lying
uzetin -- weak noun, masculine; dative singular of <uzēta> manger -- a manger
13 - jah anaks warþ miþ þamma aggilau managei harjis himinakundis hazjandane guþ jah
qiþandane:

anaks -- adverb; <anaks> at once, suddenly -- suddenly
there was
the
aggilau -- strong noun, masculine; dative singular of <aggilus> angel, messenger -- angel
managei -- weak noun, feminine; nominative singular of <managei> crowd, multitude -- a multitude
harjis -- strong noun, masculine; genitive singular of <harjis> army, host -- of the... host
himinakundis -- adjective; genitive singular masculine of <himinakunds> heavenly -- heavenly
hazjandane -- weak verb class 1; genitive plural masculine of present participle of <hazjan> to
praise -- praising
guþ -- strong noun, masculine; accusative singular of <guþ> God -- God
qiþandane -- strong verb class 5; genitive plural masculine of present participle of <qiþan> to say,
speak -- saying
14 - wulþus in hauhistjam guda

jah ana airþai gawairþi in mannam godis wiljins.
wulþus -- strong noun, masculine; nominative singular of <wulþus> splendor, glory -- glory
hauhistjam -- strong noun, neuter; dative plural of <háuhisti> the highest -- the highest
guda -- strong noun, masculine; dative singular of <guþ> God -- to God
ana -- preposition; <ana> in, on, upon, at, over; to, into; against -- on
airþai -- strong noun, feminine; dative singular of <aírþa> earth -- on earth
gawairþi -- strong noun, neuter; nominative singular of <gawaírþi> peace -- peace
in -- preposition; <in> into, towards; on account of; in, among, by -- toward
mannam -- irregular noun, masculine; dative plural of <manna> man -- men
godis -- adjective; genitive singular masculine of <gōþs, gōds> good -- good # godis wiljins,
literally 'of good will'
wiljins -- weak noun, masculine; genitive singular of <wilja> will -- will
Lesson Text
2:1 - Warþ þan in dagans jainans, urrann gagrefts fram kaisara Agustau, gameljan allana
midjungard. 2 - soh þan gilstrameleins frumista warþ at [wisandin kindina Swriais]
raginondin Saurim Kwreinaiau. 3 - jah iddjedun allai, ei melidai weseina, ƕarjizuh in seinai
baurg. 4 - Urrann þan jah Iosef us Galeilaia, us baurg Nazaraiþ, in Iudaian, in baurg
Daweidis sei haitada Beþlahaim, duþe ei was us garda fadreinais Daweidis, 5 - anameljan
miþ Mariin sei in fragiftim was imma qeins, wisandein inkilþon. 6 - warþ þan, miþþanei þo
wesun jainar, usfullnodedun dagos du bairan izai. 7 - jah gabar sunu seinana þana
frumabaur jah biwand ina jah galagida ina in uzetin, unte ni was im rumis in stada þamma.
8 - jah hairdjos wesun in þamma samin landa, þairhwakandans jah witandans wahtwom
nahts ufaro hairdai seinai. 9 - iþ aggilus fraujins anaqam ins jah wulþus fraujins biskain
ins, jah ohtedun agisa mikilamma. 10 - jah qaþ du im sa aggilus: ni ogeiþ, unte sai, spillo
izwis faheid mikila, sei wairþiþ allai managein, 11 - þatei gabaurans ist izwis himma daga
nasjands, saei ist Xristus frauja, in baurg Daweidis. 12 - jah þata izwis taikns: bigitid barn
biwundan jah galagid in uzetin. 13 - jah anaks warþ miþ þamma aggilau managei harjis
himinakundis hazjandane guþ jah qiþandane: 14 - wulþus in hauhistjam guda
jah ana airþai gawairþi in mannam godis wiljins.
Translation
From the King James version:
2:1 And it came to pass in those days, that there went out a decree from Caesar Augustus, that all
the world should be taxed. 2 (And this taxing was rst made when Cyrenius was governor of Syria.)
3 And all went to be taxed, every one into his own city. 4 And Joseph also went up from Galilee, out
of the city of Nazareth, into Judaea, unto the city of David, which is called Bethlehem; (because he
was of the house and lineage of David:) 5 To be taxed with Mary his espoused wife, being great with
child. 6 And so it was, that, while they were there, the days were accomplished that she should be
delivered. 7 And she brought forth her rstborn son, and wrapped him in swaddling clothes, and laid
him in a manger; because there was no room for them in the inn.
8 And there were in the same country shepherds abiding in the eld, keeping watch over their ock
by night. 9 And, lo, the angel of the Lord came upon them, and the glory of the Lord shone round
about them: and they were sore afraid. 10 And the angel said unto them, Fear not: for, behold, I bring
you good tidings of great joy, which shall be to all people. 11 For unto you is born this day in the city
of David a Saviour, which is Christ the Lord. 12 And this shall be a sign unto you; Ye shall nd the
babe wrapped in swaddling clothes, lying in a manger. 13 And suddenly there was with the angel a
multitude of the heavenly host praising God, and saying,
14 Glory to God in the highest,
and on earth peace, good will toward men.
Grammar
1 The Alphabet
The Gothic alphabet closely resembles the Greek uncial alphabet of the fourth century AD. Where the
Greek uncials proved insu cient for rendering some of the sounds, Roman or runic letters were borrowed.
These alphabetic characters are also used to represent numerals. Rather than work with the Gothic
alphabet itself, scholars generally work with a transliteration using the Roman alphabet, augmented with
two additional characters and with the acute accent mark. The following chart lists the transliterated
letters, their corresponding numerical values, and a rough guide to pronunciation.
Letter Number Pronunciation Environment

a 1 [a], o as in 'cot'
[ā], a as in 'father'
b 2 [v], v as in 'have' medially after vowel or diphthong
[b], b as in 'bob' otherwise
g 3 [ŋ], n as in 'sing' before k, g, q

[x], ch as in 'Bach' nally, or before s, t
[ḡ], g as in North Ger. 'sagen' otherwise
d 4 [ð], th as in 'father' medially after vowel or diphthong
[d], d as in 'did' otherwise
e 5 [ē], a as in 'gate'
q 6 [kw], qu as in 'queen'
z 7 [z], z as in 'buzz'
h 8 [x], ch as in 'Bach'
þ 9 [þ], th as in 'with'
i 10 [i], i as in 'with'
k 20 [k], k as in 'kick'
l 30 [l], l as in 'lazy'
m 40 [m], m as in 'mouth'
n 50 [n], n as in 'nose'
j 60 [j], y as in 'you'
u 70 [u], o as in 'do it'
[ū], oo as in 'boot'
p 80 [p], p as in 'pin'
90
r 100 [r], trilled r as in Sp. 'rueda'
s 200 [s], s as in 'hiss'
t 300 [t], t as in 'tin'
w 400 [u], oo as in 'boot' between consonants, nally after consonant
[w], w as in 'with' otherwise
f 500 [f], f as in 'fife'
x 600 [k], k as in 'kick'
ƕ 700 [xw], ch w as in 'Bach was'
o 800 [ō], o as in 'phone'
900
We use the numerical values to establish the order of the alphabet. The numerical value assigned to each
letter corresponds closely to the Greek system employed at the time, supporting the assertion initially
based on visual similarity that the Gothic alphabet was in fact modeled on the Greek. The symbols used
to represent 90 and 900 occur only in their numeral function, never representing sounds of the Gothic
language. They consequently have no transliterations.
The duration of doubled consonants is roughly twice that of their single counterparts. For example, inn
'within' has the prolonged n sound in English 'penknife', while in 'into' has the short n of 'cannon'; fulla 'full'
(strong adj., fem. nom. sg.) has the prolonged l of 'call later', while fula 'foal' (noun, fem. nom. sg.) has the
short l of 'caller'. Similarly atta 'father' has the prolonged t of 'Fat Tuesday', and likewise for other
consonants. The exception to this practice is gg. As in Greek, gg is used to represent the the sound of ng
in English ' nger', cf. Goth. figgrs. This practice extends to all velars, so that g before any velar represents
the same nasal sound before that velar. For example, gk in drigkan represents the nasal plus unvoiced
velar plosive as in the corresponding English 'drink'; gq in sigqan 'sink' represents roughly the sound of
nkw in English 'inkwell'. Some words -- e.g. bliggw- 'scourge', glaggw- 'accurate', skuggw- 'mirror',
triggw- 'faithful' -- may have contained a true prolonged g as in (a slow pronunciation of) English
'doggone', but this has probably given way to the sound [ŋ] by the time of Wul la's translation.
The letter w is often found in words borrowed from Greek, where the Greek contains upsilon. As can be
seen from the alphabetic order and numerical value, the Gothic symbol for w actually is the Greek upsilon.
For this reason some editors of Gothic texts instead use y in such loanwords, breaking from a more
uniform transliteration with w. Thus Lwstrws, the dative plural of 'Lystra', is transcribed by some editors
as Lystrys.
Other sounds of the Gothic language are represented by digraphs. Speci cally, the long-i sound [ī] is
represented by ei, mimicking the contemporaneous Greek pronunciation of epsilon followed by iota. The
digraph ai has a threefold distinction. In some instances ai represents the short-e vowel [ɛ] found in
Modern English 'bet' (or perhaps a slightly more open sound, as in the a of 'hat'). In other instances ai
represents the long version of the same sound. And in the last instance ai represents the diphthong
formed by its two constituents, namely the sound of i in Modern English 'white'. In transcription, these
three values are distinguished by placement of an acute accent mark: aí is [ɛ], ai is [ɛ̄], and ái is [ai]. A
similar threefold distinction holds for the digraph au: aú is the vowel sound in Modern English 'bought', au
is a long version of the same sound, and áu is the diphthong represented by ou in Modern English 'about'.
The digraph iu represents a falling diphthong (i.e. a diphthong accented on its rst element) much like the
eu of Modern English 'reuse' when the re- carries the stress. The situation is summarized in the following
chart.
Digraph Pronunciation

ei [ī], ee as in 'meet'
aí [ɛ], e as in 'bet'
ai [ɛ̄], same as above, but prolonged
ái [ai], i as in 'white'
aú [ɔ], ou as in 'bought'
au [ɔ̄], same as above, but prolonged
áu [au], ou as in 'about'
iu [íu], eu as in 'reuse'
It appears that these sounds were in fact all distinct in the period leading up to the emergence of Gothic
and in its earliest stages. But the three values of ai may have merged by the time of Wul la's translation,
and likewise the three values of au may also have merged.
2 The Sound System

Being that of the earliest documented Germanic language, the sound system of Gothic is of great
importance for historical studies. Some sound changes have occurred, however, in the span of time
leading up to Wul la's translation, so that Wul la's own pronunciation is not necessarily the nearest
approximation to the original sound system which Gothic inherited from Proto-Germanic. From a
synchronic point of view, it is clear that o [ō] is already colored with some of the qualities of u, since we
nd spelling mistakes confusing the two, e.g. supūda for supōda. Likewise e [ē], though open, was close
enough to be confused with ei [ī], e.g. qeins for qēns. It is also likely that h is in Wul la's time closer to
the h of Modern English 'he' than it is to the ch of 'Bach', and similarly with ƕ. Nevertheless, on
etymological grounds and because of the archaic nature of the morphology, it is common in scholarship
to ascribe values to Gothic letters which preserve the distinctions between, say, ei and ē, or between ái, ai,
and aí, though they may be prior to Wul la's time, and not in accordance with Wul la's own pronunciation.
By the same token, given the fact that the same spelling mistakes are made in several languages of the
other branches of Germanic, it is possible that the distinctions were never actually as clean as the
historical linguist would like. In this scenario, the marking of these distinctions is merely a theoretical
construct, but one to which we shall nevertheless adhere.
2.1 Consonants
We may group the archaic pronunciation of the Gothic consonants according to points of articulation.
This is done in the following chart.
Consonants Labial Dental Palatal Velar Labio-

(Alveolar) Velar

Stops
Voiceless: p t, tt k (x), kk q
Voiced: b d, dd g, gg
[gg]
Fricatives
Voiceless: f þ, þþ h ƕ
Voiced: b [v] d [ð] g [ḡ]
Sibilants
Voiceless: s, ss
Voiced: z
Nasals m, n, nn gg [ŋ]
mm
Liquids
Continuant: (l, ll)
Trilled: (r, rr)
Semi- w j
Vowels
Note that gg is listed among the nasals, reducing to g when marking a nasal before k or q. The letters b,
d, and g appear both as stops and fricatives. The above chart is a phonetic, rather than phonemic,
description. For example the difference in pronunciations of d is purely conditioned by environment
(allophonic), never serving as the sole distinction of a word's change in meaning.
2.2 Vowels
The vowels may similarly be organized according to articulation. This is done in the following chart.
Short Vowels Front Central Back
Unrounded Unrounded Rounded
High i u

Middle
aí aú
Low a

Long Vowels

High ei ū
ē ō
Middle ai au

Low ā
Note that the Gothic letters e and o always denote long vowels, ē and ō respectively. On the other hand, i
always denotes a short vowel.
The above system is complemented by the three diphthongs ái, áu, iu, which are all stressed on the initial
vowel. The resonants l, m, n, r may also function as vowels. For example: fugls 'bird', máiþms 'treasure',
táikns 'token', ligrs 'bed'. The semivowel w may also form the nucleus of a syllable. For example,
waúrstw 'work'.
2.3 Syllables and Stress
Conventionally scholars divide syllables in the Gothic language so that non-initial syllables begin with a
consonant. Thus haír-tō 'heart', slē-piþ 'sleeps', af-lēt 'forgive thou'. Syllables ending in a short vowel
are short, all others are considered long.
In general initial stress is the norm, though there are some exceptions. We may say there are three types
of stress: primary, secondary, and weak stress. If we use bold italics to represent primary stress, italics for
secondary stress, and no marking for weak stress, then these correspond to the stresses in the Modern
English word 'incubate'. Primary stress falls on the rst syllable, secondary stress on the last, and weak
stress on the intervening syllable. The stress system of Gothic is similar. More speci cally, root syllables
bear primary stress when initial, secondary when non-initial. Consider the following examples:
Root Initial Non-initial

haírtō 'heart' haírtō hráinja-haírts

gulþ 'gold' gulþ figgra-gulþ
In matters of stress, it helps to realize that not all pre xes are equal. Adverbial pre xes to nouns, and the
reduplicated syllables of verbs, follow the same rule as above. For example:
Pre x Unpre xed Pre xed

un- 'un-, not' mahts unmahts

saí- (redupl. syll.) slē-piþ saí-slēp
However, adverbial pre xes to verbs (i.e. preverbs) bear secondary stress. For example:
Pre x Unpre xed Pre xed

af 'from' lēt af-lēt

ana 'into' saí-slēp ana-saí-slēp
Thus stress alone may in some instances serve to distinguish verbs and nouns. Consider the following
pair:
Pre x In nitive Verb Noun

af 'from' lētan 'let' af-lēt 'forgive thou' af-lēt 'forgiveness' (acc.)
The contrast is similar to that found in Modern English 'project' (noun) vs. 'project' (verb). An exception to
the secondary stress of preverbs is ga-, which carries weak stress: ga-saƕ 'saw'.
Su x syllables (but not endings), when following a weakly stressed syllable, follow the accentuation rules
of root syllables. Compare sal-bōnd 'they anoint' vs. salbō-dēdeina 'they might anoint'; mi-kils 'great'
vs. mikil-dūþs 'greatness'.
Weak stress falls on syllables between those with primary or secondary stress. Compare -rain figgra-
gulþ above, and also -na- in ana-saí-slēp. In general, the pre x ga-, the interrogative particle -u, and
the conjunction -uh 'and' carry weak stress. For example: ga-leiks 'like'; ga-u-laubjats 'do ye two
believe'; ub-uh-wōpida 'and he cried out'.
3 Noun In ection and Strong Declension

Nouns in Gothic are in ected for case, number, and grammatical gender. There are three grammatical
genders: masculine, feminine, neuter. For nouns with clear sexual gender, the grammatical gender
generally agrees with the sexual gender. For example, qēns 'woman' is feminine, so that natural gender
and grammatical gender agree; but graba 'ditch' is also feminine, though the referent has no natural
gender. There are two numbers: singular and plural (though personal pronouns and verbs also have a dual
number). There are four cases: nominative (N), accusative (A), genitive (G), dative (D).
Case in ection is essentially a means of marking by su xes grammatical functions which would
otherwise be signalled by prepositions in Modern English. The most obvious remnant of the older case
system in English is 's (apostrophe-s), which at the end of a noun lls the same role as the preposition of
before a noun. For example, the bark of a dog is the same as a dog's bark. In much the same way, the
nouns of Gothic use su xes in order to denote grammatical function within a clause. Below is a short
description of the case system of Gothic.
We may get a jump-start on nominal syntax if we step back for a moment and discuss what we might
term logical cases. That is to say, before we pin down the meanings of the speci c cases found in Gothic,
we may rst discuss a number of possible cases. We will take as our starting point the case system of
Sanskrit, as being reasonably robust among the Indo-European languages. The chart below gives the
eight cases found in the Sanskrit language, along with the basic meanings associated with those cases.
(The fact that Sanskrit's case system is being used is immaterial -- the only purpose is to make certain
logical distinctions among types of grammatical occurrences; the fact that these distinctions also happen
to be made explicit in the su xal system of a particular language is merely an added bonus.)
Logical Case Description of Use Basic Example of Use

Preposition

Nominative case of the subject (none) I killed him.
case of something predicated to the (none) The sky is blue.

subject
Accusative case of the direct object (none) I killed him.
case of the terminus of directed (none), I ran (to the) east.

motion to(wards)
case of an expression involving extent (none), for The event lasted (for) ve days.
in time or space
Instrumental case of the instrument of an action with I killed him with a knife.
case of accompaniment with I travelled with my friend.
Dative case of the indirect object (none) He gave me a book.
to He gave a book to me.
for I wrote a recommendation

letter for my student.
Ablative case of origin, source, or separation from I went from New York to Austin.
Genitive case of possession of The shoes of the man are dirty.
's The man's shoes are dirty.
case of the sphere of relation of I shed tears of joy.
This soup needs a pinch of

salt.
The canyon is a day's journey

from here.
case of the subject or object of of, 's (s') Man's killing of man speaks to
nominalized action human nature.
Locative case of location in space or time in, on, at, I stood on the corner for an
within hour.
Vocative case of direct address (none), o! (O) Luck, be a lady tonight!
As one can see from the chart, the logical meanings of the cases may be expressed in a language, even if
such a case system is not present. English retains overt marking only of the genitive, so that prepositions
take over the role of the case system. Gothic declension, however, is more robust than that of Modern
English, though more sparse than that of Sanskrit. One may then envision the syntax associated with the
Gothic case system in terms of the following question: how do the eight logical cases above t into the
four extant cases of Gothic? The following chart gives the cases of Gothic, along with the logical cases
whose role each has subsumed.
Gothic Logical Example Translation

Case Case

Nominative Nominative frija ist þis witōdis 'she is free of that law'
Vocative atta unsar þu in himinam 'our Father, thou in heaven'
Accusative Accusative gasaíƕiþ þana sunu mans 'ye shall see the son of man'
Vocative hails þiudan Jūdaiē 'hail, king of the Jews'
Genitive Genitive gasaíƕiþ þana sunu mans 'ye shall see the son of man'
Ablative frija ist þis witōdis 'she is free of (from) that law'
Dative Dative gif mis sei undrinnái mik 'give me the portion of property which
dáil áiginis is coming to me'
Instrumental wōpida Iēsus stibnái mikilái 'Jesus cried with a loud voice'
Locative swēgnida ahmin Iēsus 'Jesus rejoiced in spirit'
Ablative sa afar mis gagganda 'he who comes after me is mightier

swinþōza mis ist than me'

The above identi cations are not iron-clad, nor should they be taken for actual historical evolution. But
they do go a long way to explaining the syntactic descriptions of Gothic case usage found in the standard
handbooks.
Like the other Germanic languages, Gothic has strong and weak nominal declensions. These are terms
originally applied by J. Grimm to distinguish two types of declension within Germanic languages. Among
nouns, the property of being strong or weak is inherent, each noun being either strong (only) or weak
(only). Adjectives, by contrast, can be strong or weak depending on the situation: adjectives are declined
strong when inde nite, weak when de nite.
3.1 a/ja/wa-Stems
The a/ja/wa-stem nouns historically derive from o/jo/wo-stem nouns, respectively, and some grammars
use the historical terminology. These nouns are generally masculine or neuter. Among masculine nouns,
dags 'day' and hláifs 'loaf, bread' are a-stems; harjis 'army' and haírdeis 'herdsman' are ja-stems; þius
'servant' is a wa-stem. Their declensions are as follows.
Masculine a-Stem ja-Stem wa-Stem

Stem daga- hláiba- harja- haírdja- þiwa-

N Sg. dags hláifs harjis haírdeis *þius
A, V dag hláif *hari haírdi *þiu

G dagis hláibis harjis haírdeis *þiwis
D daga hláiba harja haírdja *þiwa

N Pl. dagōs hláibōs harjōs haírdjōs þiwōs

A dagans hláibans harjans haírdjans *þiwans
G dagē hláibē *harjē haírdjē þiwē
D dagam hláibam harjam haírdjam *þiwam

When the nominative singular ends in -s, the -s is lost for the vocative, and so the vocative and
accusative fall together. In the plural, nominative and vocative are the same. Note the substitution of b for
f between vowels in the paradigm of hláifs; that is, intervocalic [f] becomes the voiced allophone [v].
Final -s drops when it immediately follows the combination (short vowel) + (consonantal r). For example
one nds nominative singular waír + s > waír 'man', baúr + s > baúr 'son', both nouns following the
declension of dags.
Among neuter nouns, waúrd 'word' and witōþ 'law' are a-stems; kuni 'race' and reiki 'kingdom' are ja-
stems; kniu 'knee' is a wa-stem. Their declensions are as follows.
Neuter a-Stem ja-Stem wa-Stem

Stem waúrda- witōda- kunja- reikja- kniwa-

N Sg. waúrd witōþ kuni reiki *kniu

A waúrd witōþ kuni reiki *kniu
G waúrdis witōdis kunjis reikjis *kniwis
D waúrda witōda kunja reikja *kniwa

N Pl. waúrda witōda kunja reikja *kniwa

A waúrda witōda kunja reikja kniwa
G waúrdē witōdē kunjē reikjē kniwē

D waúrdam witōdam kunjam reikjam kniwam

The nominative and accusative singular forms of neuter nouns are always identical, as are the plural
forms. The vocative is identical with these. As with f and b in hláifs, the þ of witōþ alternates with d
between vowels: intervocalic [þ] becomes the voiced allophone [ð].
3.2 ō/jō/wō-Stems
The ō/jō/wō-stem nouns historically derive from ā/jā/wā-stem nouns, respectively. These nouns are
exclusively feminine. The noun giba 'gift' is an ō-stem; sunja 'truth', bandi 'band, bond', and mawi
'maiden' are jō-stems; triggwa 'covenant' is a wō-stem. Their declensions are as follows.
Feminine ō-Stem jō-Stem wō-Stem

Stem gibō- sunjō- bandjō- máujō- triggwō-

N Sg. giba sunja bandi mawi triggwa

A giba sunja bandja máuja triggwa
G gibōs sunjōs bandjōs máujōs triggwōs
D gibái sunjái bandjái máujái triggwái

N Pl. gibōs sunjōs bandjōs máujōs triggwōs

A gibōs sunjōs bandjōs máujōs triggwōs
G gibō sunjō bandjō máujō triggwō
D gibōm sunjōm bandjōm maujōm triggwōm

The declension of wō-stems follows that of the ō-stems. The jō-stems fall into two types, depending on
whether or not the nominative and accusative singular forms are the same.
4 Strong Verb Conjugation
Verbs in Gothic, as in the other Germanic languages, fall into two categories: strong and weak. These
terms have no relation to the same names applied to nouns and adjectives.
There are two tenses in Gothic, present and preterite. As with other Indo-European languages exhibiting
this type of two-tense system, the distinction between preterite and present is the distinction between
past and non-past, since the present forms are used for both present and future. This is similar to Modern
English 'I am going on vacation next week', where the present tense has future meaning, equivalent to 'will
go'. Likewise, the preterite forms subsume the roles of several different tenses in Modern English, such as
the simple past 'did', perfect 'has done', and pluperfect 'had done'. There are three moods: indicative,
subjunctive, imperative. The moods are formed with either the preterite or present stems, except for the
imperative, which only employs the present stem. Generally the past subjunctive forms denote potential
completed actions, whereas the present subjunctive has no such implication of completion. This parallels
somewhat Modern English 'might have done' vs. 'might do'. There are also two voices in Gothic: active and
(medio)passive.
4.1 Strong Verb Classes

As in English, ablaut, or vowel gradation, characterizes the strong verbs of Gothic. This system employs
vowel alternation within a root to signify change in meaning or function. Take, for example, the English
forms: sing-sang-sung-song. Within the base s-ng, an i gives present forms, an a past forms, a u the past
participle, and o a derived noun. Other verbs may follow the same ablaut pattern in full or in part, e.g. ring-
rang-rung (with no o-grade form). Still other verbs follow an entirely different ablaut pattern, e.g. hold-held-
held.
There are seven classes of strong verbs. Six of these are characterized solely by ablaut. The seventh is
characterized by reduplication, or by reduplication coupled with ablaut. In order to distinguish, then, the
different ablaut classes, speci c forms are listed illustrating the gradation sequence. This can be
accomplished by listing four principal parts, from which all forms of a given verb may be derived:
1st Principal Part, from which are derived all forms of the present;
2nd Principal Part, from which are derived the nite forms of the preterite singular;
3rd Principal Part, from which are derived all non-singular nite forms of the preterite;
4th Principal Part, from which is derived the preterite participle.
The forms chosen as principal parts are, respectively, (1) the in nitive, (2) the rst (or third) person
singular preterite, (3) the rst person plural preterite, (4) the nominative singular masculine preterite
participle. The different strong verb classes are listed below with verbs illustrating the vowel gradation.
Class Meaning (1) In nitive (2) 1st Sg. Pret. (3) 1st Pl. Pret. (4) Past Ptcple.

Ia 'ascend' steigan stáig stigum stigans
Ib 'tell' ga-teihan ga-táih ga-taíhum ga-taíhans

IIa 'choose' kiusan káus kusum kusans

'shut' ga-lūkan ga-láuk ga-lukum ga-lukans
IIb 'lead' tiuhan táuh taúhum taúhans

IIIa 'bind' bindan band bundum bundans

IIIb 'become' waírþan warþ waúrþum waúrþans

IVa 'come' qiman qam qēmum qumans

IVb 'bear' baíran bar bērum baúrans

Va 'say' qiþan qaþ qēþum qiþans

Vb 'see' saíƕan saƕ sēƕum saíƕans

VI 'rebuke' sakan sōk sōkum sakans

VIIa 'call' háitan haíháit haíháitum háitans

VIIb 'let' lētan laílōt laílōtum lētans

As can be seen, the singular and plural preterite forms of class VII are derived from the same stem. The
seventh class functions somewhat differently from the rest, and this will be treated in more detail in a
later lesson.
4.2 Active Paradigm

The class IV verb baíran 'bear, carry' illustrates the active forms of the strong verb.
Strong Verbs Indicative Subjunctive Imperative
Present
1 Sg. baíra baíráu
2 baíris baíráis baír

3 baíriþ baírái baíradáu

1 Du. baírōs baíráiwa
2 baírats baíráits baírats

1 Pl. baíram baíráima baíram

2 baíriþ baíráiþ baíriþ
3 baírand baíráina baírandáu

Past
1 Sg. bar bērjáu
2 bart bēreis
3 bar bēri

1 Du. bēru bēreiwa
2 bēruts bēreits

1 Pl. bērum bēreima
2 bēruþ bēreiþ
3 bērun bēreina

In nitive baíran

Pres. Ptc. baírands

Past Ptc. baúrans
Note how all present forms are built from the rst principal part, and all the preterite forms except the
singular are built from the third principal part. The second principal part supplies the singular preterite
forms, and the fourth principal part the preterite participle.
4.3 Mediopassive Paradigm

The notion of voice concerns the way in which logical action is manifested in a grammatical statement. By
'logical action' is meant action in the abstract, or the underlying process being referred to. Any action may
be referred to in a number of ways, and the morphology of the language dictates whether different
expressions of the same action may be rendered concisely or through circumlocution. Within the arena of
logical action, one may distinguish agent and patient. The agent is the logical actor, the one doing the
logical action; the patient, by contrast, is the one undergoing the logical action, the logical recipient. Within
the arena of the grammatical action, one distinguishes the (grammatical) subject and the (direct) object.
The grammatical subject denotes the one performing the action expressed by the verb in the statement;
the direct object denotes the recipient of that verbal action, when different from the grammatical subject.
A statement is active when agent and subject are the same. For example, 'I ate the cookie' is active; the
logical action is that of 'eating', and 'I' is the agent of this logical action. 'I' is also the subject of the verb
expressed: 'ate'. Here the patient, 'the cookie', is the direct object. On the other hand, a statement is
passive when patient and subject are the same. For example, 'The cookie was eaten (by me)'. Here again
the logical action is 'eating', and 'I' is the agent, while 'the cookie' is still the patient. But now the patient is
the subject of the verb expressed: 'was eaten'. The agent, 'I', need not even be expressed, though it is
possible with the phrase 'by me'.
A third voice is distinguished, called the middle voice. The middle voice is somewhere between the active
and passive voices, where the distinction between agent and patient is blurred. In many of the ancient
Indo-European languages, this voice denotes action which is re exive (e.g. 'you'll get (yourself) killed'), for
the personal bene t of the subject (e.g. 'I had a house built'), or representing an internal process (e.g. 'I
wondered at its beauty'). In these languages, the morphology denoting the middle voice is often the same
as that denoting the passive. Such uses of the morphological passive in Gothic are not very common, and
the term mediopassive, rather than simply passive, is employed based largely on historical and
comparative grounds.
Gothic has a morphological mediopassive only in the present. The forms of baíran 'carry' illustrate the
conjugation.
Strong Verbs Indicative Subjunctive

1 Sg. baírada baíráidáu
2 baíraza baídáizáu
3 baírada baíráidáu

1 Du.
2

1 Pl. baíranda baíráindáu

2 baíranda baíráindáu
3 baíranda baíráindáu

There are no forms for the dual.
5 Word Order and Concord

Any mention of Gothic word order and syntax must begin by saying that the Gothic translation of the New
Testament follows the Greek extremely closely. The case system of Gothic is as robust as that of Greek,
so that one to one correspondence of constructions is possible. Nevertheless, Gothic use often departs
from Greek use, perhaps most conspicuously in the occurrence of Greek genitive absolute constructions,
which are rendered in Gothic by dative constructions. (Ironically, the same dative rendering occurs in Old
Church Slavonic, which possesses an even richer case system.)
In matters of word order, then, the concern is not solely to what degree the extant Gothic matches its
Greek source, but also to what degree the extant Gothic matches patterns expected by comparison with
other Germanic languages. Because of the antiquity of the Gothic documents and the general
conservatism Gothic displays in morphology, the most pertinent comparanda are the early runic
inscriptions. As the Gallehus inscription, c. 400 AD, shows,
ek hlewagastiz holtijaz horna tawidō

I, Hlewagastiz, son of Holtagastiz, the horn made
the unemphatic word order of the earliest Germanic documents was predominantly
(Subject) + Object + Verb.
This word order apparently lasted well into the time period of the Gothic documents. The same word
order is frequently found in the Old English poem Beowulf, as in the opening lines:
Hwæt, wē Gār-dena in gēardagum

þēodcyninga þrym gefrūnon,
hū ðā æþelingas ellen fremedon.

Listen! We have heard the glory of the Spear-danes,
of the people's kings, in days past,
how the heroes performed courageous deeds.
In both clauses, the verbs (gefrūnon, fremedon) occupy the last position, and the object directly
precedes them. Such word order is even found in comparative constructions in Old English, e.g. stāne
heardran 'than-stone harder', and in Old Norse, e.g. sólo fegra 'than-(the)-sun fairer'. It is then quite likely
that typical Gothic word order -- that is, word order emphasizing no particular element of the utterance --
during the time of Wul la's translation was also SOV. The Gothic translation of Mark 8.23,
frah ina ga-u-ƕa-seƕi

asked him if he saw anything
is, as often, a word-for-word translation of the Greek. But the second clause ga-u-ƕa-seƕi suggests
that the tendency for object to precede verb was strong enough that the object could even intervene
between verb and pre x.
Wul la's translation of the New Testament, however, frequently departs from SOV word order, and does so
more often than one would expect if such departure were merely for stylistic reasons. For example,
simple declarative sentences often have the structure
Subject + Verb (+ Adverb) (+ Object),
as in mannē sums áihta twans sununs 'a certain one among men had two sons' (Luke 15.11). This
generally agrees with the Greek word order. When the Adverb is placed rst, the Verb often follows
directly, and the Subject is moved to the position following the Verb:
Adverb + Verb + Subject (+ Object),
e.g. suns
qimiþ Satans 'immediately Satan comes' (Mark 4.15). This also agrees with the Greek. The
common conjunction jah 'and' is frequently followed by the verb of the second clause. Thus,
S + V (+ Adv) (+ O) + jah + V + S (+ O).
For example, þaruh is qaþ du imma þatei brōþar þeins qam, jah afsnáiþ atta þeins stiur þana
alidan 'then he said to him (that) your brother came, and your father killed a fattened calf' (Luke 15.27).
Again this construction agrees with the Greek. When Gothic breaks with Greek word order, it frequently
reverts back to verb- nal word order: jah gaírnida sad itan haúrnē þōei matidēdun sweina, jah
manna imma ni gaf 'and he yearned to eat his ll of the husks which the swine were eating, and the man
did not give him (any)' (Luke 15.16). Here the Greek has kai oudeis edídou autōi, literally 'and no one
gave to him'.
As the verb- nal structure of Modern German subordinate clauses and Modern English indirect questions
shows, one might expect subordinate clauses in Gothic to preserve SOV word order. But even here the
word order tends to follow the same Greek patterns found in main clauses:
Relative (+ Subject) + Verb (+ Adverb) (+ Object), or
Relative (+ Adverb) + Verb (+ Subject) (+ Object).
For example, und þatei usleiþiþ himins jah aírþa, jōta áins aíþþáu áins striks ni usleiþiþ af witōda
'up to the point when heaven and earth pass, not one iota or one bit shall pass from the law' (Matthew
5.18). If the subject is simply a single relative pronoun, then the dependent word order may be
Rel.Pron. + Verb (+ Adverb) (+ Object), or
Rel.Pron. + Adverb + Verb (+ Object).
For example, iþ þan sa sunus þeins, saei frēt þein swēs miþ kalkjōm, qam 'but then your son, who
squandered your fortune on harlots, came' (Luke 15.30).
An adjective may either precede or follow its referent. They agree in gender, case, and number, with some
exceptions. Feminine substantives are occasionally modi ed by masculine adjectives, or even neuter if
the feminine noun denotes a thing. For example, ei kanniþ wēsi... handugei guþs 'that the wisdom of
God... might be known' (Ephesians 3.10), where the neuter adjective kanniþ 'known' modi es the feminine
abstract noun handugei 'wisdom'. A plural adjective or pronoun referring to two nouns of different gender
is put in the neuter, e.g. ba (Zakarias jah Aileisabaiþ) framaldra wesun 'both (Zachary and Elizabeth)
were very old' (Luke 1.7). A possessive pronoun generally follows the noun it governs, e.g. ahman izōs
'her spirit', and likewise for possessive adjectives: atta þeins 'your father', miþ frijōndam meináim 'with
my friends'. Though there is a de nite article in Gothic, or rather a demonstrative adjective which
frequently assumes the role of an article, it often does not modify a noun governed by a genitive, e.g. in
þiudangardjái himinē 'in the kingdom of heaven'. Either noun, however, may also appear with an article:
þana attan þizōs máujōs 'the father of the(se) maidens'.
The general conservatism displayed by Gothic in terms of morphology leads scholars to expect the
unemphatic word order was typically SOV in accordance with the earliest Germanic inscriptions. The
Gothic New Testament however generally looks to be a mirror image of its Greek model. Given the rich
morphology of the Gothic language, such word order would not have posed much di culty for the
intended audience, be it a native speaker's choice of word order or not.
Gothic Online
Lesson 2
Archaeological Origins of the Goths
De nite archaeological remains of the early Goths are even more elusive than clear literary references.
Part of the problem concerns dating: the are many sites which offer possible remains of Gothic culture,
but the relevant timeframes are di cult to establish. In general closed archaeological nds (e.g. burial
nds) with Roman coins and pottery provide the best sources for dating, but the time lag between
production and placement leaves a certain amount of uncertainty. It is therefore easier to establish
relative chronology by looking at the development of certain speci c types of objects, e.g. brooches,
buckles, pots, combs. The simpler forms are considered earlier, the more complex later. Such dating,
however, does not apply well to individual objects, rather only to groups of objects. The more objects in a
closed area, the more secure the relative chronology.
This still leaves open a crucial issue, namely that a material culture is not the same as an ethnic culture,
or even political, social, or linguistic culture. Material items, and technology in general, have the ability to
move across socio-ethnic boundaries much quicker than linguistic or ethnic traits. When however
archaeologists discover not only continuity of material items, but also of ritual practice, such as burial
rites, then this strengthens the argument that the material in question is associated with a somewhat
homogenous culture. Keeping these caveats in mind, then, we may discuss the two cultures on which
archaeologists have focused in their attempts to nd physical traces of the Goths.
Wielbark Culture
The Wielbark culture is named after an area in the north of present-day Poland in which many
characteristic remains were discovered. This material culture formed in the middle of 1st century AD in
Pomerania on both sides of the Vistula, which is roughly the area in which Tacitus, Ptolemy, and Strabo
place the Goths, and at roughly the same time. An early phase of development lasted for roughly a
century. Then followed a second phase which spread over a wider area, rst encompassing the
northernmost regions of Poland and Mazovia east of the Vistula (c. 160-210), and then extending farther
south along the Vistula, San, and Bug rivers into Byelorussia, Volhynia, and northern Ukraine (c. 180-230).
This area is where the Chernjakhov culture, discussed below, later developed.
The Wielbark culture is characterized by stone circles found in cemeteries. In trying to align the
movement of this culture with the picture presented in the literary record, especially as pertains to the
purported Scandinavian origin of the Goths, it is important to nd traits common to material cultures both
in Scandinavia and on the southern shore of the Baltic, and furthermore among which the Scandinavian
nds are the clear antecedents. These stone circles in cemeteries are the only practice found to be earlier
in Scandinavia than on the European mainland. They do not, however, appear in the earliest Wielbark
cemeteries.
Another trait of the culture is that inhumation and cremation graves are found side by side in Wielbark
cemeteries. Surrounding burial sites do not display this two-fold practice, but instead display only
cremation burials. A rather peculiar trait is that the members of the Wielbark culture did not bury iron
objects, most importantly weapons, with any male dead. By contrast, the surrounding sites, as well as
earlier inhabitants of the same areas, did bury iron weapons with the dead. Thus, if this culture does in
fact represent the archaeological remains of the Goths, they appear to have broken with the typical
Germanic tradition of burying the dead with their weapons. In addition, women's dress, at least in burials,
was characterized by a double brooch, one on each shoulder.
The period of the second phase of the Wielbark culture coincides with the Marcomannic wars, c. 150 AD,
which caused dramatic changes in the material cultures of present-day Poland. This phase of the
Wielbark culture spread into the area of the Przeworsk culture, the area south of Pomerania, between the
Notec and Warta rivers, and to Masovia in the southeast. The period 180-300 AD nds not only the
expansion of Wielbark culture, but the incorporation of Wielbark traits into other cultures, particularly the
Chernjakhov.
Chernjakhov Culture
The Chernjakhov culture began in the middle of the 3rd century. It reached its fullest extent in the 4th
century, covering a large area between the Danube and Don, to the north and west of the Black Sea, and to
the south and east of the Carpathian mountains. The temporal overlap with the Wielbark culture is also
physically accompanied by shared features of material culture, particularly handmade pottery, some types
of brooch, and the style of women's dress.
More intriguing, perhaps, are the shared cultural practices. As with the Wielbark culture, the Chernjakhov
culture left behind cemeteries with mixed inhumation and cremation burials. The majority of Chernjakhov
inhumation graves are placed along a north-south line, with the head of the deceased to the north. Also
like the Wielbark culture, the Chernjakhov culture did not bury weapons with their male dead. There are
however a few cemeteries in Cozia-Iasi, Todireni, and Braniste where the dead were buried with weapons.
These weapons may have originated outside the Wielbark culture, though, perhaps in Przeworsk; the other
equipment is consonant with the idea of Germanic intruders from the north. They also buried some wheel-
made pottery with the dead, as well as some bone combs and iron implements.
The houses of the Chernjakhov culture are of two types. The most numerous are sunken huts. These are
usually rectangular, though there are some with a more oval shape. These huts are cut into the ground,
some so deep that only roo ng would need to be added. The earthen oors are generally between 5 and
16 square meters. The walls were wattle and daub, and each house had a hearth. The other type of
houses were surface dwellings. These are often found in the same settlements as the sunken huts. The
smaller ones are usually between 6 and 8 square meters, the larger between 11 and 16 square meters.
They were divided in two parts, one providing quarters for people, the other for animals.
If the Chernjakhov culture is in fact the continuation of the Wielbark culture, then the shared burial
practices, as well as the shared mode of women's dress and the style of other implements, show not only
a carryover of material culture, but also a carryover of social customs and beliefs. The Wielbark culture
did not nevertheless cease to exist when the Chernjakhov culture began. The latter is therefore unlikely to
be the result of a near total migration of the former.

The following passage, Luke 2:41-52, gives an account of an incident in Jesus's boyhood, the only
boyhood incident reported in the New Testament. Luke says that Jesus was twelve years old: the Gothic
translates twalibwintrus, literally 'twelve winters' (Luke 2.42). Ancient Germanic cultures often used
'winter' as an equivalent of 'year' when reckoning spans of time. Similar constructions occur in both the
Old English Beowulf and the Old Saxon Heliand: xii
wintra tīd 'a span of twelve winters' (B.147); gebad
wintra worn 'he endured countless winters' (B.264); Huand wit habdun aldres ēr efno tuēntig
uuintro an uncro uueroldi, ēr than quāmi that uuīb ti mi 'the two of us had an age of about twenty
winters in our world when that woman came to me' (H.144-145). Even the Old English translation of this
biblical passage has and ða he wæs twelf wintre, hy foron to Hierusalem 'and when he was twelve
winters (old), they went to Jerusalem'.
This phrase is followed by an example of the Gothic dative absolute: jah biþē
warþ twalibwintrus,
usgaggandam þan im in Iaírusaúlwma bi biūhtja dulþáis jah ustiuhandam þans dagans, literally
'when he became twelve-years-old, (with) them then going out to Jerusalem according to the custom of
the feast, and (with them) ful lling the days...' (Luke 2.42-43). These absolute constructions constitute a
substantive and associated participle to give what would be in English a subordinate clause.
Luke 2.48 provides a notable instance in which Gothic employs the plural where one might expect the
dual: ƕa gatawides uns swa? sai, sa atta þeins jah ik winnandona sokidedum þuk 'why hast thou
thus dealt with us? behold, thy father and I have sought thee sorrowing.' Here uns and sokidedum clearly
refer to Mary and Joseph, and so the reader might expect the dual ugkis for uns and the dual sokidedu
for sokidedum. Evidently the dual in Gothic, as in many other Indo-European languages, was a category
in decline (by the time of the New Testament it had completely fallen out of the Greek language). In this
particular instance, as some scholars suggest, the difference in gender (as evidenced by the neuter form
of the adjective winnandona) might have triggered the use of the plural in place of the dual. But in other
passages we nd the plural replacing the dual with no obvious trigger.
Luke 2.49 also begins with an interesting collocation: ƕa þatei sōkidēduþ mik? The phrase ƕa þatei is
a compressed phrase 'what is this?', the þata then pointing to what follows, hence the relative marker ei.
This phrase has, by the time of the Gothic text, become frozen as a way of saying 'why'. A similar
development happened within Latin during the Middle Ages, where quid est quod -- literally 'what is (this,
the fact) that...' -- came simply to denote 'why'.
2:41 - jah wratodedun þai birusjos is jera ƕammeh in Iairusalem at dulþ paska.
jah -- conjunction; <jah> and, also -- now

wratodedun -- weak verb class 2; third person plural preterite of <wratōn> to go, to journey -- went
þai -- demonstrative used as article; nominative plural masculine of <sa, so, þata> this, that -- ...
birusjos -- strong noun, masculine; nominative plural of <birusjōs> parents -- parents
is -- personal pronoun; genitive singular masculine of <is> he, she, it -- his
jera -- strong noun, neuter; dative singular of <jēr> year -- year
ƕammeh -- inde nite pronoun; dative singular neuter of <ƕazuh> each, every -- every
in -- preposition; <in> into, towards; on account of; in, among, by -- to
Iairusalem -- indeclinable noun; <Iaírusalēm> Jerusalem -- Jerusalem
at -- preposition; <at> at, by, to, with, of -- at
dulþ -- strong noun, feminine; dative singular of <dulþs> feast -- the feast
paska -- strong noun, feminine; indeclinable <paska> Passover -- of the passover
42 - jah biþe warþ twalibwintrus, usgaggandam þan im in Iairusaulwma bi biuhtja dulþais,

biþe -- conjunction; <biþē> while, when, after that, as soon as; then, thereupon -- when
warþ -- strong verb class 3; third person singular preterite of <waírþan> to become, to happen -- he
was
twalibwintrus -- adjective; nominative singular masculine of <twalibwintrus> twelve years old --
twelve years old
usgaggandam -- strong verb class 7; dative plural masculine of present participle of <usgaggan>
to go out -- went up # dative absolute
þan -- adverb; <þan> then, when -- ...
im -- personal pronoun; dative plural masculine of <is> he, she, it -- they
Iairusaulwma -- strong proper noun, feminine; accusative singular of <Iaírusaúlwma> Jerusalem --
Jerusalem
bi -- preposition; <bi> by, about; concerning; around, against; according to, on account of; for; at;
after; near -- after
biuhtja -- strong noun, neuter; dative singular of <biūhti> custom -- the custom
dulþais -- strong noun, feminine; genitive singular of <dulþs> feast -- of the feast
43 - jah ustiuhandam þans dagans, miþþane gawandidedun sik aftra, gastoþ Iesus sa magus in
Iairusalem, jah ni wissedun Iosef jah aiþei is.

ustiuhandam -- strong verb class 2; dative plural masculine of present participle of <ustiuhan> to
lead out; to complete -- when they had ful lled # continuing the dative absolute of the preceding
verse
þans -- demonstrative used as article; accusative plural masculine of <sa, so, þata> this, that -- the
miþþane -- conjunction; <miþþanei> while, during, when -- as
gawandidedun -- weak verb class 1; third person plural preterite of <gawandjan> to bring back,
return -- they returned
sik -- re exive pronoun; accusative of <sik> himself, herself, oneself -- ...
aftra -- adverb; <aftra> back, again -- ...
gastoþ -- strong verb class 6; third person singular preterite of <gastandan> to stay -- tarried
behind
Iesus -- strong proper noun, masculine; nominative singular of <Iēsus> Jesus -- Jesus
magus -- strong noun, masculine; nominative singular of <magus> boy, son -- child
wissedun -- preterite present verb; third person plural preterite of <*witan> to know -- knew... (of it)
Iosef -- strong proper noun, masculine; nominative singular of <Iōsēf> Joseph -- Joseph
aiþei -- weak noun, feminine; nominative singular of <áiþei> mother -- mother
44 - hugjandona in gasinþjam ina wisan qemun dagis wig jah sokidedun ina in ganiþjam jah in
kunþam.
hugjandona -- weak verb class 1; nominative plural neuter of present participle of <hugjan> to
think, to suppose -- but... supposing # neuter plural referring to individuals of mixed gender
gasinþjam -- weak noun, masculine; dative plural of <gasinþja> companion, company -- the
company
wisan -- strong verb class 5; in nitive of <wisan> to be -- to have been
qemun -- strong verb class 4; third person plural preterite of <qiman> to come, arrive -- they... went
dagis -- strong noun, masculine; genitive singular of <dags> day -- a day's
wig -- strong noun, masculine; accusative singular of <wigs> way, road, journey -- journey
sokidedun -- weak verb class 1; third person plural preterite of <sōkjan> to seek, ask -- they
sought
in -- preposition; <in> into, towards; on account of; in, among, by -- among
ganiþjam -- strong noun, masculine; dative plural of <ganiþjis> kinsman -- their kinsfolk
kunþam -- adjective used as substantive; dative plural neuter of <kunþs> known, acquaintance --
acquaintance
45 - jah ni bigitandona ina gawandidedun sik in Iairusalem sokjandona ina.

bigitandona -- strong verb class 5; nominative plural neuter of present participle of <bigitan> to
nd, meet -- when they found
gawandidedun -- weak verb class 1; third person plural preterite of <gawandjan> to bring back,
return -- they turned back
sokjandona -- weak verb class 1; nominative plural neuter of present participle of <sōkjan> to
seek, ask -- having sought
46- jah warþ afar dagans þrins, bigetun ina in alh sitandan in midjaim laisarjam jah hausjandan
im jah fraihnandan ins.

came to pass (that)
afar -- preposition; <afar> after, according to -- after
þrins -- numeral; accusative plural masculine of <*þreis> three -- three
bigetun -- strong verb class 5; third person plural preterite of <bigitan> to nd, meet -- they found
alh -- strong noun, feminine; dative singular of <alhs> temple -- the temple
sitandan -- strong verb class 5; accusative singular masculine of present participle of <sitan> to sit
-- sitting
midjaim -- adjective; dative plural masculine of <midjis> middle -- the middle of
laisarjam -- strong noun, masculine; dative plural of <láisareis> teacher, master -- the doctors
jah -- conjunction; <jah> and, also -- both
hausjandan -- weak verb class 1; accusative singular masculine of present participle of <háusjan>
to hear, listen -- hearing
fraihnandan -- strong verb class 5; accusative singular masculine of present participle of
<fraíhnan> to ask, question -- asking... questions
47 - usgeisnodedun þan allai þai hausjandans is ana frodein jah andawaurdjam is.
usgeisnodedun -- weak verb class 4; third person plural preterite of <usgeisnan> to be amazed,
astonished -- were astonished
allai -- adjective; nominative plural masculine of <alls> all, every -- all
þai -- demonstrative used as relative pronoun; nominative plural masculine of <sa, so, þata> this,
that -- that
hausjandans -- weak verb class 1; nominative plural masculine of present participle of <háusjan>
to hear, listen -- heard
is -- personal pronoun; genitive singular masculine of <is> he, she, it -- him
ana -- preposition; <ana> in, on, upon, at, over; to, into; against -- at
frodein -- weak noun, feminine; dative singular of <frōdei> wisdom, understanding --
understanding
andawaurdjam -- strong noun, neuter; dative plural of <andawaúrdi> answer -- answers
48- jah gasaiƕandans ina sildaleikidedun, jah qaþ du imma so aiþei is: magau, ƕa gatawides
uns swa? sai, sa atta þeins jah ik winnandona sokidedum þuk.

gasaiƕandans -- strong verb class 5; nominative plural masculine of present participle of
<gasaíƕan> to see -- when they saw
sildaleikidedun -- weak verb class 1; third person plural preterite of <sildaleikjan> to wonder, to
marvel -- they were amazed
imma -- personal pronoun; dative singular masculine of <is> he, she, it -- him
so -- demonstrative used as article; nominative singular feminine of <sa, so, þata> this, that -- ...
magau -- strong noun, masculine; vocative singular of <magus> boy, son -- son
ƕa -- interrogative adverb; <ƕa> why -- why
gatawides -- weak verb class 1; second person singular preterite of <gatáujan> to do, make -- hast
thou... dealt
uns -- personal pronoun; dative plural of <ik> I -- with us # Referring to Mary and Joseph. Gothic
often employs a plural where a dual might be expected. The instances in this verse likely arise from
the difference in gender of the referents, cf. winnandona; but this is not a necessary condition for
the use of plural in place of dual.
swa -- adverb; <swa> so, thus, as -- thus
sa -- demonstrative used as article; nominative singular masculine of <sa, so, þata> this, that -- ...
atta -- weak noun, masculine; nominative singular of <atta> father -- father
þeins -- possessive adjective; nominative singular masculine of <þeins> thy, thine, your, yours -- thy
ik -- personal pronoun; nominative singular of <ik> I -- I
winnandona -- strong verb class 3; nominative plural neuter of present participle of <winnan> to
suffer -- sorrowing # neuter plural referring to individuals of mixed gender
sokidedum -- weak verb class 1; rst person plural preterite of <sōkjan> to seek, ask -- have
sought # For the use of the plural, see the note above for uns.
þuk -- personal pronoun; accusative singular of <þu> thou, you -- thee
49 - jah qaþ du im: ƕa þatei sokideduþ mik? niu wisseduþ þatei in þaim attins meinis skulda
wisan?

qaþ -- strong verb class 5; third person singular preterite of <qiþan> to say, speak -- he said
ƕa þatei -- interrogative pronoun; nominative singular neuter of <ƕas> who, what + relative
pronoun; nominative singular neuter of <saei> who, he who, which -- how (is it) that
sokideduþ -- weak verb class 1; second person plural preterite of <sōkjan> to seek, ask -- ye
sought # For the use of the plural, see the note in the previous verse for uns.
mik -- personal pronoun; accusative singular of <ik> I -- me
niu -- adverb; <ni> not + interrogative particle; <-u> (interrogative particle, attached enclitically to
rst word of its clause) -- not
wisseduþ -- preterite present verb; second person plural preterite of <*witan> to know -- wist ye #
For the use of the plural, see the note in the previous verse for uns.
þatei -- conjunction; <þatei> that, because, if -- that
in -- preposition; <in> into, towards; on account of; in, among, by -- about
þaim -- demonstrative used as pronoun; dative plural neuter of <sa, so, þata> this, that -- business
attins -- weak noun, masculine; genitive singular of <atta> father -- Father's
meinis -- possessive adjective; genitive singular masculine of <meins> my, mine -- my
skulda -- preterite present verb; rst person singular preterite of <*skulan> to owe, be obliged -- I
must
wisan -- strong verb class 5; in nitive of <wisan> to be -- be
50 - jah ija ni froþun þamma waurda þatei rodida du im.

ija -- personal pronoun; nominative plural neuter of <ita> it -- they # neuter plural referring to
individuals of mixed gender
froþun -- strong verb class 6; third person plural preterite of <fraþjan> to understand -- understood
waurda -- strong noun, neuter; dative singular of <waúrd> word -- saying
þatei -- relative pronoun; nominative singular neuter of <saei> who, he who, which -- which
rodida -- weak verb class 1; third person singular preterite of <rōdjan> to speak -- he spake
51- jah iddja miþ im jah qam in Nazaraiþ, jah was ufhausjands im; jah aiþei is gafastaida þo
waurda alla in hairtin seinamma.

iddja -- strong verb class 7; third person singular suppletive preterite of <gaggan> to come, go -- he
went (down)
qam -- strong verb class 4; third person singular preterite of <qiman> to come, arrive -- came
Nazaraiþ -- indeclinable noun; <Nazaraíþ> Nazareth -- Nazareth
was -- strong verb class 5; third person singular preterite of <wisan> to be -- was
ufhausjands -- weak verb class 1; nominative singular masculine of present participle of
<ufháusjan> to obey, to be obedient -- subject
im -- personal pronoun; dative plural masculine of <is> he, she, it -- unto them
jah -- conjunction; <jah> and, also -- but
gafastaida -- weak verb class 3; third person singular preterite of <gafastan> to keep, hold fast --
kept
þo -- demonstrative pronoun; accusative plural neuter of <þata> this, that -- these
waurda -- strong noun, neuter; accusative plural of <waúrd> word -- sayings
alla -- adjective; accusative plural neuter of <alls> all, every -- all
hairtin -- weak noun, neuter; dative singular of <haírtō> heart -- heart
seinamma -- possessive adjective; dative singular neuter of <*seins> one's own -- her
52 - jah Iesus þaih frodein jah wahstau jah anstai at guda jah mannam.

þaih -- strong verb class 1; third person singular preterite of <þeihan> to thrive, to prosper --
increased
frodein -- weak noun, feminine; dative singular of <frōdei> wisdom, understanding -- in wisdom
wahstau -- strong noun, masculine; dative singular of <wahstus> size, stature -- stature
anstai -- strong noun, feminine; dative singular of <ansts> grace, favor -- in favor
at -- preposition; <at> at, by, to, with, of -- with
guda -- strong noun, masculine; dative singular of <guþ> God -- God
mannam -- irregular noun, masculine; dative plural of <manna> man -- man
Lesson Text
2:41 - jah wratodedun þai birusjos is jera ƕammeh in Iairusalem at dulþ paska. 42 - jah
biþe warþ twalibwintrus, usgaggandam þan im in Iairusaulwma bi biuhtja dulþais, 43 - jah
ustiuhandam þans dagans, miþþane gawandidedun sik aftra, gastoþ Iesus sa magus in
Iairusalem, jah ni wissedun Iosef jah aiþei is. 44 - hugjandona in gasinþjam ina wisan
qemun dagis wig jah sokidedun ina in ganiþjam jah in kunþam. 45 - jah ni bigitandona ina
gawandidedun sik in Iairusalem sokjandona ina. 46 - jah warþ afar dagans þrins, bigetun
ina in alh sitandan in midjaim laisarjam jah hausjandan im jah fraihnandan ins. 47 -
usgeisnodedun þan allai þai hausjandans is ana frodein jah andawaurdjam is. 48 - jah
gasaiƕandans ina sildaleikidedun, jah qaþ du imma so aiþei is: magau, ƕa gatawides uns
swa? sai, sa atta þeins jah ik winnandona sokidedum þuk. 49 - jah qaþ du im: ƕa þatei
sokideduþ mik? niu wisseduþ þatei in þaim attins meinis skulda wisan? 50 - jah ija ni
froþun þamma waurda þatei rodida du im. 51 - jah iddja miþ im jah qam in Nazaraiþ, jah
was ufhausjands im; jah aiþei is gafastaida þo waurda alla in hairtin seinamma. 52 - jah
Iesus þaih frodein jah wahstau jah anstai at guda jah mannam.
Translation
2:41 Now his parents went to Jerusalem every year at the feast of the passover. 42 And when he was
twelve years old, they went up to Jerusalem after the custom of the feast. 43 And when they had
ful lled the days, as they returned, the child Jesus tarried behind in Jerusalem; and Joseph and his
mother knew not of it. 44 But they, supposing him to have been in the company, went a day's journey;
and they sought him among their kinsfolk and acquaintance. 45 And when they found him not, they
turned back again to Jerusalem, seeking him. 46 And it came to pass, that after three days they
found him in the temple, sitting in the midst of the doctors, both hearing them, and asking them
questions. 47 And all that heard him were astonished at his understanding and answers. 48 And
when they saw him, they were amazed: and his mother said unto him, Son, why hast thou thus dealt
with us? behold, thy father and I have sought thee sorrowing. 49 And he said unto them, How is it
that ye sought me? wist ye not that I must be about my Father's business? 50 And they understood
not the saying which he spake unto them. 51 And he went down with them, and came to Nazareth,
and was subject unto them: but his mother kept all these sayings in her heart. 52 And Jesus
increased in wisdom and stature, and in favour with God and man.
Grammar
6 Sound Rules
6.1 Rules Characterizing Germanic: Grimm's and Verner's Laws

The most conspicuous sound shift affecting the Germanic languages is Grimm's Law. According to this
rule, the following sound correspondences obtain between Proto-Indo-European and Proto-Germanic:
PIE PGmc
p t k kw f þ x xw
b d g gw p t k kw
bh dh gh gwh b d g gw
In addition
p, t, k remain unchanged after s, and

t remains unchanged after p, k.
Certain discrepancies in the correspondences appear upon closer inspection of the data. In particular,
one frequently nds that the Germanic voiceless spirants (f, þ, x, xw) and s become voiced:
f, þ, x, xw, s > v, ð, ḡ, ḡw, z.
Many of these counterexamples are explained by Verner's Law. This states that the voiceless spirants
remain when initial, or when immediately preceded by the PIE accent. For example, *t > þ in PIE *bhréH-
ter > Gothic broþar, but *t > ð in PIE *pH-tér > fadar [faðar]. Note in this last example that initial *p > f,
with no voicing.
Consider the following examples:
PIE Comparandum PGmc Gothic Shift Law

p- podós (Gk.) f- fōtáus 'of the foot' p>f Grimm
-p- kléptēs (Gk.) -f- hliftus 'thief' p>f Grimm
-p- kapálam (Skt.) -v- háubiþ 'head' p>v Verner

t- tu (Lat.) þ- þu 'thou' t>þ Grimm
-t- várte (Skt.) -þ- waírþa 'I become' t>þ Grimm
-t- patér (Gk.) -ð- fadar 'father' t>ð Verner

k- cordis (Lat.) x- haírtins 'of the heart' k>x Grimm
-k- déka (Gk.) -x- taíhun 'ten' k>x Grimm
k- com-mūnis (Lat.) -ḡ- ga-máins 'common' k > ḡ Verner

s- sá (Skt.) s- sa 'that' s>s Grimm
-s- geú(s)ō (Gk.) -s- kiusa 'I choose' s>s Grimm
-s- bhárase (Skt.) -z- baíraza 'art borne' s>z Verner
Note in the instance of Latin commūnis and Gothic gamáins that Verner's Law applies to proclitics. The
example of Sanskrit bhárase and Gothic baíraza illustrates that the accent must be on the vowel
immediately preceding the consonant for Grimm's Law to apply.
6.2 Rules Characterizing Gothic

Among the ancient Germanic languages Gothic is uniquely conservative in terms of phonology. As will be
seen in the section on the weak preterite, the dental su x retains a fuller expression than in languages
such as Old English or Old Norse. Gothic also preserves a situation which precedes regular umlaut due to
i in a following syllable. For example, compare Gothic alþeis 'old' and alþiza 'older' to Old English eald
and ieldra, respectively; similarly compare PGmc. *gastiz > Goth. gasts to Old Norse gestr.
Gothic does, however, show some important sound changes. Some of the more notable examples appear
below.
6.2.1 Initial *fl-
Initial *fl- > þl- in syllables ending in h /x/. Compare Old Saxon and Old High German fliohan ' ee' to
Gothic þliuhan. The same may also occur in stems ending in q /kw/: for example, Gothic þlaqus 'putting
out leaves, tender' with possible relation to Old High German flah ' at', Latin placidus (' at, even' and
hence) 'gentle, quiet'. The change *fl- > þl- does not occur in stems with other nal consonants. For
example, compare Gothic flōdus to Old English and Old Saxon flōd ' ood, stream'.
6.2.2 Final -s
As mentioned in Section 3.1, nal -s > zero before (short vowel) + (consonantal r). For example, waír + -
s > waír 'man'; similarly baúr 'son', anþar 'second', unsar 'our'. Compare dags 'day', gasts 'guest', akrs
' eld', swērs 'honored', skeirs 'clear', G brōþrs 'of a brother'.
Additionally, -s > zero before stem- nal s. For example, runs + -s > runs 'a running'. Compare accusative
runs, showing the s is part of the stem, not the nominative ending.
6.3 Sound Changes in Gothic Strong Preterites
Several sound changes occur frequently when consonants become nal in the past tense or combine with
the second person singular past tense ending -t. These are collected here for reference.
Final b > f after a vowel or diphthong in the 1st and 3rd person singular, e.g. gadaban 'be tting' yields
gadōf.
Final d > þ after a vowel or diphthong in the 1st and 3rd person singular, e.g. bidjan 'entreat' yields
baþ.
b > f before -t in the 2nd person singular, e.g. giban 'give' yields gaft.
d > s before -t in the 2nd person singular, e.g. anabiudan 'command' yields anabáust.
t > s before -t in the 2nd person singular, e.g. bigitan ' nd' yields bigast.
þ > s before -t in the 2nd person singular, e.g. qiþan 'say' yields qast.
7 Strong Declension
7.1 i-Stems
Several nouns have stems ending in i. As mentioned above, this does not lead to regular umlaut of the
root vowel as it does in other Germanic languages such as Old Norse and Old English. The nouns gards
'court', staþs 'place', and gasts 'guest' illustrate the masculine forms of the i-declension; ansts 'grace',
fahēþs 'joy', and qēns 'woman' illustrate the feminine forms. Recall that ei is the Gothic spelling of [ī].
i-Stem Masculine Feminine

Stem gardi- stadi- gasti- ansti- fahēdi- qēni-

N Sg. gards staþs gasts ansts fahēþs qēns

A, V gard staþ gast anst fahēþ qēn
G gardis stadis gastis anstáis fahēdáis qēnáis
D garda stada gasta anstái fahēdái qēnái

N Pl. gardeis stadeis gasteis ansteis fahēdeis qēneis

A gardins stadins gastins anstins fahēdins qēnins
G gardē stadē gastē anstē fahēdē qēnē
D gardim stadim gastim anstim fahēdim qēnim

Note that, because of the lack of umlaut, the singular forms of masculine i-stems parallel those of the a-
stems. Feminine abstract nouns in -ōns and -áins, derived from verbs of the second and third weak
conjugation, decline like ansts. For example, laþōns 'invitation' from laþōn 'to invite', mitōns 'a thought'
from mitōn 'to think over', bauáins 'a dwelling' from bauan 'to inhabit', libáins 'life' from liban 'to live'.
Some nouns which belong to the i-declension in Gothic belong to the a-declension in sister languages.
For example, compare Gothic gards to the Old Norse a-stem garðr, but Goth. gasts and ON gestr are
both i-declension. By contrast, Gothic qēns appears both as i-stem in the Eddic form kvæn and as the ōn-
stem kona (G pl. kvenna) in Old Norse.
The masculine noun náus 'corpse' has plural forms N. naweis and A. nawins. The feminine noun háims
'village' follows the declension of ansts in the singular, but follows the ō-stem giba in the plural (see
Section 3.2). Feminine abstract nouns in -eins follow the declension of ansts, except for N pl. -ōs and G
pl. -ō. The forms of the masculine náus 'corpse' and of the feminine háims 'village' and láiseins 'doctrine'
are given below.
Masculine Feminine

Stem nawi- háimi- láiseini-

N Sg. náus háims láiseins

A, V háim láisein
G háimáis láiseináis
D háimái láiseinái

N Pl. naweis háimōs láiseinōs

A nawins háimō láiseinins
G háimō láiseinō
D háimōm láiseinim

7.2 u-Stems
The u-stem nouns appear in all genders, though there are few remnants of neuter forms. The masculine
sunus 'son', feminine handus 'hand', and neuter faíhu 'cattle' illustrate the declension.
u-Stem Masculine Feminine Neuter

Stem sunu- handu- faíhu-

N Sg. sunus handus faíhu

A, V sunu handu faíhu
G sunáus handáus *faíháus
D sunáu handáu faíháu

N Pl. sunjus handjus
A sununs handuns
G suniwē handiwē
D sunum handum

Some scribes write N sg. sunáus beside sunus, D sg. sunu beside sunáu, and V sg. sunáu beside sunu.
The neuter noun filu 'much' falls under this declension, with G sg. filáus used adverbially with
comparatives in the sense 'very'.
8 Personal Pronouns
Because of the rich morphology of the Gothic verb, subject pronouns are generally unnecessary. They are
used only for emphasis. In addition to singular and plural, the rst and second person pronouns also
distinguish a dual number, e.g. wit 'we two', igqara 'of you two'.
8.1 First and Second Person Pronouns

The forms of the Gothic rst and second person pronouns are as follows.
1st Person 2nd Person

N Sg. ik þu
A mik þuk
G meina þeina
D mis þus

N Du. wit *jut

A ugkis igqis
G *ugkara igqara
D ugkis igqis

N Pl. weis jus

A uns, unsis izwis
G unsara izwara
D unsis, uns izwis

Note that the rst person plural A uns and D unsis often interchange with one another. The oblique forms
ll the role of rst and second person re exive pronouns, so that e.g. Modern English 'I hit myself' would
be more literally in Gothic 'I hit me'.
8.2 Third Person Pronouns

The third person pronoun is built from a stem i-. Unlike the rst and second person pronouns, these do
not serve as re exives. Instead the forms sik, seina, sis serve as re exives. Though the forms are
singular, they serve as re exives for all genders and numbers. Thus the re exive of is in the accusative is
sik 'himself', and likewise the re exive of neut. N pl. ija in the accusative is sik 'themselves'. The forms of
the third person pronoun and the re exive are given below.
3rd Person Masculine Neuter Feminine Re exive

N Sg. is ita si -
A ina ita ija sik
G is is izōs *seina
D imma imma izái sis

N Pl. eis ija *ijōs -
A ins *ija ijōs sik

G izē *izē izō seina
D im im im sis

9 Weak Verb Conjugation

Weak verbs form a category separate from strong verbs. Whereas vowel gradation (ablaut) characterizes
strong verbs (cf. Modern English sing-sang-sung-song), this is not so for weak verbs. Rather the addition
of a dental su x -d- in the past tense characterizes weak verbs (cf. Modern English arrive-arrived). This
dental su x is appended to the verbal stem, before the addition of personal endings. The dental su x is
found not only in nite verbal forms, but also in the past participle (cf. Modern English 'That problem,
addressed by Einstein, was the beginning of modern quantum theory').
9.1 Weak Verb Classes

Gothic has four classes of weak verbs. These classes are distinguished by the vowel which precedes the
dental su x, and the presence or absence of a nasal appended to the stem: -i-, -ō-, -ái-, -nō-. These
correlate with different forms of the in nitive. The following chart lists examples of the Gothic weak verb
classes.
Class Preterite (1/3 Sg.) In nitive Meaning

i nas-i-da nas-jan 'save'
ii salb-ō-da salb-ōn 'anoint'
iii hab-ái-da hab-an 'have'
iv full-nō-da full-nan 'become full'

9.2 Active Paradigm

The class i verb nasjan 'save' illustrates the active forms of the weak verb.
Weak Verbs Indicative Subjunctive Imperative
Present
1 Sg. nasja nasjáu
2 nasjis nasjáis nasei

3 nasjiþ nasjái nasjadáu

1 Du. nasjōs nasjáiwa
2 nasjats nasjáits nasjats

1 Pl. nasjam nasjáima nasjam

2 nasjiþ nasjáiþ nasjiþ
3 nasjand nasjáina nasjandáu

Past
1 Sg. nasida nasidēdjáu
2 nasidēs nasidēdeis
3 nasida nasidēdi

1 Du. nasidēdu nasidēdeiwa
2 nasidēduts nasidēdeits

1 Pl. nasidēdum nasidēdeima
2 nasidēduþ nasidēdeiþ
3 nasidēdun nasidēdeina

In nitive nasjan

Pres. Ptc. nasjands

Past Ptc. nasiþs
All present forms derive from the in nitive, minus the -an ending. All past forms contain the dental su x.
Note that all nite preterite forms, except for the singular indicative, contain the su x -dēd- rather than
simply -d-.
9.3 Mediopassive Paradigm

As with the strong verbs, the morphological mediopassive has only present forms. The forms of nasjan
'save' illustrate the paradigm.
Weak Verbs Indicative Subjunctive

1 Sg. nasjada nasjáidáu

2 nasjaza nasjáizáu
3 nasjada nasjáidáu

1 Du.
2

1 Pl. nasjanda nasjáindáu

2 nasjanda nasjáindáu
3 nasjanda nasjáindáu

There are no forms for the dual. Be careful to note that the -d- of the mediopassive forms is found in all
verbs, strong and weak; it is not to be confused with the -d- of the weak dental preterite. The stem of
these forms derives from the in nitive, as with the present active forms.
10 Particles and Conjunctions
Gothic makes use of a number of conjunctions. The simple joining of two clauses in a copulative fashion
is most often accomplished with jah 'and'. This conjunction stands as the rst element in its clause: warþ
hūhrus abrs and gawi jáinata, jah is dugann alaþarba waírþan 'a great famine came over that
people, and he started to become very poor' (Luke 15.14). jah is also found sentence-initially, continuing a
previous sentence in a style parallel to Greek kaí in the New Testament. The enclitic -uh 'and' a xes to
the rst word of its clause: Galáiþ in praitaúria aftra Peilātus jah wōpida Iēsu qaþuh imma... 'Pilate
came into the pretorium again and called Jesus and said to him...' (John 18.33). Following iþ 'but', the
conjunction -uh generally attaches to the verb of the clause: iþ Iesus iddjuh miþ im 'and then Jesus
went with them' (Luke 7.6). The negative copulative is nih 'and not', a combination of ni 'not' and -uh. nih
generally stands at the beginning of its clause: ni maúrnáiþ sáiwalái izwarái ƕa matjáiþ jah ƕa
drigkáiþ nih leika izwaramma ƕē wasjáiþ 'have no thought for your life, what you shall eat and what
you shall drink; nor for your body, how you shall dress' (Matthew 6.25).
The general disjunctive particle is aíþþáu 'or'. The sequence 'either... or' is typically jabái...
aíþþáu or
andizuh... aíþþáu. For example, untē jabái fijáiþ áinana jah anþarana frijōþ, aíþþáu áinamma
ufháuseiþ iþ anþaramma frakann 'for either he will hate the one, and love the other; or else he will hold
to the one, and despise the other' (Matthew 6.24). In direct questions of a disjunctive nature one nds -
u... þáu '(either)... or', where -u is appended to the rst word of the rst question: abu þus silbin þu
þata qiþis, þáu anþarái þus qēþun bi mik? 'Sayest thou this thing of thyself, or did others tell it thee of
me?' (John 18.34) Indirect disjunctive questions usually omit -u, though þáu remains to mark the second
part.
There are several adversative particles: iþ,

aþþan, ak, akei. These generally stand at the head of their
clause: Háusidēduþ þatei qiþan ist þáim áirizam: ni maúrþrjáis; iþ saei maúrþreiþ skula waírþiþ
stauái. aþþan ik qiþa izwis... 'Ye have heard that it was said of them of old time, Thou shalt not kill; and
whosoever shall kill shall be in danger of the judgment: But I say unto you...' (Matthew 5.21-22). The
particle ak generally follows a negative introduction, while akei follows a positive. For example, ni
hugei
hauhaba, ak ogs 'Be not highminded, but fear' (Romans 11.20); compare all binah, akei ni all daug 'All
things are lawful for me, but all things are not expedient' (1 Cor. 10.23).
The main causal conjunctions are áuk, allis, raíhtis, untē. The particles áuk, allis, raíhtis generally
occupy second position in their clause, though áuk and raíhtis may also occupy third position. For
example: mahteigs áuk ist 'for [God] is able' (Romans 14.4); maht wēsi áuk 'For it might have been'
(Mark 14.5). áuk may combine with raíhtis or allis: sa áuk raíhtis 'for he' (Mark 6.17); saei áuk allis 'for
whoever' (Mark 9.41). By contrast, untē 'for, because, until' occupies the rst position in its clause:
áudagái þái hráinjahaírtans, untē þái guþ gasaiƕand 'Blessed are the pure in heart: for they shall see
God' (Matthew 5.8).
For ease of reference, the most common connective particles are listed in the following chart, along with
their essential roles and basic translations.
Conjunction Type Meaning

aíþþáu disjunctive 'or'

ak adversative 'but'

akei adversative 'but'

allis causal 'for, because'

andizuh... aíþþáu disjunctive 'either... or'

aþþan adversative 'but, however'

áuk causal 'for, because'

biþē temporal 'while'

duþē (duþþē) conclusive 'therefore'
nal 'to the end that, because'

duþþē ei nal 'to the end that, because'

du þamma ei nal 'to the end that, because'

ei nal 'that, so that'

eiþan conclusive 'therefore'

faúrþizei temporal 'before that'

ƕáiwa comparative 'how'

ibái (iba) nal 'lest, that... not'

iþ adversative 'but, however'

jabái conditional 'if'

jah copulative 'and'

jah... jah copulative 'both... and'

jaþþē... jaþþē disjunctive 'whether... or'

miþþanei temporal 'while'

ni þatáinei... ak jah copulative 'not only... but also'

ni (nih)... ni (nih) disjunctive 'neither... nor'

nibái (niba) conditional 'unless, if... not'

nih copulative 'and not'

nih... ak jah copulative 'not only... but also'

nu conclusive 'therefore'

nunu conclusive 'therefore'

nuh conclusive 'therefore'

raíhtis causal 'for, because'

sunsei temporal 'as soon as'

swaei nal 'so that'

swaswē nal 'so that'
comparative 'so as'

swē temporal 'just as'
comparative 'as'

swēþáuh concessive 'indeed, however'

þan adversative 'but, however'
temporal 'when, as long as'

þandē causal 'inasmuch as'
temporal 'when, as long as'
'until, until that, as long as'

þannu conclusive 'therefore'

þanuh conclusive 'therefore'

þaruh conclusive 'therefore'

þatei nal 'that'

þáu concessive 'in that case'

þáuhjabái concessive 'even though'

þēei causal 'because'
nal 'that'

þei nal 'that'

uh (encl.) copulative 'and'

und þatei temporal 'until, until that, as long as'

untē causal 'for, because'
temporal 'until, until that, as long as'
Gothic Online
Lesson 3
Linguistic Origins of the Goths
The linguistic remains of Gothic provide a window into the origin and history of the Gothic tribes that
sometimes complements, and sometimes con icts with, literary and archaeological records. Speci cally,
the words borrowed by Gothic from different languages, as well as those borrowed by other languages
from Gothic, provide clues about cultural contact, and hence possible geographic location. Generally, at
least in the ancient world, languages are assumed to borrow from neighboring languages. Such an
assumption certainly leads to some objections, but on the whole it forms a good working hypothesis,
which may lead to conclusions that can be compared with the archaeological and literary records for
con rmation. If such a hypothesis fails, however, scholars must look for other means for the languages to
come into contact, such as through travel along common trade routes.
The Gothic language as recorded in Wul la's translation contains loan-words from Latin and Celtic. This
could imply that either the Goths were settled close to Roman or Celtic populations, or they were in
contact with them via commerce or some other means. Since the literary sources pertaining to the Goths
generally speak of their origins near the Baltic Sea, scholars have primarily looked for what modes of
contact the Goths may have had with these peoples from a distance. For example, if the Goths were never
proximate to the Romans, the Latin loans may have come from Gothic mercenaries in Roman employ,
since many of the loans have a military character: Gothic *annō from Latin annōna 'military wages';
Gothic militōn 'serve in the army' from Latin mīlēs, pl. mīlitēs 'soldier'. Such loans could could date to the
period of contact between Romans and Gutones, when Drusus, son of Tiberius, convinced Catualda, chief
of the Gotones, to enter the ght against the Marcomanni.
Celtic loans are likewise often of a military or political character, such as Gothic reiks: compare Gaulish -
rīx, and Old Irish rī, genitive rīg. Such Celtic acculturation was possible during the Wielbark period, where
the Gutones in the region belonged to the Lugian cult league. Scholars suspect the Lugians were
considered Celts before the birth of Christ, but after a century had come to be considered Germanic,
closely allied to the Vandals. This holdover of Celtic terms, as with Latin terms possibly borrowed during
the Marcomannic wars, requires the Gutonic language to carry over into 4th century Gothic. Proximity to
Celtic Lugians does not explain why these particular elements are common only to Celtic and Gothic,
since other Germanic tribes were part of the Lugian league.
There are some facts (see Kortlandt, 2000) which argue against a theory of Scandinavian origin for the
Goths. On the one hand, much of the source material, admittedly for Jordanes and perhaps for his
predecessors Ablabius and Cassiodorus as well, is in the form of oral traditions, the interpretation of
which may change within a culture as the culture itself changes. On the other hand, there are some
problems with the notion of large-scale migration from the Baltic to the Black Sea. One problem is that the
region between the point of origin and the destination is believed to be the homeland of the Slavs, who
seem not to have moved until the advent of the Huns. This seems unlikely if there was a mass migration
of Goths through the territory. (It is subject to the same argument that supposes the advent of the Huns is
what caused the Goths to press into Roman territory.) In addition, the general trend of migration near the
borderland of the steppes was westward from poorer lowland to richer upland, not eastward. Another
typical trend of the period is that of migration toward more civilized areas rather than away from them,
hence in this case toward the Roman Empire's nearest border, the Danube -- a direction in which the Slavs
in fact moved, a few centuries later.
Therefore a different proposal arises (Kortlandt, 2000), namely that the Gutones moved south early,
toward Italy and the Roman Empire, until they came to the Danube. There they adopted the speech of
Alemannic tribes that had previously migrated to the region from the west, and whose speech would
already be colored by Roman contact. They were prevented from entering Roman territory, and joined
forces with other Germanic tribes in Lower Austria. This mingling of the Gutones with other Germanic
tribes in the region resulted in the Gothic ethnogenesis.
One simple fact supporting such a theory is the panoply of names applied to the Goths in the course of
their migrations, none of which is actually 'Goth' until a fairly late date. It seems especially likely that the
Gothic tribe through the 3rd and 4th centuries was composed of several uid factions. To add to such
literary observations, there is linguistic data as well that may support a Gothic ethnogenesis in southern
Germany.
In particular, some of the linguistic features deemed most conservative in Gothic, such as the
reduplicated su x in the past plural of weak verbs, may in fact be innovations. If the origin of the weak
verbs is the dh-determinative, then the reduplication found in Gothic may not be an archaic holdover, but
rather a form based on analogy with such forms as the preterite of *dhē in Old High German.
In reference to Latin, the fact that the Latin su x -ārius is productive in the Gothic words such as
bōkareis 'scribe', láisareis 'teacher', liuþareis 'singer', mōtareis 'toll-taker', sōkareis 'disputer', may argue
for closer contact than merely mercenary jargon. Other cultural loans from Latin, lacking military
character, are common, e.g. aurali 'napkin' < Lat. ōrārium; kubitus 'reclining (company) at a table' < Lat.
cubitus; aurti-gards, with rst element from Latin hortus; mēs < Vulgar Latin mēsa < Latin mēnsa. The
word lukarn 'lamp' is an early borrowing from Latin; aket, akeit 'vinegar', a borrowing from Latin acētum,
because of non-palatalized c-, may have been borrowed in 1st-3rd centuries, before migration to Russia.
Also borrowed from Latin were Kreks 'Greek' and marikreitum 'pearls', showing the change of Latin g to
Gmc k, interesting in light of the fact that the Alemannic dialects lack voiced obstruents. In fact, Greek
words often appear in Latinized forms, e.g. aípistula 'letter', aíwaggeljō 'gospel', paúrpura 'purple',
diabulus 'devil'. Greek words with accented -í- often show -j-, i.e. no accent, in Gothic: aikklesjō
'congregation', skaúrpjōnō 'of scorpions'. In general Greek o is represented by Gothic ō, as in Gothic
Aírmōgaínēs corresponding to Greek Ermogénēs. However the fact that Greek o-stems are in ected as
Gothic u-stems in the singular, and as i-stems in the plural, may be a result of Latin transmission: Iudaius,
-áus sg.; Iudaieis, ē pl.
Thus there may have been a protracted period of close contact between the Goths and Romans well
before Wuli la's translation, and the Celtic loans need not have come from Lugians in the north, but
possibly from the Bastarni (if they were in fact Celts) in the Balkans. Certain words adopted from Latin
into Gothic also show devoicing characteristic of Alemannic dialects, which suggests that the Goths may
have been in close proximity to southern Germanic dialects for an extended period. It seems that the
linguistic picture of Gothic origins is as heterogeneous as that derived from the literary and
archaeological remains.
The following passage is from John 6.1-14, in which Jesus provides enough bread and sh to feed the
multitude. The Gothic translation shows some noteworthy linguistic features. In 6.6, the phrase habáida
táujan '(what) he would do' provides an example of a compound future tense, with a sense of necessity
given by haban. The following verse, John 6.7, has the phrase twáim hundam skattē hláibōs ni
ganōhái sind, literally 'loaves at (the price) two hundred of coins are not enough'. This shows the
common use of the genitive with a numeral, analogous to Modern English 'a little bit of money'; likewise it
illustrates the use of an instrumental dative with genōhs to denote price. John 6.8 contains the genitive
Paítráus. Greek loan words in -os tend to be declined according to the Gothic u-declension.
We nd in verse 6.11 some insight into the original Greek source of the Gothic translation. As with the Old
English translation and Wycliffe's translation of 1389, Gothic lacks the phrase 'to the disciples, and the
disciples'. This suggests that the Gothic translator worked with a manuscript different from that used to
prepare the King James Version, but belonging to the same family as that of earlier English translations.
Note also the syntax of the word wáihts in John 6.12 : wáihtái ni fraqistnái 'that nothing be lost'. Here
the dative of wáihts (with negative ni) is used with an impersonal verb, giving more literally '(that) it be
lost for (no)thing' or 'at (no)thing', equivalent to '(that) it be lost in no way, in no respect'. The syntax of
John 6.14 is similarly noteworthy: gasaíƕandans þōei gatawida táikn Iēsus, literally 'seeing the-which-
(Jesus)-did miracle', where the relative clause has been pulled to the front, before its actual antecedent.
This fronting of the relative clause is common to many of the Indo-European languages, including
Sanskrit and even its modern daughters, such as Hindi.
6:1 - Afar þata galaiþ Iesus ufar marein þo Galeilaie jah Tibairiade.

þata -- demonstrative pronoun; accusative singular neuter of <þata> this, that -- these things
galaiþ -- strong verb class 1; third person singular preterite of <galeiþan> to go, travel -- went
ufar -- preposition; <ufar> over, above, beyond -- over
marein -- weak noun, feminine; dative singular of <marei> sea, lake -- sea
þo -- demonstrative used as article; accusative singular feminine of <sa, so, þata> this, that -- the
Galeilaie -- strong proper noun, masculine; genitive plural of <Galeilaius> Galilean -- of Galilee #
literally 'of the Galileans'
Tibairiade -- strong proper noun, masculine; genitive plural of <*Tibaíriadeis> Tiberians -- (which
is the sea of) Tiberias # literally '(and) of the Tiberians'
2 - jah laistida ina manageins filu, unte gaseƕun taiknins þozei gatawida bi siukaim.

laistida -- weak verb class 1; third person singular preterite of <láistjan> to follow -- followed
manageins -- weak noun, feminine; genitive singular of <managei> crowd, multitude -- multitude
filu -- strong noun, neuter; nominative singular of <filu> much, many -- a great
gaseƕun -- strong verb class 5; third person plural preterite of <gasaíƕan> to see -- they saw
taiknins -- strong noun, feminine; accusative plural of <táikns> sign, wonder -- (his) miracles
þozei -- relative pronoun; accusative plural feminine of <saei> who, he who, which -- which
gatawida -- weak verb class 1; third person singular preterite of <gatáujan> to do, make -- he did
after; near -- on
siukaim -- adjective used as substantive; dative plural masculine of <siuks> sick -- them that were
diseased
3 - usiddja þan ana fairguni Iesus jah jainar gasat miþ siponjam seinaim.
usiddja -- strong verb class 7; third person singular suppletive preterite of <usgaggan> to go out --
went up
ana -- preposition; <ana> in, on, upon, at, over; to, into; against -- into
fairguni -- strong noun, neuter; accusative singular of <faírguni> mountain -- a mountain
jainar -- adverb; <jáinar> yonder, there -- there
gasat -- strong verb class 5; third person singular preterite of <gasitan> to sit -- he sat
siponjam -- strong noun, masculine; dative plural of <sipōneis> disciple -- disciples
seinaim -- possessive adjective; dative plural masculine of <*seins> one's own -- his
4 - wasuh þan neƕa pasxa, so dulþs Iudaie.
wasuh -- strong verb class 5; third person singular preterite of <wisan> to be + enclitic conjunction;
<-uh> but, and, now, therefore -- was
neƕa -- preposition; <nēƕa> near -- nigh
pasxa -- strong noun, feminine; indeclinable <paska> Passover -- the passover
so -- demonstrative used as article; nominative singular feminine of <sa, so, þata> this, that -- the
dulþs -- strong noun, feminine; nominative singular of <dulþs> feast -- a feast
Iudaie -- strong proper noun, masculine; genitive plural of <*Iudaieis> Jew -- of the Jews
5 - þaruh ushof augona Iesus jah gaumida þammei manageins filu iddja du imma, qaþuh du
Filippau: ƕaþro bugjam hlaibans, ei matjaina þai?
þaruh -- conjunction; <þaruh> therefore, but, and; there; now -- When... then
ushof -- strong verb class 6; third person singular preterite of <ushafjan> to lift up -- lifted up
augona -- weak noun, neuter; accusative plural of <áugō> eye -- (his) eyes
gaumida -- weak verb class 1; third person singular preterite of <gáumjan> to observe, perceive,
see -- saw
þammei -- relative pronoun; dative singular neuter of <saei> who, he who, which -- ...
manageins -- weak noun, feminine; nominative plural of <managei> crowd, multitude -- company
iddja -- strong verb class 7; third person singular suppletive preterite of <usgaggan> to go out --
come
qaþuh -- strong verb class 5; third person singular preterite of <qiþan> to say, speak + enclitic
conjunction; <-uh> but, and, now, therefore -- he saith
Filippau -- strong proper noun, masculine; dative singular of <Filippus> Philip -- Philip
ƕaþro -- adverb; <ƕaþrō> whence, where -- whence
bugjam -- weak verb class 1; rst person plural of <bugjan> to buy -- shall we buy
hlaibans -- strong noun, masculine; accusative plural of <hláifs> bread, loaf -- bread
ei -- conjunction; <ei> that, so that; whether; (relative particle) -- that
matjaina -- weak verb class 1; third person plural present subjunctive of <matjan> to eat -- may eat
þai -- demonstrative used as pronoun; nominative plural masculine of <sa, so, þata> this, that --
these
6 - þatuh þan qaþ fraisands ina: iþ silba wissa þatei habaida taujan.
þatuh -- demonstrative used as pronoun; accusative singular neuter of <sa, so, þata> this, that +
enclitic conjunction; <-uh> but, and, now, therefore -- this
fraisands -- strong verb class 7; nominative singular masculine of present participle of <fráisan>
to tempt -- to prove
iþ -- conjunction; <iþ> but, however, if -- for
silba -- re exive pronoun; nominative singular masculine of <silba> self -- himself
wissa -- preterite present verb; third person singular preterite of <*witan> to know -- he... knew
þatei -- relative pronoun; accusative singular neuter of <saei> who, he who, which -- what
habaida -- weak verb class 3; third person singular preterite of <haban> to have -- he would
taujan -- weak verb class 1; in nitive of <taujan> to do -- do
7 - andhof imma Filippus: twaim hundam skatte hlaibos ni ganohai sind þaim, þei nimai
ƕarjizuh leitil.
andhof -- strong verb class 6; third person singular preterite of <andhafjan> to answer -- answered
Filippus -- strong proper noun, masculine; nominative singular of <Filippus> Philip -- Philip
twaim -- numeral; dative plural masculine of <twa> two -- two
hundam -- numeral; dative plural masculine of <hund> hundred -- hundred
skatte -- strong noun, masculine; genitive plural of <skatts> coin, denarius -- pennyworth of
hlaibos -- strong noun, masculine; nominative plural of <hláifs> bread, loaf -- bread
ganohai -- adjective; nominative plural masculine of <ganōhs> enough -- su cient
sind -- strong verb class 5; athematic third person plural of <wisan> to be -- is
þaim -- demonstrative used as pronoun; dative plural masculine of <sa, so, þata> this, that -- for
these
þei -- conjunction; <þei> that, so that; as -- that
nimai -- strong verb class 4; third person singular present subjunctive of <niman> to take, receive --
may take
ƕarjizuh -- inde nite pronoun; nominative singular masculine of <ƕarjizuh> each, every -- every
one (of them)
leitil -- adjective used as substantive; accusative singular neuter of <leitils> little -- a little
8 - qaþ ains þize siponje is, Andraias, broþar Paitraus Seimonaus:
qaþ -- strong verb class 5; third person singular preterite of <qiþan> to say, speak -- saith (unto
him)
ains -- numeral; nominative singular masculine of <áins> one -- one
þize -- demonstrative used as article; genitive plural masculine of <sa, so, þata> this, that -- ...
siponje -- strong noun, masculine; genitive plural of <sipōneis> disciple -- disciples
Andraias -- weak proper noun, masculine; nominative singular of <Andraías> Andrew -- Andrew
broþar -- weak noun, masculine; nominative singular of <brōþar> brother -- brother
Paitraus -- strong proper noun, masculine; genitive singular of <Paítrus> Peter -- Peter's
Seimonaus -- strong proper noun, masculine; genitive singular of <Seimōn> Simon -- Simon
9 - ist magula ains her, saei habaiþ ·e· hlaibans barizeinans jah ·b· fiskans; akei þata ƕa ist
du swa managaim?
ist -- strong verb class 5; athematic third person singular of <wisan> to be -- there is
magula -- weak noun, masculine; nominative singular of <magula> little boy -- lad # diminutive of
magus 'child, boy'
ains -- numeral; nominative singular masculine of <áins> one -- a
her -- adverb; <hēr> here -- here
saei -- relative pronoun; nominative masculine singular of <saei> who, he who, which -- which
habaiþ -- weak verb class 3; third person singular of <haban> to have -- hath
·e· -- numeral; <fimf> ve -- ve
hlaibans -- strong noun, masculine; accusative plural of <hláifs> bread, loaf -- loaves
barizeinans -- adjective; accusative plural masculine of <barizeins> of barley -- barley
·b· -- numeral; <twái> two -- two
fiskans -- strong noun, masculine; accusative plural of <fisks> sh -- (small) shes
akei -- conjunction; <akei> but, yet, still, nevertheless -- but
þata -- demonstrative used as person pronoun; nominative singular neuter of <sa, so, þata> this,
that -- they
ƕa -- interrogative pronoun; nominative singular neuter of <ƕas> who, what -- what
ist -- strong verb class 5; athematic third person singular of <wisan> to be -- are
du -- preposition; <du> to, towards; against; in -- among
swa -- adverb; <swa> so, thus, as -- so
managaim -- adjective used as substantive; dative plural masculine of <managáim> much, many --
many
10 - iþ Iesus qaþ: waurkeiþ þans mans anakumbjan. wasuh þan hawi manag ana þamma stada.
þaruh anakumbidedun wairos raþjon swaswe fimf þusundjos.
iþ -- conjunction; <iþ> but, however, if -- and

waurkeiþ -- weak verb class 1; second person plural imperative of <waúrkjan> to work, to make --
make
mans -- irregular noun, masculine; accusative plural of <manna> man -- men
anakumbjan -- weak verb class 1; in nitive of <anakumbjan> to recline, to sit down -- sit down
wasuh -- strong verb class 5; third person singular preterite of <wisan> to be + enclitic conjunction;
<-uh> but, and, now, therefore -- there was
þan -- conjunction; <þan> when, as (long as); then, at that time; but, and, however -- now
hawi -- strong noun, neuter; nominative singular of <hawi> grass -- grass
manag -- adjective; nominative singular neuter of <manag> much, many -- much
ana -- preposition; <ana> in, on, upon, at, over; to, into; against -- in
the
stada -- strong noun, masculine; dative singular of <staþs> place; land -- place
þaruh -- adverb; <þaruh> therefore, but, and; there; now -- so
anakumbidedun -- weak verb class 1; third person plural preterite of <anakumbjan> to recline, to
sit down -- sat down
wairos -- strong noun, masculine; nominative plural of <waír> man -- the men
raþjon -- weak noun, feminine; dative singular of <raþjō> number -- in number
swaswe -- adverb; <swaswē> as, just as; so as; so as to, so that -- about
fimf -- numeral; <fimf> ve -- ve
þusundjos -- numeral; nominative plural feminine of <þūsundi> thousand -- thousand
11 - namuh þan þans hlaibans Iesus jah awiliudonds gadailida þaim anakumbjandam; samaleiko
jah þize fiske, swa file swe wildedun.
namuh -- strong verb class 4; third person singular preterite of <niman> to take, receive + enclitic
conjunction; <-uh> but, and, now, therefore -- took
hlaibans -- strong noun, masculine; accusative plural of <hláifs> bread, loaf -- loaves
awiliudonds -- weak verb class 2; nominative singular masculine of present participle of
<awiliudōn> to give thanks -- when he had given thanks
gadailida -- weak verb class 1; third person singular preterite of <gadáiljan> to divide -- he
distributed
þaim -- demonstrative used as person pronoun; dative plural masculine of <sa, so, þata> this, that
-- to them # the part 'to the disciples, and the disciples' does not occur in the Gothic text
anakumbjandam -- weak verb class 1; dative plural masculine of participle of <anakumbjan> to
recline, to sit down -- that were set down
samaleiko -- adverb; <samaleikō> in like manner, likewise -- likewise
þize -- demonstrative used as article; genitive plural masculine of <sa, so, þata> this, that -- of the
fiske -- strong noun, masculine; genitive plural of <fisks> sh -- shes
swa -- adverb; <swa> so, thus, as -- as
file -- strong noun, neuter; genitive plural of <filu> much, many -- much
swe -- adverb; <swē> like, as, just as; so that; about -- as
wildedun -- irregular verb; third person plural preterite of <wiljan> to will, wish -- they would
12 - þanuh, biþe sadai waurþun, qaþ du siponjam seinaim: galisiþ þos aflifnandeins drauhsnos,
þei waihtai ni fraqistnai.
þanuh -- conjunction; <þan> when, as (long as); then, at that time; but, and, however + enclitic
conjunction; <-uh> but, and, now, therefore -- ...
sadai -- adjective; nominative plural masculine of <*sads> satis ed -- lled
waurþun -- strong verb class 3; third person plural preterite of <waírþan> to become, to happen --
they were
galisiþ -- strong verb class 5; second person plural imperative of <galisan> to gather -- gather up
þos -- demonstrative used as article; accusative plural feminine of <sa, so, þata> this, that -- the
aflifnandeins -- weak verb class 4; accusative plural feminine of present participle of <aflifnan> to
remain -- that remain
drauhsnos -- strong noun, feminine; accusative plural of <dráusna> piece -- fragments
þei -- conjunction; <þei> that, so that; as -- that
waihtai -- strong noun, feminine; dative singular of <waíhts> thing -- -thing # literally 'in (no)thing'
ni -- adverb; <ni> not -- no-
fraqistnai -- weak verb class 4; third person singular subjunctive of <fraqistnan> to be lost, to
perish -- be lost
13- þanuh galesun jah gafullidedun ·ib· tainjons gabruko us fimf hlaibam þaim barizeinam,
þatei aflifnoda þaim matjandam.
þanuh -- conjunction; <þan> when, as (long as); then, at that time; but, and, however + enclitic
conjunction; <-uh> but, and, now, therefore -- therefore
galesun -- strong verb class 5; third person plural preterite of <galisan> to gather -- they gathered
(them) together
gafullidedun -- weak verb class 1; third person plural preterite of <gafulljan> to ll -- lled
·ib· -- numeral; <twalif> twelve -- twelve
tainjons -- weak noun, feminine; accusative plural of <táinjō> basket -- baskets
gabruko -- strong noun, feminine; genitive plural of <gabruka> fragment -- with the fragments
us -- preposition; <us> out, out of, from -- of
fimf -- numeral; <fimf> ve -- ve
hlaibam -- strong noun, masculine; dative plural of <hláifs> bread, loaf -- loaves
þaim -- demonstrative used as article; dative plural masculine of <sa, so, þata> this, that -- the
barizeinam -- adjective; dative plural masculine of <barizeins> of barley -- barley
þatei -- relative pronoun; nominative singular neuter of <saei> who, he who, which -- which
aflifnoda -- weak verb class 4; third person singular preterite of <aflifnan> to remain -- remained
(over and above)
-- them
matjandam -- weak verb class 1; dative plural masculine of present participle of <matjan> to eat --
that had eaten
14 - þaruh þai mans gasaiƕandans þoei gatawida taikn Iesus, qeþun þatei sa ist bi sunjai
praufetus sa qimanda in þo manaseþ.
þaruh -- conjunction; <þaruh> therefore, but, and; there; now -- then

þai -- demonstrative used as adjective; nominative plural masculine of <sa, so, þata> this, that --
those
mans -- irregular noun, masculine; nominative plural of <manna> man -- men
gasaiƕandans -- strong verb class 5; nominative plural masculine of present participle of
<gasaíƕan> to see -- when they had seen
þoei -- relative pronoun; accusative singular feminine of <saei> who, he who, which -- that # taking
its gender from táikns following
gatawida -- weak verb class 1; third person singular preterite of <gatáujan> to do, make -- did
taikn -- strong noun, feminine; accusative singular of <táikns> sign, wonder -- the miracle
qeþun -- strong verb class 5; third person plural preterite of <qiþan> to say, speak -- said
þatei -- conjunction; <þatei> that, because, if -- ...
sa -- demonstrative used as pronoun; nominative singular masculine of <sa, so, þata> this, that --
this
after; near -- of
sunjai -- strong noun, feminine; dative singular of <sunja> truth -- a truth
praufetus -- strong noun, masculine; nominative singular of <praúfētus> prophet -- prophet
sa -- demonstrative used as adjective; nominative singular masculine of <sa, so, þata> this, that --
that
qimanda -- strong verb class 4; nominative singular masculine of present participle of <qiman> to
come, arrive -- that should come
þo -- demonstrative used as article; accusative singular feminine of <sa, so, þata> this, that -- the
manaseþ -- strong noun, feminine; accusative singular of <manasēþs> mankind, the world -- world
Lesson Text
6:1 - Afar þata galaiþ Iesus ufar marein þo Galeilaie jah Tibairiade. 2 - jah laistida ina
manageins filu, unte gaseƕun taiknins þozei gatawida bi siukaim. 3 - usiddja þan ana
fairguni Iesus jah jainar gasat miþ siponjam seinaim. 4 - wasuh þan neƕa pasxa, so dulþs
Iudaie. 5 - þaruh ushof augona Iesus jah gaumida þammei manageins filu iddja du imma,
qaþuh du Filippau: ƕaþro bugjam hlaibans, ei matjaina þai? 6 - þatuh þan qaþ fraisands
ina: iþ silba wissa þatei habaida taujan. 7 - andhof imma Filippus: twaim hundam skatte
hlaibos ni ganohai sind þaim, þei nimai ƕarjizuh leitil. 8 - qaþ ains þize siponje is,
Andraias, broþar Paitraus Seimonaus: 9 - ist magula ains her, saei habaiþ ·e· hlaibans
barizeinans jah ·b· fiskans; akei þata ƕa ist du swa managaim? 10 - iþ Iesus qaþ:
waurkeiþ þans mans anakumbjan. wasuh þan hawi manag ana þamma stada. þaruh
anakumbidedun wairos raþjon swaswe fimf þusundjos. 11 - namuh þan þans hlaibans
Iesus jah awiliudonds gadailida þaim anakumbjandam; samaleiko jah þize fiske, swa file
swe wildedun. 12 - þanuh, biþe sadai waurþun, qaþ du siponjam seinaim: galisiþ þos
aflifnandeins drauhsnos, þei waihtai ni fraqistnai. 13 - þanuh galesun jah gafullidedun
·ib· tainjons gabruko us fimf hlaibam þaim barizeinam, þatei aflifnoda þaim matjandam.
14 - þaruh þai mans gasaiƕandans þoei gatawida taikn Iesus, qeþun þatei sa ist bi sunjai
praufetus sa qimanda in þo manaseþ.
Translation
6:1 After these things Jesus went over the sea of Galilee, which is the sea of Tiberias. 2 And a great
multitude followed him, because they saw his miracles which he did on them that were diseased. 3
And Jesus went up into a mountain, and there he sat with his disciples. 4 And the passover, a feast
of the Jews, was nigh. 5 When Jesus then lifted up his eyes, and saw a great company come unto
him, he saith unto Philip, Whence shall we buy bread, that these may eat? 6 And this he said to prove
him: for he himself knew what he would do. 7 Philip answered him, Two hundred pennyworth of
bread is not su cient for them, that every one of them may take a little. 8 One of his disciples,
Andrew, Simon Peter's brother, saith unto him, 9 There is a lad here, which hath ve barley loaves,
and two small shes: but what are they among so many? 10 And Jesus said, Make the men sit
down. Now there was much grass in the place. So the men sat down, in number about ve
thousand. 11 And Jesus took the loaves; and when he had given thanks, he distributed to the
disciples, and the disciples to them that were set down; and likewise of the shes as much as they
would. 12 When they were lled, he said unto his disciples, Gather up the fragments that remain, that
nothing be lost. 13 Therefore they gathered them together, and lled twelve baskets with the
fragments of the ve barley loaves, which remained over and above unto them that had eaten.
14 Then those men, when they had seen the miracle that Jesus did, said, This is of a truth that
prophet that should come into the world.
Grammar
11 Strong Declension
Not all nominal stems end in a vowel. Several end in consonants. The type most common in Gothic, the n-
stems, will be discussed in a subsequent lesson. The consonant stems in the present section are fewer in
number, but generally denote important concepts, the names for which are undoubtedly survivals from a
very archaic stage of the language.
11.1 r-Stems
The r-stem nouns form a small but important fraction of the Gothic vocabulary. All r-stems in Gothic are
inherited directly from Proto-Indo-European. The nouns fadar 'father', brōþar 'brother', daúhtar 'daughter',
and swistar 'sister' illustrate the declension. All Gothic r-stems denote familial relation, with the
grammatical gender following the natural gender.
r-Stem Masculine Feminine

Stem brōþar- fadar- daúhtar- swistar-

N Sg. brōþar daúhtar swistar

A, V brōþar fadar (V) daúhtar swistar
G brōþrs daúhtrs swistrs
D brōþr daúhtr swistr

N Pl. brōþrjus daúhtrjus swistrjus

A brōþruns daúhtruns swistruns
G brōþrē daúhtrē swistrē
D brōþrum daúhtrum swistrum

The word fadar occurs only once in the vocative, the word atta 'father' being used elsewhere. The
declensions of the nouns are the same, being reproduced for the sake of completeness. The nominative
plural ending -jus comes by analogy with sunjus, the r-stems already having accusative and dative
plurals identical to the u-stems (see Section 7.2).
11.2 nd-Stems
The nd-stems derive from an original present participle formation, but were frozen as substantives. These
nouns are generally masculine. The nouns frijōnds 'friend', fijands 'enemy', nasjands 'savior' illustrate the
declension.
nd-Stem Masculine

Stem frijōnd- fijand- nasjand-

N Sg. frijōnds fijands nasjands

A, V frijōnd fijand nasjand
G frijōndis fijandis nasjandis
D frijōnd *fijand nasjand

N Pl. frijōnds fijands nasjands

A frijōnds fijands nasjands
G frijōndē fijandē nasjandē
D frijōndam fijandam nasjandam

Note the identical forms of the nominative singular and nominative and accusative plural. The following
nouns decline similarly: allwaldands 'the Almighty'; bisitands 'neighbor'; dáupjands 'baptizer, baptist';
fráujinōnds 'ruler'; fraweitands 'avenger'; gibands 'giver'; mērjands 'proclaimer'; midumōnds 'mediator';
talzjands 'teacher'.
11.3 Other Consonant Stems
Some noun stems end in consonants different from those above. Their declensions are not prevalent
enough to warrant separate discussion, so they are collected below. The nouns mēnōþs 'month', reiks
'ruler' are masculine; baúrgs 'city', mitaþs 'measure', nahts 'night' are feminine; fōn ' re' is neuter. Their
forms are given below.
Cons. Stems Masculine Feminine Neuter

Stem mēnōþ- reik- baúrg- mitaþ- naht- fōn-

N Sg. mēnōþs reiks baúrgs mitaþs nahts fōn

A, V *mēnōþ *reik baúrg mitaþ naht fōn
G *mēnōþs? reikis baúrgs mitads nahts funins
D mēnōþ reik baúrg mitaþ naht funin

N Pl. *mēnōþs reiks baúrgs mitaþs nahts
A mēnōþs reiks baúrgs mitaþs nahts
G *mēnōþē reikē baúrgē mitaþē nahtē
D mēnōþum reikam baúrgim mitaþim nahtam

Note: the feminine genitive and dative plurals were formed by analogy with i-stems, except the dative
plural nahtam which parallels dagam. Note also the -d- in the genitive singular of mitaþs. The only
neuter noun of this type is fōn, with no plural forms attested.
12 Demonstratives and the De nite Article

In comparison to other Germanic languages, Gothic has a fairly reduced set of demonstratives. The
demonstratives could generally be used as deictic adjectives, or in a substantival role as demonstrative
pronouns.
The most common demonstrative is sa, þata, sō. As adjective, it may point to something relatively close
('this') or relatively distant ('that') from the perspective of the speaker. In a less marked sense, the
demonstrative is used as a simple de nite article 'the'. As pronouns, the same forms may translate as
'this one' or 'that one'. The forms are as follows.
Masculine Neuter Feminine

N Sg. sa þata sō
A þana þata sō
G þis þis þizōs
D þamma þamma þizái

N Pl. þái þō þōs

A þans þō þōs
G þizē þizē þizō
D þáim þáim þáim

The nal a of þata is often elided before ist: þat' ist. A neuter instrumental singular is preserved in
certain phrases and as part of some conjunctions: ni þē haldis 'none the more'; bi-þē 'while'; jaþ-þē
'and if'; du-þē 'therefore'; þē-ei 'that'. A locative or instumental form survives as the relative particle þei
'that'.
The emphatic demonstrative sah, þatuh, þōh 'that, that in particular, that especially' is formed by adding
the enclitic -uh to the forms of sa, þata, sō. This demonstrative expresses not only emphasis, but
contrast as well. The attested forms are as follows.
Masculine Neuter Feminine

N Sg. sah þatuh sōh

A þanuh þatuh
G þizuh þizuh
D þammuh þammuh

N Pl. þáih
A þanzuh þōh
G
D þáimuh

When the simple pronoun ends in -a, the -a is elided before the following -u, except in the nominative
singular masculine (that is, weakly stressed -a is lost). When the simple pronoun ends in a long vowel or
diphthong, the following -u is elided. Final -s changes to -z before -uh. The instrumental occurs in the
adverb bi-þēh 'after that, then afterward'.
There are remnants of a demonstrative built to the stem hi-. These are con ned, for the most part, to a
small number of temporal adverbial phrases: himma daga 'on this day, today'; und hina daga 'to this
day'; fram himma 'henceforth'; und hita (nu) 'till now, hitherto'; also hidrē 'to here'.
The demonstrative jáins 'that, that there, yon' declines as a strong adjective (the nom. and acc. pl. neut. is
always jáinata). The demonstratives silba 'self' and sama 'same' decline as weak adjectives.
13 Adjectives: Strong Declension

Adjectives employ two different sets of endings, strong and weak. These names only re ect a binary
system, equivalent to Type A and Type B, respectively; the adjectives 'strong' and 'weak' have no other
connotations. Whereas a given noun is either strong (inherently) or weak (inherently) but not both, a given
adjective by contrast may employ either strong or weak endings as the context requires. There is thus a
difference in use and connotation between strong adjectival endings and their weak counterparts. The
term 'strong adjective' is generally used as a shorthand for 'adjective with strong endings'; similarly 'weak
adjective' means 'adjective with weak endings'. Using this terminology, the difference in usage is the
following: strong adjectives are inde nite, weak adjectives are de nite.
13.1 a/ja/wa-Stems
The strong adjective endings are a mixture of the endings of strong nouns like dags, waúrd, giba (cf.
Section 3) and of pronouns (cf. Sections 8.2 and 12). The adjective blinds 'blind' illustrates the declension
of a-stem adjectives. Pronominal endings are italicized.
Strong a-Stem Masculine Neuter Feminine

N Sg. blinds blind, blindata blinda

A blindana blind, blindata blinda
G blindis blindis blindáizōs
D blindamma blindamma blindái

N Pl. blindái blinda blindōs

A blindans blinda blindōs
G blindáizē blindáizē blindáizō
D blindáim blindáim blindáim

The ja-stem adjectives divide into two groups: (1) those with short radical syllable, and those whose
stems end in a vowel; (2) those with a long radical syllable. The difference between the two only appears
in the singular forms. The adjective midjis 'middle' illustrates the endings of group (1).
Strong ja-Stem Masculine Neuter Feminine
Group (1)
N Sg. midjis *midi, midjata midja

A midjana *midi, midjata midja
G midjis midjis midjáizōs
D midjamma midjamma midjái

N Pl. midjái midja midjōs

A midjans midja midjōs
G midjáizē midjáizē midjáizō
D midjáim midjáim midjáim

The adjective wilþeis 'wild' serves to illustrate the endings of group (2). The forms which differ from
those of Group (1) are in boldface.
Strong ja-Stem Masculine Neuter Feminine
Group (2)
N Sg. wilþeis wilþi, wilþjata wilþi

A wilþjana wilþi, wilþjata wilþja
G *wilþeis *wilþeis, -jis? wilþáizōs
D wilþjamma wilþjamma wilþjái

N Pl. wilþái wilþja wilþjōs

A wilþjans wilþja wilþjōs
G wilþjáizē wilþjáizē wilþjáizō
D wilþjáim wilþjáim wilþjáim

The wa-stem adjectives are sparsely attested. The adjective triggws 'true' serves to illustrate the
attested forms.
Strong wa-Stem Masculine Neuter Feminine

N Sg. triggws triggw
A *triggwana *triggw
G *triggws triggws, triggwis
D *triggwamma *triggwamma

N Pl. triggwái triggwōs

A *triggwans
G *triggwáizē *triggwáizē *triggwáizē

D *triggwáim *triggwáim triggwáim

Only a handful of wa-stem adjectives remain in the surviving Gothic texts. The adjective lasiws 'weak'
occurs only in the nominative singular maculine. Other wa-stems such as *qius 'alive', *fáus 'little',
*usskáus 'vigilant' do not occur in the nominative singular masculine at all.
13.2 i-Stems
The strong forms of the i-stem adjectives differ from the ja-stem forms only in the nominative singular of
all genders, the accusative singular neuter, and the genitive singular masculine and neuter. The adjective
hráins 'clean' serves to illustrate the paradigm. The forms differing from the ja-stems are in boldface.
Strong i-Stem Masculine Neuter Feminine

N Sg. hráins hráin hráins

A hráinjana hráin hráinja
G hráinis hráinis *hráinjáizōs
D hráinjamma hráinjamma hráinjái

N Pl. hráinjái hráinja hráinjōs

A hráinjans hráinja hráinjōs
G hráinjáizē hráinjáizē hráinjáizō
D hráinjáim hráinjáim hráinjáim

The following adjectives decline similarly: analáugns 'hidden'; anasiuns 'visible'; andanēms 'pleasant';
áuþs 'desert'; brūks 'useful'; gafáurs 'well-behaved'; gamáins 'common'; sēls 'kind'; skáuns 'beautiful';
skeirs 'clear'; suts 'sweet'.
13.3 u-Stems
The u-stem adjectives also employ for the most part the endings of the ja-stem declension. Only the
nominative singular of all genders and the accusative singular neuter show different forms, following the
declensions of sunus 'son', feminine handus 'hand', and neuter faíhu 'cattle' (see Section 7.2). Though
the genitive singular likely followed the form of u-stem nouns, no instances survive; likewise no dative
singular forms are attested, nor nominative and accusative plural neuter. The adjective hardus 'hard'
serves to illustrate the paradigm. Forms differing from the ja-stems are boldface.
Strong u-Stem Masculine Neuter Feminine

N Sg. hardus hardu, hardjata hardus

A hardjana hardu, hardjata hardja
G
D

N Pl. hardjái hardjōs

A hardjans hardjōs
G hardjáizē hardjáizē hardjáizō
D hardjáim hardjáim hardjáim

The following adjectives decline similarly: aggwus 'narrow'; aglus 'di cult'; hnasqus 'soft'; kaúrus
'heavy'; manwus 'ready'; qaírrus 'gentle'; seiþus 'late'; tulgus 'steadfast'; twalibwintrus 'twelve years old';
þaúrsus 'withered'; þlaqus 'soft'.
13.4 Possessive Adjectives
The possessive adjectives decline exclusively as strong adjectives (there are no weak forms of
possessives). These forms are built from the genitive forms of the respective pronouns, with the addition
of adjectival endings, e.g. ik 'I', with G sg. meina, gives adjectival *meina-s > meins 'my' (N. sg. masc.).
The forms of meins 'my, mine' serve to illustrate the paradigm.
Possessive Masculine Neuter Feminine

N Sg. meins mein, meinata meina

A meinana mein, meinata meina
G meinis meinis meináizōs
D meinamma meinamma meinái

N Pl. meinái meina meinōs

A meinans meina meinōs
G meináizē meináizē meináizō
D meináim meináim meináim

The second person builds a possessive adjective þeins, and the re exive pronoun has possessive *seins
(as it points back to the subject of the clause, only oblique forms occur). The dual and plural forms of the
personal pronouns also build possessives:
Person Stem Masculine Neuter Feminine

1 Sg. meina- meins mein, meinata meina

2 þeina- þeins þein, þeinata þeina
re . (Acc.) seina- seinana sein, seinata seina

1 Du. *ugkara- ugkar ugkar ugkara

2 igqara- igqar igqar igqara
-

1 Pl. unsara- unsar unsar unsara

2 izwara- izwar izwar izwara
-

The re exive possessive adjective *seins serves as a re exive for any number, just like the pronoun itself.
The dual possessive *unqar 'of us two' does not occur. Note that nal -s (-z) drops after a short vowel
followed by consonantal -r (cf. Section 6.2.2), hence the nominative forms of the dual and plural
possessives lack nal -s. The neuter nominative and accusative singular of the dual and plural
possessives do not show the ending -ata. In all other forms, *ugkara- 'of us two', igqara- 'of you two',
unsara- 'of us (all), our, ours' and izwara- 'of you (all), your, yours' follow the paradigm of meins.
The third person pronouns have no corresponding possessive adjectives, using simply the genitive forms
of the personal pronoun (singular is, is, izōs; plural izē, *izē, izō) or of the demonstrative pronoun
(singular þis, þis, þizōs; plural þizē, þizē, þizō).
14 Past Participle
Like Modern English, Gothic has a past participle whose formation depends on whether the verb is strong
or weak. Unlike, e.g., classical Greek or Sanskrit, which have morphologically distinct past active and past
passive participles, Gothic makes no morphological distinction between active and passive participles.
One and the same formation generally has different interpretations based on the transitivity of the root:
the past participle of transitive verbs is construed as passive (e.g. 'having been eaten'), while the past
participle of intransitive verbs is construed as active (e.g. 'having gone').
14.1 Formation
The formation of past participles in Gothic parallels that of Modern English, as well as the other Germanic
languages. There are two types of past participle, re ecting the distinction between strong and weak
verbs. Note there is no correlation between the terms 'strong' and 'weak' as applied to verbs, and the same
terms as applied to adjective endings. A strong verb forms a past participle, which may be declined as
either a strong or a weak adjective; likewise a weak verb's past participle may take either weak or strong
adjectival endings. The weak adjective endings are treated in Section 17.1.
Strong verbs form the past participle by adding the su x -an to the verbal stem, which in general
displays ablaut. Compare Modern English eat-en. Strong a-stem or weak adjective endings are then added
to the -an su x. Because of the relative unpredictability of ablaut, the past participle is typically given as
one of the principal parts. For example, the strong class IVa verb qiman 'come' has principal parts qiman,
qam, qēmun, qumans. The past participle stem is thus quman-. The nominative singular forms for
strong and weak declension of quman- are as follows.
Strong Vb. PPl. Masculine Neuter Feminine

Strong qumans quman, qumanata qumana

Weak qumana qumanō qumanō

Weak verbs form the past participle by means of a dental su x -þ, as one nds in e.g. Modern English
ask-ed. This is added to the stem, sometimes with an intervening vowel, and adjective endings are added
to this. The intervening vowel depends on weak verb class. Consider the following exemplars.
Class Past Ptcpl. (Str. N Sg. Masc.) In nitive Meaning

i nas-i-þs nas-jan 'save'
ii salb-ō-þs salb-ōn 'anoint'
iii hab-ái-þs hab-an 'have'
iv full-nan 'become full'

No verbs of the weak class iv leave any past participle forms in the records. Though it is often remarked
in grammars that this class contains only intransitive verbs, this does not explain a priori the absence of
such participles, as the example qumans shows above (see also þaúrsjan 'thirst' below). A small number
of verbs of the weak class i add the dental su x with no intervening vowel. The most common are listed
below.
In nitive Meaning Preterite (1/3 Sg.) Past Ptcpl. (Str. N Sg. Masc.)

briggan 'bring' brāhta *brāhts

brūkjan 'use' brūhta *brūhts
bugjan 'buy' baúhta baúhts
þagkjan 'think' þāhta þāhts
þugkjan 'seem' þūhta þūhts
waúrkjan 'work' waúrhta waúrhts

As with the participles of strong verbs, those of weak verbs decline as either strong a-stem or weak
adjectives as the context demands. The nominative singular forms for strong and weak declension of
quman- are as follows.
Weak Vb. PPl. Masculine Neuter Feminine

Strong nasiþs nasiþ, nasidata nasida

Weak nasida nasidō nasidō

Note the the change of -þ- to -d- between vowels.
14.2 Past Participle Usage

As mentioned above, the past participle of transitive verbs is construed as passive in sense; the past
participle of intransitive verbs is construed as active. For example, qiman 'to come' (intransitive) vs.
qumans 'come' (active -- cf. Shakespearean 'I am come' = 'I have arrived'), but baíran 'to bear' (transitive)
vs. baúrans 'borne' (passive); likewise nasjan 'to save' (transitive) vs. nasiþs 'saved' (passive), but
þaúrsjan 'thirst' (intransitive) vs. af-þaúrsiþs '(having) thirsted, thirsty' (active). Even this distinction,
though, is not absolute. For example, the transitive verb drigkan 'to drink' has a past participle with active
sense, drunkans 'having drunk', hence simply 'drunk': drunkans ist in Col. 11.21 translates Greek
methúei 'is intoxicated'.
The past participle frequently appears in the dative in an absolute contruction, much as Old Church
Slavonic dative, Latin ablative, Greek genitive, and Sanskrit locative. Such constructions convey an event
grammatically separate (hence 'absolute') from the main clause. For example, jah usleiþandin Iēsua in
skipa, gaqēmun sik manageins filu du imma 'and Jesus having passed over in the ship, there came
together to him a great multitude'; dalaþ þan atgaggandin imma af faírgunja, láistidēdun afar imma
iumjōns managōs 'then having come down from the mountain, great multitudes followed after him'. The
nominative is found on rare occasions in such absolute constructions: waúrþans dags gatils '(and) a
tting day being come'.
The past participle is sometimes used with the suppletive verb wisan 'to be' or with waírþan 'to become'
to form a periphrastic passive. For example, miþþanei wrohiþs was 'when he was accused' (Matthew
27.12); afar þatei atgibans warþ Iohannes 'after that John was put...' (Mark 1.14); skal sunus mans
uskusans waírþan 'the son of man shall be rejected' (Mark 8.31).
15 Prepositions
Each Gothic preposition governs objects in one or more of the oblique cases. The case governed is a
property of the preposition: each preposition governs only a speci c case or cases. If a preposition
governs more than one case, its meaning may or may not change depending on the case employed.
Generally the genitive is used after a preposition to denote source, cause, or instrument. The dative
commonly denotes position in space or time without motion, or it may denote source, cause, or
instrument. The accusative is used after a preposition to denote motion to or through space or time, or to
denote a point of time within a certain period, opposition, or correspondence. A few adverbs have
prepositional force when combined with a noun in the genitive. The following chart lists the primary
Gothic prepositions, together with the cases they govern and the associated meanings.
Preposition Case Meaning

af dat. of, from

afar acc. after, according to
dat. after, according to

ana acc. on, upon
dat. on, upon

and acc. along, through, over

andwaírþis gen. opposite

alja dat. except

and acc. along, throughout, towards

at acc. at, by, to
dat. at, by, to

bi acc. by, about, around, against
dat. by, about, around, against

du dat. to

faírra gen. far from

faúr acc. for, before

faúra dat. before

fram dat. from

hindana gen. from beyond

hindar acc. behind, beyond, among
dat. behind, beyond, among

in acc. in, into, towards
dat. in, into, among
gen. on, on account of

innana gen. from within

inuh acc. without

miþ dat. with

nēƕa dat. nigh to, near

þaírh acc. through, by

uf acc. under
dat. under

ufar acc. over, above
dat. over, above

ufarō dat. over
gen. over

und acc. until, up to
dat. for

undar acc. under

undarō dat. under

us dat. out, out of

utana gen. from outside, up to

utaþrō gen. from outside

wiþra acc. against
Gothic Online
Lesson 4
The Earliest Raids of the Goths
The Goths began their famous foray into the history books in the third century AD, when they launched the
rst attack of what would become in the eyes of contemporaries a barbarian ravaging and pillaging
machine. Their rst entry into the literary records comes with their attacks on the Roman empire. At the
time, the most exposed province was Transylvanian Dacia; but this region was protected by the
Carpathian mountains, hence attacks generally came from south of the range across the lower reaches of
the Danube or through a stretch of land connecting the so-called Dacian Salient to the Roman-occupied
regions of the Balkans. The rst known attack was the sack of Histria at the mouth of the Danube in 238.
This was followed some 10 years later by other land attacks: Marcianople, a city inland from the
westernmost extent of the Black Sea, was sacked in 249 by a Gothic group led by Argaith and Guntheric;
in 250 Cniva crossed the Danube at Oescus and captured Philippopolis, wintered his army, and then in
251 defeated Roman forces and killed the emperor Decius at Abrittus.
The Goths then changed tactics and led sea-borne attacks via the Black Sea, the rst series coming
sometime around 255-257. The rst attack fell on Pityus, on the eastern coast of the Black Sea, but was
unsuccessful. In the next attack a year later, the 'Boranoi' -- a group possibly including the Goths -- ravaged
Pityus, Trapezus, and a large part of the Pontus, the region of Asia Minor bordering the Black Sea in the
southeasternmost reaches. A year later the Goths explicitly attacked the cities Apamea, Chalcedon,
Nicaea, Nicomedia, Prusa, as well as the surrounding areas of Bithynia and Propontis, lying near the
southwesternmost reaches of the Black Sea.
The next attacks came another 10 years later. In 268 the Goths and other tribes formed a large eet which
headed across the Black Sea to the south, unsuccessfully attacking Tomi and Marcianople, and
subsequently (also unsuccessfully) Cyzicus and Byzantium. They pushed through the Dardanelles into the
Aegean and dispersed in three forces: (1) composed of Heruli attacking the northern Balkans near
Thessalonica -- subsequently defeated by Emperor Gallienus in 268; (2) composed of Goths and Heruli,
attacking Attica -- after pushing north over land they were defeated by Claudius at Naissus in 270; (3)
probably led by the Gothic chieftains Respa, Thuruar, and Veduc, and attacking Asia Minor, then Rhodes
and Cyprus, then Side and Ilium and Ephesus, destroying the temple of Diana. This third group was
pushed back to the Black Sea in 269. After this foray into the Mediterranean, there were no other attacks
through the Dardanelles.
The Goths returned to land battles in an attack across the Danube in 270 against Anchialus and Nicopolis.
This was followed by a Roman attack across Danube in 271, defeating the Gothic king Cannabaudes. The
Goths attacked the Pontus again in 276-277, pushing farther inland to Galatia and Cilicia.
The impact of these waves of Gothic attacks is clearly felt in the Canonical Letter of Gregory
Thaumaturgus, bishop of Neocaesarea (modern Niksar) in the Pontus region of Asia Minor. His
episcopate fell during the emperor Decius's persecution of Christians, which started c. 250 AD. He may
have lived until the reign of Aurelian (270-275 AD). The letter is a response to a neighboring bishop's
questions concerning the conduct of Roman soldiers during and after the most recent period of Gothic
raids in the Pontus (translated in Heather and Matthews, 1991):
Canon Others delude themselves by keeping the property of others which they have found, in place of their
5 own which they have lost, in order that, since the Boranoi and Goths worked on them deeds of war, so
they may become Boranoi and Goths to others. I have therefore sent my brother... [that he may] advise
you whose accusations you should accept....
Canon Concerning those who forcibly detain captives (who have escaped) from barbarians.... Send men out
6 into the countryside, lest divine thunderbolts descend upon those who perpetrate such wickedness!
Canon ... As for those who have been enrolled among the barbarians and followed after them as prisoners,
7 forgetting that they were men of Pontus, and Christians, and have become so thoroughly barbarised as
even to put to death men of their own race by the gibbet or noose, and to point out roads and houses to
the barbarians, who were ignorant of them; you must debar them even from the ranks of Hearers, until a
common decision is reached about them by the assembly of saints, with the guidance of the Holy
Spirit.
Canon ... As for those who brought themselves to attack the houses of others, if they are convicted after
8 accusation, let them not be t even to be Hearers. If however they confess their own guilt and make
restitution, they are to prostrate themselves among the ranks of the penitent.
It thus seems clear that the raiding parties, though in origin homogeneous groups of Goths or other
individual tribes, were soon augmented by other enterprizing -- or coerced -- individuals within the lands
they attacked. The attacks themselves thus only left a transitory material calamity. More long-term
problems were felt when the raids had ceased, and there arose the issues of readmitting offenders and
presumed offenders into the societies to which they formerly belonged.

The following passage is Luke 4.1-13, in which Jesus is tempted by Satan. In the rst verse, we nd the
collocation gawandida sik 'returned', encountered in several places in other readings. This phrase is
more literally 'brought himself back'. Though Gothic has a functioning morphological mediopassive which
might, on Indo-European historical grounds, serve to connote exactly the meaning reached here, Gothic is
already very close to other Germanic languages in the frequent use of such periphrastic re exive
collocations to render transitive verbs intransitive.
In Luke 4.3 we nd a nominative form sunáus instead of the proper nominative sunus 'son'; a similar form
diabuláus replaces the proper nominative diabulus in Luke 4.5. It is likely that, shortly after the time of
Wul la (if not before), the diphthong áu was monophthongized and subsequently indistinguishable from
u, leading to occasional scribal confusion. Similar phonetically derived scribal confusion occurs in Luke
4.4: we nd the forms hláib and libáid, which do not show the expected devoicing of nal -b and -d to -f
and -þ, respectively.
Note also the construction in Luke 4.3: qiþ þamma stáina ei waírþái hláibs 'command this stone that it
be made bread'. This is an example of the particle ei used to introduce an indirect command. The particle
ei was originally a general relative marker, setting off an entire phrase as dependent on surrounding
material. Only later did this particle become attached to demonstrative pronouns to form relative
pronouns, such as saei. Some of these subsequently became subordinate conjunctions, e.g. þatei. Gothic
may also use prepositional constructions for subordinate clauses, such as Luke 4.10: du gafastan '(in
order) to support' shows the frequent use in Gothic of the preposition du with the in nitive in purpose
constructions.
The phrase in Luke 4.7, in andwaírþja meinamma 'in my presence', translates the Greek enōpion emou,
which is not explicit in the King James Version. The English phrase 'Get thee behind me, Satan' in Luke 4.8
does not appear in the Gothic, an indication that the Gothic translation was made from a different
manuscript than the King James Version.
4:1- Iþ Iesus, ahmins weihis fulls, gawandida sik fram Iaurdanau jah tauhans was in ahmin in
auþidai

ahmins -- weak noun, masculine; genitive singular of <ahmins> spirit, the Spirit -- Ghost
weihis -- adjective; genitive singular masculine of <weihs> holy -- of the Holy
fulls -- adjective; nominative singular masculine of <fulls> full -- (being) full
gawandida -- weak verb class 1; third person singular preterite of <gawandjan> to bring back,
return -- returned
fram -- preposition; <fram> from, by, since, on account of -- from
Iaurdanau -- strong proper noun, masculine; dative singular of <*Iaúrdanus> Jordan -- Jordan
tauhans -- strong verb class 2; nominative singular masculine of preterite participle of <tiuhan> to
lead, to guide -- led
in -- preposition; <in> into, towards; on account of; in, among, by -- by
ahmin -- weak noun, masculine; dative singular of <ahmins> spirit, the Spirit -- the Spirit
auþidai -- strong noun, feminine; dative singular of <áuþida> desert, wasteland -- the wilderness
2- dage fidwor tiguns, fraisans fram diabulau. jah ni matida waiht in dagam jainaim, jah at
ustauhanaim þaim dagam, biþe gredags warþ.
dage -- strong noun, masculine; genitive plural of <dags> day -- days

fidwor tiguns -- numeral; accusative plural of <fidwōr tigjus> forty -- forty
fraisans -- strong verb class 7; nominative singular masculine of preterite participle of <fráisan> to
tempt -- (being) tempted
fram -- preposition; <fram> from, by, since, on account of -- of
diabulau -- strong noun, masculine; dative singular of <diabaúlus> devil -- the devil
matida -- weak verb class 1; third person singular preterite of <matjan> to eat -- he did eat
waiht -- strong noun, feminine; accusative singular of <waíhts> thing -- -thing
dagam -- strong noun, masculine; dative plural of <dags> day -- days
jainaim -- demonstrative pronoun used as adjective; dative plural masculine of <jáins> that -- those
ustauhanaim -- strong verb class 2; dative plural masculine of preterite participle of <ustiuhan> to
lead out; to complete -- were ended
-- they
dagam -- strong noun, masculine; dative plural of <dags> day -- ...
biþe -- adverb; <biþē> while, when, after that, as soon as; then, thereupon -- afterwards
gredags -- adjective; nominative singular masculine of <grēdags> hungry -- hungered
3 - jah qaþ du imma diabulus: jabai sunaus sijais gudis, qiþ þamma staina ei wairþai hlaibs.

diabulus -- strong noun, masculine; nominative singular of <diabaúlus> devil -- the devil
jabai -- conjunction; <jabái> if, even if, although -- if
sunaus -- strong noun, masculine; nominative singular of <sunus> son -- the Son # scribal error for
regular nominative sunus
sijais -- strong verb class 5; athematic second person singular present subjunctive of <wisan> to
be -- thou be
gudis -- strong noun, masculine; genitive singular of <guþ> God -- of God
qiþ -- strong verb class 5; second person singular imperative of <qiþan> to say, speak -- command
þamma -- demonstrative used as adjective; dative singular masculine of <sa, so, þata> this, that --
to this
staina -- strong noun, masculine; dative singular of <stáins> stone -- stone
wairþai -- strong verb class 3; third person singular subjunctive of <waírþan> to become, to
happen -- it be made
hlaibs -- strong noun, masculine; nominative singular of <hláifs> bread, loaf -- bread
4 - jah andhof Iesus wiþra ina qiþands: gamelid ist þatei ni bi hlaib ainana libaid manna, ak bi
all waurde gudis.

andhof -- strong verb class 6; third person singular preterite of <andhafjan> to answer -- answered
wiþra -- preposition; <wiþra> against, over against; by, near; to, in reply to, in return for; on account
of, for -- ...
qiþands -- strong verb class 5; nominative singular masculine of present participle of <qiþan> to
say, speak -- saying
gamelid -- weak verb class 1; nominative singular neuter of preterite participle of <gamēljan> to
write, enroll -- written
ist -- strong verb class 5; athematic third person singular of <wisan> to be -- it is
after; near -- by
hlaib -- strong noun, masculine; accusative singular of <hláifs> bread, loaf -- bread # nal -b for
nal -f
ainana -- adjective; accusative singular masculine of <áins> alone, only -- alone
libaid -- weak verb class 3; third person singular of <liban> to live -- shall... live # nal -d for nal -þ
manna -- irregular noun, masculine; nominative singular of <manna> man -- man
ak -- conjunction; <ak> but, however -- but
after; near -- by
all -- adjective used as substantive; dative singular neuter of <alls> all, every -- every
waurde -- strong noun, neuter; genitive plural of <waúrd> word -- word # literally 'by every (one) of
the words'
5 - jah ustiuhands ina diabulaus ana fairguni hauhata, ataugida imma allans þiudinassuns þis
midjungardis in stika melis.

ustiuhands -- strong verb class 2; nominative singular masculine of present participle of
<ustiuhan> to lead out; to complete -- taking... up
diabulaus -- strong noun, masculine; nominative singular of <diabaúlus> devil -- the devil # scribal
error for regular nominative diabulus or diabaúlus
fairguni -- strong noun, neuter; accusative singular of <faírguni> mountain -- a... mountain
hauhata -- adjective; accusative singular neuter of <hauhs> high -- high
ataugida -- weak verb class 1; third person singular preterite of <atáugjan> to show, to appear --
shewed
imma -- personal pronoun; dative singular masculine of <is> he, she, it -- unto him
allans -- adjective; accusative plural masculine of <alls> all, every -- all
þiudinassuns -- strong noun, masculine; accusative plural of <þiudinassus> kingdom -- the
kingdoms
þis -- demonstrative used as article; genitive singular masculine of <sa, so, þata> this, that -- of the
midjungardis -- strong noun, masculine; genitive singular of <midjungards> earth, world -- world
stika -- strong noun, masculine; dative singular of <stiks> point, moment -- a moment
melis -- strong noun, neuter; genitive singular of <mēl> time, season -- of time
6 - jah qaþ du imma sa diabulus: þus giba þata waldufni þize allata jah wulþu ize, unte mis
atgiban ist, jah þisƕammeh þei wiljau, giba þata.

diabulus -- strong noun, masculine; nominative singular of <diabaúlus> devil -- devil
þus -- personal pronoun; dative singular of <þu> thou, you -- thee
giba -- strong verb class 5; rst person singular of <giban> to give, yield -- will I give
þata -- demonstrative used as adjective; accusative singular neuter of <sa, so, þata> this, that --
this
waldufni -- strong noun, neuter; accusative singular of <waldufni> authority -- power
þize -- demonstrative; genitive plural neuter of <sa, so, þata> this, that -- ...
allata -- adjective; accusative singular neuter of <alls> all, every -- all
wulþu -- strong noun, masculine; accusative singular of <wulþus> splendor, glory -- the glory
ize -- personal pronoun; genitive plural masculine of <is> he, she, it -- of them
mis -- personal pronoun; dative singular of <ik> I -- unto me
atgiban -- strong verb class 5; nominative singular neuter of preterite participle of <atgiban> to
give, deliver -- delivered
ist -- strong verb class 5; athematic third person singular of <wisan> to be -- that is
þisƕammeh -- inde nite pronoun; dative singular masculine of <þisƕazuh> whoever, whosoever
-- to whomsoever
þei -- conjunction; <þei> that, so that; as -- ...
wiljau -- irregular verb; rst person singular of <wiljan> to will, wish -- I will
giba -- strong verb class 5; rst person singular of <giban> to give, yield -- I give
þata -- demonstrative used as pronoun; accusative singular neuter of <sa, so, þata> this, that -- it
7 - þu nu jabai inweitis mik in andwairþja meinamma, wairþiþ þein all.
þu -- personal pronoun; vocative singular of <þu> thou, you -- thou

nu -- adverb; <nu> now, therefore -- therefore
inweitis -- strong verb class 1; second person singular of <inweitan> to worship -- wilt worship
mik -- personal pronoun; accusative singular of <ik> I -- me
in -- preposition; <in> into, towards; on account of; in, among, by -- (in)
andwairþja -- strong noun, neuter; dative singular of <andwaírþi> face, presence -- (presence)
meinamma -- possessive adjective; dative singular neuter of <meins> my, mine -- (my)
wairþiþ -- strong verb class 3; third person singular of <waírþan> to become, to happen -- shall be
þein -- possessive adjective; nominative singular neuter of <þeins> thy, thine, your, yours -- thine
all -- adjective used as substantive; nominative singular neuter of <all> all, every -- all
8 - jah andhafjands imma Iesus qaþ: gamelid ist, fraujan guþ þeinana inweitais jah imma
ainamma fullafahjais.

andhafjands -- strong verb class 6; nominative singular masculine of present participle of
<andhafjan> to answer -- answered (and)
ist -- strong verb class 5; athematic third person singular of <wisan> to be -- (for) it is
fraujan -- weak noun, masculine; accusative singular of <fráuja> lord, master -- the Lord
þeinana -- possessive adjective; accusative singular masculine of <þeins> thy, thine, your, yours --
thy
inweitais -- strong verb class 1; second person singular present subjunctive of <inweitan> to
worship -- thou shalt worship
ainamma -- adjective; dative singular masculine of <áins> alone, only -- only
fullafahjais -- weak verb class 1; second person singular present subjunctive of <fullafahjan> to
satisfy, to serve -- shalt thou serve
9 - þaþroh gatauh ina in Iairusalem jah gasatida ina ana giblin alhs jah qaþ du imma: jabai
sunus sijais gudis, wairp þuk þaþro dalaþ;
þaþroh -- adverb; <þaþrōh> afterwards, thence -- afterwards

gatauh -- strong verb class 2; third person singular preterite of <gatiuhan> to lead, to bring -- he
brought
Iairusalem -- indeclinable noun; feminine of <Iaírusalēm> Jerusalem -- Jerusalem
gasatida -- weak verb class 1; third person singular preterite of <gasatjan> to set, to place -- set
giblin -- weak noun, masculine; dative singular of <gibla> gable, pinnacle -- a pinnacle
alhs -- strong noun, feminine; genitive singular of <alhs> temple -- of the temple
sunus -- strong noun, masculine; nominative singular of <sunus> son -- the Son
sijais -- strong verb class 5; athematic second person singular present subjunctive of <wisan> to
be -- thou be
wairp -- strong verb class 3; second person singular imperative of <waírpan> to throw, to cast --
cast
þuk -- personal pronoun; accusative singular of <þu> thou, you -- thyself
þaþro -- adverb; <þaþrō> thence -- from hence
dalaþ -- adverb; <dalaþ> down -- down
10 - gamelid ist auk þatei aggilum seinaim anabiudiþ bi þuk du gafastan þuk,
auk -- conjunction; <áuk> for, because; but, also -- for
aggilum -- strong noun, masculine; dative plural of <aggilus> angel, messenger -- angels
anabiudiþ -- strong verb class 2; third person singular of <anabiudan> to command, order -- he
shall give... charge
after; near -- over
du -- preposition; <du> to, towards; against; in -- to
gafastan -- weak verb class 3; in nitive of <gafastan> to keep, hold fast -- keep
11 - jah þatei ana handum þuk ufhaband, ei ƕan ni gastagqjais bi staina fotu þeinana.

handum -- strong noun, feminine; dative plural of <handus> hand -- (their) hands
ufhaband -- weak verb class 3; third person plural of <ufhaban> to hold up, to bear up -- they shall
bear... up
ei -- conjunction; <ei> that, so that; whether; (relative particle) -- ...
ƕan -- adverb; <ƕan> at any time -- at any time
ni -- adverb; <ni> not -- lest
gastagqjais -- weak verb class 1; second person singular present subjunctive of <gastangqjan> to
dash against -- thou dash
after; near -- against
staina -- strong noun, masculine; dative singular of <stáins> stone -- a stone
fotu -- strong noun, masculine; accusative singular of <fōtus> foot -- foot
thy
12 - jah andhafjands qaþ imma Iesus þatei qiþan ist: ni fraisais fraujan guþ þeinana.

<andhafjan> to answer -- answering
qiþan -- strong verb class 5; nominative singular neuter of preterite participle of <qiþan> to say,
speak -- said
fraisais -- strong verb class 7; second person singular present subjunctive of <fráisan> to tempt --
thou shalt... tempt
fraujan -- weak noun, masculine; accusative singular of <fráuja> lord, master -- the Lord
thy
13 - jah ustiuhands all fraistobnjo diabulus, afstoþ fairra imma und mel.

ustiuhands -- strong verb class 2; nominative singular masculine of present participle of
<ustiuhan> to lead out; to complete -- when... had ended
all -- adjective used as substantive; accusative singular neuter of <alls> all, every -- all
fraistobnjo -- strong noun, feminine; genitive plural of <fráistubni> temptation -- the temptation #
literally 'all of the temptations'
diabulus -- strong noun, masculine; nominative singular of <diabaúlus> devil -- the devil
afstoþ -- strong verb class 6; third person singular preterite of <afstandan> to stand off, to depart
-- he departed
fairra -- preposition; <faírra> far from -- from
und -- preposition; <und> up to, until, for -- for
mel -- strong noun, neuter; accusative singular of <mēl> time, season -- a season
Lesson Text
4:1 - Iþ Iesus, ahmins weihis fulls, gawandida sik fram Iaurdanau jah tauhans was in
ahmin in auþidai 2 - dage fidwor tiguns, fraisans fram diabulau. jah ni matida waiht in
dagam jainaim, jah at ustauhanaim þaim dagam, biþe gredags warþ. 3 - jah qaþ du imma
diabulus: jabai sunaus sijais gudis, qiþ þamma staina ei wairþai hlaibs. 4 - jah andhof
Iesus wiþra ina qiþands: gamelid ist þatei ni bi hlaib ainana libaid manna, ak bi all waurde
gudis. 5 - jah ustiuhands ina diabulaus ana fairguni hauhata, ataugida imma allans
þiudinassuns þis midjungardis in stika melis. 6 - jah qaþ du imma sa diabulus: þus giba
þata waldufni þize allata jah wulþu ize, unte mis atgiban ist, jah þisƕammeh þei wiljau,
giba þata. 7 - þu nu jabai inweitis mik in andwairþja meinamma, wairþiþ þein all. 8 - jah
andhafjands imma Iesus qaþ: gamelid ist, fraujan guþ þeinana inweitais jah imma
ainamma fullafahjais. 9 - þaþroh gatauh ina in Iairusalem jah gasatida ina ana giblin alhs
jah qaþ du imma: jabai sunus sijais gudis, wairp þuk þaþro dalaþ; 10 - gamelid ist auk
þatei aggilum seinaim anabiudiþ bi þuk du gafastan þuk, 11 - jah þatei ana handum þuk
ufhaband, ei ƕan ni gastagqjais bi staina fotu þeinana. 12 - jah andhafjands qaþ imma
Iesus þatei qiþan ist: ni fraisais fraujan guþ þeinana. 13 - jah ustiuhands all fraistobnjo
diabulus, afstoþ fairra imma und mel.
Translation
4:1 And Jesus being full of the Holy Ghost returned from Jordan, and was led by the Spirit into the
wilderness, 2 Being forty days tempted of the devil. And in those days he did eat nothing: and when
they were ended, he afterward hungered. 3 And the devil said unto him, If thou be the Son of God,
command this stone that it be made bread. 4 And Jesus answered him, saying, It is written, That
man shall not live by bread alone, but by every word of God.
5 And the devil, taking him up into an high mountain, shewed unto him all the kingdoms of the world
in a moment of time. 6 And the devil said unto him, All this power will I give thee, and the glory of
them: for that is delivered unto me; and to whomsoever I will I give it. 7 If thou therefore wilt worship
me, all shall be thine. 8 And Jesus answered and said unto him, Get thee behind me, Satan: for it is
written, Thou shalt worship the Lord thy God, and him only shalt thou serve.
9 And he brought him to Jerusalem, and set him on a pinnacle of the temple, and said unto him, If
thou be the Son of God, cast thyself down from hence: 10 For it is written, He shall give his angels
charge over thee, to keep thee: 11 And in their hands they shall bear thee up, lest at any time thou
dash thy foot against a stone. 12 And Jesus answering said unto him, It is said, Thou shalt not tempt
the Lord thy God.
13 And when the devil had ended all the temptation, he departed from him for a season.
Grammar
16 Weak Nominal Declension
The weak declension of nouns is nothing more than n-stem nominal formation. In principle it is no
different from the formation of r-stems or nd-stems: the a x -Vn- intercedes between nominal root and
endings, where V is some vowel. Just as brōþar 'brother' is inherently an r-stem noun (employing no
other formations), likewise weak nouns are inherently weak, i.e. only n-stem. While adjectives may employ
strong or weak declension (see Sections 13 and 17) according to contextual demands, a given noun by
contrast employs only one declension at all times: a weak noun always declines weak, a strong noun
always strong.
16.1 an/jan/wan-Stems
The an/jan/wan-stem nouns are generally masculine or neuter. Nouns with the j- or w-augment take the
same endings as those without. The nouns atta 'father', arbja 'heir', and gawaúrstwa 'fellow-worker' --
respectively an-, jan-, and wan-stems -- serve to illustrate the masculine forms. The nouns haírtō 'heart',
áugō 'eye', and sigljō 'seal' -- respectively an-, an-, and jan-stems -- serve to illustrate the neuter forms.
Weak an- Masculine Neuter

Stem

Stem attan- arbjan- gawaúrstwan- haírtan- áugan- sigljan-

N Sg. atta arbja gawaúrstwa haírtō áugō sigljō

A attan arbjan gawaúrstwan haírtō áugō sigljō
G attins arbjins gawaúrstwins haírtins áugins *sigljins
D attin arbjin gawaúrstwin haírtin áugin *sigljin

N Pl. attans arbjans gawaúrstwans haírtōna áugōna *sigljōna

A attans arbjans gawaúrstwans haírtōna áugōna *sigljōna
G attanē arbjanē gawaúrstwanē haírtanē áuganē *sigljanē
D attam arbjam gawaúrstwam haírtam áugam *sigljam

Note that the dative plural is built by analogy to a-stem nouns, without the intervening Vn-a x. The nouns
aba (masc.) 'man, husband'; aúhsa (masc.) 'ox'; namō (neut.) 'name'; and watō (neut.) 'water' have
different forms in the plural. These are boldfaced in the chart below. The masculine noun manna 'man'
generalized the zero-grade of the n-stem formation (-n- rather than -Vn-), yielding a peculiar declension.
Weak an-Stem Masculine Neuter

Stem ab(a)n- aúhs(a)n- man(a)n- nam(a)n- wat(a)n-

N Sg. aba aúhsa manna namō watō

A aban aúhsan mannan namō watō
G abins aúhsins mans namins watins
D abin aúhsin mann namin watin

N Pl. abans aúhsans mans, mannans namna watōna

A abans aúhsans mans, mannans namna watōna
G abnē aúhsnē mannē namnē watanē
D abnam aúhsam mannam namnam watnam

For the zero-grade forms of manna, compare Latin declension: nom. sg. carō ' esh' with acc. carnem, as
opposed to nom. sg. homō 'man' with acc. hominem.
16.2 ōn/jōn/wōn-Stems
The ōn/jōn/wōn-stem nouns are generally feminine. Nouns with the j- or w-augment take the same
endings as those without. The nouns tuggō 'tongue', arbjō 'heiress', and ūhtwō 'early morning' --
respectively ōn-, jōn-, and wōn-stems -- serve to illustrate the forms.
Weak ōn-Stem Feminine

Stem tuggōn- arbjōn- ūhtwōn-

N Sg. tuggō arbjō ūhtwō

A tuggōn arbjōn ūhtwōn
G tuggōns arbjōns ūhtwōns
D tuggōn arbjōn ūhtwōn

N Pl. tuggōns arbjōns ūhtwōns

A tuggōns arbjōns ūhtwōns
G tuggōnō arbjōnō ūhtwōnō
D tuggōm arbjōm ūhtwōm

The vowel ō has generalized throughout the declension, so that the dative, though characteristically
lacking any sign of the n-stem, still maintains the vowel.
16.3 īn-Stems
The īn-stem nouns (recall [ī] is spelled ei in Gothic) are generally feminine. These nouns derive for the
most part from adjectives, forming the associated abstract noun. The nouns managei 'multitude', áiþei
'mother', and frōdei 'understanding' serve to illustrate the forms.
Weak īn-Stem Feminine

Stem managein- áiþein- frōdein-

N Sg. managei áiþei frōdei

A managein áiþein frōdein
G manageins áiþeins frōdeins
D managein áiþein frōdein

N Pl. manageins áiþeins frōdeins

A manageins áiþeins frōdeins
G manageinō áiþeinō frōdeinō
D manageim áiþeim frōdeim

The formation is similar to the declension of ōn-stems. The vowel ī has generalized throughout the
declension, so that the dative maintains the vowel while losing the n.
17 Adjectives: Weak Declension

Adjectives decline according to weak or strong paradigms based on the requirements of context (cf.
Section 13 on strong adjective declension). The choice is one of speci city: Gothic employs weak
adjective forms to modify a de nite noun, and strong forms to modify an inde nite noun. For example,
ahma sa weiha 'the holy ghost' and þái ana aírþái þizái gōdōn saianans 'they that are sown on the
good ground' (Mark 4.20). For comparison, weihs ahma would be 'a holy spirit', ana gōdái aírþái 'on
(some) good ground', saianái 'sown'. Weak endings are generally used for nominalized adjectives:
unkarjans 'careless (ones)'. Compare weihs 'holy' (strong) to weiha 'priest' (weak), literally '(the) holy
one'. From a morphological point of view, weak adjective endings are simply n-stem endings. In this way,
their use for de nite reference parallels proper names in Latin, e.g. catus 'sly' vs. Catō (G. Catōnis) 'the
Sly One', and in Greek, e.g. platús 'broad' vs. Plátōn 'the Broad (Shouldered) One'.
17.1 Weak Adjective Formation

As mentioned above, the weak declension of adjectives is actually simply n-stem declension. The weak
masculine endings of a-stem adjectives exactly parallel those of the an-stem noun atta, and the neuter a-
stem weak endings those of the an-stem haírtō (Section 16.1); the feminine weak endings of a-stem
adjectives parallel those of the ōn-stem noun tuggō (Section 16.2). Again the adjective blinds 'blind'
illustrates the declension.
Weak a-Stem Masculine Neuter Feminine

N Sg. blinda blindō blindō

A blindan blindō blindōn
G blindins blindins blindōns
D blindin blindin blindōn

N Pl. blindans blindōna blindōns

A blindans blindōna blindōns
G blindanē blindanē blindōnō
D blindam blindam blindōm

The ja-stem adjectives decline analogously, the masculine forms following the jan-stem noun arbja, the
neuter following sigljō, the feminine following arbjō. The distinctions of Group (1) and Group (2) ja-stems
do not play a role in weak declension. Likewise, i-stem and u-stem adjectives follow the same weak
declension as ja-stems, exhibiting the same j-augment in all forms. The adjectives niujis 'new' and
wilþeis 'wild' illustrate the weak declension of ja-stems; hráins 'clean' illustrates the i-stems; hardus
'hard' illustrates the u-stems. The forms are as follows.
Masculine ja-Stem (1) ja-Stem (2) i-Stem u-Stem

N Sg. niuja wilþja hráinja hardja

A niujan wilþjan hráinjan hardjan
G niujins wilþjins hráinjins hardjins
D niujin wilþjin hráinjin hardjin

N Pl. niujans wilþjans hráinjans hardjans

A niujans wilþjans hráinjans hardjans
G niujanē wilþjanē hráinjanē hardjanē
D niujam wilþjam hráinjam hardjam

Neuter

N Sg. niujō wilþjō hráinjō hardjō

A niujō wilþjō hráinjō hardjō
G niujins wilþjins hráinjins hardjins
D niujin wilþjin hráinjin hardjin

N Pl. niujōna wilþjōna hráinjōna hardjōna

A niujōna wilþjōna hráinjōna hardjōna
G niujanē wilþjanē hráinjanē hardjanē
D niujam wilþjam hráinjam hardjam

Feminine

N Sg. niujō wilþjō hráinjō hardjō

A niujōn wilþjōn hráinjōn hardjōn
G niujōns wilþjōns hráinjōns hardjōns
D niujōn wilþjōn hráinjōn hardjōn

N Pl. niujōns wilþjōns hráinjōns hardjōns
A niujōns wilþjōns hráinjōns hardjōns

G niujōnō wilþjōnō hráinjōnō hardjōnō
D niujōm wilþjōm hráinjōm hardjōm

The wa-stem adjectives maintain the w-augment. Few weak forms are extant. The adjective triggws
'true' exhibits only the weak N sg. triggwa and D sg. triggwin. The wa-stem adjectives lasiws 'weak',
*qius 'alive', *fáus 'little', *usskáus 'vigilant' show no weak forms.
17.2 Comparative, Superlative, and Intensive Adjectives
The comparative of adjectives is formed by addition of the su x -iz- or -ōz-. The superlative is derived
by addition of the su x -st- or -ōst-. Consider the following examples.
Meaning Positive Comparative Superlative

'much, many' manags managiza managists

'wise' frōþs frōdōza
'poor' arms armōsts

'strong' swinþs swinþōza
'old' alþeis alþiza
'sweet' suts sutiza sutists

'hard' hardus hardiza
'high' *háuhs háuhists

As with the positive degree, the superlative degree declines either strong or weak according to the
requirements of context. The superlative, however, does not take the alternate pronominal ending -ata in
the neuter singular nominative or accusative. The comparative, by contrast, only assumes weak adjectival
endings, regardless of context. The only difference between comparative endings and general weak
adjectival endings occurs in the feminine: the feminine declines like the īn-stem managei, rather than
tuggō. The adjective jūhiza 'younger', from juggs 'young', serves to illustrate comparative declension.
Comparative Masculine Neuter Feminine

N Sg. jūhiza jūhizō jūhizei

A jūhizan jūhizō jūhizein
G jūhizins jūhizins jūhizeins
D jūhizin jūhizin jūhizein

N Pl. jūhizans jūhizōna jūhizeins

A jūhizans jūhizōna jūhizeins
G jūhizanē jūhizanē jūhizeinō
D jūhizam jūhizam jūhizeim

Several adjectives are members of suppletive systems, whereby the positive forms derive from a base
different than that of the comparative and superlative. A few of the most common such adjectives appear
below.
Meaning Positive Comparative Superlative

'good' gōþs batiza batists

'little' leitils minniza minnists
'great' mikils máiza máists
'old' sineigs sinista
'evil' ubils waírsiza

The superlative sinista generally translates Greek presbúteros 'elder': þái sinistans 'the elders'.
Intensive adjectives are formed by addition of the ending -(t)uma. These formations in ect like
comparatives, but they generally do not mark any speci c comparison. These have a superlative formed
by adding -(t)umist-. Consider the following examples.
Intensitve Meaning Superlative Meaning

aftuma 'latter, following' aftumists 'last'
aúhuma 'high' aúh(u)mists 'highest'
fruma 'former, prior' frumists ' rst'
hindumists 'hindmost, uttermost'
hleiduma 'the left'
iftuma 'next, following'
innuma 'inner'
miduma 'middle'
spēdumists 'last, latest'

Compare af-tuma to Lat. op-timus, as well as in-timus and Sanskrit án-tamas. Likewise compare the
formation of ordinals such as Lat. septimus, Sanskrit saptamás.
The dative case is used in conjunction with a comparative to denote the standard of reference or
comparison, as denoted by the Modern English 'than'. For example, swinþō mis 'mightier than me'.
18 Relatives, Interrogatives, and Inde nites
18.1 Relatives
As with the other Germanic languages, Gothic has no independent pronoun which functions speci cally
as a relative. The most prominent relative marker is the particle ei, which functions analogously to Old
Norse es (later er) or sem (or even the conjunction at 'that') and to Old English þe. These particles are
self-standing markers introducing subordinate clauses and as such have no inherent meaning of their
own. In Gothic the relative use of the particle ei is restricted to a few phrases involving temporal or modal
expressions. For example, sijáis þahands jah ni magands rodjan und þana dag ei waírþái þata 'thou
shalt be dumb, and not able to speak, until the day that this should happen' (Luke 1.20); fram þamma
daga ei anabáuþ mis 'from the time that it befell me' (Nehemiah 5.14); fram þamma daga ei
háusidēdum 'since the day we heard it' (Colossians 1.9); aþþan þamma háidáu ei Jannis jah
Mambrēs andstōþun Mōsēza 'Now in the manner in which Jannes and Jambres withstood Moses' (2
Timothy 3.8).
The particle ei occurs most frequently in a relativizing role conjoined to the demonstrative pronoun sa,
þata, sō 'this, that, the'. This yields a relative pronoun for the third person. The declension is as follows.
Relative Pron. Masculine Neuter Feminine

N Sg. saei (izei) þatei sōei (sei)

A þanei þatei þōei
G þizei þizei þizōzei
D þammei þammei þizáiei

N Pl. þáiei (izei) þōei þōzei

A þanzei þōei þōzei
G þizēei þizēei *þizōei
D þáimei þáimei þáimei

When the particle ei is su xed, a preceding weakly stressed a is lost, and s becomes z. The nominative
singular masculine is of the third person pronoun also forms a relative in this manner: izei. This is
occasionally found instead of the corresponding relative saei. It also occurs in the role of the nominative
masculine plural instead of þáiei. The nominative singular feminine si of the third person pronoun
similarly forms a relative si + ei > sei.
The rst and second person pronouns form relatives in the same fashion. The particle ei is su xed to the
appropriate form of the pronoun: ikei 'I who'; þuei 'thou who'; þukei 'thee whom'; þuzei 'to thee whom';
juzei 'ye who'; izwizei 'to you whom'.
Like Modern English, but unlike Old English and Old Norse, the relative pronoun saei, þatei, sōei derives
its case from its function in the relative clause. In the Modern English sentence 'and a man came whose
name was Jairus', the relative whose derives its case (genitive) from its function in the clause 'whose
name was Jairus', not from the clause in which its antecedent man appears (otherwise it would be the
nominative who, agreeing with man). By contrast, Old Norse favors a construction in which the
demonstrative agrees with the antecedent in the main clause: hann sendi hingat til lands prest þann
es hét Þangbrandr 'he sent there to the land a priest who was called Thangbrand'. The phrase þann es
exactly parallels the formation of the relative pronoun in Gothic, being the union of the demonstrative
pronoun followed by the relative particle (es in ON, ei in Gothic). But in the Old Norse phrase, þann is
accusative, modifying the direct object of the main clause, even though the antecedent of þann
subsequently becomes the subject of the relative clause. The same generally occurs in Old English with
the particle |e. Gothic uses the relative saei, þatei, sōei in the fashion of Modern English. For example,
jah sái qam waír þizei namō Iaeirus 'And a man came whose name (was) Jairus' (Luke 8.41). The
relative þizei takes its genitive case from its function in the relative clause, not from the main clause.
18.2 Interrogatives
The interrogative pronoun ƕas, ƕa, ƕō 'who?, what?' occurs only in the singular. The forms are as
follows.
Interrogative Masculine Neuter Feminine

N Sg. ƕas ƕa ƕō
A ƕana ƕa ƕō
G ƕis ƕis *ƕizōs
D ƕamma ƕamma ƕizái

The neuter instrumental form ƕē occurs with the meaning 'with what, wherewith, how'. The plural is
preserved in the form ƕanzuh: insandida ins twans ƕanzuh 'he sent them forth two and two'.
The interrogative adjective ƕaþar 'which (of two)' occurs only in the nominative singular masculine and
neuter. This contrasts with ƕarjis 'which (of more than two)', which declines like midjis (cf. Section 13.1),
though the neuter nominative singular always ends in -ata. The interrogative adjectives ƕileiks 'what
sort of' and *ƕēláuþs (fem. ƕēláuda) 'how great' follow the declension of blinds (cf. Section 13.1), as
do their respective correlatives swaleiks 'such' and swaláuþs (fem. swaláuda) 'so great'.
The enclitic particle -u is often appended to the rst word of an interrogative statement. For example, niu
'not?'; skuldu ist 'is it lawful?'; abu þus silbin 'of thyself?'
18.3 Inde nites
Simple inde nites, formed by su xing the particle -hun to forms of ƕas 'who', manna 'man', and áins
'one', occur only in negated constructions. See Section 21.2 on Negatives.
A general inde nite, akin to Modern English 'whosoever, whoever', is formed by the combinations ƕazuh
saei, saƕazuh saei, and saƕazuh izei. These occur only in the nominative singular masculine. The
neuter counterpart, þataƕah þei 'whatsoever', occurs only in the accusative singular. Inde nites of
similar meaning are formed by pre xing þis (genitive of þata) to forms of ƕazuh. These are followed by
the relative saei, or by þei. The attested forms are as follows.
þisƕazuh saei 'whosoever' Masculine Neuter Feminine

N Sg. þisƕazuh saei þisƕah þei (þatei)
A þisƕanōh saei þisƕah þei (þatei)
G þisƕizuh þei
D þisƕammēh saei þisƕammēh þei

The form þatei occasionally replaces þei in the neuter. No feminine forms occur.
áin- 'one, anyone, a certain one' always declines according to the strong declension of blinds (Section
13.1), e.g. masc. N sg. áins, pl. áinái; neut. N sg. áin(ata), pl. áina; fem. N sg. áina, pl. áinōs. The plural
forms are used in the sense 'only, alone'. Note correlated structures: áins... jah áins 'the one... and the
other'.
all- 'all, every, whole' always declines according to the strong declension of blinds, e.g. masc. N sg. alls,
pl. allái; neut. N sg. all(ata), pl. alla; fem. N sg. alla, pl. allōs.
anþar- 'second, other' always declines according to the strong declension of blinds, though the neuter N
sg. never takes the pronominal ending -ata. For example, masc. N sg. anþar (cf. Section 6.2.2), pl.
anþarái; neut. N sg. anþar, pl. anþara; fem. N sg. anþara, pl. anþarō.
sum- 'some one, a certain one' always declines according to the strong declension of blinds, e.g. masc.
N sg. sums, pl. sumái; neut. N sg. sum(ata), pl. suma; fem. N sg. suma, pl. sumōs. Forms of this
pronoun are often repeated in correlated structures: sums... sums 'the one... the other'. The particle -uh
is frequently su xed to the second member of such constructions, and occasionally to both members:
sumái(h)... sumáih 'some... and others' (masc. nom. pl.).
19 Present Participle
The present participle adds the su x -nd- to the present stem (yielding a stem which resembles the 3rd
person plural, present indicative active). Adjectival endings are then added to the resulting stem. The
present participle declines exclusively as a weak adjective, with the sole exception of the masculine
nominative singular, which has an alternate strong ending. The feminine forms follow the declension of
īn-stem nouns like managei, rather than ōn-stems. The verb niman 'take' has present participle stem
nimand-. The declension is as follows.
Present Ptcple Masculine Neuter Feminine

N Sg. nimanda, nimands nimandō nimandei

A nimandan nimandō nimandein
G nimandins nimandins nimandeins
D nimandin nimandin nimandein

N Pl. nimandans nimandōna nimandeins

A nimandans nimandōna nimandeins
G nimandanē nimandanē nimandeinō
D nimandam nimandam nimandeim

The present participle denotes an action ongoing at the time of the main verb. The present participle
generally takes its object in the same case as the nite forms of the participle, though frequently the
object is omitted. For example, þái waúrd háusjandans 'those hearing the word' (Mark 4.18); Sa
saijands waúrd saijiþ 'The one sowing sows the word', equivalent to 'The sower sows the word' (Mark
4.14).
Some nouns, such as the nd-stem fijands 'enemy', were originally participles but have subsequently
become frozen in a substantive role. These infrequently take objects in the accusative, instead generally
employing the genitive. Compare the following contructions: þans fijands galgins Xristáus 'the enemies
of the cross of Christ' (Philippians 3.18) vs. þáim
fijandam izwis 'to those hating you' (Luke 6.27). Also
note the following passage: aþþan ik qiþa izwis: frijōþ fijands izwarans, þiuþjáiþ þans wrikandans
izwis, wáila táujáiþ þáim hatjandam izwis, jah bidjáiþ bi þans usþriutandans izwis 'But I say unto
you, Love your enemies, bless those cursing you, do good to those hating you, and pray for those abusing
you' (Matthew 5.44).
20 Adjective Use
Adjectives agree with the nouns they modify in gender, case, and number. But the adjective at times
agrees with the natural gender of the referent, rather than with the gender of the noun representing it.
Consider the following example, where the feminine noun handugei 'wisdom' is modi ed by a neuter
adjective agreeing with the genderless concept represented by handugei: ei kanniþ wēsi handugei
guþs 'that the wisdom of God be known'. Note also the following, where neuter áinhun (leikē) 'any (of
bodies)' is modi ed by a masculine singular adjective taking its gender from the person or man whom the
circumlocution represents: ni waírþiþ garaíhts áinhun leikē 'no man becomes just'.
When a singular noun denotes a collection of individual members, the adjective may take its number and
gender according to the individuals. For example, the feminine singular managei 'multitude, people' is
generally modi ed by adjectives in the masculine plural: jah was managei beidandans Zakariins 'and
the people were waiting for Zacharias'. This likewise occurs with the noun hiuhma 'crowd': jah alls
hiuhma was manageins beidandans 'and the whole crowd of people was waiting'.
Unlike many of the Indo-European languages, but like e.g. Old Norse, an adjective modifying both
masculine and feminine beings takes a neuter plural form. For example, wēsunuh þan garaíhta ba
andwaírþja guþs 'they were both righteous before God', where the referents are Zacharias and Elizabeth.
Adjectives take either strong or weak endings. Strong adjective forms modify inde nite nouns. Consider
the following examples: stibnái mikilái 'in a loud voice'; gaguds ragineis 'a good counselor'; wastjái
ƕeitái 'in a white cloth'. Predicate adjectives regularly take strong endings: goþ þus ist hamfamma in
libáin galeiþan 'it is better for thee to enter into life maimed'. All cardinal numerals only decline strong,
as well as the ordinal anþar 'second'; likewise the possessive adjectives like meins 'my'; pronominal
adjectives like sums 'some', alls 'all', jáins 'that', swaleiks 'such'; and other adjectives like fulls 'full',
ganōhs 'enough', halbs 'half', midjis 'middle'.
Weak adjective forms modify de nite nouns, and therefore generally accompany the de nite article. For
example, stiur þana alidan 'the fattened calf'; (áina) anabusnē þizō minnistōnō '(one) of the smallest
commandments'; wastja þō frumistōn 'the best garment'; ni mag bagms þiuþeigs akrana ubila
gatáujan 'a good tree cannot bear evil fruits'. A weak adjective generally accompanies a noun in the
vocative: atta weiha 'holy father!'; o unfrodans Galateis 'O foolish Galatians'. All ordinal numerals beside
anþar exhibit only weak declension. The same is true for comparatives, as well as intensives ending in -
ma, e.g. aftuma 'latter'. The present participle takes weak endings, except for the alternate strong ending
in the masculine nominative singular. The adjectives sama 'same' and silba 'self' always take weak
endings.
Gothic Online
Lesson 5
Early Contact between Goths and Huns
Scholars have long looked for an explanation of the Goths' sudden and destructive entrance into history in
the middle of the 3rd century. They have generally attributed Gothic movements to a response to the
marauding Huns who came swiftly from the east and attacked and displaced the formerly sedentary
Goths. Of course this begs the question as to the reason for the Huns' entrance into eastern Europe:
overpopulation, drought, or the search for richer grazing areas have all been suggested as possibilities.
The Huns rst attacked and subdued the Alans, a nomadic Iranian people neighboring the Goths to the
east of the Don. Together the Huns and Alans attacked the Goths. Their combined forces rst attacked
the Greuthungi, whose leader was Ermenaric. Upon his death, Vithimer became leader of the Greuthungi
and paid some Huns to ght alongside the Goths. Vithimer was eventually killed in battle against a force
consisting mostly of Alans, and the subsequent leaders Alatheus and Saphrax led a retreat to the
Dniester.
This westward movement of the Greuthungi was countered by the Tervingi, who, led by Athanaric,
marched from the east to the Dniester to hold them off. Hunnic attacks eventually forced Athanaric to fall
back, until he built a defensive wall running from the river Gerasius (modern Prut) to the Danube. Further
Hunnic attacks interrupted construction of the walls, and Alavivus and Fritigern led splinter groups to seek
refuge in the Roman empire across the Danube. This then left the Greuthungi free to cross the Dniester,
and they too pushed to the Danube and sought entry into Roman territory. The two groups sought to enter
Roman territory sometime in 376.
This rapid turn of events is, however, likely a synopsis of a situation which developed over a substantial
period of time. It is more likely that Huns did not come in the form of a lightning storm of invaders, but
rather that pressure upon neighboring Gothic tribes built up over time. In fact the Tervingi request for
asylum presumably involved several stages, all taking considerable time: (1) deliberations among the
Goths themselves as to how best to escape the Huns; (2) a request made to local Roman o cials for
permission to enter Roman territory; (3) referral of the matter to the emperor Valens, to whom the Goths
eventually sent embassies; (4) a period of waiting while Valens made a decision from his present location
in Antioch; (5) another waiting period while the embassies returned from Antioch, travelling over 1000km
each way.
As it turns out, the Goths themselves still remained the major concern of the Roman empire in the region
of the Danube in 376 and after. The Huns by contrast only operated in small raiding parties at the time.
Athanaric's Tervingi established a new settlement in the Carpathians in late 370s. When Athanaric was
ousted c. 380, the Goths he ruled remained in north of the Danube. This suggests that the Huns were not
such oppressive raiders that the Goths were in a particular hurry to ee. Another Gothic group under
Arimer, perhaps the former subjects of Athanaric, also remained north of the Danube until the mid 380s.
Yet another group of Greuthungi under Odotheus tried in 386 to cross south into Roman territory. They
were defeated and resettled to Asia Minor. Much later, in 405-406, the Gothic king Radagaisus crossed the
Roman border and invaded Italy. But though Odotheus and Radagaisus may have been Hunnic refugees,
no sources contradict the possibility that they were simply leaders of independent groups of Goths.
The Huns themselves did not press the Roman border: in 395 (20 years after the initial Gothic requests to
pass into Roman territory), a large group of Huns crossed the Caucasus. One part headed for Persia,
another for Roman territories in Armenia, Cappadocia, and Syria, going as far as Antioch, Edessa, and
Cilicia. Though these may have been Huns from the Danube, this would have involved a journey of more
than 1000km around the Black Sea and through the di cult Caucasus, a harsh journey for men and
horses alike. It is likely that the Huns' center was somewhat father east of the Danube, closer to the Don
and Volga.
One story of the Huns' arrival is given in the Ecclesiatical History of the 5th century church historian
Sozomen (translated in Heather and Matthews, 1991):
2 The Goths, who in former times inhabited the region beyond the Ister and were masters of the other
barbarians, were driven from their lands by the people called the Huns and crossed over into Roman territory.
3 Now this race, so they say, was previously unknown to the Thracians living by the Ister and to the Goths
themselves, and lived as their neighbors without either party realising it -- the reason for their ignorance
being that a huge lake lay between them, each people believing that the country in which they lived was the
last dry land to exist, and that beyond lay sea and an in nite expanse of water. It came about, however, that
an ox, driven mad by insects, ran through the lake and was follwoed by its herdsman, who saw the land on
the other side and reported it to his fellow-tribesmen.
4 Others say that a deer, eeing in the chase, showed its Hunnish pursuers the way, which lay concealed by the
surface of the water; and that the hunters, admiring the country with its gentler climate and ease of
cultivation, at once turned back and reported what they had seen to the ruler of their race.
5 The Huns rst tried the strength of the Goths with a small force of men, and later attacked in full force,
defeating the Goths in battle and taking possession of their entire country. The victims of the attack made to
cross the river, and coming over to the Roman frontiers sent envoys to the emperor, promising their services
as his allies in the future and asking his agreement to settle wherever he chose.
6 The leader of this embassy was Ulphilas, the bishop of the Goths; and, negotiations proceeding as they
hoped, they were allowed to live in Thrace.
In this account, Sozomen seems to pass over the fact that Wul la (here Ulphilas, for Ul la) was expelled
from Gothic lands during the persecutions of the 340s, and so likely had no personal connection to the
events of the 370s related here. However it was possible during that period to pass somewhat freely over
the imperial borders, and so it is not impossible that Wul la maintained some connection with these
events.
Ambrose of Milan, writing c. 380, sums up the story of the Huns' arrival thus (quoted in Heather, 1996):
The Huns threw themselves upon the Alans, the Alans upon the Goths, and the Goths upon the Taifali and
Sarmatae... and this is not yet the end.
Evidence of more permanent Hunnic presence on the Danube only begins c. 400 AD, when a leader of the
Huns called Uldin announced his presence by sending the head of an imperial general Gainas to imperial
authorities in Constantinople.

The following passage is Matthew 6.1-15, relating the famous Sermon on the Mount. The Gothic selection
contains numerous possessive forms, as in Matthew 6.1: izwara 'your'. This form could be either the
genitive plural of þu 'thou' or the feminine singular nominative or accusative of the possessive adjective
izwar 'your, yours'. The possessive adjectives are in fact derived from appending adjectival endings to the
genitive of the personal pronouns. Compare Modern English mine to the Old English genitive singular of
the rst person pronoun: mīn. The decision as to which analysis should be given to izwara is based
primarily on proximity to the form izwaramma, which is unambiguously adjectival, as well as on
parallelism in the structures of the following verses. Similar ambiguity surrounds þeina in verses 6.3-4
and 6.13.
In Matthew 6.3 we nd iþ þuk táujandan armaiōn 'but when thou doest alms'. This is an example of an
accusative absolute, consisting of a substantive (here þuk) and an associated participle (here
táujandan) placed in the accusative case to related information that would generally occupy a full
subordinate clause in Modern English. Such constructions are far less common in Gothic than their dative
counterpart.
We also nd in this passage several uses of the present subjunctive, most frequently here equivalent to
imperatives. The use in Matthew 6.5 -- jah þan bidjaiþ 'when you pray' -- shows use of the present
subjunctive to denote hypotheical events in the future. In the jargon of traditional grammars of Greek and
Latin, this is a present subjunctive in the protasis of a present general condition.
In this reading we encounter several terms of relating to tribal structure. In particular we nd the general
term þiuda 'people' (Matthew 6.7). This seems to denote any ethnically or culturally identi able group, as
the Gothic term of self-reference, Gut-þiuda 'Gothic people', attests. We also nd the term þiudinassus
'kingdom' (Matthew 6.10) and þiudangardi 'kingdom' (Matthew 6.13), built from þiudans 'head of a
þiuda, king'.
The last part of Matthew 6.13, untē þeina ist þiudangardi jah mahts jah wulþus in áiwins 'for thine is
the kingdom and the power and the glory for ever', is a phrase which is absent from the traditional Greek
text, as well as from the Old English translation of c. 995, Wycliffe's translation of 1389, and Tyndale's of
1526.
6:1- Atsaiƕiþ armaion izwara ni taujan in andwairþja manne du saiƕan im; aiþþau laun ni
habaiþ fram attin izwaramma þamma in himinam.
atsaiƕiþ -- strong verb class 5; second person plural imperative of <atsaíƕan> to observe, to take
heed -- take heed (that)
armaion -- weak noun, feminine; accusative singular of <armaiō> pity, alms -- alms
izwara -- possessive adjective; accusative singular feminine of <izwar> your, yours -- your # form
indistinguishable from the genitive plural of the personal pronoun þu 'thou, you'
taujan -- weak verb class 1; in nitive of <táujan> to do, to make -- (ye) do
andwairþja -- strong noun, neuter; dative singular of <andwaírþi> face, presence -- before
manne -- irregular noun, masculine; genitive plural of <manna> man -- men
saiƕan -- strong verb class 5; in nitive of <saíƕan> to see -- be seen
im -- personal pronoun; dative plural masculine of <is> he, she, it -- of them
aiþþau -- conjunction; <aíþþáu> or, else -- otherwise
laun -- strong noun, neuter; accusative singular of <láun> reward, wage -- reward
habaiþ -- weak verb class 3; second person plural of <haban> to have -- ye have
attin -- weak noun, masculine; dative singular of <atta> father -- Father
izwaramma -- possessive adjective; dative singular masculine of <izwar> your, yours -- your
þamma -- demonstrative used as relative pronoun; dative singular masculine of <sa, so, þata>
this, that -- which (is)
himinam -- strong noun, masculine; dative singular of <himins> heaven -- heaven
2 - þan nu taujais armaion, ni haurnjais faura þus, swaswe þai liutans taujand in gaqumþim jah
in garunsim, ei hauhjaindau fram mannam; amen qiþa izwis: andnemun mizdon seina.
þan -- adverb; <þan> then, when -- when

taujais -- weak verb class 1; second person singular present subjunctive of <táujan> to do, to make
-- thou doest
armaion -- weak noun, feminine; accusative singular of <armaiō> pity, alms -- (thine) alms
haurnjais -- weak verb class 1; second person singular present subjunctive of <haúrnjan> to blow
a horn -- do... sound a trumpet
faura -- preposition; <faúra> before, for -- before
swaswe -- adverb; <swaswē> as, just as; so as; so as to, so that -- as
þai -- demonstrative used as article; nominative plural masculine of <sa, so, þata> this, that -- the
liutans -- weak noun, masculine; nominative plural of <liuta> hypocrite -- hypocrites
taujand -- weak verb class 1; third person plural of <táujan> to do, to make -- do
gaqumþim -- strong noun, feminine; dative plural of <gaqumþs> assembly, synagogue -- the
synagogues
garunsim -- strong noun, feminine; dative plural of <garuns> street -- the streets
hauhjaindau -- weak verb class 1; third person plural passive subjunctive of <háuhjan> to exalt, to
glorify -- they may have glory
amen -- interjection; <amēn> amen, truly -- verily
qiþa -- strong verb class 5; rst person singular of <qiþan> to say, speak -- I say
andnemun -- strong verb class 4; third person plural preterite of <andniman> to receive, to take --
they have
mizdon -- weak noun, feminine; accusative singular of <mizdō> reward -- (their) reward
3 - iþ þuk taujandan armaion ni witi hleidumei þeina, ƕa taujiþ taihswo þeina,
iþ -- conjunction; <iþ> but, however, if -- but

þuk -- personal pronoun; accusative singular of <þu> thou, you -- thou
taujandan -- weak verb class 1; accusative singular masculine of participle of <táujan> to do, to
make -- when... doest
armaion -- weak noun, feminine; accusative singular of <armaiō> pity, alms -- alms
witi -- preterite present verb; third person singular present subjunctive of <*witan> to know -- let...
know
hleidumei -- adjective used as substantive; nominative singular feminine of <hleiduma> left; (fem.
subst.) left hand, left side -- left hand
þeina -- possessive adjective; nominative singular feminine of <þeins> thy, thine, your, yours -- thy
# form indistinguishable from the genitive singular of the personal pronoun þu 'thou, you'
ƕa -- interrogative pronoun; accusative singular neuter of <ƕas> who, what -- what
taujiþ -- weak verb class 1; third person singular of <táujan> to do, to make -- doeth
taihswo -- adjective used as substantive; nominative singular feminine of <taíhswa> right; (fem.
subst.) right hand, right side -- right hand
4 - ei sijai so armahairtiþa þeina in fulhsnja, jah atta þeins saei saiƕiþ in fulhsnja, usgibiþ þus
in bairhtein.

sijai -- strong verb class 5; athematic third person singular subjunctive of <wisan> to be -- be
armahairtiþa -- strong noun, feminine; nominative singular of <armahaírtiþa> charity, alms -- alms
fulhsnja -- strong noun, neuter; dative singular of <fulhsni> hidden thing, secret -- secret
atta -- weak noun, masculine; nominative singular of <atta> father -- Father
saiƕiþ -- strong verb class 5; third person singular of <saíƕan> to see -- seeth
usgibiþ -- strong verb class 5; third person singular of <usgiban> to reward, to give out -- shall
reward
bairhtein -- weak noun, feminine; dative singular of <baírhtei> brightness -- openly
5 - jah þan bidjaiþ, ni sijaiþ swaswe þai liutans, unte frijond in gaqumþim jah waihstam plapjo
standandans bidjan, ei gaumjaindau mannam. Amen, qiþa izwis þatei haband mizdon seina.

bidjaiþ -- strong verb class 5; second person plural present subjunctive of <bidjan> to ask, to pray
-- thou prayest # the King James Version translates as singular, though the Gothic has plural
sijaiþ -- strong verb class 5; athematic second person plural present subjunctive of <wisan> to be --
thou shalt... be # the King James Version translates as singular, though the Gothic has plural
swaswe -- adverb; <swaswē> as, just as; so as; so as to, so that -- as... (are)
liutans -- weak noun, masculine; nominative plural of <liuta> hypocrite -- hypocrites
frijond -- weak verb class 2; third person plural of <frijōn> to love -- they love
gaqumþim -- strong noun, feminine; dative plural of <gaqumþs> assembly, synagogue -- the
synagogues
waihstam -- weak noun, masculine; dative plural of <waíhsta> corner -- the corners
plapjo -- strong noun, feminine; genitive plural of <*plapja> street, square -- of the streets
standandans -- strong verb class 6; nominative plural masculine of present participle of
<standan> to stand -- standing
bidjan -- strong verb class 5; in nitive of <bidjan> to ask, to pray -- to pray
gaumjaindau -- weak verb class 1; third person plural passive present subjunctive of <gáumjan>
to observe, perceive, see -- they may be seen
mannam -- irregular noun, masculine; dative plural of <manna> man -- of men
Amen -- interjection; <amēn> amen, truly -- amen
haband -- weak verb class 3; third person plural of <haban> to have -- they have
mizdon -- weak noun, feminine; accusative singular of <mizdō> reward -- reward
seina -- possessive adjective; accusative singular feminine of <seina> one's own -- their
6- iþ þu þan bidjais, gagg in heþjon þeina jah galukands haurdai þeinai bidei du attin
þeinamma þamma in fulhsnja, jah atta þeins saei saiƕiþ in fulhsnja, usgibiþ þus in bairhtein.

þu -- personal pronoun; nominative singular of <þu> thou, you -- thou
bidjais -- strong verb class 5; second person singular subjunctive of <bidjan> to ask, to pray -- thou
prayest
gagg -- strong verb class 7; second person singular imperative of <gaggan> to come, go -- enter
heþjon -- weak noun, feminine; accusative singular of <hēþjō> room, chamber -- chamber
þeina -- possessive adjective; accusative singular feminine of <þeins> thy, thine, your, yours -- thy
galukands -- strong verb class 2; nominative singular masculine of present participle of <galūkan>
to shut, to close -- when thou hast shut
haurdai -- strong noun, feminine; dative singular of <haúrds> door -- door
þeinai -- possessive adjective; dative singular feminine of <þeins> thy, thine, your, yours -- thy
bidei -- strong verb class 5; second person singular imperative of <bidjan> to ask, to pray -- pray
attin -- weak noun, masculine; dative singular of <atta> father -- Father
þeinamma -- possessive adjective; dative singular masculine of <þeins> thy, thine, your, yours --
thy
þamma -- demonstrative used as relative pronoun; dative singular masculine of <sa, so, þata>
this, that -- which (is)
saiƕiþ -- strong verb class 5; third person singular of <saíƕan> to see -- seeth
usgibiþ -- strong verb class 5; third person singular of <usgiban> to reward, to give out -- shall
reward
bairhtein -- weak noun, feminine; dative singular of <baírhtei> brightness -- openly
7 - bidjandansuþ-þan ni filuwaurdjaiþ, swaswe þai þiudo; þugkeiþ im auk ei in filuwaurdein

seinai andhausjaindau.
bidjandansuþ-þan -- strong verb class 5; nominative plural masculine of present participle of

<bidjan> to ask, to pray + enclitic conjunction; <-uh> but, and, now, therefore + conjunction;
<þan> when, as (long as); then, at that time; but, and, however -- but when ye pray # the -h of -uh
assimilates to the following þ- of þan
filuwaurdjaiþ -- weak verb class 1; second person plural present subjunctive of <filuwaúrdjan> to
use many words, to be wordy -- use... vain repititions
swaswe -- adverb; <swaswē> as, just as; so as; so as to, so that -- as... (do)
þiudo -- strong noun, feminine; genitive plural of <þiuda> people; (pl.) heathens, Gentiles --
heathens
þugkeiþ -- weak verb class 1; third person singular of <þungkjan> to seem -- think
in -- preposition; <in> into, towards; on account of; in, among, by -- for
filuwaurdein -- weak noun, feminine; dative singular of <filuwaúrdei> wordiness -- much speaking
seinai -- possessive adjective; dative singular feminine of <seina> one's own -- their
andhausjaindau -- weak verb class 1; third person plural passive present subjunctive of
<andháusjan> to hear, to obey -- they shall be heard
8 - ni galeikoþ nu þaim; wait auk atta izwar þizei jus þaurbuþ, faurþizei jus bidjaiþ ina.

galeikoþ -- weak verb class 2; second person plural imperative of <galeikōn> to be like -- Be... ye...
like
-- unto them
wait -- preterite present verb; third person singular of <*witan> to know -- knoweth
izwar -- possessive adjective; nominative plural masculine of <izwar> your, yours -- your # note
loss of masculine nominative singular -s after a short vowel followed by -r-, cf. Section 6.2.2
þizei -- relative pronoun; genitive singular neuter of <saei> who, he who, which -- what things
jus -- personal pronoun; nominative plural of <þu> thou, you -- ye
þaurbuþ -- preterite present verb; second person plural of <þaúrban> to need, to be in want -- have
need of
faurþizei -- conjunction; <faúrþizei> before -- before
-- ask
9 - swa nu bidjaiþ jus:
atta unsar þu in himinam,

weihnai namo þein.
swa -- adverb; <swa> so, thus, as -- after this manner

-- pray
atta -- weak noun, masculine; vocative singular of <atta> father -- Father
unsar -- possessive adjective; vocative singular masculine of <unsar> our, ours -- our
þu -- personal pronoun; nominative singular of <þu> thou, you -- which (art)
himinam -- strong noun, masculine; dative plural of <himins> heaven -- heaven
weihnai -- weak verb class 4; third person singular present subjunctive of <weihnan> to be
hallowed -- hallowed be
namo -- weak noun, neuter; nominative singular of <namō> name -- name
þein -- possessive adjective; nominative singular neuter of <þeins> thy, thine, your, yours -- thy
10 - qimai þiudinassus þeins.

wairþai wilja þeins,
swe in himina jah ana airþai.
qimai -- strong verb class 4; third person singular present subjunctive of <qiman> to come, arrive --
come
þiudinassus -- strong noun, masculine; nominative singular of <þiudinassus> kingdom -- kingdom
wairþai -- strong verb class 3; third person singular present subjunctive of <waírþan> to become,
to happen -- be done
wilja -- weak noun, masculine; nominative singular of <wilja> will -- will
swe -- adverb; <swē> like, as, just as; so that; about -- as (it is)
himina -- strong noun, masculine; dative singular of <himins> heaven -- heaven
jah -- conjunction; <jah> and, also -- ...
airþai -- strong noun, feminine; dative singular of <aírþa> earth -- earth
11 - hlaif unsarana þana sinteinan gif uns himma daga.
hlaif -- strong noun, masculine; accusative singular of <hláifs> bread, loaf -- bread
unsarana -- possessive adjective; accusative singular masculine of <unsar> our, ours -- our
...
sinteinan -- adjective; accusative singular masculine of <sinteins> daily -- daily
gif -- strong verb class 5; second person singular imperative of <giban> to give, yield -- give
uns -- personal pronoun; dative plural of <ik> I -- us
himma -- demonstrative adjective; dative singular masculine of <*his> this -- this
daga -- strong noun, masculine; dative singular of <dags> day -- day
12 - jah aflet uns þatei skulans sijaima,

swaswe jah weis afletam þaim skulam unsaraim.

aflet -- strong verb class 7; second person singular imperative of <aflētan> to leave, to forgive --
forgive
uns -- personal pronoun; dative plural of <ik> I -- us
skulans -- adjective used as substantive; nominative plural masculine of <skula> owing, in debt,
guilty; (weak subst.) debtor -- (our debts)
sijaima -- strong verb class 5; athematic rst person plural subjunctive of <wisan> to be -- ... #
literally '(forgive us) if we be debtors'
jah -- adverb; <jah> and, also -- ...
weis -- personal pronoun; nominative plural of <ik> I -- we
afletam -- strong verb class 7; rst person plural of <aflētan> to leave, to forgive -- forgive
þaim -- demonstrative used as article; dative plural masculine of <sa, so, þata> this, that -- ...
skulam -- adjective used as substantive; dative plural masculine of <skula> owing, in debt, guilty;
(weak subst.) debtor -- debtors
unsaraim -- possessive adjective; dative plural masculine of <unsar> our, ours -- our
13 - jah ni briggais uns in fraistubnjai,

ak lausei uns af þamma ubilin;
unte þeina ist þiudangardi jah mahts
jah wulþus in aiwins. amen.

briggais -- weak verb class 1; second person singular present subjunctive of <briggan> to bring --
lead
uns -- personal pronoun; accusative plural of <ik> I -- us
fraistubnjai -- strong noun, feminine; dative singular of <fráistubni> temptation -- temptation
lausei -- weak verb class 1; second person singular imperative of <láusjan> to free, to deliver --
deliver
uns -- personal pronoun; accusative plural of <ik> I -- us
af -- preposition; <af> from, of -- from
þamma -- demonstrative used as article; dative singular neuter of <sa, so, þata> this, that -- ...
ubilin -- adjective used as substantive; dative singular neuter of <ubils> bad, evil -- evil
þiudangardi -- strong noun, feminine; nominative singular of <þiudangardi> kingdom -- the
kingdom
mahts -- strong noun, feminine; nominative singular of <mahts> power -- the power
wulþus -- strong noun, masculine; nominative singular of <wulþus> splendor, glory -- the glory
aiwins -- strong noun, masculine; accusative plural of <áiws> time, lifetime, age, eternity -- ever
amen -- interjection; <amēn> amen, truly -- amen
14 - unte jabai afletiþ mannam missadedins ize, afletiþ jah izwis atta izwar sa ufar himinam.

afletiþ -- strong verb class 7; second person plural of <aflētan> to leave, to forgive -- ye forgive
missadedins -- strong noun, feminine; accusative plural of <missadēþs> misdeed, sin --
trespasses
ize -- personal pronoun; genitive plural masculine of <is> he, she, it -- their
afletiþ -- strong verb class 7; third person singular of <aflētan> to leave, to forgive -- will... forgive
# note identity of form with 2nd person plural
jah -- adverb; <jah> and, also -- also
izwar -- possessive adjective; nominative singular masculine of <izwar> your, yours -- your
sa -- demonstrative used as relative pronoun; nominative singular masculine of <sa, so, þata> this,
that -- (who is)
ufar -- preposition; <ufar> over, above, beyond -- ...
himinam -- strong noun, masculine; dative plural of <himins> heaven -- heavenly
15 - iþ jabai ni afletiþ mannam missadedins ize, ni þau atta izwar afletiþ missadedins izwaros.

afletiþ -- strong verb class 7; second person plural of <aflētan> to leave, to forgive -- ye forgive
trespasses
ize -- personal pronoun; genitive plural masculine of <is> he, she, it -- their
ni -- adverb; <ni> not -- n-
þau -- adverb; <þáu> then, in that case -- -either
izwar -- possessive adjective; nominative singular masculine of <izwar> your, yours -- your
afletiþ -- strong verb class 7; third person singular of <aflētan> to leave, to forgive -- will... forgive
# note identity of form with 2nd person plural
trespasses
izwaros -- possessive adjective; accusative plural feminine of <izwar> your, yours -- your
Lesson Text
6:1 - Atsaiƕiþ armaion izwara ni taujan in andwairþja manne du saiƕan im; aiþþau laun ni
habaiþ fram attin izwaramma þamma in himinam. 2 - þan nu taujais armaion, ni haurnjais
faura þus, swaswe þai liutans taujand in gaqumþim jah in garunsim, ei hauhjaindau fram
mannam; amen qiþa izwis: andnemun mizdon seina. 3 - iþ þuk taujandan armaion ni witi
hleidumei þeina, ƕa taujiþ taihswo þeina, 4 - ei sijai so armahairtiþa þeina in fulhsnja, jah
atta þeins saei saiƕiþ in fulhsnja, usgibiþ þus in bairhtein. 5 - jah þan bidjaiþ, ni sijaiþ
swaswe þai liutans, unte frijond in gaqumþim jah waihstam plapjo standandans bidjan, ei
gaumjaindau mannam. Amen, qiþa izwis þatei haband mizdon seina. 6 - iþ þu þan bidjais,
gagg in heþjon þeina jah galukands haurdai þeinai bidei du attin þeinamma þamma in
fulhsnja, jah atta þeins saei saiƕiþ in fulhsnja, usgibiþ þus in bairhtein. 7 - bidjandansuþ-
þan ni filuwaurdjaiþ, swaswe þai þiudo; þugkeiþ im auk ei in filuwaurdein seinai
andhausjaindau. 8 - ni galeikoþ nu þaim; wait auk atta izwar þizei jus þaurbuþ, faurþizei
jus bidjaiþ ina. 9 - swa nu bidjaiþ jus:
atta unsar þu in himinam,

weihnai namo þein. 10 - qimai þiudinassus þeins.
wairþai wilja þeins,
swe in himina jah ana airþai. 11 - hlaif unsarana þana sinteinan gif uns himma daga.
12 - jah aflet uns þatei skulans sijaima,
swaswe jah weis afletam þaim skulam unsaraim. 13 - jah ni briggais uns in
fraistubnjai,
ak lausei uns af þamma ubilin;
unte þeina ist þiudangardi jah mahts
jah wulþus in aiwins. amen. 14 - unte jabai afletiþ mannam missadedins ize, afletiþ
jah izwis atta izwar sa ufar himinam. 15 - iþ jabai ni afletiþ mannam missadedins ize, ni
þau atta izwar afletiþ missadedins izwaros.
Translation
6:1 Take heed that ye do not your alms before men, to be seen of them: otherwise ye have no reward
of your Father which is in heaven.
2 Therefore when thou doest thine alms, do not sound a trumpet before thee, as the hypocrites do in
the synagogues and in the streets, that they may have glory of men. Verily I say unto you, They have
their reward. 3 But when thou doest alms, let not thy left hand know what thy right hand doeth: 4
That thine alms may be in secret: and thy Father which seeth in secret himself shall reward thee
openly.
5 And when thou prayest, thou shalt not be as the hypocrites are: for they love to pray standing in
the synagogues and in the corners of the streets, that they may be seen of men. Verily I say unto
you, They have their reward. 6 But thou, when thou prayest, enter into thy closet, and when thou hast
shut thy door, pray to thy Father which is in secret; and thy Father which seeth in secret shall reward
thee openly.
7 But when ye pray, use not vain repetitions, as the heathen do: for they think that they shall be heard
for their much speaking. 8 Be not ye therefore like unto them: for your Father knoweth what things
ye have need of, before ye ask him.
9 After this manner therefore pray ye:
Our Father which art in heaven,
Hallowed be thy name.
10 Thy kingdom come.
Thy will be done
in earth, as it is in heaven.
11 Give us this day our daily bread.
12 And forgive us our debts,
as we forgive our debtors.
13 And lead us not into temptation,
but deliver us from evil:
For thine is the kingdom, and the power,
and the glory, for ever. Amen.
14 For if ye forgive men their trespasses, your heavenly Father will also forgive you: 15 But if ye
forgive not men their trespasses, neither will your Father forgive your trespasses.
Grammar
21 Distributive and Negative Pronouns and Adjectives
21.1 Distributives
The interrogative ƕaþar forms a distributive by addition of the particle -uh: ƕaþaruh 'each (of two)'.
Only the dative masculine occurs, both alone (ƕaþarammēh) and in composition (áinƕaþarammēh 'to
each one (of two)').
The pronoun ƕas, ƕa, ƕō also forms a distributive by su xing -uh: ƕazuh, ƕah, ƕōh 'each, every'.
The declension is as follows.
ƕazuh 'each' Masculine Neuter Feminine

N Sg. ƕazuh ƕah ƕōh

A ƕanōh ƕah ƕōh
G ƕizuh ƕizuh *ƕizōzuh
D ƕammēh ƕammēh *ƕizáih

N Pl.
A ƕanzuh

The only plural form is the masculine accusative plural ƕanzuh. Before -uh, an s changes to z. The u of
the su x -uh drops after a long vowel or stressed a.
The adjective ƕarjis likewise forms a distributive by a xing -uh: ƕarjizuh 'each, every'. The declension
is as follows.
ƕarjizuh 'each' Masculine Neuter Feminine

N Sg. ƕarjizuh ƕarjatōh *ƕarjōh

A ƕarjanōh *ƕarjatōh ƕarjōh
G ƕarjizuh *ƕarjizuh *ƕarjizōzuh
D ƕarjammēh ƕarjammēh *ƕarjáih

This adjective occurs with the unin ected pre x áin- to form the compound áinƕarjizuh 'every one'. The
attested forms are as follows.
áinƕarjizuh 'every one' Masculine Neuter Feminine

N Sg. áinƕarjizuh áinƕarjatōh
A áinƕarjanōh áinƕarjōh
G áinƕarjizuh
D áinƕarjammēh

The stem ba- 'both' only survives in a few forms, naturally plural. The attested forms are as follows.
ba- 'both' Masculine Neuter Feminine

N Pl. bái, bajōþs ba
A bans ba
G
D báim, bajōþum

21.2 Negatives
The particle -hun is su xed to forms of ƕas 'who', manna 'man', and áins 'one' to form inde nite
pronouns, ƕashun, mannahun, áinshun. These always occur with the negative particle ni in the
meaning 'no one, nothing, no, none'. The compound form of ƕas occurs only in the nominative singular
masculine: ni
ƕashun 'no one'. The compound forms of manna occur only in the masculine singular. The
compound forms of áins occur at least in part for all genders. The attested forms of these pronouns are
as follows.
-hun Masculine Masculine Masculine Neuter Feminine

Compounds

N Sg. ƕashun mannahun áinshun áinhun áinōhun

A mannanhun áinnōhun, áinhun áinōhun
áinōhun
G manshun áinishun *áinishun *áináizōshun
D mannhun áinummēhun *áinummēhun *áináihun

Note that the rst element of each compound declines, while only the -hun remains invariant. The base
áins- declines according to the strong declension of blinds (Section 13.1), except that is has -ē- or -ō-
where blinds has a nal -a. Note also the forms áin-(n)ō-hun (masc. acc.; compare blind-ana) and
áin-ummē-hun (masc. dat.; compare blind-amma). For the particle -hun, compare Sanskrit -ca-ná
(where -na is a negative particle) in kás caná 'any one'. Note also -que in Latin quisque 'whoever'.
The feminine noun waíhts 'thing, matter' occurs with the negative ni 'no, not', as does a neuter form
waíht, to express 'nothing' (Greek oudén or mēdén).
22 Numerals
22.1 Cardinals and Ordinals
Below is a list of the attested cardinal and ordinal numerals in Gothic.
Number Cardinal Ordinal

1 áins 'one' fruma (frumists) ' rst'
2 twái anþar
3 þrija (neut.) þridja
4 fidwōr
5 fimf fimfta-
6 saíhs saíhsta
7 sibun
8 ahtáu ahtuda
9 niun niunda
10 taíhun taíhunda
11 *áinlif (dat. áinlibim)
12 twalif (dat. twalibim)
13
14 fidwōrtaíhun
15 fimftaíhun fimftataíhunda (dat. fimftataíhundin)

16
17
18
19
20 twái tigjus
30 *þreis tigjus (acc. þrins tiguns)
40 fidwōr tigjus
50 fimf tigjus
60 saíhs tigjus
70 sibuntēhund
80 ahtáutēhund
90 niuntēhund (gen. niuntēhundis)
100 taíhuntēhund, taíhuntaíhund
200 twa hunda
300 þrija hunda
400
500 fimf hunda
600
700
800
900 niun hunda
1,000 þūsundi
2,000 twōs þūsundjōs
3,000 g (= þreis) þūsundjōs
4,000 fidwōr þūsundjōs
5,000 fimf þūsundjōs

10,000 dat. taíhun þūsundjōm
20,000 dat. twáim tigum þūsundjō

The form tigjus which appears in the cardinal decades 20-60 is the nominative plural of a u-stem noun
meaning 'group of ten, decade' (cf. Section 7.2). These numerals govern the genitive case. The hundreds
200, 300, 500, 900 combine the individual units and the neuter noun hund 'hundred', which declines like
the neuter a-stem waúrd (Section 3.1). These numerals govern the genitive case. The feminine noun
þūsundi 'thousand' declines like the jō-stem noun bandi (Section 3.2). The numerals denoting thousands
govern the genitive case.
22.2 Numeral Declension

The cardinal numbers 1 through 3 are decline as adjectives, agreeing with the noun they modify in gender,
number, and case. The numeral áins 'one' occurs in both singular and plural; in the plural it means 'only,
alone'. It follows the strong a-stem adjective declension of blinds. The cardinals 2 and 3 naturally occur
only in the plural. No forms of 3 occur in the nominative, though the expected masculine and feminine
form is *þreis, and neuter *þrija mimicking the accusative. The declensions are given below.
áins 'one' Masculine Neuter Feminine

N Sg. áins áin, áinata áina
A áinana áin, áinata áina

G áinis áinis áináizōs
D áinamma áinamma áinái

N Pl. áinái áina áinōs

A áinans áina áinōs
G áináizē áináizē áináizō
D áináim áináim áináim

twái 'two'

N Pl. twái twa twōs

A twans twa twōs
G twaddjē twaddjē
D twáim twáim twáim

*þreis 'three'

N Pl. *þreis *þrija *þreis

A þrins þrija þrins
G þrijē
D þrim þrim

The cardinal numbers 4-15 generally remain unin ected, though some in ected forms occur. The attested
forms are genitive and dative plurals exhibiting i-stem declension. For example, dative forms are
fidwōrim, taíhunim, áinlibim, twalibim, fimf taíhunim; genitives are niunē, twalibē.
The attested ordinals decline as adjectives. The ordinal fruma ' rst' (cf. Section 17.2) declines as a weak
adjective, with the feminine following the īn-stem declension of managei. The forms are as follows.
fruma ' rst' Masculine Neuter Feminine

N Sg. fruma frumō frumei

A fruman frumō frumein
G frumins frumins frumeins
D frumin frumin frumein

N Pl. frumans frumōna frumeins

A frumans frumōna frumeins
G frumanē frumanē frumeinō
D frumam frumam frumeim

The form frumists may be declined strong (following blinds) or weak, though when weak it does not take
the pronominal ending -ata in the neuter singular nominative and accusative. The ordinal anþar 'second'
only declines strong like blinds, and likewise does not take the ending -ata: N sg. masc. anþar, neut.
anþar, fem. anþara. The other ordinals -- þridja 'third', fimfta ' fth', saíhsta 'sixth', ahtuda 'eighth', niunda
'ninth', taíhunda 'tenth', fimftataíhunda ' fteenth' -- all decline weak according to the pattern of blinda.
22.3 Distributive and Multiplicative Numerals

The distributive ba- signi es 'both', occurring in only a few forms. See Section 21.1 above.
The only distributive numeral is tweihnái 'two each'. Only the feminine accusative tweihnōs and dative
tweihnáim are attested. Otherwise, distributive numerals are expressed by phrases involving a
preposition or a distributive pronoun such as ƕazuh 'each, every' or ƕarjizuh 'each, every'. For example,
bi twans aíþþáu máist þrins 'by twos or at most (by) threes'; ana ƕarjanōh fimftiguns 'by fties in
each' (more literally 'according to each fty(es)'); insandida ins twans ƕanzuh 'he sent them forth two
each', i.e. 'two and two' or 'by twos'.
The adjective -falþ, corresponding to Modern English '-fold' in e.g. 'manifold', is appended to cardinals to
form multiplicative numerals. The following are attested: áinfalþs 'onefold, simple'; fidurfalþs 'fourfold';
taíhuntaíhundfalþs 'hundredfold'; managfalþs 'manifold'.
22.4 Numeral Adverbs
Numeral adverbs denoting frequency or the number of times of occurrence are composed of a numeral in
conjunction with the dative singular or plural of the noun *sinþs 'a going, time'. These are áinamma
sinþa 'once'; anþaramma sinþa 'a second time'; twáim sinþam 'twice'; þrim sinþam 'thrice'; fimf
sinþam ' ve times'; sibun sinþam 'seven times'.
23 The First Strong Conjugation
Strong verbs are characterized by vocalic alternation accompanying morphological change. This so-called
ablaut pattern differs among verbs, but similarities are frequent enough that strong verbs fall into a small
number of ablaut classes, the members of a given class sharing the same sequence of vocalic
alternation. The particular sequence characterizing a given strong verb class is the result of a number of
sound changes from Proto-Indo-European (PIE) to Proto-Germanic (PGmc), and from the latter to the
respective daughter languages. The morpheme structure of the root in PIE uniquely characterizes the
ablaut class to which a verb belongs; subsequent evolution into Germanic and the resulting daughter
languages, however, has restructured this characterization. The following chart shows an example of the
evolution of a verb from PIE to the PGmc class I strong conjugation, and then gives examples of class I
strong verbs from Gothic.
Class I Root Shape Present Past Sg. Past Pl. Past Part. Meaning

PIE (K)Vi(C) e o zero zero
*ghréibō *ghróiba *ghribmé *ghribón 'seize'

PGmc (K)V(C) ī ai i (EG i/e) o (EG i/e)
*grīpu (EG -a) *graip *gripum *gripan 'seize'

Goth. ei [ī] ái i / aí [e] i / aí [e]
greipa gráip gripum gripans 'seize'
-teiha -táih -taíhum -taíhans 'tell'

EG stands for East Germanic, the branch of Germanic to which Gothic belongs. K stands for any
consonant sequence, C for any single consonant, V for any vowel. Items in parentheses may or may not
be present. The resulting ablaut pattern characterizing the rst strong conjugation in Gothic thus
becomes the following.
Class Present Past Sg. Past Pl. Past Part.
Ia ei [ī] ái i i
Ib ei [ī] ái aí [e] aí [e]
The difference between Classes Ia and Ib lies solely in the vowel of the past plural and participle stems.
The change is conditioned by the consonant following the vowel. Generally the vowel i occurs, but this is
replaced by aí when followed by h. Take for example the past participles stigans vs. þaíhans.
The verb greipa 'seize', with prinicpal parts greipa -- gráip -- gripum -- gripans, serves to illustrate the
forms of the rst conjugation. The forms are as follows.
Class I Active Mediopassive

Indicative Subjunctive Imperative Indicative Subjunctive
Present
1 Sg. greipa greipáu greipada greipáidáu

2 greipis greipáis greip greipaza greipáizáu
3 greipiþ greipái greipadáu greipada greipáidáu

1 Du. greipōs greipáiwa
2 greipats greipáits greipats

1 Pl. greipam greipáima greipam greipanda greipáindáu

2 greipiþ greipáiþ greipiþ greipanda greipáindáu
3 greipand greipáina greipandáu greipanda greipáindáu

Past
1 Sg. gráip gripjáu
2 gráipt gripeis
3 gráip gripi

1 Du. gripu gripeiwa
2 griputs gripeits

1 Pl. gripum gripeima
2 gripuþ gripeiþ
3 gripun gripeina

In nitive greipan

Pres. Ptc. greipands

Past Ptc. gripans
24 The Second Strong Conjugation

The second strong conjugation comprises verbs whose present system often shows the diphthong iu.
The historical evolution of these verbs is shown in the chart below.
Class Root Present Past Past Pl. Past Part. Meaning

II Shape Sg.

PIE (K)Vu(C) e o zero zero
*néudō *nóuda *nudmé *nudón 'enjoy'

PGmc (K)V(C) eu (EG iu) au u (EG o (EG u/o)

u/o)
*néutu (EG *naut *nutum *notan (EG 'enjoy'
*níuta) *nutan)

Goth. iu áu u / aú u / aú [o]
[o]
niuta náut nutum nutans 'enjoy'
tiuha táuh taúhum taúhans 'lead'

Note that the root shape, though distinct from Class I in the PIE period, is no longer distinct in the PGmc
period. At this stage, only the choice of V distinguishes the classes: V = ī in the Class I present, V = eu or
V = iu in the Class II present. The resulting ablaut pattern characterizing the second strong conjugation in
Gothic thus becomes the following.
IIa iu áu u u
IIb iu áu aú [o] aú [o]
As in the rst strong conjugation, the difference between Classes IIa and IIb lies solely in the vowel of the
past plural and participle stems. This change is also conditioned by the consonant following the vowel.
Generally the vowel u occurs, but this is replaced by aú when followed by h. Take for example the past
plural forms drusum vs. taúhum.
The verb niuta 'enjoy', with prinicpal parts niuta -- náut -- nutum -- nutans, serves to illustrate the forms
of the second conjugation. The forms are as follows.
Class II Active Mediopassive

Present
1 Sg. niuta niutáu niutada niutáidáu

2 niutis niutáis niut niutaza niutáizáu
3 niutiþ niutái niutadáu niutada niutáidáu

1 Du. niutōs niutáiwa
2 niutats niutáits niutats

1 Pl. niutam niutáima niutam niutanda niutáindáu
2 niutiþ niutáiþ niutiþ niutanda niutáindáu

3 niutand niutáina niutandáu niutanda niutáindáu

Past
1 Sg. náut nutjáu
2 náust nuteis
3 náut nuti

1 Du. nutu nuteiwa
2 nututs nuteits

1 Pl. nutum nuteima
2 nutuþ nuteiþ
3 nutun nuteina

In nitive niutan

Pres. Ptc. niutands

Past Ptc. nutans
For consonant changes before the second person singular past indicative ending, see Section 6.3.
25 Adverbs
25.1 General
Gothic employs various mechanisms for deriving adverbs. A few of these methods are described below.
Genitive case. Nouns may stand in the genitive and adverbially qualify a clause as a whole, rather than
qualify a speci c noun. Examples are allis 'in general, wholly'; and-waírþis 'over against'; nahts 'at night';
raíhtis 'however, indeed'.
Su x -ba. This su x generally derives adverbs of manner from associated adjectives. For example,
agluba 'with di culty'; ana-láugniba 'secretly'; baírtaba 'brightly'; báitraba 'bitterly'; balþaba 'boldly';
ga-tēmiba ' tly'; glaggwaba, glaggwuba 'diligently, precisely'; hardaba, harduba 'grievously'; háuhaba
'highly'; ƕassaba 'sharply'; manwuba 'in readiness'; mikilaba 'greatly'; raíhtaba 'rightly'; sunjaba 'truly';
ubilaba 'evilly'.
Su x -ō. This su x frequently derives adverbs from adjectives. For example, and-áugjō 'openly'; ana-
leikō 'in like manner'; ga-leikō 'like'; glaggwō 'diligently'; sinteinō 'continually'; sniumundō 'quickly';
spráutō 'quickly'; þiubjō 'secretly'; þridjō 'for the third time'; ūhteigō 'in season'. This su x is found with
other adverbs, e.g. aftarō 'behind'; aúftō 'perhaps, surely'; missō 'one another'; sundrō 'asunder'; ufarō
'above'; undarō 'beneath'.
Su x -ē. This su x occurs less frequently than the others. Examples are simlē 'once'; swarē 'in vain'.
25.2 Negation, A rmation, and Interrogation

The adverb corresponding to Modern English 'Yes.' is ja or jái; that corresponding to Modern English 'No.'
is nē. The adverb ni 'no' is the general negative adverb within statements.
The adverb -u is a postpositive particle marking questions, much the same as Latin -ne. For example,
skuldu ist? 'is it lawful?' This adverb may also intervene between pre x and base, as in ga-u-láubjats
'do ye two believe?' Other interrogative particles are the following: an 'then'; ibái, requiring a negative
answer; ja-u 'whether'; ni-u 'not'; nuh 'then'; þáu 'or', in the second of two alternative questions.
25.3 Temporal Adverbs

Adverbs denoting time are generally simple adverbs or are nouns or noun phrases in an oblique case.
Examples of simple adverbs are the following: áir 'early'; aftra 'again'; ƕan 'when'; ju 'already'; naúh 'still';
nu 'now'; þan 'then'; ufta 'often'. Examples involving oblique nominal forms are the following: dagis
ƕizuh 'day by day'; du maúrgina 'tomorrow'; fram himma nu 'henceforth'; gistra-dagis 'tomorrow';
himma daga 'today'.
25.4 Local Adverbs
There are a few common, simple adverbs referring to location or motion. These are faúr 'before'; inn 'in,
within'; iup 'upwards'; nēƕ 'near, close by'; ūt 'out, forth'.
A number of su xes are used to form adverbs expressing location or differing types or directions of
motion. These are listed below.
Su x -a. Used to denote stationary location. For example, afta 'behind'; dalaþa 'below'; faúra 'before';
inna 'within'; iupa 'above'; ūta 'without'.
Su x -drē. Used to denote motion toward a place. For example, hidrē 'hither'; ƕadrē 'whither'; jaindrē
'thither'.
Su x -na. Used to denote motion from a place. For example, aftana 'from behind'; hindana 'from
behind'; innana 'from within'; iupana 'from above'; ūtana 'from without'.
Su x -ō. Used to denote stationary location. See the discussion in Section 25.1 above.
Su x -r. Used to denote stationary location. For example, hēr 'here'; ƕar 'where'; jáinar 'yonder'; þar
'there'.
Su x -þ -(d). Used to denote motion toward a place. For example, aljaþ 'in another direction'; dalaþ
'down'; ƕaþ 'whither'; jaind 'thither'; samaþ 'to the same place'.
Su x -þrō. Used to denote motion from a place. For example, aljaþrō 'from elsewhere'; allaþrō 'from all
directions'; dalaþrō 'from below'; faírraþrō 'from afar'; ƕaþrō 'whence'; innaþrō 'from within'; iupaþrō
'from above'; jáinþrō 'thence'; þaþrō 'thence'.
25.5 Comparison of Adverbs

The comparative degree of adverbs generally ends in -(i)s or -ōs. Examples are áiris 'earlier'; faúrþis
'beforehand'; framis 'further'; haldis 'rather'; háuhis 'higher'; máis 'more'; nēƕis 'nearer'; mins 'less'; waírs
'worse'; aljaleikōs 'otherwise'; sniumundōs 'with more haste'.
The superlative degree ends in -ist. Few superlative adverbs are attested: frumist ' rst of all'; máist 'at
most'.
Gothic Online
Lesson 6
Gothic Social Organization
Determining the social structure of the Goths during the rst centuries in which they come into history is
particularly di cult because few sources have any direct knowledge of the Goths -- and those that do,
unfortunately, do not treat the topic directly or in any depth. The majority of sources in the fourth century
discuss the Tervingi, Goths located in the area of the Danube, to the west of the Greuthungi. An important
source, albeit an indirect one, is the translation of Wul la: the Bible offers a wealth of social and political
institutions of Jewish society of a few centuries earlier, and their interaction with Roman political
institutions. Comparing our understanding of these institutions with how Wul la chose to translate the
Greek text offers a window into the societal structure of the audience of Wul la's translation.
Etymology offers a picture of the long-term survival and development of cultural institutions as preserved
in a language; but this picture is generally coarse-grained because of the timespan over which regular and
speci able linguistic changes occur. In addition, the vagaries of cultural change and idiomatic language
habits imply that at any given moment a term may be applied to a thing or circumstance which is not
predictable as the accumulation of the linguistic history of the word up to that point: for example, English
broadcast, though a sensible compound for the intended purpose, is not predictable in its current use for
'radio or television program' as a result of the combination of meanings 'wide' and 'throw (a net)'. This
unpredictability may occur for no other reason than that the required apparati, the radio and television, did
not exist in any prior period: references to new technology may make novel use of old vocabulary.
Specifying through solely etymological methods precisely how a word was used at any speci c point in its
history generally requires knowing both its history before and after the period in question, so that a sort of
triangulation method may be applied to re ne possiblities for the meaning of the word in any given
intermediate period. Such methods are limited when attempting to discover how the Gothic language, as
found in Wul la's translation, is applied by its speakers to their current social institutions for the simple
reason that Wul la's translation is the terminus of our information about the Gothic language.
To complement the results of etymological investigation, scholars may thus turn to methods of textual
comparison. Speci cally, they may focus on how Wul la translated elements of Biblical culture, and
estimate how these would be understood by Wul la himself, and how these are mapped onto Gothic
social structure. Combining this with the history of the terms involved provides another method of
triangulation in order to pinpoint Gothic social institutions concurrent with Wul la's translation. This may
be further compared with other socio-cultural depictions found in contemporary literature.
The following are estimates of the meaning of various Gothic terms at the time of the Biblical translation,
based on the above method of textual comparison, coupled with crossreferencing from contemporary
sources. These are necessarily imperfect and tentative. To limit their inaccuracies further, it must be said
that this only necessarily applies to the Tervingi, and extension to the social structures of other Goths
such as the Greuthungi, for whom there is scant cultural information, is precarious at best.
Collective units, in rough order of importance, are as follows:
Gutþiuda: in origin 'the Gothic people', this came to signify those people living within
Tervingian territory, whether enthnically Goths or not. This probably included the Taifali, a
perhaps Celtic or Vandalic group of nomadic horsemen who were evidently averse to
permanent settlement, but who formed a tribal confederation with the Tervingi.
gafaúrds: the chief 'tribal council', composed of representatives of each kuni, most
importantly the reiks, but also the sinistans and máistans.
kuni: in origin 'race' or 'generation', this had come to signify a social subdivision, ruled by an
individual reiks. There were several such kunja within the confederation, though one kuni
would be distinguished as 'royal' and exercise more in uence than the others. This was the
most active political unit, and a member of the kuni was called an inkunja. Each kuni would
typically have its own shrines and priests.
harjis: an 'army'. At the time of Wul la, this signi ed a military unit whose size was on the
order of a Roman legion, and so roughly three thousand men. Such an army could be raised by
individual kunja, or by the Gutþiuda as a whole.
hansa: 'troop', a military unit. The size of a hansa is unde ned, ranging in size from the
equivalent of a Roman maniple to a Roman cohort.
háims: the organized village. This is the basic center of agriculture and commerce.
weihs: essentially equivalent to the háims as the organized village and basic center of
commerce.
Individual o ces and titles, in rough order of importance, were as follows:
þiudans: designating a 'king', particularly a monarchic king. This institution had evidently
fallen into disuse by the time of Gothic texts. The o ce probably not only included military and
political authority, but a sort of judgeship as well.
reiks: a 'ruler', in particular the head of a kuni. The title conferred political authority, but lacked
the power residing in the judgeship. Such a personage would own a house, and be fráuja
'master' of this house and the dependents, as well as over his armed retainers, the andbahtōs
and sipōnjōs.
*draúhtins: not extant in Gothic texts, but able to be inferred from words such as draúhti-
witōþ 'military service' and draúhtinōn 'perform military service'. This signi ed a military
leader probably on par with the reiks, the two terms likely being alternates for one another
emphasizing different characteristics of the same o ce.
kindins: in origin the 'ruler' of a community related by descent, the term came to have the
sense of 'governor' over a barbarian confederation, in particular a magistrate appointed by
another o cial.
ragineis: a 'counselor'. Probably equal in status to kindins, if the two are in fact
distinguishable.
sinista: in origin 'oldest', hence an 'elder'. These were members of the gafaúrds.
máists: in origin 'greatest', hence 'chief' or 'noble, magnate'. These were members of the
gafaúrds.
inkunja: an individual member of a kuni.
fráuja: a 'lord'. Such an individual was a landed noble, owning a gards 'house(hold)', and
responsible for the persons and activities in it.
baúrgja: an individual member of a baúrgs.

ingardja: an individual member of a gards.
andbahts: in origin 'servant', though likely in particular an armed retainer.
sipōneis: an armed retainer.
skalks: a slave.
*þius: a slave belonging to the family.
asneis: a day laborer generally employed at harvest time.
Structures and their environs, in rough order of importance, were as follows:
baúrgs: at the time of Wul la, a walled forti cation. A reiks would have set himself apart from
other nobles by living in such a forti ed structure.
gards: in origin 'fenced property', in the time of Wul la this is an unforti ed house, equivalent
to a Roman manor. Nobles of less stature than the reiks would have lived in such structures.
The head of such a household is the fráuja. The term stood for the structure, as well as those
in it, such as the wife, children, relatives, and dependents.
gawi: in origin 'meadow', this denotes the lands surrounding the baúrgs.

The following passage is Mark 4:1-12, the parable of the Sower and the Seed. Looking at Mark 4.1, we nd
swaswē ina galeiþandan in skip gasitan in marein 'so that he entered into a ship, and sat in the sea'.
The construction is actually an in nitival result clause, at its most basic swaswē... ina... gasitan 'so as...
(for) him... to sit'. The participle galeiþandan is a masculine accusative modifying ina, '(for) him going'.
The verse Mark 4.5 is interesting for its peculiar uses of the genitive. In the rst instance, there is the
phrase in þizei 'on account of which, on account of this that'. The occurence of the genitive itself in a
phrase with this meaning is not surprising: the genitive is often used to denote cause in Germanic
languages, a feature of its adoption of the role of the ablative case found in other Indo-European
languages. What is striking is its use with a strictly locative (hence dative in Germanic) or accusative
preposition in, which rarely if ever occurs in other Germanic languages. Mark 4.5 also contains the phrase
ni habáida diupáizōs aírþōs, literally 'it did not have of deep earth'. As encountered in a previous
reading, the genitive often serves to replace a predicate nominative or accusative in negated clauses.
Gothic shares this feature with Old Church Slavonic.
Mark 4.9 provides examples of the Gothic use of the subjunctive: saei habái áusōna háusjandōna,
gaháusjái, literally 'he who has hearing ears, let him hear'. The latter verb, gaháusjái, shows the
subjunctive in a hortatory function. But note also the use of the present subjunctive habái in a clause
giving a general characteristic, rather than the indicative of Modern English.
Note also Mark 4.11: izwis atgiban ist kunnan rūna þiudangardjōs gudis, literally 'it is for you to know
the rune of the kingdom of God'. Here we nd an instance of the Gothic re ex of the word for 'rune'. The
word rūna, along with its cognates, is eventually charged with deep signi cance in Germanic languages,
and seemingly appropriate for the power of the Biblical statement made here. The meaning of its
cognates in Germanic ranges anywhere from 'counsel, advice' to 'secret counsel' to 'secret' to 'mystery', or
from 'secret counsel' to 'secret writings' to 'sacred writings' to 'writings' to 'runes'. Compare the Old Norse
phrase rúnuom inom reginkunnom 'runes of divine origin' in verse 80 of the Hávamál. This sentiment
is also present in the runic inscription in the Noleby Stone, c. 450 AD: runo fahi raginakudo tojeka 'I
prepare the suitable divine rune...'.
Of course runes as a writing system seem to have been in origin solely utilitarian, likely lacking any
particularly divine overtones. But over time in the North and West Germanic traditions, as the above
references illustrate, they came to develop a sort of mystique, if for no other reason than that they were
associated with the inspirational step that led to the initiation of writing in general. It is di cult to say to
what degree such mystique should be read into the Gothic term, since Wul la's translation actually
predates both the Hávamál and the Noleby Stone by quite a span of time. If we must then have recourse
to a translation of rūna devoid of mystical import, it is nevertheless a powerful term if understood as the
'privy counsel' due a noble from his advisors.
4:1- Jah aftra dugann laisjan at marein, jah galesun sik du imma manageins filu, swaswe ina
galeiþandan in skip gasitan in marein; jah alla so managei wiþra marein ana staþa was.

aftra -- adverb; <aftra> back, again -- again
dugann -- strong verb class 3; third person singular preterite of <duginnan> to begin -- he began
laisjan -- weak verb class 1; in nitive of <láisjan> to teach -- to teach
at -- preposition; <at> at, by, to, with, of -- by... side
marein -- weak noun, feminine; dative singular of <marei> sea, lake -- the sea
galesun -- strong verb class 5; third person plural preterite of <galisan> to gather -- was gathered #
the collocation galēsun sik is literally 'gathered themselves', and not strictly passive as the English
manageins -- weak noun, feminine; genitive singular of <managei> crowd, multitude -- multitude
swaswe -- conjunction; <swaswē> as, just as; so as; so as to, so that -- so that
ina -- personal pronoun; accusative singular masculine of <is> he, she, it -- he
galeiþandan -- strong verb class 1; accusative singular masculine of present participle of
<galeiþan> to go, travel -- entered... (and)
skip -- strong noun, masculine; accusative singular of <skip> ship -- a ship
gasitan -- strong verb class 5; in nitive of <gasitan> to sit -- sat
alla -- adjective; nominative singular feminine of <alls> all, every -- whole
managei -- weak noun, feminine; nominative singular of <managei> crowd, multitude -- multitude
of, for -- by
staþa -- strong noun, masculine; dative singular of <staþs> place; land -- the land
2 - jah laisida ins in gajukom manag jah qaþ im in laiseinai seinai:

laisida -- weak verb class 1; third person singular preterite of <láisjan> to teach -- he taught
gajukom -- weak noun, feminine; dative plural of <gajukō> parable -- parables
manag -- adjective used as substantive; accusative singular neuter of <manag> much, many --
many things
laiseinai -- strong noun, feminine; dative singular of <láiseins> doctrine, teaching -- doctrine
seinai -- possessive adjective; dative singular feminine of <seina> one's own -- his
3 - hauseiþ! sai, urrann sa saiands du saian fraiwa seinamma.
hauseiþ -- weak verb class 1; second person plural imperative of <háusjan> to hear, listen --
hearken
forth -- there went out
sa -- demonstrative used as article; nominative singular masculine of <sa, so, þata> this, that -- a
saiands -- strong verb class 7; nominative singular masculine of present participle of <saian> to
sow -- sower
saian -- strong verb class 7; in nitive of <saian> to sow -- sow
fraiwa -- strong noun, neuter; dative singular of <fráiw> seed -- (seed)
seinamma -- possessive adjective; dative singular neuter of <*seins> one's own -- (his)
4 - jah warþ, miþþanei saiso, sum raihtis gadraus faur wig, jah qemun fuglos jah fretun þata.

came to pass
miþþanei -- conjunction; <miþþanei> while, during, when -- as
saiso -- strong verb class 7; third person singular preterite of <saian> to sow -- he sowed
sum -- inde nite pronoun; nominative singular neuter of <sums> some, one -- some
raihtis -- adverb; <raíhtis> indeed -- ...
gadraus -- strong verb class 2; third person singular preterite of <gadriusan> to fall, fail -- fell
faur -- preposition; <faúr> for, before, by -- by
wig -- strong noun, masculine; accusative singular of <wigs> way, road, journey -- the way side
qemun -- strong verb class 4; third person plural preterite of <qiman> to come, arrive -- came
fuglos -- strong noun, masculine; nominative plural of <fugls> bird, fowl -- the fowls (of the air)
fretun -- strong verb class 4; third person plural preterite of <fraitan> to devour -- devoured... up
5 - anþaruþ-þan gadraus ana stainahamma, þarei ni habaida airþa managa, jah suns urrann, in
þizei ni habaida diupaizos airþos;
anþaruþ-þan -- adjective; nominative singular neuter of <anþar> other, another; second + enclitic
conjunction; <-uh> but, and, now, therefore + conjunction; <þan> when, as (long as); then, at that
time; but, and, however -- and some # the nal -h of -uh has assimilated to the initial þ- of þan
stainahamma -- adjective used as substantive; dative singular neuter of <stáinahs> stony -- stony
ground
þarei -- adverb; <þar> there + relative particle; <ei> that, so that; whether; (relative particle) --
where
habaida -- weak verb class 3; third person singular preterite of <haban> to have -- it had
airþa -- strong noun, feminine; accusative singular of <aírþa> earth -- earth
managa -- adjective; accusative singular feminine of <manag> much, many -- much
suns -- adverb; <suns> at once, soon -- immediately
forth -- it sprang up
þizei -- relative pronoun; genitive singular neuter of <saei> who, he who, which -- because
diupaizos -- adjective; genitive singular feminine of <diups> deep -- depth
airþos -- strong noun, feminine; genitive singular of <aírþa> earth -- of earth
6 - at sunnin þan urrinnandin ufbrann, jah unte ni habaida waurtins, gaþaursnoda.

sunnin -- weak noun, feminine/neuter; dative singular of <sunnō> sun -- the sun
þan -- conjunction; <þan> when, as (long as); then, at that time; but, and, however -- but
urrinnandin -- strong verb class 3; dative singular feminine of present participle of <urrinnan> to
rise, come from, go forth -- was up
ufbrann -- strong verb class 3; third person singular preterite of <ufbrinnan> to scorch -- it was
scorched
waurtins -- strong noun, feminine; accusative plural of <waúrts> root -- root
gaþaursnoda -- weak verb class 4; third person singular preterite of <gaþaúrsnan> to be withered
-- it withered away
7 - jah sum gadraus in þaurnuns; jah ufarstigun þai þaurnjus jah afƕapidedun þata, jah akran
ni gaf.

sum -- inde nite pronoun; nominative singular neuter of <sums> some, one -- some
in -- preposition; <in> into, towards; on account of; in, among, by -- among
þaurnuns -- strong noun, masculine; accusative plural of <þaúrnus> thorn -- thorns
ufarstigun -- strong verb class 1; third person plural preterite of <ufarsteigan> to spring up, to
mount up -- grew up
þaurnjus -- strong noun, masculine; nominative plural of <þaúrnus> thorn -- thorns
afƕapidedun -- weak verb class 1; third person plural preterite of <afƕapjan> to choke -- choked
akran -- strong noun, neuter; accusative singular of <akran> fruit -- fruit
gaf -- strong verb class 5; third person singular preterite of <giban> to give, yield -- it yielded
8 - jah sum gadraus in airþa goda jah gaf akran urrinnando jah wahsjando, jah bar ain ·l· jah
ain ·j· jah ain ·r·

sum -- inde nite pronoun; nominative singular neuter of <sums> some, one -- other
in -- preposition; <in> into, towards; on account of; in, among, by -- on
airþa -- strong noun, feminine; accusative singular of <aírþa> earth -- ground
goda -- adjective; accusative singular feminine of <gōþs, gōds> good -- good
gaf -- strong verb class 5; third person singular preterite of <giban> to give, yield -- did yield
akran -- strong noun, neuter; accusative singular of <akran> fruit -- fruit
urrinnando -- strong verb class 3; accusative singular neuter of present participle of <urrinnan> to
rise, come from, go forth -- that sprang up
wahsjando -- strong verb class 6; accusative singular neuter of present participle of <wahsjan> to
grow, to increase -- increased
bar -- strong verb class 4; third person singular preterite of <baíran> to bear, to carry -- brought
forth
ain -- inde nite pronoun; nominative singular neuter of <áins> one, some -- ...
·l· -- numeral; <þreis tigjus> thirty -- thirty
ain -- inde nite pronoun; nominative singular neuter of <áins> one, some -- some
·j· -- numeral; <saíhs tigjus> sixty -- sixty
ain -- inde nite pronoun; nominative singular neuter of <áins> one, some -- some
·r· -- numeral; <taíhuntēhund> hundred -- an hundred
9 - jah qaþ: saei habai ausona hausjandona, gahausjai.

qaþ -- strong verb class 5; third person singular preterite of <qiþan> to say, speak -- he said (unto
them)
saei -- relative pronoun; nominative singular masculine of <saei> who, he who, which -- he that
habai -- weak verb class 3; third person singular present subjunctive of <haban> to have -- hath
ausona -- weak noun, neuter; accusative plural of <áusō> ear -- ears
hausjandona -- weak verb class 1; accusative plural neuter of participle of <háusjan> to hear,
listen -- to hear
gahausjai -- weak verb class 1; third person singular present subjunctive of <gaháusjan> to hear --
let him hear
10 - iþ biþe warþ sundro, frehun ina þai bi ina miþ þaim twalibim þizos gajukons.

was
sundro -- adverb; <sundrō> alone, apart -- alone
frehun -- strong verb class 5; third person plural preterite of <fraíhnan> to ask, question -- asked
þai -- demonstrative used as person pronoun; nominative plural masculine of <sa, so, þata> this,
that -- they (that were)
after; near -- about
þaim -- demonstrative used as article; dative plural masculine of <sa, so, þata> this, that -- the
twalibim -- numeral; dative plural masculine of <twalif> twelve -- twelve
þizos -- demonstrative used as article; genitive singular feminine of <sa, so, þata> this, that -- of
the
gajukons -- weak noun, feminine; genitive singular of <gajukō> parable -- parable
11 - jah qaþ im: izwis atgiban ist kunnan runa þiudangardjos gudis, iþ jainaim þaim uta in
gajukom allata wairþiþ,

im -- personal pronoun; dative plural of <is> he, she, it -- unto them
izwis -- personal pronoun; dative plural masculine of <þu> thou, you -- unto you
atgiban -- strong verb class 5; nominative singular neuter of preterite participle of <atgiban> to
give, deliver -- given
kunnan -- preterite present verb; in nitive of <kunnan> to know -- to know
runa -- strong noun, feminine; accusative singular of <rūna> mystery, secret -- the mystery
þiudangardjos -- strong noun, feminine; genitive singular of <þiudangardi> kingdom -- of the
kingdom
jainaim -- demonstrative pronoun; dative plural masculine of <jáins> that -- unto them
þaim -- demonstrative used as relative pronoun; dative plural masculine of <sa, so, þata> this, that
-- that (are)
uta -- adverb; <ūta> out, without -- without
gajukom -- weak noun, feminine; dative plural of <gajukō> parable -- parables
allata -- adjective used as substantive; nominative singular neuter of <all> all, every -- all these
things
wairþiþ -- strong verb class 3; third person singular of <waírþan> to become, to happen -- are done
12- ei saiƕandans saiƕaina jah ni gaumjaina, jah hausjandans hausjaina jah ni fraþjaina, ibai
ƕan gawandjaina sik jah afletaindau im frawaurhteis.

saiƕandans -- strong verb class 5; nominative plural masculine of present participle of <saíƕan>
to see -- seeing
saiƕaina -- strong verb class 5; third person plural present subjunctive of <saíƕan> to see -- they
may see
gaumjaina -- weak verb class 1; third person plural present subjunctive of <gáumjan> to observe,
perceive, see -- perceive
hausjandans -- weak verb class 1; nominative plural masculine of present participle of <háusjan>
to hear, listen -- hearing
hausjaina -- weak verb class 1; third person plural present subjunctive of <hausjan> to hear -- they
may hear
fraþjaina -- strong verb class 6; third person plural present subjunctive of <fraþjan> to understand
-- understand
ibai -- conjunction; <ibái> lest, that not -- lest
ƕan -- adverb; <ƕan> at any time -- at any time
gawandjaina -- weak verb class 1; third person plural present subjunctive of <gawandjan> to bring
back, return -- they should be converted
sik -- re exive pronoun; accusative plural masculine of <sik> himself, herself, oneself -- ...
afletaindau -- strong verb class 7; third person plural passive present subjunctive of <aflētan> to
leave, to forgive -- should be forgiven
frawaurhteis -- strong noun, feminine; nominative plural of <frawaúrhts> sin -- (their) sins
Lesson Text
4:1 - Jah aftra dugann laisjan at marein, jah galesun sik du imma manageins filu, swaswe
ina galeiþandan in skip gasitan in marein; jah alla so managei wiþra marein ana staþa was.
2 - jah laisida ins in gajukom manag jah qaþ im in laiseinai seinai: 3 - hauseiþ! sai, urrann
sa saiands du saian fraiwa seinamma. 4 - jah warþ, miþþanei saiso, sum raihtis gadraus
faur wig, jah qemun fuglos jah fretun þata. 5 - anþaruþ-þan gadraus ana stainahamma,
þarei ni habaida airþa managa, jah suns urrann, in þizei ni habaida diupaizos airþos; 6 - at
sunnin þan urrinnandin ufbrann, jah unte ni habaida waurtins, gaþaursnoda. 7 - jah sum
gadraus in þaurnuns; jah ufarstigun þai þaurnjus jah afƕapidedun þata, jah akran ni gaf. 8
- jah sum gadraus in airþa goda jah gaf akran urrinnando jah wahsjando, jah bar ain ·l·
jah ain ·j· jah ain ·r· 9 - jah qaþ: saei habai ausona hausjandona, gahausjai. 10 - iþ biþe
warþ sundro, frehun ina þai bi ina miþ þaim twalibim þizos gajukons. 11 - jah qaþ im:
izwis atgiban ist kunnan runa þiudangardjos gudis, iþ jainaim þaim uta in gajukom allata
wairþiþ, 12 - ei saiƕandans saiƕaina jah ni gaumjaina, jah hausjandans hausjaina jah ni
fraþjaina, ibai ƕan gawandjaina sik jah afletaindau im frawaurhteis.
Translation
4:1 And he began again to teach by the sea side: and there was gathered unto him a great multitude,
so that he entered into a ship, and sat in the sea; and the whole multitude was by the sea on the
land. 2 And he taught them many things by parables, and said unto them in his doctrine,
3 Hearken; Behold, there went out a sower to sow: 4 And it came to pass, as he sowed, some fell by
the way side, and the fowls of the air came and devoured it up. 5 And some fell on stony ground,
where it had not much earth; and immediately it sprang up, because it had no depth of earth: 6 But
when the sun was up, it was scorched; and because it had no root, it withered away. 7 And some fell
among thorns, and the thorns grew up, and choked it, and it yielded no fruit. 8 And other fell on good
ground, and did yield fruit that sprang up and increased; and brought forth, some thirty, and some
sixty, and some an hundred. 9 And he said unto them, He that hath ears to hear, let him hear.
10 And when he was alone, they that were about him with the twelve asked of him the parable. 11
And he said unto them, Unto you it is given to know the mystery of the kingdom of God: but unto
them that are without, all these things are done in parables: 12 That seeing they may see, and not
perceive; and hearing they may hear, and not understand; lest at any time they should be converted,
and their sins should be forgiven them.
Grammar
26 The Third Strong Conjugation

The third strong conjugation comprises verbs whose present system generally shows the vowel i
followed by a resonant (l,r,m,n) and one other consonant. The historical evolution of these verbs is
shown in the chart below.
Class Root Present Past Sg. Past Pl. Past Part. Meaning
III Shape

PIE (K)VRC e o zero zero
*bhéndhō *bhóndha *bhndhmé *bhndhón 'tie'
*wérbō *wórba *wrbmé *wrbón

PGmc (K)VNC i a u u
*bindu (EG *band *bundum *bundan 'tie'

*binda)

(K)VLC e/i a u (EG u/o) o (EG u/o)
*werpu (EG *warp *wurpum (EG *worpan 'throw'

*werpa) *worpum)

Goth. i a u u
binda band bundum bundans 'bind'

aí [e] a aú [o] aú [o]
waírpa warp waúrpum waúrpans 'throw'

In the above, R stands for any resonant l,r,m,n. N stands only for the nasals of this set m,n, while L
stands for the non-nasals l,r. The resulting ablaut pattern characterizing the third strong conjugation in
Gothic thus falls into two groups.
IIIa i a u u
IIIb aí [e] a aú [o] aú [o]
The difference in ablaut patterns is conditioned by the consonant following the vowel. In the present, the
e generally changes to i, except when followed by a non-nasal resonant. Likewise in the past plural and
past participle, u generally appears, except when replaced by aú [o] before a non-nasal resonant.
The verb binda 'bind', with prinicpal parts binda -- band -- bundum -- bundans, serves to illustrate the
forms of the third conjugation. The forms are as follows.
Class III Active Mediopassive

Present
1 Sg. binda bindáu bindada bindáidáu

2 bindis bindáis bind bindaza bindáizáu
3 bindiþ bindái bindadáu bindada bindáidáu

1 Du. bindōs bindáiwa
2 bindats bindáits bindats

1 Pl. bindam bindáima bindam bindanda bindáindáu

2 bindiþ bindáiþ bindiþ bindanda bindáindáu
3 bindand bindáina bindandáu bindanda bindáindáu

Past
1 Sg. band bundjáu
2 banst bundeis
3 band bundi

1 Du. bundu bundeiwa
2 bunduts bundeits

1 Pl. bundum bundeima
2 bunduþ bundeiþ
3 bundun bundeina

In nitive bindan

Pres. Ptc. bindands

Past Ptc. bundans
27 The Fourth Strong Conjugation

The fourth strong conjugation comprises verbs whose root ends in a single resonant l,r,m,n. The
historical evolution of these verbs is shown in the chart below.
Class Root Present Past Past Pl. Past Meaning

IV Shape Sg. Part.

PIE (K)VR e o ē zero
*bhérō *bhóra *bhērmé *bhrón 'carry'

PGmc (K)VR e/i a ē o (EG

o/u)
*beru (EG *bar *bērum *boran 'carry'
*bera)

Goth. i / aí [e] a ē u / aú [o]
qima qam qēmum qumans 'come'
baíra bar bērum baúrans 'bear'

In the above, R stands for any resonant l,r,m,n. The resulting ablaut pattern characterizing the third
strong conjugation in Gothic thus becomes the following.
IVa i a ē u
IVb aí [e] a ē aú [o]
The difference between Classes IVa and IVb lies in the vowels of the present system and of the past
participle stems.
The verbs brikan 'break' and trudan 'tread' follow the ablaut pattern of the fourth class though their roots
do not end in a resonant.
The verb baíran 'bear, carry', with prinicpal parts baíra -- bar -- bērum -- baúrans, serves to illustrate the
forms of the fourth conjugation. The forms are as follows.
Class IV Active Mediopassive

Present
1 Sg. baíra baíráu baírada baíráidáu

2 baíris baíráis baír baíraza baíráizáu
3 baíriþ baírái baíradáu baírada baíráidáu

1 Du. baírōs baíráiwa
2 baírats baíráits baírats

1 Pl. baíram baíráima baíram baíranda baíráindáu

2 baíriþ baíráiþ baíriþ baíranda baíráindáu
3 baírand baíráina baírandáu baíranda baíráindáu

Past
1 Sg. bar bērjáu
2 bart bēreis
3 bar bēri

1 Du. bēru bēreiwa
2 bēruts bēreits

1 Pl. bērum bēreima
2 bēruþ bēreiþ
3 bērun bēreina

In nitive baíran

Pres. Ptc. baírands

Past Ptc. baúrans
28 The Nominative Case

The nominative case is the case of the subject of a nite verb. If the verb is such that its meaning equates
predicate to subject -- e.g. be, become, seem, appear -- then the predicate also takes the nominative case.
For example, ik im sō usstass jah libáins 'I am the resurrection and the life' (John 11.25); jah was drus
is mikils 'and the fall of it was great' (Matthew 8.27); ni ei weis gakusanái þugkáima 'not that we
should appear approved' (II Corinthians 13.7). Similarly, if a passive verb is such that it equates predicate
to subject -- e.g. be named, be called, be considered, be deemed, be made -- then the predicate takes the
nominative case. For example, ni þatei... ju garaíhts gadōmiþs sijáu 'not as though... I were already
deemed right' (Philippians 3.12); gasatiþs im ik mērjans 'I am ordained a preacher' (I Timothy 2.7).
With verbs meaning name or call, Gothic often employs the nominative where one might otherwise expect
the accusative or another oblique case. For example, jah gasatida Seimōna namō Paítrus 'And Simon
he surnamed Peter' (Mark 3.16), where the Greek employs the accusative; fram þizái namnidōn bimáit
in leika handuwaúrht 'by that which is called circumcision in the esh made by hands' (Ephesians 2.11),
where þizái namnidōn is a dative expression modifying the nominative bimáit... handuwaúrht, though
in the Greek noun and modi ers are all in the same case. The verbs wisan 'be' and waírþan 'become'
often employ the preposition du with the dative in place of a predicate nominative.
The nominative case is used in one, possibly two, instances for an absolute construction. In these
constructions, a noun is paired with a past participle and forms a unit grammatically distinct (absolute)
from the remaining constructions of the sentence. Such absolute constructions are generally in the
dative, and sometimes in the accusative, case in Gothic. However in some instances such pairings occur
in the nominative, though the noun so modi ed is not the apparent subject of the nite verb of the main
clause. The clearest example is jah waúrþans dags gatils, þan Herodis mela gabaúrþáis seináizōs
nahtamat waúrhta 'And when a convenient day was come, that Herod on his birthday made a supper...',
more literally 'and a convenient day having come,...' (Mark 6.21). Another possible instance is urrann sa
dáuþa gabundans handuns jah fotuns faskjam jah wlits is auralja bibundans 'And he that was
dead came forth, bound hand and foot with graveclothes: and his face was bound about with a napkin',
literally 'and his face bound about...' (John 11.44). This last phrase, however, translates a Greek nite verb
form peridédeto, and may therefore be an instance of an omitted copula.
29 The Accusative Case

The direct object of a transitive verb, nite or non- nite, is placed in the accusative case. For example,
aþþan ik in watin izwis dáupja 'I indeed baptize you with water' (Matthew 3.11); jabái áuk frijōþ þans
frijōndans izwis áinans, ƕō mizdōnō habáiþ? 'For if ye love them which love you, what reward have
ye?', more literally 'For if ye love those loving you alone, what of rewards have ye?' (Matthew 5.46). Note in
the last example that þans frijōndans is the accusative object of the nite form frijōþ, while izwis
áinans is the accusative object of the participle frijōndans.
Certain impersonal verbal constructions take the accusative. The verbs grēdōn 'be greedy, hungry',
huggrjan 'hunger', þaúrsjan 'thirst' take the accusative of the person affected. For example, jabái grēdō
fijand þeinana, mat gif imma 'if thine enemy hunger, give him food', literally 'if it hunger thine enemy'
(Romans 12.20); þana gaggandan du mis ni huggreiþ, jah þana galáubjandan du mis ni þaúrseiþ
ƕanhun 'he that cometh to me shall never hunger; and he that believeth on me shall never thirst', more
literally 'it shall never hunger one coming to me; and it shall never thirst one believing in me' (John 6.35).
The phrase kar' ist or kara 'it concerns' takes the accusative of the person and genitive of the thing. For
example, jah ni kar' ist ina þizē lambē 'and careth not for the sheep', literally 'it concerns him not of the
sheep' (John 10.13). The phrase skula wisan 'be guilty, be debtor' takes an accusative of the thing owed:
aflēt uns þatei skulans sijáima 'forgive us our debts', literally 'forgive us that which we owe' (Matthew
6.12).
Occasionally either transitive or intransitive verbs may take an internal or cognate accusative. An internal
accusative is any direct object reiterating or specifying the basic meaning of the verb; a cognate
accusative futher stipulates that the noun in the accusative be cognate with the verb itself. Consider the
following examples: ei waúrkjáima waúrstwa guþs 'that we might work the works of God' (John 6.28);
háifst þō gōdōn háifstida 'I have fought a good ght' (II Timothy 4.7); jah ōhtēdun sis agis mikil 'and
they feared exceedingly', literally 'and they feared a great fear' (Mark 4.41); náiteinōs, swa managōs
swaswē wajamērjand 'and blasphemes wherewith soever they shall blaspheme', literally 'and
blasphemes, as many as they shall blaspheme' (Mark 3.28).
Some verbs in Gothic take a double accusative. The following are some situations in which this occurs:
(1) Personal Object + Predicate: Examples are sō

sunja frijans izwis briggiþ 'the truth shall make you
free' (John 8.32); þanzei jah apaústuluns namnida 'whom also he named apostles' (Luke 6.13);
motarjōs garaíhtana domidēdun guþ 'the publicans justi ed God', literally 'the publicans deemed God
right' (Luke 7.29).
(2) Personal Object + Internal Accusative: Examples are ƕa áuk bōteiþ mannan 'for what shall it pro t
a man' (Mark 8.36); láisida ins in gajukōm manag 'he taught them many things by parables' (Mark 4.2).
There are other examples that may be considered as belonging to the category discussed next.
(3) Personal + Material Object: Some examples overlap with the category above. Examples are sa izwis
láiseiþ allata 'he shall teach you all (things)' (John 14.26); wileima ei þatei þuk bidjōs táujáis uggkis
'we would that thou shouldest do for us whatsoever we shall desire', literally '...whatsoever we shall ask
thee' (Mark 10.35).
Viewed more generally, the accusative denotes extent in time or space, usually leading to some eventual
endpoint or terminus. A few examples are alla naht þaírharbáidjandans 'having toiled all night' (Luke
5.5); jah qinō wisandei in runa blōþis jēra twalif 'And a woman having an issue of blood twelve years'
(Luke 8.43); manag áuk mēl frawalw ina 'for many a time it had caught him' (Luke 8.29); qēmun dagis
wig 'they went a day's journey' (Luke 2.44); jah jabái ƕaw þuk ananáuþjái rasta áina, gaggáis miþ
imma twōs 'and if anyone compel thee (to go) one mile, go with him two' (Matthew 5.41).
Related to the above notion of extent is the so-called accusative of speci cation, or in the terminology of
the classical languages, the accusative or respect. The accusative may be used to limit the scope of the
surrounding semantic environment. Consider the following examples: jah urrann sa dáuþa gabundans
handuns jah fotuns faskjam 'and the dead man came forth, bound hands and feet with bandages'
(John 11.44); standáiþ nu uf gaúrdanái hupins izwarans sunjái 'stand therefore, girt (about) your
loins with truth' (Ephesians 6.14).
The accusative, like the more typical dative and very rarely the nominative, is used in absolute
constructions. In this, a noun or pronoun together with a particple form a phrase grammatically distinct
from the main clause, but are together taken as nearly equivalent in sense to a clause with a nite verb.
Consider the following: iþ þuk táujandan armaiōn ni witi hleidumei þeina, ƕa táujiþtaíhswo þeina
'But when thou doest alms, let not thy left hand know what thy right hand doeth', more literally 'you doing
alms, let not...' (Matthew 6.3). This accusative construction translates a genitive absolute in the Greek
text, as does the accusative construction in the next example: jah atgaggandeininn daúhtar
Herodiadins jah plinsjandein jah galeikandein Heroda jah þáim miþanakumbjandam, qaþ
þiudans du þizái máujái 'And when the daughter of the (said) Herodias came in, and danced, and
pleased Herod and them that sat with him, the king said unto the damsel', literally 'the daughter... coming
in, and dancing, and pleasing..., the king said...' (Mark 6.22).
30 The In nitive
30.1 Uses of the In nitive
The in nitive may appear as subject of a clause. In such circumstances the in nitive may stand alone, be
accompanied by the preposition du, or be modi ed by the article þata. Consider the following examples:
ƕáiwa aglu ist þáim hugjandam afar faíháu in þiudangardja guþs galeiþan 'how hard is it for them
that trust in riches to enter into the kingdom of God' (Mark 10.24); iþ þata du sitan af taíhswō meinái
aíþþáu af hleidumein nist mein du giban 'But to sit on my right hand and on my left hand is not mine
to give' (Mark 10.40); ƕa ist þata us dáuþáim usstandan 'what the rising from the dead is' (Mark 9.10).
The in nitive may appear as object of another verb. The in nitive is often complementary to the
governing verb, taking the same subject. For example, jah sōkidēdun ina undgreipan 'And they sought
to lay hold on him' (Mark 12.12); untē ni magt áin tagl ƕeit aíþþáu swart gatáujan 'because thou
canst not make one hair white or black' (Matthew 5.36); jah gahaíháitun imma faíhu giban 'and
promised to give him money' (Mark 14.11).
A complementary in nitive may also occur with adjectives or nouns. For example, manwus im qiman at
izwis 'I am ready to come to you' (II Corinthians 12.14); lustu habands andlētnan jah miþ Xristáu
wisan 'having a desire to depart, and to be with Christ' (Philippians 1.23).
The in nitive may be used to express purpose. This often occurs in conjunction with verbs of motion. The
in nitive may stand alone, or it may follow the preposition du. Consider the following examples: jah
gagga káusjan þans 'and I go to prove them' (Luke 14.19); ni qam gataíran ak usfulljan 'I am not come
to destroy, but to ful l' (Matthew 5.17); sái urrann sa saiands du saian fráiwa seinamma 'Behold, there
went out a sower to sow his seed' (Mark 4.3).
The in nitive may be used with the conjunctions swaswē and swaei to express result. The subject of
such an in nitive generally takes the accusative case. For example, jah sái wēgs mikils warþ in
marein, swaswē þata skip gahuliþ waírþan fram wēgim 'And, behold, there arose a great tempest in
the sea, insomuch that the ship was covered with the waves', literally '... so as for the ship to become
covered...' (Matthew 8.24); jah galēsun sik du imma manageins filu, swaswē ina galeiþandan in
skip gasitan in marein 'and there was gathered unto him a great multitude, so that he entered into a
ship, and sat in the sea', literally '... so as for him entering ... to sit...' (Mark 4.1); ganah þamma
swaleikamma andabeit þata fram managizam, swaei þata andaneiþō izwis máis fragiban jah
gaþláihan 'Su cient to such a man is this punishment, which was in icted of many. So that contrariwise
ye ought rather to forgive him, and comfort him', literally '... so as for you... to forgive... and to comfort...' (II
Corinthians 2.6-7).
30.2 Use of Cases with the In nitive

The subject of an in nitive generally takes the accusative case. The accusative with in nitive is often
equivalent to a clause with nite verb in Modern English. Such a construction may stand as object of a
verb, as in the following examples: in þizei háusidēduþ ina siukan 'because that ye had heard that he
had been sick', literally '... had heard him to be sick' (Philippians 2.26); ƕana qiþand mik mans wisan
'Whom do men say that I am', literally 'Whom do men say me to be' (Mark 8.27). An accusative and
in nitive construction may also stand as the subject of a verb: jah warþ afsláuþnan allans 'and it
happened that they were all amazed', literally 'and (for) them to be amazed happened' (Luke 4.36); iþ
azētizō ist himin jah aírþa hindarleiþan þáu witōdis áinana writ gadriusan 'And it is easier for
heaven and earth to pass, than one tittle of the law to fail' (Luke 16.17).
The subject of an in nitive may also take the dative case. This generally occurs when the in nitive is itself
the subject of the clause. For example, gōþ þus ist hamfamma in libáin galeiþan, þáu twos handuns
habandin galeiþan 'it is better for thee to enter into life maimed, than having two hands to go into hell'
(Mark 9.43); jah warþ þaírhgaggan imma sabbatō daga þaírh atisk 'And it came to pass, that he went
through the corn elds on the sabbath day', literally 'and it happened for him to go...' (Mark 2.23). Note
also ƕáiwa aglu ist þáim hugjandam afar faíháu in þiudangardja guþs galeiþan 'how hard is it for
them that trust in riches to enter into the kingdom of God' (Mark 10.24), quoted in the previous section.
Gothic Online
Lesson 7
Christianity among the Goths
Our major document in the Gothic language is a translation of the Christian Bible. But this translation
gives no information as to how Christianity was received by the Goths. Ultimately it is clear that
Christianity took hold among the Gothic tribes, but to see its development in the early stages after the
mission of Wul la (Ul la), we must have recourse to other historical documents.
The Ecclesiastical History of Sozomen

Sozomen was a church historian of the 5th century. His work the Ecclesiastical History was likely
dependent on the works of several predecessors, in particular the historians Socrates, Eunapius, and
Philostorgius. According to Sozomen, the attacks of the Huns led the Goths to send an embassy to the
Roman emperor, asking permission to resettle in Roman territory in return for ghting alongside the
Romans when the need arose: the leader of this embassy, Sozomen records, was Wul la. Subsequent
events resulted in a division among the Goths, the two major groups led by Athanaric and Fritigern,
respectively. As the two fought each other, Fritigern asked the Roman emperor Valens for assistance. In
Thrace the combined forces of Fritigern's Goths and Valens' Roman legions defeated Athanric. Out of
gratitude for his aid, Fritigern offered to adopt the emperor's religion, and ordered those under his rule to
adopt Christianity as well.
It seems however that Gothic adoption of Christianity was not unanimously supported. The passage
below describes the trials which befell the Christians during the time period shortly after Fritigern's
conversion (translated in Heather and Matthews, 1991):
At that time, there were many among the subjects of Fritigern who bore witness through Christ and suffered
death. Athanaric was annoyed that those under his power also had been persuaded by Ulphilas to become
Christians, and subjected many of them to many forms of punishment because the ancestral religion was
threatened by innovation...
It seems that Athanaric was determined to undermine the authority of Fritigern after suffering a defeat at
his hands. But in a more general perspective, a reiks such as Athanaric was charged to uphold older
traditions, so that the Christians were felt to be a challenge to the authority of the reiks. Sozomen
continues:
It is said that a wooden image was placed on a wagon, and that those instructed by Athanaric to undertake
this task wheeled it round to the tent of any of those who were denounced as Christians and ordered them to
do homage and sacri ce to it; and the tents of those who refused to do so were burned, with the people
inside.

And I have heard that an even more dreadful suffering than this occurred, when a large number of Christians
who refused to yield to attempts to compel them to sacri ce by force, took refuge in the tent which formed
their church in that place, and all -- men and women also, some of whom led their little children by the hand,
others with new-born babies feeding at the breast -- were destroyed when the pagans set re to it.
The Passion of St. Saba the Goth

Another text crucial to our understanding of the Gothic reception of Christianity is the Passion of St. Saba
the Goth. The text survives in 10th century manuscripts, but the story itself dates the martyrdom of St.
Saba to April 12, 372 AD. The story tells us that Saba was a Goth living in Gothic territory, and had been a
Christian since childhood. He had no possessions except for the bare necessities.
As the story goes, Christians were compelled to eat esh sacri ced according to Gothic tribal customs,
and therefore unclean to Christians. At the level of the village, it seems that Christianity could be tolerated,
as long as it was not practiced overtly (translated sections are quoted from Heather and Matthews, 1991):
[W]hen the chief men in Gothia began to be moved against the Christians, compelling them to eat sacri cial
meat, it occurred to some of the pagans in the village in which Saba lived to make the Christians who
belonged to them eat publicly before the persecutors meat that had not been sacri ced in place of that which
had, hoping thereby to preserve the innocence of their own people and at the same time to deceive the
persecutors. Learning this, the blessed Saba not only himself refused to touch the forbidden meat but
advanced into the midst of the gathering and bore witness, saying to everyone, 'If anyone eats of that meat,
this man cannot be a Christian', and he prevented them all from falling into the Devil's snare. For this, the men
who had devised the deception threw him out of the village, but after some time allowed him to return.
Saba was banished for his vehement espousal of Christianity, since being so outspoken over such
matters threatened to upset the traditional social order of the village.
Saba eventually returned. Later, when a reiks visited from elsewhere, village nobles attempted to conceal
the fact that any Christians lived in the village, since such village members would be an affront to the
authority of the reiks. Saba would not conceal his beliefs and spoke out, whereupon the village elders
protected other Christians by saying that Saba was the only one in the village. The reiks mocked Saba for
his poverty, and again Saba was cast out.
Later Saba, along with a prebyter Sansalas, was taken captive by a gang under the leadership of Atharid.
They tortured Saba late into the night and then left him. He was freed by a slave woman, but he refused to
ee. He was bound again and cursed Atharid, who subsequently ordered him to be put to death. The story
continues:
Those appointed to perform this lawless act left the presbyter Sansalas in bonds, and took hold of Saba and
led him away to drown him in the river called the Mousaios.... When they came to the banks of the river, his
guards said to one another, 'Come now, let us set free this fool. How will Atharidus ever nd out?' But the
blessed Saba said to them, 'Why do you waste time talking nonsense and not do what you were told to?...'
Then they took him down to the water, still thanking and glorifying God..., threw him in and, pressing a beam
against his neck, pushed him to the bottom and held him there.
So died Saba, though subverting at every moment the attempts of others to help him. It thus appears that
none at the village level were involved in the decision-making process for the kuni, under the direction of
the reiks. At this lower level, Christianity was tolerated, and converted relatives and friends were
concealed and assisted by their fellow villagers and family members. It was apparently at the level of the
kuni and the reiks that Christianity threatened the socio-political order, and it was from this level that
persecution was enacted.
The following passage is Mark 9:2-13, the Trans guration. We nd in Mark 9.4 an example of a
periphrastic construction showing progressive aspect: wēsun rōdjandans 'they were talking'. Though
this parallels the Greek ēsan sullalountes, it seems that it was a natural construction within Germanic, as
the Modern English translation illustrates. Though Old English texts are only attested much later than the
Gothic Bible, such a construction is nevertheless as old as Beowulf itself: Swa se secg hwata
secggende wæs laðra spella 'So was the valiant warrior speaking of terrible tales' (B.3028).
In Mark 9.5 we nd the word hlijans 'tabernacles'. This word only appears here, in the accusative plural.
The Proto-Germanic antecedent *hle-wa- gives Old Norse hlé, Old English hlēo, Old Frisian hlī, Old
Saxon hleo, all meaning 'protection'. This even nds its way into Modern English nautical jargon:
lee(ward).
Mark 9.9 gives an illustration of what, in grammars of the classical languages Greek and Latin, is typically
termed the sequence of tenses: anabáuþ im ei mannhun ni spillōdēdeina 'he charged them that they
should tell no man'. The direct command would have employed a present subjunctive or imperative.
However when the indirect command is introduced by a past tense verb, the present subjunctive or
imperative is rendered by a past subjunctive. A similar situation occurs in Modern English: the future
tense in 'He will go home' is restructured as a past subjunctive (or really a past tense of the present 'will')
when subordinate to a past tense main verb, as in 'He said that he would go home.'
9:2 - jah afar dagans saihs ganam Iesus Paitru jah Iakobu jah Iohannen jah ustauh ins ana
fairguni hauh sundro ainans: jah inmaidida sik in andwairþja ize.

saihs -- numeral; <saíhs> six -- six
ganam -- strong verb class 4; third person singular preterite of <ganiman> to take to oneself, to
take with oneself -- taketh with him
Paitru -- strong proper noun, masculine; accusative singular of <Paítrus> Peter -- Peter
Iakobu -- strong proper noun, masculine; accusative singular of <Iakōbus> Jacob, James -- James
Iohannen -- strong proper noun, masculine; accusative singular of <Iōhannēs> John -- John
ustauh -- strong verb class 2; third person singular preterite of <ustiuhan> to lead out; to complete
-- leadeth... up
fairguni -- strong noun, neuter; accusative singular of <faírguni> mountain -- mountain
hauh -- adjective; accusative singular neuter of <háuhs> high -- an high
sundro -- adverb; <sundrō> alone, apart -- apart
ainans -- adjective; accusative plural masculine of <áins> alone, only -- by themselves
inmaidida -- weak verb class 1; third person singular preterite of <inmáidjan> to trans gure -- he
was trans gured
andwairþja -- strong noun, neuter; dative singular of <andwaírþi> face, presence -- before
ize -- personal pronoun; genitive plural masculine of <is> he, she, it -- them
3 - jah wastjos is waurþun glitmunjandeins, ƕeitos swe snaiws, swaleikos swe wullareis ana
airþai ni mag gaƕeitjan.

wastjos -- strong noun, feminine; nominative plural of <*wasti> garment -- raiment
waurþun -- strong verb class 3; third person plural preterite of <waírþan> to become, to happen --
became
glitmunjandeins -- weak verb class 1; nominative plural feminine of present participle of
<glitmunjan> to glitter, to shine -- shining
ƕeitos -- adjective; nominative plural feminine of <ƕeits> white -- (exceeding) white
swe -- adverb; <swē> like, as, just as; so that; about -- ...
snaiws -- strong noun, masculine; nominative singular of <snáiws> snow -- snow
swaleikos -- adjective; nominative plural feminine of <swaleiks> such -- as
swe -- adverb; <swē> like, as, just as; so that; about -- so as
wullareis -- strong noun, masculine; nominative singular of <wullareis> one who whitens wool,
fuller -- a fuller
mag -- preterite present verb; third person singular of <magan> to be able -- can
gaƕeitjan -- weak verb class 1; in nitive of <gaƕeitjan> to whiten -- white (them)
4 - jah ataugiþs warþ im Helias miþ Mose; jah wesun rodjandans miþ Iesua.

ataugiþs -- weak verb class 1; nominative singular masculine of preterite participle of <atáugjan>
to show, to appear -- appeared
there
Helias -- proper noun, masculine; nominative singular of <Hēlias> Elias -- Elias
Mose -- strong proper noun, masculine; dative singular of <Mōsēs> Moses -- Moses
wesun -- strong verb class 5; third person plural preterite of <wisan> to be -- they were
rodjandans -- weak verb class 1; nominative plural masculine of present participle of <rōdjan> to
speak -- speaking
Iesua -- strong proper noun, masculine; dative singular of <Iēsus> Jesus -- Jesus
5 - jah andhafjands Paitrus qaþ du Iesua: rabbei, goþ ist unsis her wisan, jah gawaurkjam
hlijans þrins, þus ainana jah Mose ainana jah ainana Helijin.

<andhafjan> to answer -- answered and
Paitrus -- strong proper noun, masculine; nominative singular of <Paítrus> Peter -- Peter
Iesua -- strong proper noun, masculine; dative singular of <Iēsus> Jesus -- Jesus
rabbei -- noun, masculine; vocative singular of <rabbei> rabbi, master, teacher -- master
goþ -- adjective; nominative singular neuter of <gōþs, gōds> good -- good
ist -- strong verb class 5; athematic third person singular present of <wisan> to be -- it is
unsis -- personal pronoun; dative plural of <ik> I -- for us
her -- adverb; <hēr> here -- here
wisan -- strong verb class 5; in nitive of <wisan> to be -- to be
gawaurkjam -- weak verb class 1; rst person plural imperative of <gawaúrkjan> to make -- let us
make
hlijans -- noun, masculine; accusative plural of <*hlija> tent, tabernacle -- tabernacles # or possibly
nominative *hleis
þrins -- numeral; accusative plural masculine of <*þreis> three -- three
þus -- personal pronoun; dative singular of <þu> thou, you -- for thee
ainana -- numeral; accusative singular masculine of <áins> one -- one
Mose -- strong proper noun, masculine; dative singular of <Mōsēs> Moses -- for Moses
Helijin -- proper noun, masculine; dative singular of <Hēlias> Elias -- for Elias
6 - ni auk wissa ƕa rodidedi; wesun auk usagidai.

wissa -- preterite present verb; third person singular preterite of <*witan> to know -- he wist
ƕa -- interrogative pronoun; accusative singular neuter of <ƕas> who, what -- what
rodidedi -- weak verb class 1; third person singular preterite subjunctive of <rōdjan> to speak -- to
say # literally 'what he should say'
wesun -- strong verb class 5; third person plural preterite of <wisan> to be -- they were
usagidai -- weak verb class 1; nominative plural masculine of preterite participle of <usagjan> to
frighten, to terrify -- (sore) afraid
7 - jah warþ milhma ufarskadwjands im, jah qam stibna us þamma milhmin: sa ist sunus meins
sa liuba, þamma hausjaiþ.

there was
milhma -- weak noun, masculine; nominative singular of <milhma> cloud -- a cloud
ufarskadwjands -- weak verb class 1; nominative singular masculine of present participle of
<ufarskadwjan> to over-shadow -- that overshadowed
qam -- strong verb class 4; third person singular preterite of <qiman> to come, arrive -- came
stibna -- strong noun, feminine; nominative singular of <stibna> voice -- a voice... (saying)
us -- preposition; <us> out, out of, from -- out of
the
milhmin -- weak noun, masculine; dative singular of <milhma> cloud -- cloud
sa -- demonstrative used as pronoun; nominative singular masculine of <sa, so, þata> this, that --
this
sunus -- strong noun, masculine; nominative singular of <sunus> son -- son
meins -- possessive adjective; nominative singular masculine of <meins> my, mine -- my
sa -- demonstrative used as article; nominative singular masculine of <sa, so, þata> this, that -- ...
liuba -- adjective; nominative singular masculine of <liufs> dear, beloved -- beloved
þamma -- demonstrative used as person pronoun; dative singular masculine of <sa, so, þata> this,
that -- him
hausjaiþ -- weak verb class 1; second person plural present subjunctive of <háusjan> to hear,
listen -- hear
8 - jah anaks insaiƕandans ni þanaseiþs ainohun gaseƕun, alja Iesu ainana miþ sis.

anaks -- adverb; <anaks> at once, suddenly -- suddenly
insaiƕandans -- strong verb class 5; nominative plural masculine of present participle of
<insaíƕan> to look upon, regard -- when they had looked round about
þanaseiþs -- adverb; <þanaseiþs> further, still -- any more
ainohun -- inde nite pronoun; accusative singular masculine of <áinshun> (always with negative)
(no) one, (n)one -- man
alja -- preposition; <alja> than, except, unless, save; except -- save
Iesu -- strong proper noun, masculine; accusative singular of <Iēsus> Jesus -- Jesus
ainana -- adjective; accusative singular masculine of <áins> alone, only -- only
sis -- re exive pronoun; dative of <sik> himself, herself, oneself -- themselves
9- dalaþ þan atgaggandam im af þamma fairgunja, anabauþ im ei mannhun ni spillodedeina

þatei gaseƕun, niba biþe sunus mans us dauþaim usstoþi.
dalaþ -- adverb; <dalaþ> down -- down

atgaggandam -- strong verb class 7; dative plural masculine present participle of <atgaggan> to
come, go -- as... came # dative absolute
fairgunja -- strong noun, neuter; dative singular of <faírguni> mountain -- mountain
anabauþ -- strong verb class 2; third person singular preterite of <anabiudan> to command, order
-- he charged
mannhun -- inde nite pronoun; dative singular masculine of <mannahun> (always with negative)
spillodedeina -- weak verb class 2; third person plural preterite subjunctive of <spillōn> to tell,
relate -- they should tell
þatei -- relative pronoun; accusative singular neuter of <saei> who, he who, which -- what things
gaseƕun -- strong verb class 5; third person plural preterite of <gasaíƕan> to see -- they had seen
niba -- conjunction; <nibái (niba)> unless, except -- till
biþe -- conjunction; <biþē> while, when, after that, as soon as; then, thereupon -- ...
sunus -- strong noun, masculine; nominative singular of <sunus> son -- the Son
mans -- irregular noun, masculine; genitive singular of <manna> man -- of man
dauþaim -- adjective used as substantive; dative plural masculine of <dáuþs> dead -- the dead
usstoþi -- strong verb class 6; third person singular preterite subjunctive of <usstandan> to stand
up, rise -- has risen
10 - jah þata waurd habaidedun du sis misso sokjandans: ƕa ist þata us dauþaim usstandan?

þata -- demonstrative used as adjective; accusative singular neuter of <sa, so, þata> this, that --
that
waurd -- strong noun, neuter; accusative singular of <waúrd> word -- saying
habaidedun -- weak verb class 3; third person plural preterite of <haban> to have -- they kept
du -- preposition; <du> to, towards; against; in -- with
sis -- re exive pronoun; dative plural masculine of <sik> himself, herself, oneself -- themselves
misso -- adverb; <missō> reciprocally, the one the other, one to another -- one with another
sokjandans -- weak verb class 1; nominative plural masculine of present participle of <sōkjan> to
seek, ask -- questioning
ƕa -- interrogative pronoun; nominative singular neuter of <ƕas> who, what -- what
ist -- strong verb class 5; athematic third person singular of <wisan> to be -- should mean
þata -- article; nominative singular neuter of <þata> the -- the
dauþaim -- adjective used as substantive; dative plural masculine of <dáuþs> dead -- the dead
usstandan -- strong verb class 6; in nitive of <usstandan> to stand up, rise -- rising
11 - jah frehun ina qiþandans: unte qiþand þai bokarjos þatei Helias skuli qiman faurþis?

frehun -- strong verb class 5; third person plural preterite of <fraíhnan> to ask, question -- they
asked
qiþandans -- strong verb class 5; nominative plural masculine of present participle of <qiþan> to
say, speak -- saying
unte -- conjunction; <untē> for, because, since, until -- why
qiþand -- strong verb class 5; third person plural of <qiþan> to say, speak -- say
bokarjos -- strong noun, masculine; nominative plural of <bōkareis> scribe -- scribes
skuli -- preterite present verb; third person singular present subjunctive of <*skulan> to owe, be
obliged -- must
qiman -- strong verb class 4; in nitive of <qiman> to come, arrive -- come
faurþis -- adverb; <faúrþis> rst, beforehand -- rst
12 - iþ is andhafjands qaþ du im: Helias sweþauh qimands faurþis aftra gaboteiþ alla; jah ƕaiwa
gameliþ ist bi sunu mans, ei manag winnai jah frakunþs wairþai.

is -- personal pronoun; nominative singular masculine of <is> he, she, it -- he
<andhafjan> to answer -- answered and
qaþ -- strong verb class 5; third person singular of <qiþan> to say, speak -- told
sweþauh -- adverb; <swēþáuh> indeed, however -- verily
qimands -- strong verb class 4; nominative singular masculine of present participle of <qiman> to
come, arrive -- cometh... and
faurþis -- adverb; <faúrþis> rst, beforehand -- rst
aftra -- preposition; <aftra> back, again -- ...
gaboteiþ -- weak verb class 1; third person singular of <gabōtjan> to make useful, to restore --
restoreth
alla -- adjective used as substantive; accusative plural neuter of <alls> all, every -- all things
ƕaiwa -- adverb; <ƕáiwa> how, in what way -- how
gameliþ -- weak verb class 1; nominative singular neuter of preterite participle of <gamēljan> to
after; near -- of
sunu -- strong noun, masculine; accusative singular of <sunus> son -- the Son
mans -- irregular noun, masculine; genitive singular of <manna> man -- of man
manag -- adjective; accusative singular neuter of <manags> much, many -- many things
winnai -- strong verb class 3; third person singular present subjunctive of <winnan> to suffer -- he
must suffer
frakunþs -- preterite present verb; nominative singular masculine of preterite participle of
<frakunnan> to despise -- set at nought
wairþai -- strong verb class 3; third person singular subjunctive of <waírþan> to become, to
happen -- be
13 - akei qiþa izwis þatei ju Helias qam jah gatawidedun imma swa filu swe wildedun, swaswe
gameliþ ist bi ina.

ju -- adverb; <ju> now, already -- indeed
qam -- strong verb class 4; third person singular preterite of <qiman> to come, arrive -- is... come
gatawidedun -- weak verb class 1; third person plural preterite of <gatáujan> to do, make -- they
have done
swa -- adverb; <swa> so, thus, as -- ...
filu -- strong noun, neuter; accusative singular of <filu> much, many -- whatsoever
swe -- conjunction; <swē> like, as, just as; so that; about -- ...
wildedun -- irregular verb; third person plural preterite of <wiljan> to will, wish -- they listed
gameliþ -- weak verb class 1; nominative singular neuter of preterite participle of <gamēljan> to
after; near -- of
Lesson Text
9:2 - jah afar dagans saihs ganam Iesus Paitru jah Iakobu jah Iohannen jah ustauh ins ana
fairguni hauh sundro ainans: jah inmaidida sik in andwairþja ize. 3 - jah wastjos is
waurþun glitmunjandeins, ƕeitos swe snaiws, swaleikos swe wullareis ana airþai ni mag
gaƕeitjan. 4 - jah ataugiþs warþ im Helias miþ Mose; jah wesun rodjandans miþ Iesua. 5 -
jah andhafjands Paitrus qaþ du Iesua: rabbei, goþ ist unsis her wisan, jah gawaurkjam
hlijans þrins, þus ainana jah Mose ainana jah ainana Helijin. 6 - ni auk wissa ƕa rodidedi;
wesun auk usagidai. 7 - jah warþ milhma ufarskadwjands im, jah qam stibna us þamma
milhmin: sa ist sunus meins sa liuba, þamma hausjaiþ. 8 - jah anaks insaiƕandans ni
þanaseiþs ainohun gaseƕun, alja Iesu ainana miþ sis. 9 - dalaþ þan atgaggandam im af
þamma fairgunja, anabauþ im ei mannhun ni spillodedeina þatei gaseƕun, niba biþe
sunus mans us dauþaim usstoþi. 10 - jah þata waurd habaidedun du sis misso
sokjandans: ƕa ist þata us dauþaim usstandan? 11 - jah frehun ina qiþandans: unte
qiþand þai bokarjos þatei Helias skuli qiman faurþis? 12 - iþ is andhafjands qaþ du im:
Helias sweþauh qimands faurþis aftra gaboteiþ alla; jah ƕaiwa gameliþ ist bi sunu mans,
ei manag winnai jah frakunþs wairþai. 13 - akei qiþa izwis þatei ju Helias qam jah
gatawidedun imma swa filu swe wildedun, swaswe gameliþ ist bi ina.
Translation
9:2 And after six days Jesus taketh with him Peter, and James, and John, and leadeth them up into
an high mountain apart by themselves: and he was trans gured before them. 3 And his raiment
became shining, exceeding white as snow; so as no fuller on earth can white them. 4 And there
appeared unto them Elias with Moses: and they were talking with Jesus. 5 And Peter answered and
said to Jesus, Master, it is good for us to be here: and let us make three tabernacles; one for thee,
and one for Moses, and one for Elias. 6 For he wist not what to say; for they were sore afraid. 7 And
there was a cloud that overshadowed them: and a voice came out of the cloud, saying, This is my
beloved Son: hear him. 8 And suddenly, when they had looked round about, they saw no man any
more, save Jesus only with themselves.
9 And as they came down from the mountain, he charged them that they should tell no man what
things they had seen, till the Son of man were risen from the dead. 10 And they kept that saying with
themselves, questioning one with another what the rising from the dead should mean. 11 And they
asked him, saying, Why say the scribes that Elias must rst come? 12 And he answered and told
them, Elias verily cometh rst, and restoreth all things; and how it is written of the Son of man, that
he must suffer many things, and be set at nought. 13 But I say unto you, That Elias is indeed come,
and they have done unto him whatsoever they listed, as it is written of him.
Grammar
31 The Fifth Strong Conjugation
The fth strong conjugation comprises verbs whose roots end in a single non-resonant consonant (i.e.
not l,r,m,n). The historical evolution of these verbs is shown in the chart below.
Class Root
V Shape Present Past Sg. Past Pl. Past Part. Meaning

PIE (K)VT e o ē e
*ghébhō *ghóbha *ghēbhmé *ghebhón 'give'

PGmc (K)VT e/i a ē e (EG i/e)
*ḡevu (EG *ḡevan (EG

*ḡiva) *ḡav *ḡēvum *ḡivan) 'give'

Goth. i / aí [e] a ē i / aí [e]
giba gaf gēbum gibans 'give'
saíƕa saƕ sēƕum saíƕans 'see'

In the above, T stands for any non-resonant, that is any consonant other than l,r,m,n. The resulting ablaut
pattern characterizing the fth strong conjugation in Gothic thus becomes the following.
Va i a ē i
Vb aí [e] a ē aí [e]
The difference between classes Va and Vb lies in the vowel of the present stem and the past participle.
The change is conditioned by the consonant following the vowel. Generally the vowel i occurs, but this is
replaced by aí [e] when followed by h or ƕ. Hence giba, but saíƕa.
The verb sniwan 'hasten' belongs to the class Va, with nal root consonant w. When this becomes word-
nal, the w shifts to u (i.e. aw becomes áu). The verb bidjan 'pray' conjugates according to the pattern of
class Va, but the j-augment remains only in the forms built from the present stem. The verb fraíhnan
'inquire' conjugates according to the pattern of class Vb, but the n-su x remains only in the forms built
from the present stem. The principal parts of these verbs are as follows.
Class Present Past Sg. Past Pl. Past Part. Meaning

Va sniwa snáu snēwum - 'hasten'
bidja baþ bēdum bidans 'pray'

Vb fraíhna frah frēhum fraíhans 'inquire'

The verb giba 'give', with prinicpal parts giba -- gaf -- gēbum -- gibans, serves to illustrate the forms of
the fth conjugation. The forms are as follows.
Class V Active Mediopassive

Present
1 Sg. giba gibáu gibada gibáidáu

2 gibis gibáis gib gibaza gibáizáu
3 gibiþ gibái gibadáu gibada gibáidáu

1 Du. gibōs gibáiwa
2 gibats gibáits gibats

1 Pl. gibam gibáima gibam gibanda gibáindáu

2 gibiþ gibáiþ gibiþ gibanda gibáindáu
3 giband gibáina gibandáu gibanda gibáindáu

Past
1 Sg. gaf gēbjáu
2 gaft gēbeis
3 gaf gēbi

1 Du. gēbu gēbeiwa
2 gēbuts gēbeits

1 Pl. gēbum gēbeima
2 gēbuþ gēbeiþ
3 gēbun gēbeina

In nitive giban

Pres. Ptc. gibands

Past Ptc. gibans
For the sake of illustration, the present active forms of sniwan, bidjan, and fraíhnan are listed below.
Class V Active

Present sniw- bidj- fraíhn-

Indicative
1 Sg. sniwa bidja fraíhna

2 sniwis bidjis fraíhnis
3 sniwiþ bidjiþ fraíhniþ

1 Du. sniwōs bidjōs fraíhnōs

2 sniwats bidjats fraíhnats

1 Pl. sniwam bidjam fraíhnam

3 sniwand bidjand fraíhnand

Subjunctive

1 Sg. sniwáu bidjáu fraíhnáu

2 sniwáis bidjáis fraíhnáis
3 sniwái bidjái fraíhnái

1 Du. sniwáiwa bidjáiwa fraíhnáiwa

2 sniwáits bidjáits fraíhnáits

1 Pl. sniwáima bidjáima fraíhnáima

2 sniwáiþ bidjáiþ fraíhnáiþ
3 sniwáina bidjáina fraíhnáina

Imperative

2 Sg. sniw bidei fraíhn

3 sniwadáu bidjadáu fraíhnadáu

2 Du. sniwats bidjats fraíhnats

1 Pl. sniwam bidjam fraíhnam

3 sniwandáu bidjandáu fraíhnandáu

Note the second person singular, present imperative active form bidei: the word nal j-augment becomes
vocalic, giving ei [ī]. The present forms of bidjan parallel those of verbs of the rst weak conjugation. The
(present) mediopassive forms are constructed analogously. In the nite past forms, the j-augment and
the n-su x do not appear, the conjugations following giba in all respects. The w of sniwan, when word-
nal, combines with the preceding a to yield the diphthong áu.
32 The Sixth Strong Conjugation

The sixth strong conjugation comprises verbs whose roots end in at most a single consonant. The
historical evolution of these verbs is shown in the chart below.
Class VI Root Shape Present Past Sg. Past Pl. Past Part. Meaning

PIE (K)V(C) o ō ō o
*pórō *pōra *pōrmé *porón 'travel'

PGmc (K)V(C) a ō ō a
*faru (EG *fara) *fōr *fōrum *faran 'travel'

Goth. a ō ō a
fara fōr fōrum farans 'travel'

In the above, K stands for any sequence of consonants, C for a single consonant. The resulting ablaut
pattern characterizing the sixth strong conjugation in Gothic thus becomes the following.
VI a ō ō a
Some verbs of class VI, such as the verb fraþjan 'understand', have a j-augment which remains only in
forms built from the present stem. The class VI verb standan 'stand' has an n-in x which remains only in
forms built from the present stem, cf. English stand vs. stood. The principal parts of these verbs are as
follows.
Class Present Past Sg. Past Pl. Past Part. Meaning

VI fraþja frōþ frōþum fraþans 'understand'
standa stōþ stōþum - 'stand'

The verb saka 'rebuke', with prinicpal parts saka -- sōk -- sōkum -- sakans, serves to illustrate the forms
of the sixth conjugation. The forms are as follows.
Class VI Active Mediopassive

Present
1 Sg. saka sakáu sakada sakáidáu

2 sakis sakáis sak sakaza sakáizáu
3 sakiþ sakái sakadáu sakada sakáidáu

1 Du. sakōs sakáiwa
2 sakats sakáits sakats

1 Pl. sakam sakáima sakam sakanda sakáindáu

2 sakiþ sakáiþ sakiþ sakanda sakáindáu
3 sakand sakáina sakandáu sakanda sakáindáu

Past
1 Sg. sōk sōkjáu
2 sōkt sōkeis
3 sōk sōki

1 Du. sōku sōkeiwa
2 sōkuts sōkeits

1 Pl. sōkum sōkeima
2 sōkuþ sōkeiþ
3 sōkun sōkeina

In nitive sakan

Pres. Ptc. sakands

Past Ptc. sakans
For the sake of illustration, the present active forms of fraþjan and standan are listed below.
Class VI Active

Present fraþj- sta-n-d-

Indicative
1 Sg. fraþja standa

2 fraþjis standis
3 fraþjiþ standiþ

1 Du. fraþjōs standōs

2 fraþjats standats

1 Pl. fraþjam standam

3 fraþjand standand

Subjunctive

1 Sg. fraþjáu standáu

2 fraþjáis standáis
3 fraþjái standái

1 Du. fraþjáiwa standáiwa

2 fraþjáits standáits

1 Pl. fraþjáima standáima

2 fraþjáiþ standáiþ
3 fraþjáina standáina

Imperative

2 Sg. fraþei stand

3 fraþjadáu standadáu

2 Du. fraþjats standats

1 Pl. fraþjam standam

3 fraþjandáu standandáu

Note the second person singular, present imperative active form fraþei: the word nal j-augment
becomes vocalic, giving ei [ī]. The present forms of fraþjan parallel those of verbs of the rst weak
conjugation. The (present) mediopassive forms are constructed in a similar fashion. In the nite past
forms, the j-augment and the n-in x do not appear, the conjugations following saka in all respects.
33 The Genitive Case

The genitive case eludes concise description. In its most general sense, it is a case denoting relation of
one sort or another. The typical nature of such relation is possession, as in Modern English 'Lincoln's hat'.
But certain relations defy such characterization, such as 'Lincoln's presidency'. The genitive may denote
the logical subject of the action which the head noun represents: 'Lincoln's death'. On the other hand, the
genitive may express the logical object of the action which the head noun represents: 'Lincoln's
assassination'. This broad range encompassed by the genitive in English is paralleled in Gothic.
The partitive genitive, as its name denotes, identi es the whole of which a part is speci ed. Take for
example þái þiudō 'those of the publicans, the publicans' (Matthew 5.46); in þōei baúrgē 'in whichever
of cities, in whichever city' (Luke 10.8); ƕas izwara 'which of you' (Matthew 6.27); manageins filu 'much
of a multitude, a great multitude' (Mark 9.14); halbata áiginis meinis 'half of my goods' (Luke 19.8). As
illustrated in some of the preceding examples, this is particularly common with expressions denoting
de nite or inde nite number: sumái þizē bōkarjē 'some of the scribes' (Matthew 9.3); qinōnō suma 'a
certain one of women, a certain woman' (Mark 5.25); áina anabusnē þizō ministōnō 'one of these least
commandments' (Matthew 5.19); twans sipōnjē seináizē 'two of his disciples' (Matthew 8.21). This
construction is occasionally replaced by the preposition us followed by the dative: sumans us im 'some
from (among) them, some of them' (Romans 11.14); us þáim reikam managái 'many from (among) the
rulers, many of the rulers' (John 12.42). The preposition in with dative is also found: sumái in izwis
'some among you, some of you' (I Corinthians 15.12).
The genitive may denote characteristic or measure. For example some uses of the genitive denoting
measure are the following: dagis wig 'a day's journey' (Luke 2.44); was áuk jērē twalibē 'she was of (the
age of) twelve years' (Mark 5.42). Such uses may specify composition, marking what the head noun
consists of or is made from. For example, stikla watins 'a cup of water' (Mark 9.41); hiuhma siponjē is
'a company of his disciples' (Luke 6.17). Constructions denoting characteristic often employ adjectives
rather than a noun in the genitive: in
spildom stáineináim 'in tables of stone, in stone tables' (II
Corinthians 3.3); ni sind þatáinei kasa gulþeina jah silubreina, ak jah triweina jah digana 'there are
not only vessels of gold and of silver, but also of wood and of earth', literally 'golden vessels...', etc. (II
Timothy 2.20).
The genitive frequently complements adjectives. Certain adjectives have their meaning completed or
further speci ed by a noun or pronoun in the genitive. For example, weihs fráujins 'holy to the Lord',
literally 'holy of the Lord' (Luke 2.23); waírþaba fráujins 'worthy of the Lord' (Colossians 1.10); skula
waírþiþ leikis jah blōþis fráujins 'shall be guilty of the body and blood of the Lord' (I Corinthians 11.27);
inwitōþs Xristáus 'under the law to Christ', literally 'in-law of Christ' (I Corinthians 9.21). Possessive
adjectives regularly substitute for their corresponding personal pronouns in the genitive: meina waírþs
'worthy of me', but literally 'my worthy', or more historically 'mine worthy' (Matthew 10.37).
The genitive occasionally adopts the roles of either instrumental or ablative. For example, frija ist þis
witōdis 'she is free from the law', literally 'free of the law' (Romans 7.3); framaþjái libáináis guþs
'alienated from the life of God' (Ephesians 4.18); fullōs gabrukō 'full of fragments' (Mark 8.19).
The genitive may be used independently of any head noun to specify time or place. Such uses of the
genitive often have adverbial force in English. For example, jah was fraquman dagis ƕizuh stiur .a.
'Now that which was prepared for me daily was one ox' (Nehemiah 5.18); witandans wahtwōm nahts
'keeping watch by night' (Luke 2.8); framwigis gif unsis þana hláif 'evermore give us this bread' (John
6.34). Uses of the genitive in reference to place often denote the goal of an action: manna sums
gaggida landis 'A certain (noble)man went into a (far) country' (Luke 19.12); usleiþam jáinis stadis 'Let
us pass over unto the other side' (Mark 4.35).
Some adjectives have forms frozen in the genitive as common adverbs, e.g. filáus 'much'; allis 'at all,
wholly, indeed'; raíhtis 'indeed'.
The genitive regularly accompanies certain verbs. The genitive is often used as predicate after wisan 'to
be' or waírþan 'to become' to show possession, partition, or membership. For example, Xristáus sijuþ 'ye
belong to Christ', literally 'ye are of Christ' (Mark 9.41); ƕarjis þizē waírþiþ qēns 'she is the wife of which
of them?' (Luke 20.33); jah þu þizē is 'you also art (one) of them' (Matthew 26.73). When a verb does not
act over its object entirely, the object may be in the genitive: ei... nēmi akranis 'that he might receive... of
the fruit' (Mark 12.2); allái áinis hláibis jah áinis stiklis brūkjam 'we all partake of one bread and of one
cup' (I Corinthians 10.17); jah swa þis hláibis matjái jaþ þis stikils drigkái 'and so let him eat of that
bread, and drink of that cup' (I Corinthians 11.28). Some verbs referring to memory, perception,
requesting, or desiring govern a genitive. For example, baþþis leikis Iēsuis 'begged the body of Jesus'
(Matthew 27.58); du lustōn izōs 'to lust after her' (Matthew 5.28); þáu anþarizuh beidáima 'or shall we
expect another?' (Matthew 11.3); ƕas mag þis háusjōn 'who can hear (of) it?' (John 6.60); jah
gamunda Paítrus waúrdis Iēsuis 'and Peter remembered the word of Jesus' (Matthew 26.75); ni
faírweitjandam þizē gasaíƕananē ak þizē ungasaíƕananē 'While we look not at the things which are
seen, but at the things which are not seen' (II Corinthians 4.18). Verbs meaning ' ll' are often accompanied
by the genitive: jahswinþnōda ahmins fullnands jah handugeins 'waxed strong, becoming lled with
spirit and wisdom', where the Greek has a dative ekrataiouto pneúmati 'waxed strong with spirit' for the
rst Gothic genitive (Luke 2.40); grēdagans gasōþida þiuþē 'he hath lled the hungry with good things'
(Luke 1.53). Verbs meaning 'heal' or 'cleanse' may employ a genitive in an ablatival function: háiljan
sik
saúhtē seináizō 'to heal themselves of their diseases' (Luke 6.17); aþþáu jabái ƕas gahráinjái sik
þizē 'if a man therefore purge himself from these' (II Timothy 2.21).
The genitive occasionally accompanies negation, a feature Gothic shares with Old Church Slavonic. That
is, when a positive statement contains either an intransitive verb with nominative subject or a transitive
verb with accusative object, the corresponding negative statement often changes the nominative or
accusative to a genitive. Consider the following: ni wasim barnē 'they had no child', literally 'not was to
them of children' (Luke 1.7); ni was im rūmis 'there was no room for them' (Luke 2.7); in þizei ni
habáida diupáizōs aírþōs 'because it had no depth of earth', literally '... it had not of deep earth' (Mark
4.5); jabái ƕis brōþar... barnē ni bileiþái 'and if someone's brother... should not leave children' (Mark
12.19); ni habandein wammē aíþþáu máilē aíþþáu ƕa swaleikáizē 'not having spot, or wrinkle, or any
such thing' (Ephesians 5.27). As the phrase ƕa swaleikáizē 'any of such things' in the last example
suggests, such genitives accompanying negation are generally explained as partitive genitives. That is,
e.g., ni
was im barnē is to be understood as 'there was not to them (any bit) of children'; similarly ni
habáida diupáizōs aírþōs 'it did not have (a bit) of deep earth'. Such constructions would then parallel
the use of ni waíhts 'no thing, no creature', but with waíhts omitted. For example, compare ni waíht
bōtōs mis táujáu 'I do myself nothing of advantage' (I Corinthians 13.3). In English terms, this is akin to
phrasing 'I don't want any of those' as 'I don't want... of those'.
34 The Dative Case

The dative case denotes the indirect object of an action, as in the Modern English 'he is giving a book to
me'. More generally, the dative denotes the somewhat vaguely de ned referent of an action or state, as in
Modern English 'that does not bode well for me' or 'what's it to you?' The dative case in Gothic also
subsumes many of the functions represented by the Ablative, Locative, and Instrumental cases in other
Indo-European languages. These cases correspond approximately to the Modern English use of the
prepositions 'from', 'in' or 'on', and 'with', respectively.
The following examples exhibit the use of the dative to denote reference in Gothic: liuhaþ du
andhuleinái þiudōm 'a light for enlightenment to the gentiles' (Luke 2.32); saúrga meina alláim
aíkklēsjōm 'my care for all (the) churches' (II Corinthians 11.28). This reference sometimes mixes with
senses of possession or relation. This is particularly common after the verbs wisan 'to be' or waírþan 'to
become'. Consider the following examples: jah ƕaþrō imma sunus ist? 'and whence is he his son?',
literally 'and whence is he son to him?' (Mark 12.37); jah ni was im barnē 'and they had no children',
literally 'and not was to them (of) children' (Luke 1.7); jah waírþiþ þus fahēds jah swēgniþa 'and thou
shalt have joy and gladness', literally 'and there will be joy and gladness to you' (Luke 1.14); ei uns
waírþái þata arbi 'that the inheritance may be ours', literally 'that the inheritance may be to us' (Luke
20.14). Note in the following example the alternation between genitive and dative: swaei frauja ist sa
sunus mans jah þamma sabbatō 'Therefore the Son of man is Lord also of the sabbath', literally
'therefore the son of man is lord also to the sabbath' (Mark 2.28). Greek, by contrast, employs the genitive
in both phrases.
The following uses of the dative stem from its function as instrumental case:
dative of means or instrument: usually equivalent to 'with' or 'by (means of)' in English. For example,
sumáiþ þan lōfam slōhun (ina) 'and others smote (him) with the palms of their hands' (Matthew
26.67); bláuþjandans waúrd guþs þizái anabusnái izwarái 'making void the word of God through
your command' (Mark 7.13); ufgaúrdanái hupins izwarans sunjái jah gapáidōdái brunjōn
garaíhteins 'girt about your loins with truth, and clothed with the breastplate of righteousness'
(Ephesians 6.14).
dative of amount or price: for example, niu twái sparwans assarjáu bugjanda 'Are not two sparrows
sold for a farthing?' (Matthew 10.29); waírþa galáubamma usbaúhtái sijuþ 'ye are bought with a
costly price' (I Corinthians 7.23).
dative of accompaniment (sociative dative): such datives generally occur unaccompanied by a
preposition only with the verbs wisan 'to be' and waírþan 'to become', and thus is often similar to the
dative of reference or relation discussed above. Often, however, this is preceded by miþ, or used in
conjunction with a verb pre xed with miþ- or ga-: ak jah gatewiþs fram aiklesjōm miþgasinþa uns
miþ anstái þizái 'but who was also chosen of the churches to travel with us with this grace', literally
'...a traveling companion to us with this grace' (II Corinthians 8.19); jah galáistans waúrþun imma
Seimōn jah þái miþ imma 'and Simon and those with him were followers to him' (Mark 1.36);
miþskalkinōda mis 'he hath served with me' (Philippians 2.22); þatei miþ ni qam sipōnjam seináim
Iēsus in þata skip 'that Jesus came not with his disciples into the ship' (John 6.22); ju gahōrinōda
izái 'hath committed adultery with her already' (Matthew 5.28).
The following uses of the dative stem from its ablative or instrumental functions:
dative of separation: for example, afstandand sumái galáubeinái 'some shall depart from faith' (I
Timothy 4.1); þammei ik háubiþ afmaímáit 'from whom I cut off the head' (Mark 6.16).
dative of cause: often overlaps with the dative of means. For example, ungaláubeinái
usbruknōdēdun 'because of unbelief they were broken off' (Romans 11.20); aþþan anstái guþs im
saei im 'But by the grace of God I am what I am'; iþ ik huhráu fraqistna 'and I perish with hunger'
(Luke 15.17).
dative of manner: for example, swē in daga garēdaba gaggáima, ni gabaúram jah drugkaneim,
ni ligram jah agláitjam, ni háifstái jah aljana 'Let us walk honestly, as in the day; not in rioting and
drunkenness, not in chambering and wantonness, not in strife and envying' (Romans 13.13); niu
þamma samin ahmin iddjēdum, niu þáim samam láistim 'walked we not in the same spirit?
walked we not in the same steps?' (II Corinthians 12.18).
dative of degree of difference: for example, ni waírhtái bōtida 'by nothing bettered' (Mark 5.26); man
áuk ni waíhtái mik minizō gatáujan 'for I suppose myself to accomplish (things by) no whit less' (II
Corinthians 11.5).
dative of comparison: used to denote the standard to which comparison is made. For example,
swinþōza mis ist 'is mightier than me' (Matthew 3.11); managizō þáim 'more than these' (Matthew
5.37); handugōzei mannam 'wiser than men' (I Corinthians 1.25).
The following uses of the dative stem from its locative function:
location in space: occasionally used independently, but more often accompanied by a locative
preposition or a verb compounded with such a preposition. For example, untē mis atist ubil 'for evil is
present with me' (Romans 7.21); iþ áins sums þizē atstandandanē imma 'and one of them standing
by him' (Mark 14.47); jah ufswōgjands ahmin seinamma 'and sighing deeply in his spirit' (Mark 8.12);
du ganasjan þans gamalwidans haírtin 'to heal those broken in heart' (Luke 4.18).
location in time: for example, urreisiþ naht jah daga 'and rise night and day' (Mark 4.27);
wratōdēdun þái birusjōs is jēra ƕammēh in Iaírusalēm 'Now his parents went to Jerusalem every
year at the feast of the passover' (Luke 2.41); Hláif unsarana þana sinteinan gif uns himma daga
'Give us this day our daily bread' (Matthew 6.11); ni waírþái sa þlaúhs izwar wintráu '(that) your
ight be not in the winter' (Mark 13.18).
As in other Germanic languages, certain verbs in Gothic use the dative to mark the direct object, leaving
out the accusative altogether. Some such verbs may be grouped into general types:
physical perception: (at)tēkan 'to touch'; kukjan 'to kiss'; (ga)baírgan 'to hide, keep, preserve';
gáumjan 'to perceive, observe'; witan 'to watch'. For example, sei tēkiþ imma 'that touches him' (Luke
7.39); þammei kukjáu 'whomsoever I shall kiss' (Mark 14.44); ƕa gáumeis gramsta 'why beholdest
thou the mote?' (Luke 6.41); witandans Iēsua 'watching Jesus' (Matthew 27.54).
disposition: (ga)tráuan 'to trust'; galáubjan 'to believe'; neiwan 'to be angry'; aljanōn 'to be jealous'.
For example, jah galáubjam imma 'and we believe (in) him' (Matthew 27.42); iþ sō Herōdia náiw
imma 'therefore this Herodias was angry with him' (Mark 6.19); iþ saei ufbrikiþ mis, ufbrikiþ
þamma sandjandin mik 'and he that despiseth me despiseth him that sent me' (Luke 10.16).
injury: balwjan 'to plague'; qistjan 'to destroy'. For example, balwjan unsis 'to torment us' (Matthew
8.29); ni qam sáiwalōm qistjan ak nasjan 'is not come to destroy lives, but to save (them)' (Luke
9.56).
separation: these likely take the dative in its ablative function, e.g. ufarmunnōn 'to forget'; idweitjan
'to reproach'; sakan 'to rebuke'. For example, swēþáuh þáim afta ufarmunnōnds 'indeed forgetting
those (things which are) behind' (Philippians 3.13).
A common construction in Gothic is the dative absolute. Such constructions employ a noun or pronoun
combined with a participle to function as a self-contained clause. The noun and participle are placed in
the dative (though occasionally the accusative, or even the nominative, is employed), and remain
grammatically distinct (absolute) from the other elements of the sentence. For example, usleiþandin
Iēsua in skipa aftra hinfar marein, gaqēmun sik manageins filu du imma 'and Jesus having passed
over on a ship to the other side of the sea, there came to him a great multitude' (Mark 5.21). In other Indo-
European languages such as Latin or Greek, such absolute constructions can refer only to entities
completely grammatically absent from the remainder of the statement. The constructions in Gothic,
however, are rarely so absolute. They frequently refer to someone or something which appears later in the
statement, generally in the dative. For example, qimandin þan in garda duatiddjēdun imma þái
blindans 'And when he was come into the house, the blind men came to him' (Matthew 9.28). The Gothic
dative absolute is often preceded by the preposition at: at andanahtja þan waúrþanamma atbērun du
imma dáimōnarjans managans 'When the even was come, they brought unto him many that were
possessed with devils' (Matthew 8.16); jah at Iēsu ufdáupidamma jah bidjandin, usluknōda himins
'Jesus also being baptized and praying, the heaven was opened' (Luke 3.21); at libandin abin 'while (her)
husband liveth' (Romans 7.3).
35 The Conjunctions ei, þei, and þatei

The particle ei is a general relative particle, akin to Old Norse er. It has no de nite meaning of its own,
but serves to mark a pronoun or clause as relative. It combines as an enclitic with demonstrative
pronouns to produce the associated relative, e.g. þata 'that (thing)' vs. þatei 'which (thing), (the thing)
which'. When ei serves as a freestanding relative marker, it may introduce various types of temporal or
substantive clauses. The following are some of the most common:
temporal clauses: For example, fram þamma daga ei háusidēdun 'since the day we heard it'
(Colossians 1.9). The following example, however, denotes manner rather than time: aþþan þamma
háidáu ei Jannis jah Mambrēs andstōþun Mōsēza 'For in the manner (in which = ei) Jannis and
(J)ambres withstood Moses' (2 Timothy 3.8).
purpose clauses: In this function ei is generally followed by the subjunctive. For example, ƕaþrō
bugjam hláibans, ei matjáina þái 'Whence shall we buy bread, that these may eat?' (John 6.5);
frawardjand áuk andwaírþja seina, ei gasaíƕáindáu mannam fastandans 'for they dis gure their
faces, that they may appear unto men to fast' (Matthew 6.16).
indirect commands or wishes: These likewise take the subjunctive. For example, wenja áuk ei þaírh
bidōs izwarōs fragibáidáu izwis 'for I trust that through your prayers I shall be given unto you'
(Philemon 1.22); bidja du guda ei ni waíht ubilis táujáiþ 'Now I pray to God that ye do no evil' (II
Corinthians 13.7); faúrbáud imma ei mann ni qēþi 'he charged him to tell no man', literally 'he
charged that he not tell anyone' (Luke 5.14).
statements of belief: After verbs denoting 'believe' or 'trust', ei may introduce a substantive clause with
a verb in the indicative, or occasionally in the subjunctive. For example, aþþan gatráuam in fráujin in
izwis ei, þatei anabudum izwis, jah táujiþ jah táujan habáiþ 'And we have con dence in the Lord
within you, that ye both do and will do the things which we command you' (II Thessalonians 3.4);
silbans tráuáidēdun sis ei wēseina garaíhtái '(certain which) trusted in themselves that they were
righteous' (Luke 18.9).
indirect statement: In this function ei is generally followed by the indicative. For example, þu
qiþis ei
þiudans im ik 'you say that I am king' (John 18.37); swaswē qaþ du Iudaium ei þadei ik gagga jus
ni maguþ qiman 'as I said unto the Jews, Whither I go, ye cannot come' (John 13.33).
The particle þei functions as a relative marker similar to ei. Compare the Old English relative þe. There is
one example of its use without nominal antecedent, in which it marks a temporal clause: ibái magun
sunjus brūþfadis qáinōn und þata ƕeilōs þei miþ im ist brūþfaþs 'Can the children of the
bridechamber mourn, as long as the bridegroom is with them?' (Matthew 9.15). Frequently þei
immediately follows an inde nite pronoun or adverb. For example, þataƕah þei wileiþ, bidjiþ 'ye shall
ask what ye will' (John 15.7); þisƕaruh þei merjada sō aíwaggēljō 'Wheresoever this gospel shall be
preached' (Mark 14.9); þisƕaduh þei gaggáiþ in gard 'In what place soever ye enter into an house'
(Mark 6.10).
The particle þei, like ei, introduces purpose clauses, in which it is followed by the subjunctive. For
example, þata rōdida izwis þei in mis gawaírþi áigeiþ 'These things I have spoken unto you, that in me
ye might have peace' (John 16.33). Compare the use of ei in the following: þata rōdida izwis, ei ni
afmarzjáindáu 'These things have I spoken unto you, that ye should not be offended' (John 16.1). þei
may likewise introduce indirect statement: qiþa þus þei hana ni hrukeiþ 'I say unto thee, The cock shall
not crow' (John 13.38); qiþa izwis þei grētiþ 'I say unto you, That ye shall weep' (John 16.20).
The word þatei may occasionally function like ei, introducing substantive clauses denoting belief. As
with ei, such clauses may have a verb in the indicative or subjunctive. For example, gatráujands in
alláim izwis þatei meina fahēþs alláizē izwara ist 'having con dence in you all, that my joy is the joy
of you all' (II Corinthians 2.3); gatráua áuk þatei ni dáuþus... magi uns afskáidan 'For I trust that
neither death... may separate us' (Romans 8.39); ga-u-láubjats þatei magjáu þata táujan 'Believe ye
that I am able to do this?' (John 9.18). Uses of þatei to introduce indirect commands or wishes are
uncommon: fragibands im þatei sunjus þiudangardjōs waírþáina 'granting them that they become
sons of the kingdom' (Skeireins 3.20). þatei may likewise introduce indirect statement: jah jabái qēþjáu
þatei ni kunnjáu ina 'and if I should say, I know him not' (John 8.55).
Gothic Online
Lesson 8
Wul la
Ul la, also written Ulphilas in Greek texts, is the name of the bishop who devised an alphabet for the
Gothic language and translated the Bible into Gothic in the mid-4th century AD. Based on the form in
which it is written in Romance languages, as Vulphilas, Vul la, or Gulphilas -- with an initial gu- signifying
w- -- the name is probably more properly written Wulfila. The name itself is composed of the noun wulfs
'wolf' and the diminutive su x -ila, the same kind of construction which forms the name of the most
famous of the Huns, Attila < atta 'father' + ila (diminutive). It is not clear that the name 'little wolf' has any
particular connotation in the case of the Biblical translator.
Most of what we know about Wul la comes from two sources. One is a letter by Auxentius, a former
student of Wul la. The other is the Church History of Philostorgius, written sometime in the 5th century.
Unfortunately this latter only survives in epitomized form, in the work of a 9th century scholar and
patriarch of Constantinople by the name of Photius. This is brief enough that it is worth quoting in full
(from Heather and Matthews, 1991):
(Philostorgius) says that at this time Ulphilas led a large body of the Scythians from those living across the
Ister (the people whom in olden times they called Getae, but now call Goths) to the land of the Romans,
driven through piety from their own homes. Now this people became Christian in the following way.
In the reigns of Valerian and Galleinus, a large number of Scythians from beyond the Ister crossed into
Roman territory and overran much of Europe. Crossing into Asia, they reached as far as Galatia and
Cappadocia. They took many prisoners, including some who were members of the clergy, and went home
with a great quantity of booty.
Now the pious hand of prisoners, living as they did among the barbarians, converted many of them to the way
of piety and persuaded them to adopt the Christian faith instead of the pagan. Among these prisoners were
the ancestors of Ulphilas; they were Cappadocians by nationality, from a village near the city of Parnassus
called Sadagolthina.
It was this Ulphilas who led the exodus of the pious ones, being the rst bishop appointed among them. He
was appointed in the following circumstances: sent with others by the ruler of the race of the Goths on an
embassy in the time of Constantine (for the barbarian peoples in those parts owed allegiance to the
emperor), Ulphilas was elected by Eusebius and the bishops of his party as bishop of the Christians in the
Getic land.
Among the matters which he attended to among them, he was the inventor for them of their own letters, and
translated all the Scriptures into their languages -- with the exception, that is, of Kings. This was because
these books contain the history of wars, while the Gothic people, being lovers of war, were in need of
something to restrain their passion for ghting rather than to incite them to it -- which those books have the
power to do, for all that they are held in the highest honour, and are well tted to lead believers to the worship
of God.
The emperor established this mass of refugees in the territories of Moesia, where each man chose to live;
and he held Ulphilas in the highest esteem, so as often to refer to him as the 'Moses of our time'.
Philostorgius admires this man to excess, and records that with those in his charge he was attached to the
same heretical opinions as himself.
Wul la must have been consecrated bishop before 341, since in this year Eusebius of Nicomedia died.
Wul la subsequently went on a 7-year mission in Gothia, eventually leaving as a result of persecution.
Assuming he was in fact consecrated in 341, and then left shortly thereafter on his mission, he would
have left the Gothic lands in 347-348. This agrees with the timeline found in Auxentius. The historian
Sozomen does in fact record something of Wul la's impact on the Goths in his Ecclesiastical History
(translated in Heather and Matthews, 1991):
In my opinion, however, this is not the only reason why the entire nation of the Goths is still to this day
associated with the followers of Arius: there is also the in uence of Ulphilas, who held the priestly o ce
among them at that time.
At rst, Ulphilas was in no respect at variance with the Catholic church, but in the reign of Constantius, in my
opinion without considering the consequences, he joined the party of Eudoxius and Acacius at the council of
Constantinople, while remaining in communion with the clergy of the party who had met at Nicaea.
But when he arrived at Constantinople, it is said theat there entered into discussion with him on questions of
doctrine the leaders of the Arian heresy, who promised that they would lend their support to his embassy to
the emperor if he adopted the same opinions as themselves; and that, compelled by his need -- or even
genuinely believing it better to think of God in this way -- he entered communion with the supporters of Arius
and, together with the entire people, split away from the Catholic church.
Auxentius was a student of Wul la and later bishop of Durostorum (Silistra) on the Danube. His letter
concerning his teacher is preserved in a scholia on the council of Aquileia in 381, written by the 5th
century Arian theologian Maximinus. In the council itself, the Illyrian Arians, led by bishops Palladius of
Ratiaria and Secundianus of Singidunum, were defeated by Ambrose of Milan, and Arian beliefs were
thereby condemned.
To situate Wul la in the proper theological setting of which he was a part, it is instructive to know
something of the Arian debate which seized the church during this period. Arius was a Libyan theologian
who lived c. 256-336 A.D. He denied that the Son was consubstantial with the Father, and thereby raised
questions of the nature of the Trinity. The First Council of Nicea met in 325 to resolve this heresy, which
seriously threatened the early church. As time passed and the debate continued, several revised opinions
emerged. There were essentially four broad viewpoints:
1. homo-ousía, literally 'same-substance'. The homoousians (or homousians) maintained that the
Father, Son, and Holy Spirit were of the same being or substance (ous/ia), none prior to the others.
This was early espoused by Athanasius of Alexandria, then later by Basil of Caesarea and others.
2. homoi-ousía, literally 'similar-substance'. The homoiousians (or homoeusians) maintained that the
members of the Trinity were cast from similar, but not, identical substance. The softening of tone
allowed certain questions raised by homoousian doctrine to be passed over, speci cally the question
of what were in fact the differences in the members of the Trinity. The leader of this movement was
Basil of Ancyra.
3. hómoios, literally 'similar'. The homoians (or homoeans) felt (1) that terms including ousía held no
explanatory power, and (2) that the doctrine of the homoousians confused the members of the Trinity.
This school was initiated by Eusebius of Nicomedia, then later taken up by the bishops Acacius of
Caesarea and Eudoxius of Constantinople, and eventually supported by the Emperor Constantius.
4. an-(h)ómoios, literally 'dis-similar'. The anomoians (or anomoeans) were more assertive than the
Arians, proposing that the Father and Son were in fact unlike one another, creating a true division
within the Trinity. This movement gained ground sometime in the 350s, under the leadership of Aetius
and Eunomius.
Wul la for his part espoused the Arian doctrine, asserting a difference between the members of the
Trinity, and further maintaining a disdain for the introduction of the term ousía into traditional creeds.
According to Auxentius, Wul la also rejected the homoiousians, 'because he defended not comparable
things but different dispositions'. It appears that Wul la's primary concern with the members of the Trinity
was not their actual substance, but rather the functions they ful lled. There was an established order, in
which the 'unbegotten' Supreme God (Father) produced the 'only-begotten' God (the Lord, or Christ, the
Son), who was then in turn the creator of the physical and spiritual universe in the stead of the Father.
This Second God had also produced the Holy Spirit as an intermediary between the mortal and divine
world. Auxentius explains:
Now since there exists only one unbegotten God and there stands under him only one only-begotten God, the
Holy Spirit our advocate can be called neither God nor Lord, but received its being from God through the
Lord:... minister of Christ and distributor of acts of grace....
Steadfast in these and simlar doctrines, ourishing gloriously for forty years in the bishopric, [Ul la] preached
unceasingly with apostolic grace in the Greek, Latin and Gothic languages, in the one and only church of
Christ....
In his letter Auxentius goes on to talk of the persecution that drove Wul la from Gothia:
Then, through the envy and machinations of the Enemy a tyrannical and fearsome persecution of Christians
in the barbarian land was aroused by the impious and sacrilegious 'iudex' of the Goths....
And then, after the glorious martyrdom of many servants and maidservants of Christ, with threats of
persecution growing ever more intense, after completing just seven years in his episcopate the holy and
blessed Ul la, of whom we speak, was driven from the barbarian land with a great number of confessors and,
still in the reign of Constantius of blessed memory, was received with honour on Roman soil.
And as God through Moses liberated his people from the power and violence of Pharaoh and the Egyptians,
brought them across the seas and provided that they enter his service, so, through him whom we describe,
God liberated from barbarian lands the confessors of his holy son the only-begotten, brought them across the
Danube and had them serve him in the mountains, in imitation of the saints.
Wul la was then not merely an obscure patriarch who chose a mission into the barbarian hinterland. Had
the council at Aquileia in 381 not stamped out Arian beliefs, Wul la may have gone on to be heralded as
one of the great fathers of the church during this era. As events unfolded, however, his side did not carry
the day; the steps taken later by the church, to erase documents espousing Arian attitudes, were so
successful that we are in fact lucky to have any material on Wul la at all.
It is uncertain whether the Gothic commentary on the Gospel of John, known as Skeireins (cf. ga-
skeirjan 'make clear, interpret', related to skeinan 'shine' -- compare OE scīr and OHG schīr 'pure, sheer',
as well as OE scīnan 'shine'), represents an original Gothic composition or merely a translation of a Greek
or Latin original. Accepting Gothic as the original language of the text still leaves many questions of style
and syntax unanswered. The text does not syntactically depart from the biblical translation in any
signi cant way. This is perhaps only a chance occurrence due to the brevity of the surviving text. Given
the genre, however, it is probably safe to suppose that the text was in uenced by both Greek and Latin
texts of similar character.
The Skeireins was probably composed sometime in the 5th century A.D. It was once argued that Wul la
was the author of this text as well as of the Bible translation, but this is now thought unlikely. The
surviving portions of the work are recorded as a palimpsest on eight separate leaves of parchment,
originally part of a single manuscript. The numbering convention used here, following Bennett's edition in
The Gothic Commentary on the Gospel of John, designates each of the leaves with a Roman numeral (I-
VIII) and the columns of text on each leaf with letters of the alphabet (a, b for recto and c, d for verso).
The passage below, Skeireins IV c16 - d24, is of interest for providing us with a demonstration of the
theological beliefs of the early Goths.
c16-19 - Iþ sa us himina qumana: jabai in leika wisan þuhta: akei ufaro allaim ist.

sa -- demonstrative used as person pronoun; nominative singular masculine of <sa, so, þata> this,
that -- he (who)
qumana -- strong verb class 4; nominative singular masculine of preterite participle of <qiman> to
come, arrive -- has come
jabai -- conjunction; <jabái> if, even if, although -- even if
leika -- strong noun, neuter; dative singular of <leik> body, esh -- the esh
wisan -- strong verb class 5; in nitive of <wisan> to be -- to be
þuhta -- weak verb class 1; third person singular preterite of <þugkjan> to seem -- he seemed
akei -- conjunction; <akei> but, yet, still, nevertheless -- nevertheless
ufaro -- preposition; <ufarō> above, upon, over -- above
allaim -- adjective used as substantive; dative plural masculine of <alls> all, every -- all
ist -- strong verb class 5; athematic third person singular present of <wisan> to be -- is
c20-24 - jah þatei gasaƕ jag gahausida þata weitwodeiþ: jah þo weitwodida is ni ainshun nimiþ:

þatei -- relative pronoun; accusative singular neuter of <saei> who, he who, which -- that which
gasaƕ -- strong verb class 5; third person singular preterite of <gasaíƕan> to see -- he has seen
jag -- conjunction; <jah> and, also -- and # the nal -h of jah has assimilated to the initial g- of the
following word
gahausida -- weak verb class 1; third person singular preterite of <gaháusjan> to hear -- heard
þata -- demonstrative used as pronoun; accusative singular neuter of <sa, so, þata> this, that --
that
weitwodeiþ -- weak verb class 1; third person singular of <weitwōdjan> to bear witness, to testify
-- he testi es
þo -- demonstrative used as article; accusative plural neuter of <sa, so, þata> this, that -- ...
weitwodida -- weak verb class 1; accusative plural neuter of preterite participle of <weitwōdjan>
to bear witness, to testify -- testimony
is -- personal pronoun; genitive singular masculine of <is> he, she, it -- of him
ainshun -- inde nite pronoun; nominative singular masculine of <áinshun> (always with negative)
nimiþ -- strong verb class 4; third person singular of <niman> to take, receive -- receives
c25-d3 - Jah þauhjabai us air himina ana airþai in manne garehsnais qam:

þauhjabai -- conjunction; <þáuhjabái> even though -- even though
air -- adverb; <áir> soon, early -- ...
ana -- preposition; <ana> in, on, upon, at, over; to, into; against -- to
manne -- irregular noun, masculine; genitive plural of <manna> man -- concerning men
garehsnais -- strong noun, feminine; genitive singular of <garēhsns> time, determination, design,
plan -- the plan
qam -- strong verb class 4; third person singular preterite of <qiman> to come, arrive -- he came
d3-10 - akei ni þe haldis airþeins was nih us airþai rodjands: Ak himinakunda anafilhands
fulhsnja þoei gasaƕ.
akei -- conjunction; <akei> but, yet, still, nevertheless -- yet by

þe -- demonstrative used as article; instrumental singular neuter of <sa, so, þata> this, that -- ...
haldis -- adverb; <haldis> rather, more -- means
airþeins -- adjective; nominative singular masculine of <aírþeins> earthly, born of the earth --
earthly
was -- strong verb class 5; third person singular preterite of <wisan> to be -- he was
nih -- adverb; <ni> not + enclitic conjunction; <-uh> but, and, now, therefore -- or
airþai -- strong noun, feminine; dative singular of <aírþa> earth -- the earth
rodjands -- weak verb class 1; nominative singular masculine of present participle of <rōdjan> to
speak -- speaking
Ak -- conjunction; <ak> but, however -- but
himinakunda -- adjective; nominative singular masculine of <himinakunds> heavenly -- born of
heaven
anafilhands -- strong verb class 3; nominative singular masculine of present participle of
<anafilhan> to transmit, to hand down -- transmitting
fulhsnja -- strong noun, neuter; accusative plural of <fulhsni> hidden thing, secret -- the hidden
things
þoei -- relative pronoun; accusative plural neuter of <saei> who, he who, which -- that
gasaƕ -- strong verb class 5; third person singular preterite of <gasaíƕan> to see -- he had seen
d10-17 - jag gahausida at attin: þo nu insakana wesun fram Iohanne ni in þis þatainei ei fins.
mikilein gakannidedi:
jag -- conjunction; <jah> and, also -- and # the nal -h of jah has assimilated to the initial g- of the
following word
gahausida -- weak verb class 1; third person singular preterite of <gaháusjan> to hear -- had heard
at -- preposition; <at> at, by, to, with, of -- from
attin -- weak noun, masculine; dative singular of <atta> father -- the Father
þo -- demonstrative used as pronoun; nominative singular neuter of <sa, so, þata> this, that --
these matters
nu -- adverb; <nu> now, therefore -- now
insakana -- strong verb class 6; nominative singular neuter of preterite participle of <*insakan> to
designate, to put forth -- declared
wesun -- strong verb class 5; third person plural preterite of <wisan> to be -- were
fram -- preposition; <fram> from, by, since, on account of -- by
Iohanne -- strong proper noun, masculine; dative singular of <Iōhannēs> John -- John
þis -- demonstrative; genitive singular neuter of <sa, so, þata> this, that -- ...
þatainei -- adverb; <þatáinei> only -- merely
fins -- weak noun, masculine; genitive singular of <fráuja> lord, master -- the Lord's # abbreviation
for fráujins
mikilein -- weak noun, feminine; accusative singular of <mikilei> greatness -- greatness
gakannidedi -- weak verb class 1; third person singular preterite subjunctive of <gakannjan> to
make known -- he might proclaim
d17-19 - ak du gatarhjan jah gasakan þo afgudon haifst:

gatarhjan -- weak verb class 1; in nitive of <gatarhjan> to expose, to make public -- censure
gasakan -- strong verb class 6; in nitive of <gasakan> to rebuke, to reprove -- rebuke
þo -- demonstrative used as adjective; accusative singular feminine of <sa, so, þata> this, that --
that
afgudon -- adjective; accusative singular feminine of <afguþs> godless, impious -- impious
haifst -- strong noun, feminine; accusative singular of <háifsts> ght, strife -- contention
d19-24 - sabailliaus jah markailliaus: þaiei ainana anananþidedun qiþan attan jah sunu:
sabailliaus -- strong noun, masculine; genitive singular of <sabaíllius> Sabellius -- of Sabellius

markailliaus -- strong noun, masculine; genitive singular of <markaíllius> Marcellus -- Marcellus
þaiei -- relative pronoun; nominative plural masculine of <saei> who, he who, which -- who
ainana -- numeral; accusative singular masculine of <áins> one -- (are) one
anananþidedun -- weak verb class 1; third person plural preterite of <anananþjan> to dare --
dared
qiþan -- strong verb class 5; in nitive of <qiþan> to say, speak -- to say (that)
attan -- weak noun, masculine; accusative singular of <atta> father -- the Father
sunu -- strong noun, masculine; accusative singular of <sunus> son -- the Son
Lesson Text
c16-19 - Iþ sa us himina qumana: jabai in leika wisan þuhta: akei ufaro allaim ist. c20-24
- jah þatei gasaƕ jag gahausida þata weitwodeiþ: jah þo weitwodida is ni ainshun nimiþ:
c25-d3 - Jah þauhjabai us air himina ana airþai in manne garehsnais qam: d3-10 - akei ni
þe haldis airþeins was nih us airþai rodjands: Ak himinakunda anafilhands fulhsnja þoei
gasaƕ. d10-17 - jag gahausida at attin: þo nu insakana wesun fram Iohanne ni in þis
þatainei ei fins. mikilein gakannidedi: d17-19 - ak du gatarhjan jah gasakan þo afgudon
haifst: d19-24 - sabailliaus jah markailliaus: þaiei ainana anananþidedun qiþan attan jah
sunu:
Translation
Translation from William Holmes Bennett (The Gothic Commentary on the Gospel of John, Modern
Language Association of America: New York, 1960) --
But "He Who has come from heaven," even if He seemed to be in the esh, nevertheless "is above
all, and what He has seen and heard, that He testi es, and no man receives His testimony." And even
though He came from heaven to earth for the plan concerning men, yet He was by no means earthly
or speaking from the earth but born of heaven, transmitting the hidden things that He had seen and
had heard from the Father. Now these matters were declared by John, not merely that he might
proclaim the Lord's greatness, but to censure and rebuke that impious contention of Sabellius and
Marcellus, who dared to say that the Father and the Son are one.
Grammar
36 The Seventh Strong Conjugation
The seventh strong conjugation marks a departure from the preterite formation of the other strong
classes. Verbs of class VII form the past tense by means of reduplication, which may or may not be
accompanied by ablaut in the root syllable. Reduplication denotes the pre xation to the root of the root's
own initial consonant, followed by the vowel aí [e]. When the root lacks an initial consonant, only the
vowel aí [e] appears. When the root begins with a consonant cluster, only the rst consonant reduplicates
-- unless the root begins with sk- or st-, whereby the entire cluster reduplicates. The historical evolution
of these verbs is shown in the chart below.
Class Root
VII Shape Present Past Sg. Past Pl. Past Part. Meaning

PIE (K)VC (K)VC (K)e-(K)VC (K)e-(K)VC (K)VC
*áugō *eáuga *eaugmé *augón 'increase'
*stáldhō *stestáldha *stestaldhmé *staldhón 'acquire'
*lēdō *lelōda *lelōdmé *lēdón 'let'

PGmc. (K)VC (K)VC (K)e-(K)VC (K)e-(K)VC (K)VC
*auku (EG
*auka) *eáuk *eáukum *aukan 'increase'
*stalðu
(EG
*stalða) *stestálð *stestálðum *stalðan 'acquire'
*lētu (EG
*lēta) *lelōt *lelōtum *lētan 'let'

Goth. (K)VC (K)aí-(K)VC (K)aí-(K)VC (K)VC
áuka aíáuk aíáukum áukans 'add'
-stalda -staístald -staístaldum -staldans 'possess'
lēta laílōt laílōtum lētans 'let'

The roots of class seven strong verbs do not possess a unique shape distinguishing them from verbs of
other strong classes. The primary characteristic subdividing class VII itself is the presence or absence of
root ablaut accompanying reduplication, as shown in the following chart.
Root
Class Vowel Present Past Sg. Past Pl. Past Part. Meaning

ga- ga- ga-

VIIa a, ā stalda ga-staístald staístaldum staldans 'possess'
ái fráisa faífráis faífráisum fráisans 'tempt'
saíslēp
ē slēpa (saízlēp) saíslēpum slēpans 'sleep'
ō ƕōpa ƕaíƕōp ƕaíƕōpum ƕōpans 'boast'
áu áuka aíáuk aíáukum áukans 'add'

VIIb ē, ai grētan gaígrōt gaígrōtum grētans 'weep'
lēta laílōt laílōtum lētans 'let'
ga- ga- ga- 're ect

rēda ga-raírōþ raírōdum rēdans upon'
tēka taítōk taítōkum tēkans 'touch'
saian saísō saísōum saians 'sow'
waia waíwō waíwōum waians 'blow'

Class VIIa verbs may contain any root vowel. The reduplicating vowel however is always e. In class VIIb,
the root vowel is always [ē], written ai when it directly precedes another vowel.
The verb lēta 'let', with prinicpal parts lēta -- laílōt -- laílōtum -- lētans, serves to illustrate the forms of
the seventh conjugation. The forms are as follows.
Class VII Active Mediopassive

Present
1 Sg. lēta lētáu lētada lētáidáu

2 lētis lētáis lēt lētaza lētáizáu
3 lētiþ lētái lētadáu lētada lētáidáu

1 Du. lētōs lētáiwa
2 lētats lētáits lētats

1 Pl. lētam lētáima lētam lētanda lētáindáu

2 lētiþ lētáiþ lētiþ lētanda lētáindáu
3 lētand lētáina lētandáu lētanda lētáindáu

Past
1 Sg. laílōt laílōtjáu
2 laílōst laílōteis
3 laílōt laílōti

1 Du. laílōtu laílōteiwa
2 laílōtuts laílōteits

1 Pl. laílōtum laílōteima
2 laílōtuþ laílōteiþ
3 laílōtun laílōteina

In nitive lētan

Pres. Ptc. lētands

Past Ptc. lētans
37 Weak Verbs and the First Weak Conjugation

37.1 Basic Formation of Weak Verbs
The weak verbs stand in contradistinction to strong verbs. Whereas strong verbs employ ablaut to mark
the past tense, weak verbs employ a dental su x -d/þ- (sometimes -t-) to mark the past forms. This
formation distinguishes the Germanic family from other branches of Indo-European, as the dental
preterite is found nowhere else.
Early investigations into its origin supposed that the dental su x represents the second element of an
original periphrastic formation involving the root *dhē 'put', akin to suggestions that the Latin imperfect
represents a periphrastic construction employing the root *bhū 'become'. As with the Latin situation, the
hypothesis suffers from a lack of conclusive evidence as to the precise nature of the original
construction, e.g. as to what was the form of the rst element of the periphrastic construction. Gothic,
however, is unique in displaying in the plural a fuller form of the second element than one nds in other
Germanic languages. Speci cally, while the singular su xes with their endings are the monosyllabic -da,
-dēs, -da, the dual and plural forms are disyllabic: -dēd-u, -dēd-uts; -dēd-um, -dēd-uþ, -dēd-un.
These forms are quite suggestive, in that they parallel the attested strong preterite forms of the root *dhē
in other Germanic languages: Old High German tāt-um, tāt-ut, tāt-un; Old Saxon dād-un.
Another common thread of investigations into the origin of the dental preterite in Germanic has been its
possible relation to the -t- of past participles in Germanic (e.g. Goth. nas-i-þ-s) and in other branches
of Indo-European: Greek do-tó-s 'given'; Latin da-tu-s 'given'. A preterite form with this -t- su x, such
as PIE *kousitōm 'I heard' > PGmc *hauziðōm (EG *hausiðōm), might eventually be con ated in the
Proto-Germanic period with PIE *dhōmi 'I put' > PGmc. *ðōm and reanalyzed as a compound form. Then
by extension in Gothic the preterite plural forms of PIE *dhē, e.g. PGmc *ðēðum, would have been
su xed to ll out the rest of the paradigm.
Another possibility presents itself, one which does not suffer from the ambiguities of stem formation and
analogy which are integral to the preceding theories. Benveniste early studied the use of the dh-
determinatve in PIE, especially in the Greek and Indo-Iranian branches. Lehmann (1942, 1943)
subsequently illustrated the connotations of this su x within the Germanic family, and he proposed that
this determinative is in fact the origin of the dental preterite. The dh-determinative, sometime in the
period leading up to the split of Germanic from PIE, and then subsequently within PGmc, assumed a
similar function in three basic situations:
1. with nouns derived from transitive roots: to denote past passive modi cation. For example,
consider PIE *bher- 'cut' > Gothic fotu-baúrd 'foot-board', Old English bord; compare Greek
perthō 'destroy', Latin ferīre 'strike', Old High German borōn 'bore'; PIE *mel- 'grind' > Gothic
unmidljái (nom. pl. masc.) 'unkind', Old Icelandic mildr 'kind', Old English milde 'kind': the
semantic development is evidently 'something that has been ground up' > 'something soft' >
'gentle, mild'. Compare Gothic malan 'grind', Latin molēre 'grind'. Also PIE *wer- 'speak' > Gothic
waúrd 'word', Old Icelandic orð 'word', Old English word. Compare Latin verbum 'word', Greek eírō
'speak'. The dh-su x denotes 'something that has been spoken'.
2. with nouns derived from intransitive roots: to denote modi cation caused by previous action. For
example, consider PIE *gher- 'like', cf. Sanskrit háryati 'likes', Greek khaírō 'rejoice'. The dh-
formant survives in Sanskrit grdhyati 'desires', Gothic gredáu (dat. sg. masc.) 'desire', Gothic
gredags 'hungry', Old Icelandic gráðr 'hunger'. The semantics pass from 'liking' to the 'result of
having liked continuing into the present', and hence 'desiring'. Consider also PIE *men- 'think'. This
has a dh-extension PIE *mendh- 'turn one's attention to' > Gothic mundrōn 'turn one's attention
to'; compare also Old High German muntar 'alert', Gothic mundrein (dat. sg. fem.) 'desire',
resulting from the semantic association 'having turned one's attention towards' > 'alert'.
3. with verbs: to denote modi cation or change resulting from previous action. For example, consider
PIE *(s)keu- 'cover' > Sanskrit skáuti 'covers'. The dh-extension yields Old English hȳdan 'hide,
conceal', Greek keúthō 'conceal', as well as the nouns Gothic skauda-raip 'shoe-string', Old
Icelandic skjóða 'sack', Middle High German schōte 'covering', Old Persian tigra-xauda 'with
pointed cap'. These dh-forms show a semantic development 'to have covered' > 'hidden'. Consider
also PIE *ar- ' t' > Greek ararískō 'arrange', Latin rērī 'think'. The dh-extension gives Gothic
undrēdan 'take care of', as well as Old Icelandic ráða, Old English rædan, Old Saxon rādan, all
meaning 'give advice'. These show a semantic development ' tting together, thinking' > 'having
thought' > 'giving advice'. Note in addition PIE *wal- 'be strong' > Latin valēre 'be strong'. The dh-
extension gives Gothic waldan, Old Icelandic valda, Old English wealdan, Old Saxon waldan, Old
High German waltan, Lithuanian veldéti, all 'rule, possess'. The dh-determinative changes 'be
strong' to 'have been strong' > 'rule, possess'.
The semantics of the dh-determinative are thus consonant with the eventual dental preterite. Speci cally,
while the PIE verbal system of aspect was still transparent, the dh-determinative signi ed a state reached
by previous event. As this aspectual system gave way to a tense system, this dh-determinative would
have become associated with past action much as the stative developed into the perfect in other
branches of IE, such as Greek and Indo-Iranian. Another distinctive feature commending this theory is the
simple fact that it takes the elusive nature of the ending of the rst periphrastic element at face value:
there was none. The original formation is not V1+V2, but rather the typical PIE formation of R+S+E, that is
root-su x-ending.
By the period of the documented Germanic languages the weak verbs are a self-standing pillar of the
verbal system. Across the rest of the Germanic languages, these verbs fall into three classes, stemming
from the respective su xation of PIE *-j- > PGmc *-j/ij-, PIE *-ā- > PGmc *-ō-, or PIE *-oi- > PGmc
*-ai- to the verbal root. Gothic possesses a fourth class characterized by the su x PIE *-nō- > PGmc *-
nā-. Verbs formed in this manner are found in other Germanic languages, e.g. Old Norse vakna and Old
English wæcnian 'awake', but they are not numerous enough to form a class by themselves. In terms of
preterite morphology, these verbs conjugate according to the PIE *-ā- > PGmc *-ō- class. Gothic thus
possesses the following weak verb classes, usually distinguished in grammars by the form of the
in nitive.
Weak Class In nitive Past 1/3 Sg. Past 1 Pl. Past Part. Meaning

i nas-jan nasida nasidēdum nasiþs 'save'
ii salb-ōn salbōda salbōdēdum salbōþs 'anoint'
iii hab-an habáida habáidēdum habáiþs 'have'
iv full-nan fullnōda fullnōdēdum - 'become full'
Four forms are given above merely for the sake of comparison with strong verbs. Such a list of forms is
not however necessary, as it is for the strong verbs, since the forms of weak verbs are predictable once
the in nitive is given.
37.2 The First Weak Conjugation

The rst weak conjugation is characterized by the su x PIE *-j- > PGmc *-i/ij- added to the verbal root.
These verbs are typically either causative or denominative. Consider the following examples:
Strong Past 3 Strong Weak i

In n. Sg Meaning Class In n. Meaning
Causative
'give to
drigkan dragk 'drink' III dragkjan drink'
'lie, 'make
ligan lag recline' V lagjan recline, lay'
ga- ga-
ga-nisan nas 'be saved' V nasjan 'save'
ur- ur-
ur-reisan ráis 'arise' I ráisjan 'raise'
sitan sat 'sit' V satjan 'set'
af-
sliupan sláup 'slip' II sláupjan 'put off'

Nominative
Denominative
ga-
diups 'deep' diupjan 'make deep'
'feast, keep
dulþs 'feast' dulþjan a feast'
'magnify,
mikils 'great' mikiljan praise'
'become
riqis 'darkness' riqizjan dark'
sigljō 'seal' sigljan 'seal, shut'
'stone, cast
stáins 'stone' stáinjan stones at'

In Gothic, as in the other Germanic languages, the re ex of the PGmc *-i/ij- su x in certain
morphological forms depends on the shape of the root to which it was a xed. There are two possibilities:
Gothic -ji- or -ei- [ī]. First weak conjugation roots thus fall into two groups, based on the re ex of the
su x. The re ex of the su x only differs between the groups in the 2nd and 3rd person singular present
indicative active, in the 2nd person plural present indicative active, and in the 2nd person plural
imperative. Elsewhere the form of the su x does not depend on root shape, but appears as -j- in all
other present forms. The su x appears as -i- in all past forms. For the sake of clarity, paradigms for the
two types of class i weak verbs will be listed separately.
In order to make a clear statement of the distinction between the types of class i weak verbs, we must
re ne our terminology of syllable length. Recall that, according to the de nition given in Section 2.3,
syllables ending in a short vowel are termed short, all others are long. Thus long syllables end in a
consonant or contain a long vowel, or both. For the purposes of describing the rst weak conjugation, a
further distinction must be made. We will restrict the term long syllable and de ne the term overlong
syllable as follows.
long syllable: a syllable containing a short vowel followed by a consonant, or containing a long vowel
with no following consonant;
overlong syllable: a syllable containing a long vowel followed by a consonant.
Note that traditional terminology in Germanic linguistics often includes the former category under the
heading 'short' and terms the latter 'long'. This system has its advantages; the system above is employed
here in order to keep terminology as close as possible to that used in grammars of other early Indo-
European languages, e.g. Latin, Greek, and Sanskrit.
37.2.1 Class ia Verbs
Given the above de nitions of syllable length, we may succinctly characterize the rst type of class i weak
verbs:
Class ia Description Explanation

verbs with For example, the stem syllable may contain a short vowel followed by a
long stem consonant, as nasjan 'to save'; or the stem syllable may contain a long vowel with
Syllable syllable no following consonant, as stōjan 'to judge'.

Re ex -ji- in the 2/3 sg. and 2 pl. present indicative active, and in the 2 pl. imperative.
[Note that this class, according to traditional terminology, contains roots whose stem syllable is 'short'
(nasjan) or 'long' and open (stōjan).]
The verb nasjan 'to save' serves to illustrate the forms of verbs whose stem contains a short vowel
followed by a consonant. The forms are as follows.
Class ia Active Mediopassive
Long
Present
1 Sg. nasja nasjáu nasjada nasjáidáu

2 nasjis nasjáis nasei nasjaza nasjáizáu
3 nasjiþ nasjái nasjadáu nasjada nasjáidáu

1 Du. nasjōs nasjáiwa
2 nasjats nasjáits nasjats

1 Pl. nasjam nasjáima nasjam nasjanda nasjáindáu

2 nasjiþ nasjáiþ nasjiþ nasjanda nasjáindáu
3 nasjand nasjáina nasjandáu nasjanda nasjáindáu

Past
1 Sg. nasida nasidēdjáu
2 nasidēs nasidēdeis
3 nasida nasidēdi

1 Du. nasidēdu nasidēdeiwa
2 nasidēduts nasidēdeits

1 Pl. nasidēdum nasidēdeima
2 nasidēduþ nasidēdeiþ
3 nasidēdun nasidēdeina

In nitive nasjan

Pres. Ptc. nasjands

Past Ptc. nasiþs
For purposes of comparison, the conjugation of stōjan 'to judge' is given below. The forms illustrate the
conjugation of class ia weak verbs whose stem contains a long vowel with no following consonant.
Class ia Active Mediopassive
Long
Present
1 Sg. stōja stōjáu stōjada stōjáidáu

2 stōjis stōjáis stauei stōjaza stōjáizáu
3 stōjiþ stōjái stōjadáu stōjada stōjáidáu

1 Du. stōjōs stōjáiwa
2 stōjats stōjáits stōjats

1 Pl. stōjam stōjáima stōjam stōjanda stōjáindáu

2 stōjiþ stōjáiþ stōjiþ stōjanda stōjáindáu
3 stōjand stōjáina stōjandáu stōjanda stōjáindáu

Past
1 Sg. stauida stauidēdjáu
2 stauidēs stauidēdeis
3 stauida stauidēdi

1 Du. stauidēdu stauidēdeiwa
2 stauidēduts stauidēdeits

1 Pl. stauidēdum stauidēdeima
2 stauidēduþ stauidēdeiþ
3 stauidēdun stauidēdeina

In nitive stōjan

Pres. Ptc. stōjands

Past Ptc. stauiþs
Class ia verbs are thus characterized by the fact that -j- is retained in all present forms, where it is
followed by a vowel. Note that the imperative 2 sg. ending is -ei, so the -j- becomes [ī] when nal. When
-j- comes between two consonants, as in the past forms, it is voiced as -i-. Before a vowel, ō is written
au.
37.2.2 Class ib Verbs
Again according to the above de nitions of syllable length, we may succinctly characterize the second
type of class i weak verbs:
Class ib Description Explanation

verbs with overlong For example, a monosyllabic stem contains a long vowel followed by a
stem syllable, or consonant, as sōkjan 'to seek'; or the stem may contain more than one
Syllable polysyllabic stems syllable, as glitmunjan 'to shine'.

in the 2/3 sg. and 2 pl. present indicative active, and in the 2 pl.
Re ex -ei- imperative.
[Note that this class, according to traditional terminology, contains roots whose stem syllable is 'long' and
closed (sōkjan).]
The verb sōkjan 'to seek' serves to illustrate the forms of verbs whose stem contains a long vowel
followed by a consonant. The forms are as follows.
Class ib Active Mediopassive
Overlong
Present
1 Sg. sōkja sōkjáu sōkjada sōkjáidáu

2 sōkeis sōkjáis sōkei sōkjaza sōkjáizáu
3 sōkeiþ sōkjái sōkjadáu sōkjada sōkjáidáu

1 Du. sōkjōs sōkjáiwa
2 sōkjats sōkjáits sōkjats

1 Pl. sōkjam sōkjáima sōkjam sōkjanda sōkjáindáu

2 sōkeiþ sōkjáiþ sōkeiþ sōkjanda sōkjáindáu
3 sōkjand sōkjáina sōkjandáu sōkjanda sōkjáindáu

Past
1 Sg. sōkida sōkidēdjáu
2 sōkidēs sōkidēdeis
3 sōkida sōkidēdi

1 Du. sōkidēdu sōkidēdeiwa
2 sōkidēduts sōkidēdeits

1 Pl. sōkidēdum sōkidēdeima
2 sōkidēduþ sōkidēdeiþ
3 sōkidēdun sōkidēdeina

In nitive sōkjan

Pres. Ptc. sōkjands

Past Ptc. sōkiþs
Class ib verbs are thus characterized by the fact that -j- is retained before the back vowel -a-, but
assimilates with a following -i- to give ī (written ei). As in class ia the imperative 2 sg. ending is -ei, so
the -j- becomes [ī] when nal. Likewise, as in class ia, when -j- comes between two consonants, it is
voiced as -i-.
37.2.3 Irregular and t-Su x Weak Verbs
The verb gaggan 'to go' was originally a reduplicated verb of the strong class VII. It nevertheless once
shows a weak preterite gaggida in Gothic; generally the suppletive forms iddja, iddjēs, etc. supply the
past tense of gaggan. Some weak verbs already lacked in Proto-Germanic the medial -i- between root
and dental su x. The ensuing phonetic environment led to -t- as the re ex of the dental su x in the past
forms. The verb káupatjan 'to buffet' falls into this category, though the past participle shows -i-. The
following is a list of the verbs in Gothic showing these peculiar features.
In nitive Past 1/3 Sg. Past Part. Meaning

briggan brāhta brāhts 'bring'
brūkjan brūhta brūhts 'use'
bugjan baúhta -baúhts 'buy'
gaggan iddja gaggans 'go'
káupatjan káupasta káupatiþs 'buffet'
þagkjan þāhta -þāhts 'think'
þugkjan þūhta -þūhts 'seem'
waúrkjan waúrhta -waúrhts 'work, make'

38 The Second Weak Conjugation

The second weak conjugation is characterized by the su x PIE *-ā- > PGmc *-ō- added to the verbal
root. These verbs are typically denominative. Consider the following examples:
Weak ii
Nominative Stem Meaning In n. Meaning
Denominative
fisks fiska- ' sh' fiskōn ' sh, catch sh'
fráuja fráujin- 'lord' fráujinōn 'rule over'
'hunger, be
grēdus grēdu- 'hunger' grēdōn hungry'
gudja gudjin- 'priest' gudjinōn 'be a priest'
hatis hatiz- 'hatred' hatizōn 'be angry'
kara karō- 'care' karōn 'be concerned'
ga-
páida páidō- 'shirt' páidōn 'clothe'
reiki reiki- 'realm' reikinōn 'rule'
sidus sidu- 'custom' sidōn 'practice'
skalks skalka- 'servant' skalkinōn 'serve'
sunja sunjō- 'truth' sunjōn 'defend oneself'
þiudans þiudana- 'king' þiudanōn 'be king, rule'

Unlike in the rst weak conjugation, the form of the class ii su x does not depend on root shape, but
appears as -ō- in all other present forms. The su x likewise appears as -ō- in all past forms.
The verb salbōn 'to anoint' serves to illustrate the forms of class ii weak verbs. The forms are as follows.
Class ii Active Mediopassive

Present
1 Sg. salbō salbō salbōda salbōdáu

2 salbōs salbōs salbō salbōza salbōzáu
3 salbōþ salbō salbōdáu salbōda salbōdáu

1 Du. salbōs salbōwa
2 salbōts salbōts salbōts

1 Pl. salbōm salbōma salbōm salbōnda salbōndáu

2 salbōþ salbōþ salbōþ salbōnda salbōndáu
3 salbōnd salbōna salbōndáu salbōnda salbōndáu

Past
1 Sg. salbōda salbōdēdjáu
2 salbōdēs salbōdēdeis
3 salbōda salbōdēdi

1 Du. salbōdēdu salbōdēdeiwa
2 salbōdēduts salbōdēdeits

1 Pl. salbōdēdum salbōdēdeima
2 salbōdēduþ salbōdēdeiþ
3 salbōdēdun salbōdēdeina

In nitive salbōn

Pres. Ptc. salbōnds

Past Ptc. salbōþs
Note the su x -ō- appears in all forms built to the present stem, replacing even the distinctive su x of
the subjunctive. The -ō- also precedes the dental su x in past forms, indicative and subjunctive.
39 The Subjunctive
The subjunctive in Gothic describes an event which is viewed by the speaker as not actual. For example,
the speaker may feel that the event is potential ('were I your brother...'), supposed ('assuming this be
true...'), reported ('I've heard he would walk at night...'), or desired ('Thy kingdom come...'). The non-factual
or uncon rmed status of these events in the view of the speaker is conveyed by the use of the
subjunctive. The corresponding statements, when the speaker views the events as factual or con rmed,
employ the indicative. The statements are actual ('I am your brother'), known ('It is true that...'), witnessed
('I saw that he walked...'), or realized ('as we forgive those who trespass...').
Gothic, like other Germanic languages, has two subjunctive formations, one built from the present stem of
the verb, the other built from the past stem. The distinction, however, is not one of tense -- it cannot be,
since the subjunctive denotes an event which is unreal, and therefore cannot be located in time. The
distinction between Past and Present Subjunctive, then, is essentially one of the event viewed as a
complete whole (Past Subjunctive) or as incomplete (Present Subjunctive), or rather, as viewed without
speci c reference to its completion (though it may in fact be completed). The formation and use of the
subjunctive in Gothic is described in the following sections.
Proto-Indo-European possessed two different verb formations to denote events viewed as unreal: the
subjunctive and the optative. Succinctly, the subjunctive denotes events which are simply viewed as
unreal, e.g. 'if I were you...'; the optative generally denotes wishes, e.g. 'would I were you...'. Inasmuch as
most subjunctive forms in Gothic actually continue the forms of the PIE optative, many grammars use the
term optative instead of subjunctive. By the time of the Gothic texts, however, the point is pragmatically
moot, since the functions of PIE subjunctive and optative both have merged into the single irrealis mood
called subjunctive in these lessons.
39.1 Present Subjunctive

Both strong and weak verbs form the present subjunctive from the same stem as the present indicative
of the verb. The verbs baíran 'to bear', nasjan 'to save', and salbōn 'to anoint', serve to illustrate the
paradigm. The verb wisan 'to be' forms the subjunctive from the stem found in the present indicative
plural, e.g. 1 pl. sijum.
Strong Weak i Weak ii

Pres. In n. baíran nasjan salbōn wisan

Pres. Subjunct.

1 Sg. baíráu nasjáu salbō sijáu

2 baíráis nasjáis salbōs sijáis
3 baírái nasjái salbō sijái

1 Du. baíráiwa nasjáiwa salbōwa
2 baíráits nasjáits salbōts

1 Pl. baíráima nasjáima salbōma sijáima

2 baíráiþ nasjáiþ salbōþ sijáiþ
3 baíráina nasjáina salbōna sijáina

The verb wisan 'to be' has no extant dual forms in the present subjunctive. The -ō- of verbs of the
second weak conjugation stands in place of the -ái- found in the subjunctive of other verbs.
The present subjunctive is often used to express wishes capable of ful llment: wiljáuei mis gibáis ana
mesa háubiþ Iōhannis 'I desire that thou give me the head of John on a platter' (Mark 6.25); weihnái
namō þein; qimái þiudanassus þeins; waírþái wilja þeins... jah ni briggáis uns in fráistubnjái
'hallowed be thy name, thy kingdom come, thy will be done... and lead us not into temptation' (Matthew
6.9-13); guþ gibái izwis 'God grant you' (Romans 15.5). The present subjunctive is also used to refer to
the following circumstances:
exhortation: gawaúrkjáima hleiþrōs þrins 'let us make three tents' (Luke 9.33; but compare Mark 9.5
gawaúrkjam); ni filuwaúrdjáiþ 'do not use many words' (Matthew 6.7); þaírhgaggáima ju und
Bēþlahaím jah saíƕáima 'let us now go unto Bethlehem and see' (Luke 2.15); swa nu bidjáiþ jus 'so
therefore pray ye' (Matthew 6.9).
indirect discourse: The present subjunctive may be introduced by either a present or past tense verb.
For example, jusqiþiþ þatei wajamērjáu 'do you say that I blaspheme?' (John 10.36); Farisaieis
frēhun ina skuldu sijái mann qēn afsatjan 'the Pharisees asked him if it be lawful for a man to put
away (his) wife' (Mark 10.2).
possibility: faírgunja miþsatjáu 'I could remove mountains' (I Corinthians 13.2); jah þan in sis silbin
ƕōftulja habái 'and then shall he have rejoicing in himself' (Galatians 6.4).
purpose: The present subjunctive may follow either a primary or secondary tense. For example, swa
liuhtjái liuhaþ izwar... ei gasaíƕáina izwara gōda waúrstwa jah háuhjáina attan izwarana 'let
your light shine... that they may see your good works, and glorify your Father' (Matthew 5.16); galisiþ
þōs aflifnandeins draúhsnōs, þei waítái ni fraqistnái 'gather up the remaining fragments, that
nothing may be lost' (John 6.12); Mōsēs gamēlida unsis... ei nimái brōþar is þō qēn is jah
ussatjái barna brōþr seinamma 'Moses wrote unto us... that his brother should (and shall) take his
wife and raise up children unto his brother' (Mark 12.19).
supposition: jabái ƕas mein waúrd fastái 'if anyone keep my word' (John 8.52); táujiþ jah láisjái
'shall do and (may indeed) teach' (Matthew 5.19).
uncertainty: ƕas þannu sa sijái 'who, then, can this be?' (Matthew 4.41).
The present subjunctive is also used to refer to present or future time after the conjunction faúrþizei
'before': faúrþizei jus bidjáiþ ina 'before ye ask him' (Matthew 6.8).
39.2 Past Subjunctive
The past subjunctive is formed from the same stem found in the past plural indicative of the verb. This
holds true for both strong and weak verbs, so that the strong past subjunctive shows the ablaut of the
strong plural (and reduplication in verbs of class VII), and the weak past subjunctive shows the dental
su x found in the weak plural. The verbs baíran 'to bear', nasjan 'to save', salbōn 'to anoint', and wisan
'to be' serve to illustrate the paradigm.
Strong Weak i Weak ii

Pres. In n. baíran nasjan salbōn wisan

Past 1 Pl. bērum nasidēdum salbōdēdum wēsum

Past Subjunct.

1 Sg. bērjáu nasidēdjáu salbōdēdjáu wēsjáu

2 bēreis nasidēdeis salbōdēdeis wēseis
3 bēri nasidēdi salbōdēdi wēsi

1 Du. bēreiwa
2 bēreits nasidēdeits salbōdēdeits wēseits

1 Pl. bēreima nasidēdeima salbōdēdeima wēseima

2 bēreiþ nasidēdeiþ salbōdēdeiþ wēseiþ
3 bēreina nasidēdeina salbōdēdeina wēseina

Forms for the rst person dual are lacking in the weak verbs.
The past subjunctive is often used to express wishes unful lled or unable to be ful lled: iþ wissēdeis...
'hadst thou but known...' (Luke 19.42); jahwáinei þiudanōdēdeiþ 'and would that ye did reign!' (I
Corinthians 4.8). The past subjunctive also expresses unreal conditions, present or past: wáinei
þiudanōdēdeiþ 'would that ye reigned!' (I Corinthians 4.8); wēseis hēr 'if thou hadst been here' (John
11.21). The past subjunctive is also used to refer to the following circumstances:
exhortation: anabáuþ im ei mann ni qēþeina 'he commanded them that they should not tell any
man' (Mark 7.36).
indirect discourse: The past subjunctive is always introduced by a past tense verb. For example, þadei
háusidēdun ei is wēsi 'where they heard he was' (Mark 6.55); jah sōkidēdun ƕáiwa ina
innatbēreina jah galagidēdeina in andwaírþja is 'and they sought how they might bring him in and
lay him before him' (Luke 5.18).
possibility: ƕa wēsi þata 'what that might be' (Luke 15.26).
purpose: The past subjunctive rarely follows a primary tense, generally following a secondary tense.
For example, atgibana ist mis hnuþō leika meinamma, aggilus satanins, ei mik káupastēdi
'there is given to me a thorn in my esh, a messenger of Satan, to buffet me' (II Corinthians 12.7); jah
allans þans ubil habandans gaháilida, ei usfullnōdēdi 'and healed all those that were sick, that it
might be ful lled' (Matthew 8.16-17); rūna nēmun allái þái gudjans... bi Iēsu, ei afdáuþidēdeina
ina 'all the chief priests... took counsel against Jesus, that they might put him to death' (Matthew 27.1).
supposition: hugidēdun þatei is bi slēp qēþi 'they supposed that he was speaking of sleep' (John
11.13).
uncertainty: ni kunnandans ƕaþar skuldēdi máiza 'not knowing which should be greater' (Skeireins
3.4).
The past subjunctive is also used to refer to past time after the conjunction faúrþizei 'before': faúrþizei
Abraham waúrþi, im ik 'before Abraham was, I am' (John 8.58).
40 Tense and Aspect
Tense places an event on a timeline, relative to the perspective of the one uttering a clause. The speaker's
perspective is de ned as now, and this partitions the timeline into past (before now), present (concurrent
with now), and future (after now). Aspect, by contrast, focuses on the speaker's conception of the event
represented by a verb. Sometimes the conception of an event is part and parcel of the meaning of the
word itself, whereby one refers to lexical aspect (the terms Aktionsart and manner/type of action are also
found). In other instances, however, certain changes in morphology may denote different conceptions of
the same basic event. Scholars generally refer to this morphological aspect with the unquali ed term
'aspect'.
Events may be durative, i.e. extending over time, or punctual, without temporal extent. Likewise events
may be active/eventive, denoting an input of energy to maintain action, or stative, denoting a quality or
state of being maintained without effort. Any of these may be further characterized as perfective or
imperfective. An event is perfective when it is viewed with speci c reference to its endpoints; that is, both
beginning and end are included in the event, so that the event makes a conceptually indivisible whole. An
event is imperfective when it is not perfective. More speci cally, an event is imperfective when the
speaker does not make reference to the endpoints of the action, so that the conception is not that of an
indivisible whole, but rather that of an action with internal structure.
40.1 The ga- Pre x

Proto-Indo-European verbs functioned primarily according to an aspectual system, at its most basic
divided into active and stative (or eventive and stative). Tense was a secondary development largely
con ned to the individual daughter languages. It appears that adverbial elements within the utterance
could also convey aspectual value. In some of the daughter languages, these adverbial elements came to
occupy a position just before the verb, hence the term preverbs. The preverbal elements came most
conspicuously in Slavic to develop a robust aspectual system complementary to the su xal system
inherited from PIE. But the aspectual nature of preverbs has left possible traces in other branches of Indo-
European, including Germanic. The most likely member of this preverbal system is PIE *kom- 'near, at,
with', which in pretonic position voices the intial *k- > g- [ḡ] according to Verner's Law (see Section 6),
and remains as ga- in Gothic and Old Saxon, ge- in other Germanic languages.
In the earliest stages of PIE, preverbs were uncommon, but sentence particles could nevertheless perform
an aspectual role. PIE *kom- has left traces of its independence from verbs even in those daughter
languages in which it seems to serve as an aspectual preverb. Its use as a postpositive particle survives
in Latin mē-cum 'with me' and tē-cum 'with you'; likewise it is found at the end of sentence-initial enclitic
chains in Hittite nu-kan and Vedic nú-kam, where it lls a perfectivizing role. This freedom even
survives in Gothic, where other sentence elements may intervene between ga- and the verb. For example,
þu ga-u-láubjeis du sunáu gudis 'do ye believe in the Son of Man (God)' (John 9.35); ga-þáu-
láubidēdeiþ mis 'ye would believe me' (John 5.46). This extends to strings of elements, such as ga-þ-
þan-miþ-sandidēdun < ga-(u)h-þan-miþ-sandidēdun 'we are sending along with (him)' (II
Corinthians 8.18); even to nominal elements, such as ga-u-ƕa-sēƕi 'did you see anything?' (Mark 8.23).
There is some cross-linguistic evidence supporting the possibility that PIE *kom- served as a
perfectivizing preverb in various daughter languages. For example, one nds the common contrast of
PGmc *þahan (cf. Old Norse þega) and Latin tacēre, both 'be silent', versus Gothic ga-þahan and Latin
con-ticēre, both 'fall silent'. This contrast of perfectivity remains in some places within the Gothic
corpus. For example, take háusjan and gaháusjan, both 'to hear'. In the statement saei habái áusōna
háusjandōna gaháusjái 'Whoever has ears to hear, let him hear' (Mark 4.9), the unpre xed participial
form háusjandōna is temporally unbounded, akin to 'ears hearing, and keeping right on hearing'. The
pre xed form gaháusjái, by contrast, is bounded, and akin to 'let him hear, once and for all, and get it
done with'. Consider also the following examples contrasting the verbal pair sigqan-gasigqan, both
meaning 'sink':
Perfective: andanahtja þan waúrþanamma, þan gasagq sauil, bērun du imma allans 'With
evening having come, when the sun had set, they brought them all to him' (Mark 1.32);
Imperfective: miþþanei þan sagq sunnō, allái... brahtēdun ins du imma 'While the sun was
sinking, they all... brought them to him' (Luke 4.40).
Within Germanic, the ga- pre x was early associated with the past participle. In some of the Germanic
languages, such as Old Saxon, this pre x was so common as to become essentially obligatory on the past
participle. Compare
Language In nitive 3 Sg. Past 1 Pl. Past Past Part. Meaning

Gothic bindan band bundum bundans 'bind'
Old English bindan band bundon bunden 'bind'
Old Saxon bindan band bundun gibundan 'bind'
Old High German bintan bant buntun gibuntan 'bind'
Some verbs, however, typically occurred with the ga- pre x thoughout the paradigm. Compare
Language In nitive 3 Sg. Past 1 Pl. Past Past Part. Meaning

Old English ge-wītan ge-wāt ge-witon ge-witen 'go'
Old Saxon gi-uuītan gi-uuēt gi-uuitun gi-uuitan 'go'
This pre x is found with cognate verbs even outside Germanic: compare Gothic ga-qiman and Old
English ge-cuman, both 'come', to Latin con-venīre 'come'. As the aspect system of late PIE and early
PGmc gave way to a true tense system, the stative developed into a past tense in Germanic, parallel to the
development, e.g., of the PIE stative into the perfect of Greek and Sanskrit. At this stage the ga- pre x
came to be naturally associated with the past tense.
40.2 Future
Gothic has no speci c morphological forms to denote the future tense. Instead, Gothic employs the
present forms with future sense, a trait it shares with the other Germanic languages -- compare Modern
English 'I am going to the store in ve minutes; is anybody coming?' Both present indicative and present
subjunctive forms are used in this manner. Consider the following examples: áudagái þái
hráinjahaírtans, untē þái guþ gasaíƕand 'blessed (are) the pure in heart, for they shall see God'
(Matthew 5.8); ni ufarswaráis, iþ usgibáis fráujin áiþans þeinans 'thou shalt not forswear thyself, but
shalt perform unto the Lord thine oaths' (Matthew 5.33); ni maúrþrjáis; iþ saei maúrþreiþ skula
waírþiþ stauái 'thou shalt not kill; and whosoever shall kill shall be in danger of the judgment' (Matthew
5.21).
Also like the other Germanic languages, Gothic employs a few auxiliary verbs to form a periphrastic
future: skulan 'shall', haban 'have', duginnan 'begin'. Compare Modern English 'I shall return' and 'I have
to go in ve minutes'. Such constructions are rare. Consider the following examples: ƕa skuli þata barn
waírþan 'what manner of child shall this be?' (Luke 1.66); þaruh sa andbahts meins wisan habáiþ 'and
there shall also my servant be' (John 12.26); iþ þatei táuja, jah táujan haba 'but what I do, and will do' (II
Corinthians 11.12); untē gáunōn jah grētan duginnid 'for ye shall mourn and weep' (Luke 6.25); jah in
þamma faginō, akei jah faginōn duginna 'and I therein do rejoice, yea, and will rejoice' (Philippians
1.18).
Gothic also occasionally uses the adjective anawaírþs 'future' to express the future: þatei anawaírþ was
uns du winnan agliþōs 'that we should suffer tribulation', literally 'that it was future for us to suffer...' (I
Thessalonians 3.4); izei anawaírþái wēsun du galáubjan imma '(to them) which should hereafter
believe on him' (I Timothy 1.16).
An event completed in the future, i.e. the future perfect, is likewise rendered in Gothic by present forms.
For example, ni usgaggis jáinþrō, untē usgibis þana minnistan kintu 'thou shalt by no means come
out thence, till thou hast paid the uttermost farthing', meaning 'till thou shalt have paid...' (Matthew 5.26);
hana ni hrukeiþ, untē þu mik afáikis kunnan þrim sinþam 'the cock shall not crow, till thou hast
denied me thrice', meaning 'till thou shalt have denied...' (John 13.38).
40.3 Historical Present

Gothic makes use of the historical present, though only when the Greek does so as well. The term
historical present denotes the use of a present tense form to refer to a past action. This is found in
Modern English, more commonly in some speakers than others, and forms a marked narrative technique
for jokes of the form 'Two guys walk into a bar...'. The general explanation for such present tense use is
that use of the present tense where the listener expects a past tense adds a sense of vividness, bringing
the listener into the narrative instead of keeping him or her at a mental distance. This is a common
technique in historical narratives in the classical languages Latin and Greek, and is found in Germanic
languages as well -- prominently so in Old Norse. Gothic however provides only instances which mimic
their Greek prototype. For example, naúhþan imma rōdjandin gaggiþ sums mannē 'while he was still
speaking, a certain one of men comes...' (Luke 8.49); þō qaþ, jah afar þata qiþiþ du im 'these things
said he, and after that he saith unto them' (John 11.11). Occasionally the Gothic translates a Greek
historical present with a past form: jah
atiddjēdun du Iēsua, jah gasaíƕand þana wōdan 'and they
came to Jesus, and see the possessed (one)' (Mark 5.15). Here the past form atiddjēdun translates the
Greek present form ērkhontai 'come', while the present form gasaíƕand mimics the Greek present
theōrousin.
Gothic Online
Lesson 9
Gothic Wanderings, 376-401
In the year 376, the Goths sent a request to cross the Danube into Roman territory. The clearest source for
events of the Gothic crossing into Roman territory is Ammianus Marcellinus. According to his account, in
376 the Tervingi under Fritigern and Alaviv were allowed to cross the Danube into Roman territory and
settle in Thrace. They may have been ordered to disarm as a condition of entry, but if so, the Roman
o cials in charge seemed to ignore this. They were not allowed to settle as a separate group with their
own territory, and they had no autonomous status within the empire. The mass move strained Roman
resources in terms of manpower and equipment to ferry the Goths across the Danube; it likewise caused
shortages of food.
Lupinicus, a Roman commander in Thrace, was dispatched with some troops to provide an escort to the
Goths, weakening Roman forces along the Danube. As a result, other tribes subsequently forced their way
across the Danube: Greuthungi under Alatheus and Safrax; Greuthungi under Farnobius; Taifali from the
region of Walachia. The Taifali and Greuthungi under Farnobius coalesced into one group; those under
Alatheus and Safrax joined with Fritigern. Lupicinus invited the mutually antagonistic Fritigern and Alaviv
to a feast, but a quarrel ensued in which Roman soldiers killed the Gothic escorts of Fritigern and Alaviv.
Fritigern escaped, but Alaviv's name is no longer mentioned by Ammianus; likewise the name Tervingi is
no longer mentioned, only Goths.
The Goths began to ravage the land. Lupicinus went to put down the revolt, but he was killed and his
forces were wiped out. Other Goths in Roman employ joined in the revolt, leading to an unsuccessful
Gothic siege of Adrianople, led by Fritigern. Emperor Valens in the Eastern Empire sent troops led by
Traianus and Profuturus to meet the Goths in Thrace; coemperor Gratian of the Western Empire sent
troops under Frigeridus and together they tried to starve the Tervingi under Fritigern. Meanwhile Frigeridus
suffered an attack of gout and command fell to Richomeres. Both Gothic and imperial forces could nally
wait no longer and attacked one another, but the outcome was inconclusive.
Fritigern subsequently convinced Alatheus and Safrax to join him, adding Greuthungi, Alanic, and Hunnic
cavalry to his troops. Frigeridus returned to Thrace in 377 and killed Farnobius in a battle against
Greuthungi and Taifali troops. Fritigern called a general retreat; later in 378 he sent a priest to Valens
demanding all of Thrace, but simultaneously sent a secret letter offering himself as a Roman ally. Valens,
sensing Fritigern's weakness, attacked the Goths, leading his troops along with the commander
Sebastianus, who had replaced Traianus. The Roman troops left from Adrianople. Fritigern's cavalry
quickly routed the Roman cavalry, and shortly afterward the infantry, with the result that the battle ended
in a Gothic victory. Valens was seriously wounded in the ght and subsequently died.
Bolstered by their victory, the Goths continued to pillage the surrounding areas. But ironically the
newfound success led to a concomitant sense of self-satisfaction among the Goths, with the result that
Fritigern lost some of his troop's cohesion. To drive off the Gothic plunderers, the emperor Theodosius
enlisted the help of the Goth Modares-Modaharius and later Athanaric to ght Fritigern's forces. With their
aid they overcame the latter and struck a treaty with Fritigern's former subjects in 382.
As part of the treaty, the Goths were settled in Dacia and Thrace. They received land for their own use and
were considered autonomous, but did not own property according to imperial law. They were obliged to
enter Roman military service, but could only receive subordinate commands. They were exempt from
taxation.
Soon the empire was again in turmoil. Out of the destabilization caused by the would-be usurper
Maximus, a Goth from Moesia by the name of Alaric headed an uprising in 391. His forces were eventually
defeated, but Alaric was released on the orders of Theodosius, a scenario which was to happen four more
times between 392 and 402. Eventually Alaric returned to serve Theodosius in putting down another
attempted usurpation by Eugenius in 394. After Theodosius died in 395, the Gothic troops were
discharged, but lack of supplies led to plundering on their trip home.
In 394-395 the Huns nally pushed across the Danube and drove the major part of the Gothic forces to
seek a safe haven. This majority, under Alaric, pushed to Constantinople and reached an agreement with
the top imperial advior Ru nus in which Alaric was allowed a high military post and his Gothic followers
granted entrance into eastern Illyricum. They eventually forced their way south as far as Larissa, then
fought and plundered until they reached the Peloponnesus. The Romans were eventually pressured into a
treaty in 397, granting the Goths land in central Macedonia between the Haliacmon and Axius rivers, and
granting Alaric a high military post with Illyrian troops under his command, integrating him into the Roman
military hierarchy once again.
In this position Alaric consolidated his power: he became the ward of Gothic ethnic identity, and had the
authority to punish acts of desertion by opportunistic Gothic chiefs. It is not clear if Alaric was elevated to
a true king, a þiudans, but his status as reiks reached a new height, with monarchic overtones.
In 399 the Goth Tribigild led an uprising in Phrygia, his forces consisting in large part of Greuthungi who
had formerly been loyal to Odotheus. They ravaged Asia Minor until they met with defeat in Pisidia.
Tribigild escaped with 300 men. Gainas was eventually sent with Roman forces to stamp out the rebellion,
but sometime around 400 he changed sides and helped the Goths cross the Bosporus. Tribigild was killed
shortly thereafter, but Gainas soon occupied Constantinople itself. The imperial palace was burned, and
the populace rallied against the numerically inferior Goths. Seven hundred sought refuge in an Orthodox
church, but were killed by order of the emperor Arcadius.
Gainas escaped and tried to cross back into Asia Minor, but a fellow tribesman, Fravitta, led a Roman eet
to destroy their makeshift rafts. Gainas evidently turned north seeking to lead his remaining Goths back to
their homeland across the Danube. They met with the Huns and suffered defeat; the Hunnic commander
Uldin sent the head of Gainas to Constantinople. The emperor received it on January 3, 401.

The following passage is Mark 16.1-12. The rst section, Mark 16:1-8, recounts how two of the women in
Jesus' entourage were preparing to enter the borrowed tomb in which the Savior was buried, remove the
death shroud, and anoint his body with the customary burial spices; but they found the tomb empty.
Verses 9-20, of which 9-12a are included here, seem to constitute an addition to Mark's gospel; this
ending, written in another style, was supplied by a much later writer, as it exists in none of the best Greek
manuscripts. It is nevertheless already present in the 4th century manuscript used to produce the Gothic
Bible.
In the rst verse we nd an example of a genitive absolute: inwisandins sabbate dagis 'when the day of
the sabbath was past' (Mark 16.1). These genitive constructions are relatively rare in Gothic, this being an
imitation of the Greek diagenoménou tou sabbátou. Unfortunately such slavish adherence to the
morphologically more robust Greek original creates awkard sense in the Gothic, since the Greek aorist
participle denotes a completed action, while the Gothic present participle ostensibly has the sense of an
on-going action.
In Mark 16.5 we nd the term taíhswái 'right (side)'. This derives from the adjective *taíhswa 'right'. The
phrase taíhswō handus 'right hand (side)' has been shortened simply to the weak feminine adjective
alone: taíhswō, as encountered in Matthew 6.3 in Lesson 5; or less frequently to a strong feminine
adjective as here. The same process has left the Greek cognate adjective hē deksía 'the right (hand)' with
the same denotation. Latin similarly uses the feminine adjective to denote the right side: dextra (manus)
'right (hand)', so ad dextram 'to the right', and hence Modern Spanish derecha 'to the right' -- but
derecho 'straight'. The su x -w- is the same as that found in Greek, i.e. *deksiwos > deksios (compare
Mycenaean de-ki-si-wo). The su x is absent in the Latin cognate, though present in laevus 'left'.
Mark 16.6 provides an interesting grammatical gem: sai þana staþ 'behold the place'. The particle sai
generally functions as a weak exclamatory, equivalent to 'lo!'. Such a function commends one scholarly
theory as to the origin of the interjection, namely that it derives from a compound of the Gothic
demonstrative sa with the PIE deictic particle i, as found in, e.g., Greek houtos-í 'this one here' or vuv-í
'just now'. Another theory suggests that the form is in fact the locative of the sa- pronoun. The above
phrase, however, contains sai followed by an accusative, which is di cult to construe according to the
above theories. A third possibility exists, namely that sai is an apocopated form of the 2nd person
singular imperative of saíƕan, thus saíƕ 'look (at)!', with loss of the nal consonant -ƕ. Although not
without its problems, this interpretation makes good sense of the accusative -- now the direct object of a
verb -- in this phrase.
Another interesting construction is found in Mark 16.8: dizuh-þan-sat ijos reiro jah usfilmei, literally
'and then a trembling beset them, and amazement'. Note here the interpolation of -uh and þan between
the pre x and root of the verb dis-sitan 'settle upon'. In intervocalic position, the -s of the pre x voices to
-z-. Such insertion of conjunctions between verb and preverb is not uncommon in Gothic, and may even
include nominal elements such as ƕa 'anything'. See also the discussion of the ga-pre x in Lesson 8,
Section 40.1.
16:1- jah inwisandins sabbate dagis Marja so Magdalene jah Marja so Iakobis jah Salome
usbauhtedun aromata, ei atgaggandeins gasalbodedeina ina.

inwisandins -- strong verb class 5; genitive singular masculine of present participle of <inwisan>
to be present, near at hand -- when... was past # inwisandins... dagis genitive absolute
sabbate -- strong noun, masculine; genitive plural of <sabbatus> Sabbath -- the sabbath
dagis -- strong noun, masculine; genitive singular of <dags> day -- ...
Marja -- proper noun, feminine; nominative singular of <Marja> Mary -- Mary
Magdalene -- proper noun, feminine; nominative singular of <Magdalēnē> Magdalene --
Magdalene
Marja -- proper noun, feminine; nominative singular of <Marja> Mary -- Mary
(mother)
Iakobis -- strong proper noun, masculine; genitive singular of <Iakōb> Jacob, James -- of James
Salome -- proper noun, feminine; nominative singular of <Salōmē> Salome -- Salome
usbauhtedun -- weak verb class 1; third person plural preterite of <usbugjan> to buy -- had bought
aromata -- noun, neuter; accusative plural of <aromata> (pl.) spices -- (sweet) spices # Greek
borrowing; this is the only occurrence of this word in Gothic
atgaggandeins -- strong verb class 7; nominative plural feminine of present participle of
<atgaggan> to come, go -- they might come and
gasalbodedeina -- weak verb class 2; third person plural preterite subjunctive of <gasalbōn>
annoint -- annoint
2 - jah filu air þis dagis afarsabbate atiddjedun du þamma hlaiwa at urrinnandin sunnin.

filu -- strong noun, neuter; used as adverb <filu> much, many -- very
air -- adverb; <áir> soon, early -- early (in the morning)
þis -- demonstrative used as article; genitive singular masculine of <sa, so, þata> this, that -- the
dagis -- strong noun, masculine; genitive singular of <dags> day -- day
afarsabbate -- strong noun, masculine; genitive plural of <afarsabbatus> day after the Sabbath,
Sunday -- rst... of the week # this is the only occurrence of this word
atiddjedun -- strong verb class 7; third person plural suppletive preterite of <atgaggan> to come,
go -- they came
hlaiwa -- strong noun, neuter; dative singular of <hláiw> grave, tomb -- sepulchre
at -- preposition; <at> at, by, to, with, of -- at
urrinnandin -- strong verb class 3; dative singular neuter of present participle of <urrinnan> to
rise, come from, go forth -- the rising of
sunnin -- weak noun, feminine/neuter; dative singular of <sunnō> sun -- the sun
3 - jah qeþun du sis misso: ƕas afwalwjai unsis þana stain af daurom þis hlaiwis?

qeþun -- strong verb class 5; third person plural preterite of <qiþan> to say, speak -- they said
du -- preposition; <du> to, towards; against; in -- among
sis -- re exive pronoun; dative of <sik> himself, herself, oneself -- themselves
misso -- adverb; <missō> reciprocally, the one the other, one to another -- ...
ƕas -- interrogative pronoun; nominative singular masculine of <ƕas> who, what -- who
afwalwjai -- weak verb class 1; third person singular present subjunctive of <afwalwjan> to roll
away -- shall roll... away
unsis -- personal pronoun; dative plural of <ik> I -- us
the
stain -- strong noun, masculine; accusative singular of <stáins> stone -- stone
daurom -- strong noun, feminine; dative plural <daúr> doorway -- the door
þis -- demonstrative used as article; genitive singular neuter of <sa, so, þata> this, that -- of the
hlaiwis -- strong noun, neuter; genitive singular of <hláiw> grave, tomb -- sepulchre
4 - jah insaiƕandeins gaumidedun þammei afwalwiþs ist sa stains; was auk mikils abraba.

insaiƕandeins -- strong verb class 5; nominative plural feminine of present participle of
<insaíƕan> to look upon, regard -- when they looked
gaumidedun -- weak verb class 1; third person plural preterite of <gáumjan> to observe, perceive,
see -- they saw
þammei -- relative pronoun; dative singular neuter of <saei> who, he who, which -- that
afwalwiþs -- weak verb class 1; nominative singular masculine of preterite participle of
<afwalwjan> to roll away -- rolled away
ist -- strong verb class 5; athematic third person singular present of <wisan> to be -- was
stains -- strong noun, masculine; nominative singular of <stáins> stone -- stone
was -- strong verb class 5; third person singular preterite of <wisan> to be -- it was
mikils -- adjective; nominative singular masculine of <mikils> great -- great
abraba -- adverb; <abraba> strongly, excessively, very, very much -- very
5- jah atgaggandeins in þata hlaiw gaseƕun juggalauþ sitandan in taihswai biwaibidana wastjai
ƕeitai; jah usgeisnodedun.

atgaggandeins -- strong verb class 7; nominative plural feminine of present participle of
<atgaggan> to come, go -- entering
þata -- demonstrative used as article; accusative singular neuter of <sa, so, þata> this, that -- the
hlaiw -- strong noun, neuter; accusative singular of <hláiw> grave, tomb -- sepulchre
juggalauþ -- strong noun, masculine; accusative singular of <juggaláuþs> young man -- a young
man
sitandan -- strong verb class 5; accusative singular masculine of present participle of <sitan> to sit
-- sitting
in -- preposition; <in> into, towards; on account of; in, among, by -- on
taihswai -- adjective used as substantive; dative singular feminine of <taíhswa> right; (fem. subst.)
right hand, right side -- right hand
biwaibidana -- weak verb class 1; accusative singular masculine of preterite participle of
<biwáibjan> to clothe, to wrap -- clothed
wastjai -- strong noun, feminine; dative singular of <wasti> garment -- in a (long)... garment
ƕeitai -- adjective; dative singular feminine of <ƕeits> white -- white
usgeisnodedun -- weak verb class 4; third person plural preterite of <usgeisnan> to be amazed,
astonished -- they were affrighted
6 - þaruh qaþ du im: ni faurhteiþ izwis, Iesu sokeiþ Nazoraiu þana ushramidan; nist her, urrais,
sai þana staþ þarei galagidedun ina.
þaruh -- conjunction; <þaruh> therefore, but, and; there; now -- but

qaþ -- strong verb class 5; third person singular preterite of <qiþan> to say, speak -- he saith
im -- personal pronoun; dative plural feminine of <is> he, she, it -- them
faurhteiþ -- weak verb class 1; second person plural imperative of <faurhtjan> to fear, to be afraid
-- be... affrighted
izwis -- personal pronoun; dative plural of <þu> thou, you -- ...
Iesu -- strong proper noun, masculine; accusative singular of <Iēsus> Jesus -- Jesus
sokeiþ -- weak verb class 1; second person plural of <sōkjan> to seek, ask -- ye seek
Nazoraiu -- proper adjective; accusative singular masculine of <Nazaraíus> Nazarene, of Nazareth
-- of Nazareth
þana -- demonstrative used as relative pronoun; accusative singular masculine of <sa, so, þata>
this, that -- which
ushramidan -- weak verb class 1; accusative singular masculine of preterite participle of
<ushramjan> to crucify -- was cruci ed
nist -- adverb; <ni> not + strong verb class 5; athematic third person singular present of <wisan>
to be -- he is not
her -- adverb; <her\> here -- here
urrais -- strong verb class 1; third person singular preterite of <urreisan> to arise -- he is risen
the
staþ -- strong noun, masculine; accusative singular of <staþs> place; land -- place
þarei -- adverb; <þar> there + relative particle; <ei> that, so that; whether; (relative particle) --
where
galagidedun -- weak verb class 1; third person plural preterite of <galagjan> to lay, put -- they laid
7 - akei gaggiþ qiþiduh du siponjam is jah du Paitrau þatei faurbigaggiþ izwis in Galeilaian;
þaruh ina gasaiƕiþ, swaswe qaþ izwis.

gaggiþ -- strong verb class 7; second person plural imperative of <gaggan> to come, go -- go (your
way)
qiþiduh -- strong verb class 5; second person plural imperative of <qiþan> to say, speak + enclitic
conjunction; <-uh> but, and, now, therefore -- tell # nal -þ of qiþiþ voiced between vowels and
written as -d- = [ð]
Paitrau -- strong proper noun, masculine; dative singular of <Paítrus> Peter -- Peter
faurbigaggiþ -- strong verb class 7; third person singular of <faurbigaggan> to go before -- he
goeth before
Galeilaian -- proper noun, feminine; accusative singular of <Galeilaia> Galilee -- Galilee
þaruh -- adverb; <þar> there + enclitic conjunction; <-uh> but, and, now, therefore -- there
gasaiƕiþ -- strong verb class 5; third person singular of <gasaíƕan> to see -- shall ye see
8 - jah usgaggandeins af þamma hlaiwa gaþlauhun; dizuh-þan-sat ijos reiro jah usfilmei, jah ni
qeþun mannhun waiht; ohtedun sis auk.

usgaggandeins -- strong verb class 7; nominative plural feminine of present participle of
<usgaggan> to go out -- they went out (quickly) and
hlaiwa -- strong noun, neuter; dative singular of <hláiw> grave, tomb -- sepulchre
gaþlauhun -- strong verb class 2; third person plural preterite of <gaþliuhan> to ee -- ed
dizuh-þan-sat -- strong verb class 5; third person singular preterite of <dissitan> to seize upon +
enclitic conjunction; <-uh> but, and, now, therefore + conjunction; <þan> when, as (long as); then,
at that time; but, and, however -- ...
ijos -- demonstrative used as person pronoun; accusative plural feminine of <sa, so, þata> this,
that -- they
reiro -- weak noun, feminine; nominative singular of <reirō> trembling -- trembled # subject of
diz-...-sat, literally 'and then a trembling beset them, and amazement'
usfilmei -- weak noun, feminine; nominative singular of <usfilmei> amazement -- were amazed #
subject of diz-...-sat
jah -- conjunction; <jah> and, also -- -either
qeþun -- strong verb class 5; third person plural preterite of <qiþan> to say, speak -- said they
mannhun -- inde nite pronoun; dative singular masculine of <mannahun> (always with negative)
(no) one, (n)one -- to any man
waiht -- strong noun, feminine; accusative singular of <waíhts> thing -- any thing
ohtedun -- preterite present verb; third person plural preterite of <ōgan> to be afraid -- they were
afraid
sis -- re exive pronoun; dative of <sik> himself, herself, oneself -- ...
9 - usstandands þan in maurgin frumin sabbato ataugida sik frumist Marjin þizai Magdalene, af
þizaiei uswarp sibun unhulþons.
usstandands -- strong verb class 6; nominative singular masculine of present participle of

<usstandan> to stand up, rise -- when... was risen
þan -- conjunction; <þan> when, as (long as); then, at that time; but, and, however -- now
maurgin -- strong noun, masculine; dative singular of <maúrgins> morning -- early... day
frumin -- intensive adjective; dative singular masculine of <fruma> former, rst -- the rst
sabbato -- indeclinable noun; <sabbatō> Sabbath -- of the week
ataugida -- weak verb class 1; third person singular preterite of <atáugjan> to show, to appear -- he
appeared
frumist -- intensive adjective used as adverb; accusative singular neuter of superlative of <fruma>
former, rst -- rst
Marjin -- proper noun, feminine; dative singular of <Marja> Mary -- to Mary
þizai -- demonstrative used as article; dative singular feminine of <sa, so, þata> this, that -- ...
Magdalene -- proper noun, feminine; nominative singular of <Magdalēnē> Magdalene --
Magdalene
af -- preposition; <af> from, of -- out of
þizaiei -- relative pronoun; dative singular feminine of <saei> who, he who, which -- whom
uswarp -- strong verb class 3; third person singular preterite of <uswaírpan> to cast out, to reject --
he had cast
sibun -- numeral; <sibun> seven -- seven
unhulþons -- weak noun, feminine; accusative plural of <unhulþō> unclean spirit, evil spirit --
devils
10 - soh gaggandei gataih þaim miþ imma wisandam, qainondam jah gretandam.
soh -- demonstrative used as person pronoun; nominative singular feminine of <sa, so, þata> this,
that + enclitic conjunction; <-uh> but, and, now, therefore -- and she
gaggandei -- strong verb class 7; nominative singular feminine of present participle of <gaggan>
to come, go -- went and
gataih -- strong verb class 1; third person singular preterite of <gateihan> to tell -- told
-- them
wisandam -- strong verb class 5; dative plural masculine of present participle of <wisan> to be --
that had been
qainondam -- weak verb class 2; dative plural masculine of present participle of <qáinōn> to
lament -- as they mourned
gretandam -- strong verb class 7; dative plural masculine of present participle of <grētan> to weep
-- wept
11 - jah eis hausjandans þatei libaiþ jah gasaiƕans warþ fram izai, ni galaubidebun.

eis -- personal pronoun; nominative plural masculine of <is> he, she, it -- they
hausjandans -- weak verb class 1; nominative plural masculine of participle of <háusjan> to hear,
listen -- when they had heard
libaiþ -- weak verb class 3; third person singular present of <liban> to live -- he was alive
gasaiƕans -- strong verb class 5; nominative singular masculine of preterite participle of
<gasaíƕan> to see -- seen
had been
izai -- personal pronoun; dative singular feminine of <is> he, she, it -- her
galaubidebun -- weak verb class 1; third person plural preterite of <galáubjan> to believe --
believed
12 - afaruh þan þata ...
afaruh -- adverb; <afar> after, according to + enclitic conjunction; <-uh> but, and, now, therefore --
after
þan -- conjunction; <þan> when, as (long as); then, at that time; but, and, however -- ...
þata -- demonstrative used as pronoun; accusative singular neuter of <sa, so, þata> this, that --
that
Lesson Text
16:1 - jah inwisandins sabbate dagis Marja so Magdalene jah Marja so Iakobis jah Salome
usbauhtedun aromata, ei atgaggandeins gasalbodedeina ina. 2 - jah filu air þis dagis
afarsabbate atiddjedun du þamma hlaiwa at urrinnandin sunnin. 3 - jah qeþun du sis
misso: ƕas afwalwjai unsis þana stain af daurom þis hlaiwis? 4 - jah insaiƕandeins
gaumidedun þammei afwalwiþs ist sa stains; was auk mikils abraba. 5 - jah atgaggandeins
in þata hlaiw gaseƕun juggalauþ sitandan in taihswai biwaibidana wastjai ƕeitai; jah
usgeisnodedun. 6 - þaruh qaþ du im: ni faurhteiþ izwis, Iesu sokeiþ Nazoraiu þana
ushramidan; nist her, urrais, sai þana staþ þarei galagidedun ina. 7 - akei gaggiþ qiþiduh
du siponjam is jah du Paitrau þatei faurbigaggiþ izwis in Galeilaian; þaruh ina gasaiƕiþ,
swaswe qaþ izwis. 8 - jah usgaggandeins af þamma hlaiwa gaþlauhun; dizuh-þan-sat ijos
reiro jah usfilmei, jah ni qeþun mannhun waiht; ohtedun sis auk. 9 - usstandands þan in
maurgin frumin sabbato ataugida sik frumist Marjin þizai Magdalene, af þizaiei uswarp
sibun unhulþons. 10 - soh gaggandei gataih þaim miþ imma wisandam, qainondam jah
gretandam. 11 - jah eis hausjandans þatei libaiþ jah gasaiƕans warþ fram izai, ni
galaubidebun. 12 - afaruh þan þata ...
Translation
16:1 And when the sabbath was past, Mary Magdalene, and Mary the mother of James, and Salome,
had bought sweet spices, that they might come and anoint him. 2 And very early in the morning the
rst day of the week, they came unto the sepulchre at the rising of the sun. 3 And they said among
themselves, Who shall roll us away the stone from the door of the sepulchre? 4 And when they
looked, they saw that the stone was rolled away: for it was very great. 5 And entering into the
sepulchre, they saw a young man sitting on the right side, clothed in a long white garment; and they
were affrighted. 6 And he saith unto them, Be not affrighted: Ye seek Jesus of Nazareth, which was
cruci ed: he is risen; he is not here: behold the place where they laid him. 7 But go your way, tell his
disciples and Peter that he goeth before you into Galilee: there shall ye see him, as he said unto you.
8 And they went out quickly, and ed from the sepulchre; for they trembled and were amazed:
neither said they any thing to any man; for they were afraid.
9 Now when Jesus was risen early the rst day of the week, he appeared rst to Mary Magdalene,
out of whom he had cast seven devils. 10 And she went and told them that had been with him, as
they mourned and wept. 11 And they, when they had heard that he was alive, and had been seen of
her, believed not.
12 After that ...
Grammar
41 The Third Weak Conjugation
The third weak conjugation is characterized by the su x PIE *-oi- > PGmc *-ai- added to the verbal
root. The verbs of this class are typically not derived from other sources, and are generally durative or
stative (see Section 40). For example, Gothic þuláiþ 'puts up with, endures' (compare also Old High
German dolēt), Gothic siláiþ 'is silent', Gothic þaháiþ 'is silent' (compare Old High German dagēt).
The verb haban 'to have' serves to illustrate the forms of class iii weak verbs. The forms are as follows.
Class iii Active Mediopassive

Present
1 Sg. haba habáu habada habáidáu
2 habáis habáis habái habaza habáizáu

3 habáiþ habái habadáu habada habáidáu

1 Du. habōs habáiwa
2 habats habáits habats

1 Pl. habam habáima habam habanda habáindáu

2 habáiþ habáiþ habáiþ habanda habáindáu
3 haband habáina habandáu habanda habáindáu

Past
1 Sg. habáida habáidēdjáu
2 habáidēs habáidēdeis
3 habáida habáidēdi

1 Du. habáidēdu habáidēdeiwa
2 habáidēduts habáidēdeits

1 Pl. habáidēdum habáidēdeima
2 habáidēduþ habáidēdeiþ
3 habáidēdun habáidēdeina

In nitive haban

Pres. Ptc. habands

Past Ptc. habáiþs
The origin of the present forms is unclear. Some scholars propose PIE *kapēti or *kapējéti, though this
is less likely than proposing a PIE middle ending *kap-oi. This was then extended by the third singular
ending *-ti: *kap-oi > *kap-oi-ti > Gothic habáiþ. Such a middle construction is also consonant with
the stativity of many of the verbs of this class.
42 The Fourth Weak Conjugation

The fourth weak conjugation is characterized by the su x PIE *-nā- > PGmc *-nō- added to the verbal
root. The verbs of this class are typically denominative or deverbative. Consider the following examples:
Nominative Stem Meaning Weak iv In n. Meaning
Denominative
'become
fulls fulla- 'full' fullnan full'
'be
háuhs háuha- 'high' us-háuhnan glori ed'
'be
weihs weiha- 'holy' weihnan hallowed'

Strong
In n. Past Part.
Deverbative
'become
andbindan andbundans 'unbind' andbundnan unbound'
fraliusan fralusans 'lose' fralusnan 'be lost'
'be 'keep
wakan *wakans awake' gawaknan awake'

The verb fullnan 'to become full' serves to illustrate the forms of class iv weak verbs. The forms are as
follows.
Class iv Active Mediopassive

Present
1 Sg. fullna fullnáu - -
2 fullnis fullnáis fulln - -
3 fullniþ fullnái fullnadáu - -

1 Du. fullnōs fullnáiwa
2 fullnats fullnáits fullnats

1 Pl. fullnam fullnáima fullnam - -
2 fullniþ fullnáiþ fullniþ - -
3 fullnand fullnáina fullnandáu - -

Past
1 Sg. fullnōda fullnōdēdjáu
2 fullnōdēs fullnōdēdeis
3 fullnōda fullnōdēdi

1 Du. fullnōdēdu fullnōdēdeiwa
2 fullnōdēduts fullnōdēdeits

1 Pl. fullnōdēdum fullnōdēdeima
2 fullnōdēduþ fullnōdēdeiþ
3 fullnōdēdun fullnōdēdeina

In nitive fullnan

Pres. Ptc. fullnands

Past Ptc. -
In the past tense, the forms of class iv weak verbs are thus the same as those of class ii, except for the
insertion of the -n- su x. Mediopassive forms are lacking in Gothic for this class of verbs (not
unexpectedly, given the intransitive nature of the verbs and their possible origin in the PIE middle voice).
There are also no extant forms of past participles.
43 Preterite-Present Verbs
Preterite-present verbs derive their name from the fact that they are in origin preterites of strong verbs,
whose present forms fell out of the paradigm, and whose forms were reanalyzed with present sense. The
present tense forms are built on what was the second principal part in the singular, and on what was the
third principal part in the plural. Frequently in nitive forms and past participles are lacking. These verbs
often acquired new nite past tense forms through the mechanism of the dental su x found in the weak
verbs.
Because of their origin in the strong verbs, there are six original classes or gradations of preterite-present
verbs.
The First Class or First Gradation of preterite-present verbs is typi ed by the verb wáit 'I know'. Its
evolution was as follows:
Class I 1 Sg. Pres. 1 Pl. Pres. 1 Sg. Past 1 Pl. Past Meaning

PIE *wóida *widmé *wíssōm *wissmé 'know'
PGmc. *wait *witum *wissō (EG -a) *wissum 'know'

The forms of rst gradation verbs in Gothic are as follows:
1st Gradation
wáit láis
'I know' 'I know
Present Indic.
1 Sg. wáit láis

2 wáist
3 wáit

2 Du. wituts
3

1 Pl. witum
2 wituþ
3 witun

Present Subj.
1 Sg. witjáu
2 witeis
3 witi

2 Pl. witeiþ

Past Indic.
1 Sg. wissa
2 wisseis
3 wissa

2 Pl. wissēduþ
3 wissēdun

Past Subj.
1 Sg. wissēdjáu
2 wissēdeis
3 wissēdi

3 Pl. wissēdeina

In nitive witan

Pres. Part. witands

The Second Class or Second Gradation of preterite-present verbs is typi ed by the verb dáug 'it is good
for, pro ts'. Its evolution was as follows:
Class 1 Sg.
II Pres. 1 Pl. Pres. 1 Sg. Past 1 Pl. Past Meaning

PIE *dhóugha *dhughmé *dhúktōm *dhuktmé 'be valid'
*doxtō (EG *duxtum (EG

PGmc. *dauḡ *duḡum *dohta) *dohtum) 'be valid'

Only one form from the second gradation survives in the Gothic documents:
2nd Gradation
dáug
'pro ts'
Present Indic.
3 Sg. dáug

The Third Class or Third Gradation of preterite-present verbs is typi ed by the verb kann 'I know (how to)'.
Its evolution was as follows:
Class III 1 Sg. Pres. 1 Pl. Pres. 1 Sg. Past 1 Pl. Past Meaning

PIE *gónna *gnnmé *gnntōm *gnntmé 'can'
PGmc. *kann *kunnum *kunþō (EG -a) *kundum 'can'

The forms of third gradation verbs in Gothic are as follows:
3rd Gradation
kann þarf ga-dars

'I know' 'I need' 'I dare'
Present Indic.
1 Sg. kann þarf gadars

2 kan(n)t þarft
3 kann ga-dars

1 Pl. kunnum þaúrbum ga-daúrsum

2 kunnuþ þaúrbuþ
3 kunnun þaúrbun

Present Subj.
1 Sg. kunnjáu ga-daúrsjáu

2 kunneis
3 kunnei

1 Pl. þaúrbeima
2 kunneiþ þaúrbeiþ
3 kunneina

Past Indic.
1 Sg. kunþa þaúrfta ga-daúrsta

2 kunþēs
3 kunþa

1 Pl. kunþēdum
3 kunþēdun ga-daúrstēdun

Past Subj.
1 Sg. kunþēdjáu
3 uf-kunþēdi

2 Pl. kunþēdeiþ

In nitive kunnan ga-daúrsan

Pres. Part. kunnands þaúrbands

Past Part. kunþs þaúrfts

The Fourth Class or Fourth Gradation of preterite-present verbs is typi ed by the verb skal 'I shall, owe'.
Class IV 1 Sg. Pres. 1 Pl. Pres. 1 Sg. Past 1 Pl. Past Meaning

PIE *skóla *sklmé *skltōm *skltmé 'shall'
PGmc. *skal *skulum *skulþō (EG -a) *skulðum 'shall'

The forms of fourth gradation verbs in Gothic are as follows:
4th Gradation
skal man bi-nah ga-nah

'I shall' 'I think' 'it is permitted' 'it su ces'
Present Indic.
1 Sg. skal man
2 skalt
3 skal bi-nah ga-nah

1 Pl. skulum
2 skuluþ ga-munuþ
3 skulun

Present Subj.
1 Sg. skuljáu
2 ga-muneis
3 skuli muni

1 Pl. ga-muneima
2 skuleiþ ga-muneiþ

Past Indic.
1 Sg. munda
3 skulda ga-munda

1 Pl. skuldēdum ga-mundēdum
3 skuldēdun mundēdun

Past Subj.
3 Sg. skuldēdi

2 Pl. skuldēdeiþ

In nitive ga-munan

Pres. Part. munands

Past Part. skulds munds bi-naúhts

The Fifth Class or Fifth Gradation of preterite-present verbs is typi ed by the verb mag 'I am able, can,
may'. Its evolution was as follows:
Class 1 Sg.
V Pres. 1 Pl. Pres. 1 Sg. Past 1 Pl. Past Meaning

PIE *mógha *moghmé *móktōm *moktmé 'may'
*maxtō (EG *maxtum (EG

PGmc. *maḡ *maḡum *mahta) *mahtum) 'may'

This is the only verb of the fth gradation in Gothic. Its forms are as follows:
5th Gradation
mag
'I may'
Present Indic.
1 Sg. mag
2 magt
3 mag

1 Du. magu
2 maguts

1 Pl. magum
2 maguþ
3 magun

Present Subj.
1 Sg. magjáu
2 mageis
3 magi

1 Pl. mageima
2 mageiþ

Past Indic.
3 Sg. mahta

1 Pl. mahtēdum
3 mahtēdun

Past Subj.
3 Sg. mahtēdi

3 Pl. mahtēdeina

Pres. Part. magands

Past Part. mahts

The Sixth Class or Sixth Gradation of preterite-present verbs is typi ed by the verb ga-mōt 'I nd room'.
Class VI 1 Sg. Pres. 1 Pl. Pres. 1 Sg. Past 1 Pl. Past Meaning

PIE *mōda *mōdmé *mōssōm *mōssmé 'must'
PGmc. *mōt *mōtum *mōssō (EG -a) *mōssum 'must'

The forms of sixth gradation verbs in Gothic are as follows:
6th Gradation
ga-mōt ōg áih
'I nd room' 'I fear' 'I have'
Present Indic.
1 Sg. ōg áih, áig

3 ga-mōt áih, áig

1 Pl. áihum, áigum

2 áihuþ
3 áigun

Present Subj.
2 Sg. ōgjeis
3 ga-mōteima áigi

2 Pl. áigeiþ
3 áigeina

Imperative
2 Sg. ōgs

2 Pl. ōgeiþ

Past Indic.
1 Sg. ōhta
3 ōhta áihta

3 Pl. ga-mostēdun ōhtēdun áihtēdun

Past Subj.
2 Sg. áihtēdeis

In nitive faír-áihan

Pres. Part. ōgands áihands, áigands

The present participle of ōgs also survives in the compound adjective un-agands 'fearless'. The verb -
áihan 'to have' may have originally been a verb of class VII. Its in nitive appears only in the compound
form faír-áihan 'to partake of'.
44 Anomalous Verbs
The so-called anomalous verbs are actually the remnants of athematic verbs. The only two such verbs are
im 'I am' and wiljáu 'I will'. The verb im 'I am' is athematic in the present indicative and subjunctive, but
forms a suppletive system with the verb wisan 'to be', whose forms supply the in ntive and the remaining
elements of the paradigm. The paradigm is therefore as follows:
wisan 'be' Indicative Subjunctive Imperative

Present
1 Sg. im sijáu
2 is sijáis sái, sijáis

3 ist sijái sijái

1 Du. siju *sijáiwa
2 *sijuts *sijáits *sijáits

1 Pl. sijum sijáima sijáima

2 sijuþ sijáiþ sijáiþ
3 sind sijáina sijáina

Past
1 Sg. was wēsjáu
2 wast wēseis
3 was wēsi

1 Du. wēsu wēseiwa
2 wēsuts wēseits

1 Pl. wēsum wēseima
2 wēsuþ wēseiþ
3 wēsun wēseina

In nitive wisan

Pres. Ptc. wisands

Past Ptc.
The optative forms are used for the imperative, apart from the possible form sái. There are also forms
sium and siuþ alternating with sijum and sijuþ, respectively. The initial vowel of ist combines with a
preceding vowel in a few common phrases: ni ist > nist; þata ist > þatist; kara ist > karist.
The verb wiljáu 'I will' does not retain any present indicative forms in Gothic. Only preterite subjunctive
forms remain (though in Old English only the present subjunctive), which are used in place of the present
indicative. From these were built a new in nitive and weak past tense. The forms are therefore as follows:
wiljan 'will'

Present
1 Sg. wiljáu
2 wileis
3 wili

1 Du.
2 wileits

1 Pl. wileima
2 wileiþ
3 wileina

Indicative Subjunctive
Past
1 Sg. wilda wildēdjáu

2 wildēs wildēdeis
3 wilda wildēdi

1 Du. wildēdu wildēdeiwa

2 wildēduts wildēdeits

1 Pl. wildēdum wildēdeima

2 wildēduþ wildēdeiþ
3 wildēdun wildēdeina

In nitive wiljan

Pres. Ptc. wiljands

Past Ptc.
45 Word Derivation
Words in Gothic are generally simple, derivative, or compound. Simple words have no discernable internal
parts with meaning of their own. Take for example the nouns atta 'father', áihs 'oath', dags 'day', fótus
'foot', stáins 'stone', waúrd 'word'. Nouns may be derived from other words, such as adjectives and verbs,
by means of various su xes and pre xes. For example su xation converts the adjective laggs 'long' into
the noun laggei 'length', manags 'much' into managei 'multitude', milds 'mild' into mildiþa 'mildness'.
Examples of nouns derived from verbs are the following: dragk 'a drink' from drigkan 'to drink', saggws
'song' from siggwan 'to sing', giba 'gift' from giban 'to give', un-witi 'ignorance' from *witan 'to know'.
Compound nouns are formed by the conjoining of two or more words to form a noun. In Gothic, the
second element is always a noun, though the rst element can be a noun, adjective, or particle. When the
rst element is an a-stem noun or adjective, the -a- of the stem usually remains: áiƕa-tundi 'thornbush',
dwala-waúrdei 'foolish talk', weina-triu 'vine'. The -a- remains in short ja-stems, but not in long ja-
stems: midja-sweipáins 'the ood', niuja-satiþs 'novice'; but arbi-numja 'heir', agláiti-waúrdei
'indecent language'. The ō-, jō-, i-, and u-stems generally retain their stem vowels when they form the
rst element of compounds: mōta-staþs 'toll-place', þūsundi-faþs 'leader of a thousand men', mari-
sáiws 'sea', fōtu-baúrd 'footboard'. The n-stem nouns employ -a- in compounds: áuga-daúrō 'window',
staua-stōls 'judgement seat'. When consonant stems form the rst member of a compound, they
sometimes employ the vowel -a- by analogy with the a-stems, e.g. brōþra-lubō 'brotherly love' and
nahta-mats 'supper'.
Examples of simple adjectives are baírhts 'bright', fagrs 'fair', háils 'whole', siuks 'sick'. Adjectives, like
nouns, could be derived by means of pre xes: ana-siuns 'visible', fram-aldrs 'very old', un-fagrs 'un t'.
They could likewise be derived through su xes: the noun stáins 'stone' yields the adjective stáinahs
'stony', waúrd 'word' yields waúrdahs 'verbal'. Nominal composition might even result in an adjective, the
so-called bahuvrīhi or exocentric compound, which describes a person or thing related to the elements of
the compound. Modern English is replete with examples: a blackbelt is not a belt, but a martial artist
possessing a belt which is black; Blackbeard is not a beard, but a pirate whose beard is black; well-
intentioned descibes a person with good intentions. Examples in Gothic are manag-falþs 'having many
parts, manifold', láus-handus 'empty-handed'.
Examples of some simple verbs are the following: gaggan 'go', lētan 'let', lisan 'gather', niman 'take',
waírþan 'become'. Verbs were often derived from nouns and adjectives by means of pre xes and
su xes. For example, the noun áigin 'property' gives ga-áigin-ōn 'take possession of'; skalks 'servant'
gives skalkinōn 'serve'. Many members of the weak verb classes are examples of just such a process,
though at times it is di cult to discern which is primary, the nominal item or the verbal. For example, fisks
'a sh' vs. fiskōn 'to sh'; namō 'a name' vs. namnjan 'to name'; weihs 'holy' vs. weihnan 'become holy'.
The following sections provide charts listing the most common pre xes and su xes employed in noun,
adjective, and verb derivation.
45.1 Nominal and Adjectival Pre xes

Nouns and adjectives employ the same pre xes in the process of derivation. The following chart gives
many of the more important pre xes, together with their antecedents in the proto-languages, as well as
some examples of their use within Gothic.
Pre x Meaning PGmc PIE Example Meaning

af from, off *av *apó af-drugkja drunkard
af-guþs godless
af-lēts forgiveness

*ápo- +
afar after, next *afar -ero afar-dags the next day
the rst day after the

afar-sabbatus Sabbath

ana on, upon *ana *an(u) ana-busns command
ana-minds supposition
ana-qiss blasphemy
ana-siuns visible
ana-waírþs future

and(a) against, toward *andV *antV and-áugi face
anda-hafts answer
anda-nahti evening
anda-þahts circumspect

at at, to *ad *ad at-aþni year
at-witáins observation

bi by *bi *bhi bi-háit strife
bi-sitands neighbor

Lat.
dis apart, asunder dis-? *d(w)is? dis-wiss dissolution

faír around, through *fer(i) *per(i) faír-weiti spectacle

faúr(a) before, for *fur(a/i) *pr(o/i) faúr-hāh curtain
faúr-stasseis chief ruler
faúra-daúri street
faúra-gagga steward
faúra-hāh curtain

fra before *fra *pro fra-gifts gift, promise
fra-waúrhts sin
fra-weit revenge

fram from *fram *pro-mo fram-aldrs very old
fram-gāhts progress

ga near, at, with *ḡa *kom ga-baúrþs birth
ga-bruka fragment
ga-dōfs becoming, t
ga-guþs pious
ga-hugds thought
ga-juk pair
ga-munds remembrance
ga-skafts creation
ga-waúrstwa fellow worker

*ki-n-d-
hindar behind *hindar ero? hindar-weis deceitful

id again *eð *eti id-weit reproach

in in *in *eni in-ahs sober
one of the same

in-gardja household
in-ilō excuse
in-kunja countryman

of the same
inna within *inna *eni-no? inna-kunds household

miss(a) various, false *missa *mit-tā? missa-dēþs misdeed
missa-leiks various
missa-qiss discord

with, under, miþ-gardi-

miþ between *miþ *me-ta waddjus partition wall
miþ-ga-sinþa travelling companion
miþ-wissei conscience

uf up, under *uv *upó uf-áiþeis under an oath
uf-háuseins obedience
uf-kunþi knowledge

ufar over, above *uvar *uper(i) ufar-fulls overfull
ufar-gudja chief priest

un not, un- *un *n un-agei fearlessness
un-baírands barren
without
un-frōdei understanding
un-háili disease
un-mahts in rmity

us out of, utterly *ūz *ūs us-filh burial
us-kunþs well-known
us-qiss accusation
us-stass resurrection

*wi- + -
wiþra against *wiþra tero wiþra-waírþs opposite

45.2 Nominal Su xes

Some su xes were employed solely to derive nouns. The following chart gives many of the more
important su xes used to derive nouns, together with their antecedents in the proto-languages, as well as
some examples of their use within Gothic.
Su x Use PGmc PIE Example Meaning

and agent noun *Vnd *Vnt bisitands neighbor
frijōnds friend
fijands enemy
nasjands savior

Lat.
arja agent noun ārius bōkareis scribe
láisareis teacher
sōkareis disputer

assu, abstract *(Vn)-ad-

inassu noun *(Vn)ass t ibnassus evenness
ufarassus over ow
blōtinassus worship
hōrinassus adultery

abstract
dūþi noun *dūþi *tūti ajukdūþs eternity
managdūþs abundance
gamáindūþs communion

abstract
ein noun *īn *īn áudagei blessedness
diupei depth
laggei length

abstract
iþa noun *iþ *it aggwiþa anguish
dáubiþa deafness
swēiþa honor

abstract baptizing,
n noun *Vn *Vn dáupeins baptism
laþōns calling, invitation
libáins living, life

abstract
ōþu noun *ōþ *āt gáunōþus mourning
gabaúrjōþus pleasure

abstract
ubni, ufni noun *uvnja *mnjo fastubni observance
fráistubni temptation
waldufni power
wundufni wound

abstract
þwa noun *þwa *two fijaþwa hatred
frijaþwa love
saliþwōs
(pl.) dwelling

45.3 Adjectival Su xes

Other su xes were employed speci cally to derive adjectives from other elements. The following chart
gives many of the more important su xes used in deriving adjectives, together with their antecedents in
the proto-languages, as well as some examples of their use within Gothic.

aga, aha relation *aga, aha *oko áudags blessed
grēdags hungry
áinaha only
stáinahs stony

eiga relation *īga *īko hrōþeigs victorious
láiseigs apt to teach
mahteigs mighty
waúrstweigs effective

eina material *īna *īno aírþeins earthen
áiweins eternal
barizeins of barley
gulþeins golden
gumeins male

iska quality *isko *isko barnisks childish
funisks ery
gudisks godly
mannisks human
iudaíwisks Jewish

45.4 Verbal Pre xes

Many of the pre xes listed above are also used in forming verbs. There are, however, a few which are
proper only to verbs within Gothic. The following chart gives the more important pre xes applied to verbs,
together with their antecedents in the proto-languages, as well as some examples of their use within
Gothic.
Pre x Meaning PGmc PIE Example Meaning

af from, off *av *apó af-áikan deny
af-gaggan go away
af-lētan dismiss

*ápo- + - afar-
afar after, next *afar ero gaggan follow

ana on, upon *ana *an(u) ana-áukan add to
ana-háitan call on
ana-
hneiwan stoop down

and against, toward *and *ant and-bindan unbind
and-niman receive
and-
standan withstand

at at, to *ad *ad at-áugjan show
at-giban give up
at-saíƕan take heed
at-tēkan touch

bi by *bi *bhi bi-áukan add to
bi-leiban remain
bi-rinnan run about

Lat.
dis apart, asunder dis- *d(w)is? dis-dáiljan share
dis-sitan settle upon
dis-taíran tear asunder

du-at-
du to, at *tō? ? gaggan go to
du-ginnan begin
du-rinnan run to

faúr-
faúr(a) before, for *fur(a/i) *pr(o/i) biudan forbid
faúr-
gaggan pass by
faúr-qiþan excuse
faúra-
gaggan go before
faúra-
standan govern

fra before *fra *pro fra-giban give
fra-itan devour
fra-lētan liberate

ga near, at, with *ḡa *kom ga-baíran bring forth
ga-háitan call together
ga-kiusan approve
ga-taíran destroy

*ki-n-d- hindar-
hindar behind *hindar ero? leiþan go behind

in in *in *eni in-brannjan put in the re
in-saíƕan look at

tus (pejorative) *tuz *dus tuz-wērjan doubt

two, separate, twis- depart from one,

twis apart *twis *dwis standan diverge

þaírh-
þaírh through *þerx *ter-kwe baíran carry through
þaírh-
gaggan go through
þaírh-wisan remain

uf up, under *uv *upó uf-blēsan blow up
uf-brikan reject
uf-dáupjan baptize
uf-háusjan submit
uf-ligan lie under

ufar-
ufar over, above *uvar *uper(i) gaggan trangress
ufar-
munnōn forget
ufar-
steigan mount up

und-
und to, toward *unþ *nt greipan seize
und-rinnan run to

unþa-
unþa away from *unþa *nto þliuhan escape

us out of, utterly *ūz *ūs us-anan expire
us-dreiban drive out
us-láubjan permit
us-qiþan proclaim

*wi- + - wiþra-
wiþra against *wiþra tero gaggan go to meet
wiþra-
mōtjan go to meet

45.5 Verbal Su xes

The most common su xes employed in deriving verbs have actually been dealt with separately. These
are in fact the su xes of most of the weak verb classes. In many instances, however, such derivation had
taken place long before Gothic became a separate language in the Germanic family. There are, however, a
few additional su xes used to derive verbs; but they are not su ciently numerous to form separate verb
classes as such. The following chart lists these su xes, together with their antecedents in the proto-
languages, as well as some examples of their use within Gothic.

atjan intensive *at-jan *ad-jan laúhatjan lighten
káupatjan buffet, beat
swōgatjan sigh, groan

inōn *in-ōn gudjinōn be a priest
ga-áiginōn take possession of
skalkinōn serve
hōrinōn commit adultery

Gothic Online
Lesson 10
Gothic Wanderings, 401-418
The death of Gainas in 401 stirred Alaric to break the recent treaty and to move from the land granted to
the Goths in Macedonia and strike at Italy itself. Alaric eventually attacked Milan, but Roman forces under
the command of Stilicho arrived in March 402 and forced him to abandon the attack. Alaric's forces
retreated along the northern bank of the river Po, then crossed the river and turned south. They attacked
the city Hasta-Asti, but failed to take it; they then retreated upstream to Pollentia-Pollenzo.
Stilicho's forces pursued; among them were Alanic troops under the command of Saul. On Easter Sunday
of 402, Stilicho handed over command to the pagan Saul, who proceeded to lead an unexpected attack
against Alaric's forces. Alaric was caught off guard, and his infantry suffered heavy losses. He
nevertheless managed to save his cavalry, and with them he counterattacked, pushing back the Alans and
killing Saul. The Goths then withdrew into the mountains. Evidently a treaty was struck between Stilicho
and Alaric.
The Gothic forces left Italy south of the river Po and headed to Verona where they stopped. Sometime
later, Stilicho and the Alans attacked again, and the Goths again withdrew into the mountains. Their points
of escape were blocked; they were seized by hunger and disease, and large groups of Alaric's forces
began to desert. Two Gothic leaders, Ul las and Sarus, joined the Romans. The remaining Goths departed
Italian territory and continued to ravage the countryside of Illyricum.
Alaric's forces remained relatively con ned in Illyricum until the Alans, Vandals, and Suevi together
crossed the Rhine into Gaul. Starting in 408, the Eastern and Western empires began a period of
reconciliation, which obviated the tactical usefulness of Alaric's treaty with Constantinople. He therefore
led his troops to Emona-Laibach in the Julian Alps, and then occupied surrounding areas. Shortly
thereafter, Alaric threatened to invade Italy if he did not receive four thousand pounds of gold -- roughly
the annual income of a Roman senator, but also an amount on which about 90,000 people could live
decently, yielding a possible estimate of the size of Alaric's forces.
Stilicho persuaded Rome to pay the sum, and Alaric was taken into Roman service. He commanded
combined Roman and Gothic troops which he led into Gaul against the usurper Constantine. The
previously agreed sum of money probably never reached Alaric, since Stilicho was quickly overthrown. In
the ensuing instability, a large number of barbarians joined Alaric's forces. Sarus remained with the
Romans to take Stilicho's place, having his Hunnic bodyguard killed to secure his position.
Alaric tried to negotiate new terms with the emperor Honorius, but was rejected and therefore quickly
moved into Italy. By October of 408 they surrounded Rome and cut off all her supplies. In their
desperation, the Romans handed over to Alaric ve thousand pounds of gold, thirty thousand pounds of
silver, four thousand silk robes, three thousand purple-dyed furs, and three thousand pounds of pepper. In
addition Alaric demanded that an embassy be sent to obtain a peace treaty from Honorius, but this never
amounted to anything. At the end of 408 Alaric set up camp in Tuscany.
As a result of the economic straits imposed by the Goths' plundering of Rome, their spoils were devalued.
This, combined with their subsequent pillaging of those areas which supplied their food, forced Alaric to
seek a permanent home for his people. He began negotiations in early 409 with Honorius, but the
emperor would not listen, and subsequently marched out with his own forces, accompanied by an
auxiliary of Dalmatian troops, to attack Alaric. At this point Alaric was joined by his brother-in-law Athaulf,
who led a contingent of combined Gothic and Hunnic cavalry. Alaric managed to defeat the emperor's
Dalmatian troops, and again struck up negotiations, demanding Noricum and Venetia.
When that and a second series of negotiations broke down, Alaric again marched on Rome in late 409.
The city again capitulated, and Alaric convinced the senate to declare Attalus emperor. Attalus appointed
Alaric chief commander of the military, and Athaulf commander of the cavalry, but appointed an anti-
Gothic partisan as the senatorial representative. Attalus was baptized by the Arian bishop Sigesar.
At this point it was in Roman, and Gothic, tactical interests to conquer Africa, which was the primary
source of Roman grain. Attalus determined to take the region, but failed to accept Gothic assistance, and
so the attack failed. Eventually Alaric had Attalus stripped of his o ce.
Alaric once again renewed negotiations with Honorius, meeting him in person in a small town in the Alps.
At the same time, however, Sarus attacked Alaric's forces, and the result was that Honorius again broke
off the talks. Alaric and his forces decided to move against Rome once more. They captured the city and
continued to plunder it for the next three days. Athaulf captured the emperor's sister, Galla Placidia.
The Goths left as swiftly as they came, and proceeded to march south through Italy. They eventually tried
to get to Sicily, but had to abort the attempt by reason of the weather and lack of ships. They eventually
retraced their steps and headed north for Campania. There they set up a camp, but Alaric nally died in
Bruttium before the year 410 drew to a close.
Athaulf became Gothic king after Alaric. In 411, through the mediation of Attalus, Athaulf struck an accord
with Iovinus, the Gallic leader of a Burgundian-Alanic coalition who had recently taken over imperial
authority. Sarus too joined the forces of Iovinus. Iovinus tried to consolidate his power on the Italian
peninsula, but Athaulf unexpectedly led his forces out of Italy and destroyed Sarus's forces in the process.
When Iovinus failed to make Athaulf coemperor, the latter broke his ties with Iovinus and began
negotiations with representatives of Honorius, who promised to settle the Goths in Gaul. They reached an
agreement sometime in 413.
Iovinus was subsequently captured by the Goths in Valence. In keeping with history, however, Honorius
again broke his agreement with the Goths on the pretext that Galla Placidia would rst have to be
released. Angered once again, the Goths proceeded to ravage Gaul. They capured Narbonne and
Toulouse, but failed in an attempt to take Marseille, where Athaulf was wounded.
In January 414, Athaulf married Galla Placidia in Narbonne. The wedding was conducted in Roman
fashion. Athaulf seemed ready to cease his wars against Rome and make peace. He relocated to
Barcelona, where before long his wife gave birth to a son, baptized with the name Theodosius.
Unfortunately the child died shortly thereafter, in 415. Athaulf himself was assassinated in August or
September of the same year. He was killed by one of the men in his entourage, by the name of Dubius or
Eberwolf, while he and his company were inspecting their horses.
Sarus's brother Sigeric became king, but this lasted only a week. During this short period, he had Athaulf's
children by his rst wife killed, and humiliated Galla Placidia. In September 415 the Goths chose Valia as
their king and resolved to contiue the war against Rome. Again in search of food stores, they marched
into the Iberian peninsula intent on crossing into Africa. When they realized they could not cross the
Straits of Gibraltar, they abandoned the plan and ultimately, in the spring of 416, Valia surrendered to
Constantius, the military commander of the Western imperial forces. Constantius provided supplies for
roughly fteen thousand troops and their retinue, while the Goths turned over Galla Placidia. The Goths
then set themselves to expelling imperial enemies from the Spanish peninsula, rst turning against the
Vandals, then against the Alans, who subsequently formed their own alliance. In 418 Constantius ordered
the Goths to desist and called them to Gaul. The Goths were ordered to the valley of the Goronne between
Toulouse and Bordeaux.
Valia died in 418 and was succeeded by Theodoric. This marked the beginning of a new period of Gothic
power. So ended a biblical 40 years of wandering without a homeland, the result of events set in motion
by the advent of the Huns. The Goths were nally in a position to construct an empire of their own:
Theodoric's dynasty would go unbroken until 507, and the Goths were secured as a force with which
neighboring empires would need to negotiate, recognizing the leadership of the Gothic king and sending
hostages to his court. So rose the Visigothic tribe to power.
The following passage is 1 Corinthians 13:1-12. Much of the rst verse has not survived. In I Corinthians
13.2 we nd praúfētjans 'prophecy' The nominative form of this word is generally the neuter plural
praúfētja (see verse 13.8). Although deriving ultimately from the Greek prophēteía, the fact that the
accented vowel in Greek is merely a glide in Gothic shows that the word is most likely borrowed from the
Latin prophētia.
In I Corinthians 13.4 we nd the phrase friaþwa

usbeisneiga ist, sels ist 'charity is patient, is kind'. Note
here the change in gender between usbeisneiga (fem. nom. sg.) and sēls (masc. nom. sg.). In Gothic,
nouns grammatically feminine are occasionally treated as masculines, or as neuters when denoting
things.
Verse 13.7 contains an interesting display of repetition: allata þuláiþ, allata galáubeiþ, all wēneiþ, alla
gabeidiþ 'bears everything, believes everything, hopes everything, endures all things'. Note the alternation
between adjectival (zero) and pronominal (-ata) endings in the neuter plural. The Greek uses the same
form, pánta, in each phrase.
In 1 Corinthians 13.12 we nd a somewhat idiomatic phrase: in frisahtái, literally 'in an image'. Evidently
by extension this meant 'in an ephemeral view, in a mere re ection', leading to the sense 'darkly, unclearly,
imperfectly'.
13:1 - .... aiþþau klismo klismjandei.
aiþþau -- conjunction; <áiþþáu> or, else -- or

klismo -- weak noun, feminine; nominative singular of <klismō> cymbal -- a... cymbal
klismjandei -- weak verb class 1; nominative singular feminine of present participle of <klismjan>
to clang -- tinkling
2- jah jabai habau praufetjans jah witjau allaize runos jah all kunþi jah habau alla galaubein,
swaswe fairgunja miþsatjau, iþ friaþwa ni habau, ni waihts im.

jabai -- conjunction; <jabái> if, even if, although -- though
habau -- weak verb class 3; rst person singular present subjunctive of <haban> to have -- I have
praufetjans -- irregular noun, masculine/neuter; accusative plural of <praúfētja> prophecy -- (the
gift of) prophecy
witjau -- preterite present verb; rst person singular present subjunctive of <*witan> to know --
understand
allaize -- adjective used as substantive; genitive plural neuter of <alls> all, every -- all
runos -- strong noun, feminine; accusative plural of <rūna> mystery, secret -- the mysteries #
literally 'the mysteries of all things'
all -- adjective; accusative singular neuter of <alls> all, every -- all
kunþi -- strong noun, neuter; accusative singular of <kunþi> knowledge -- knowledge
habau -- weak verb class 3; rst person singular present subjunctive of <haban> to have -- (though
I) have
alla -- adjective; accusative singular feminine of <alls> all, every -- all
galaubein -- strong noun, feminine; accusative singular of <galáubeins> faith, belief -- faith
swaswe -- conjunction; <swaswē> as, just as; so as; so as to, so that -- so that
fairgunja -- strong noun, neuter; accusative plural of <faírguni> mountain -- mountains
miþsatjau -- weak verb class 1; rst person singular present subjunctive of <miþsatjan> to move,
to remove -- I could remove
friaþwa -- strong noun, feminine; accusative singular of <friaþwa> love, charity -- charity
habau -- weak verb class 3; rst person singular present subjunctive of <haban> to have -- have
waihts -- strong noun, feminine; nominative singular of <waíhts> thing -- -thing
im -- strong verb class 5; athematic rst person singular of <wisan> to be -- I am
3 - jah jabai fraatjau allos aihtins meinos, jah jabai atgibau leik mein ei gabrannjaidau, iþ
friaþwa ni habau, ni waiht botos mis taujau.

fraatjau -- weak verb class 1; rst person singular subjunctive of <fraatjan> to give as food -- I
bestow... (to feed the poor)
allos -- adjective; accusative plural feminine of <alls> all, every -- all
aihtins -- strong noun, feminine; accusative plural of <áihts> possession -- possessions
meinos -- possessive adjective; accusative plural feminine of <meins> my, mine -- my
atgibau -- strong verb class 5; rst person singular present subjunctive of <atgiban> to give,
deliver -- I give
leik -- strong noun, neuter; accusative singular of <leik> body, esh -- body
mein -- possessive adjective; accusative singular neuter of <meins> my, mine -- my
ei -- conjunction; <ei> that, so that; whether; (relative particle) -- to
gabrannjaidau -- weak verb class 1; third person singular passive present subjunctive of
<gabrannjan> to burn -- be burned
friaþwa -- strong noun, feminine; accusative singular of <friaþwa> love, charity -- charity
habau -- weak verb class 3; rst person singular present subjunctive of <haban> to have -- have
waiht -- strong noun, feminine; accusative singular of <waíhts> thing -- -thing
botos -- strong noun, feminine; genitive singular of <bōta> advantage -- ...
mis -- personal pronoun; dative singular of <ik> I -- me
taujau -- weak verb class 1; rst person singular subjunctive of <táujan> to do, to make -- it
pro teth # literally, 'I make no bit of pro t for myself'
4 - friaþwa usbeisneiga ist, sels ist: friaþwa ni aljanoþ; friaþwa ni flauteiþ, ni ufblesada,
friaþwa -- strong noun, feminine; nominative singular of <friaþwa> love, charity -- charity
usbeisneiga -- adjective; nominative singular feminine of <usbeisneigs> long-suffering, patient --
suffereth long
ist -- strong verb class 5; athematic third person singular of <wisan> to be -- ...
sels -- adjective; nominative singular masculine of <sēls> kind, good -- kind # though masculine,
this refers to friaþwa
ist -- strong verb class 5; athematic third person singular of <wisan> to be -- (and) is
aljanoþ -- weak verb class 2; third person singular of <aljanōn> to envy -- envieth
flauteiþ -- weak verb class 1; third person singular of <fláutjan> be pretentious -- vaunteth... itself
ufblesada -- strong verb class 7; third person singular passive present of <ufblēsan> to puff up --
is... puffed up
5 - ni aiwiskoþ, ni sokeiþ sein ain, ni ingramjada, nih mitoþ ubil,

aiwiskoþ -- weak verb class 2; third person singular present of <áiwiskōn> to act unseemly --
doth... behave itself unseemly
sokeiþ -- weak verb class 1; third person singular present of <sōkjan> to seek, ask -- seeketh
sein -- possessive adjective; accusative singular neuter of <*seins> one's own -- her
ain -- adjective used as substantive; accusative singular neuter of <áins> alone, only -- own
ingramjada -- weak verb class 1; third person singular passive present of <ingramjan> to provoke
-- is... (easily) provoked
nih -- adverb; <ni> not + enclitic conjunction; <-uh> but, and, now, therefore -- no
mitoþ -- weak verb class 2; third person singular of <mitōn> to think, consider -- thinketh
ubil -- adjective used as substantive; accusative singular neuter of <ubils> bad, evil -- evil
6 - nih faginoþ inwindiþai, miþfaginoþ sunjai;
nih -- adverb; <ni> not + enclitic conjunction; <-uh> but, and, now, therefore -- not
faginoþ -- weak verb class 2; third person singular of <faginōn> to rejoice -- rejoiceth
inwindiþai -- strong noun, feminine; dative singular of <inwindiþa> injustice -- in iniquity
miþfaginoþ -- weak verb class 2; third person singular of <miþfaginōn> to rejoice with -- (but)
rejoiceth
sunjai -- strong noun, feminine; dative singular of <sunja> truth -- in the truth
7 - allata þulaiþ, allata galaubeiþ, all weneiþ, alla gabeidiþ.
allata -- adjective used as substantive; accusative singular neuter of <alls> all, every -- all things
þulaiþ -- weak verb class 3; third person singular of <þulan> to endure, to bear -- beareth
allata -- adjective used as substantive; accusative singular neuter of <alls> all, every -- all things
galaubeiþ -- weak verb class 1; third person singular of <galáubjan> to believe -- believeth
all -- adjective; accusative singular neuter of <alls> all, every -- all things
weneiþ -- weak verb class 1; third person singular of <wenjan> to hope, to expect -- hopeth
alla -- adjective; accusative plural neuter of <alls> all, every -- all things
gabeidiþ -- strong verb class 1; third person singular of <gabeidan> to abide, to await -- endureth
8- friaþwa aiw ni gadriusiþ, iþ jaþþe praufetja gatairanda jaþþe razdos gaƕeiland jaþþe kunþi
gataurniþ.
aiw -- strong noun, masculine; accusative singular of <áiws> time, lifetime, age, eternity -- -ever
gadriusiþ -- strong verb class 2; third person singular of <gadriusan> to fall, fail -- faileth
jaþþe -- conjunction; <jaþþē> and if, whether -- whether (there be)
praufetja -- irregular noun, masculine/neuter; nominative plural of <praúfētja> prophecy --
prophecies
gatairanda -- strong verb class 4; third person plural passive present of <gataíran> to destroy, to
break -- they shall fail
razdos -- strong noun, feminine; nominative plural of <razda> tongue, language -- tongues
gaƕeiland -- weak verb class 3; third person plural of <gaƕeilan> to cease -- they shall cease
kunþi -- strong noun, neuter; nominative singular of <kunþi> knowledge -- knowledge
gataurniþ -- weak verb class 4; third person singular of <gataúrnan> to vanish, to be destroyed -- it
shall vanish away
9 - suman kunnum jah suman praufetjam.
suman -- adverb; <suman> once, formerly; in part -- (for) in part

kunnum -- preterite present verb; rst person plural of <kunnan> to know -- we know
suman -- adverb; <suman> once, formerly; in part -- in part
praufetjam -- weak verb class 1; rst person plural of <praúfētjan> to prophesy -- we prophesy
10 - biþe qimiþ þatei ustauhan ist, gataurniþ þatei us dailai ist.
biþe -- conjunction; <biþē> while, when, after that, as soon as; then, thereupon -- but when
qimiþ -- strong verb class 4; third person singular of <qiman> to come, arrive -- is come
þatei -- relative pronoun; nominative singular neuter of <saei> who, he who, which -- that which
ustauhan -- strong verb class 2; nominative singular neuter of preterite participle of <ustiuhan> to
lead out; to complete -- perfect
gataurniþ -- weak verb class 4; third person singular of <gataúrnan> to vanish, to be destroyed --
(then)... shall be done away
þatei -- relative pronoun; nominative singular neuter of <saei> who, he who, which -- that which
us -- preposition; <us> out, out of, from -- in
dailai -- strong noun, feminine; dative singular of <dáils> share, portion -- part
11- iþ þan was niuklahs, swe niuklahs rodida, swe niuklahs froþ, swe niuklahs mitoda; biþe
warþ wair, barniskeins aflagida.
iþ -- conjunction; <iþ> but, however, if -- ...

þan -- conjunction; <þan> when, as (long as); then, at that time; but, and, however -- when
was -- strong verb class 5; rst person singular preterite of <wisan> to be -- I was
niuklahs -- adjective; nominative singular masculine of <niuklahs> young, childish -- a child
niuklahs -- adjective used as substantive; nominative singular masculine of <niuklahs> young,
childish -- a child
rodida -- weak verb class 1; rst person singular preterite of <rōdjan> to speak -- I spake
childish -- a child
froþ -- strong verb class 6; rst person singular preterite of <fraþjan> to understand -- I understood
childish -- a child
mitoda -- weak verb class 2; rst person singular preterite of <mitōn> to think, consider -- I thought
biþe -- conjunction; <biþē> while, when, after that, as soon as; then, thereupon -- but when
warþ -- strong verb class 3; rst person singular preterite of <waírþan> to become, to happen -- I
became
wair -- strong noun, masculine; nominative singular of <waír> man -- a man
barniskeins -- weak noun, feminine; accusative plural of <barniskei> childish thing -- childish
things
aflagida -- weak verb class 1; rst person singular preterite of <aflagjan> to put away -- I put away
12 - saiƕam nu þairh skuggwan in frisahtai, iþ þan andwairþi wiþra andwairþi; nu wait us dailai,
iþ þan ufkunna ...
saiƕam -- strong verb class 5; rst person plural of <saíƕan> to see -- we see
nu -- adverb; <nu> now, therefore -- for now
þairh -- preposition; <þaírh> through; by, by means of; on account of -- through
skuggwan -- weak noun, masculine; accusative singular of <skuggwa> mirror -- a glass
frisahtai -- strong noun, feminine; dative singular of <frisahts> image -- darkly
þan -- conjunction; <þan> when, as (long as); then, at that time; but, and, however -- then
andwairþi -- strong noun, neuter; nominative singular of <andwaírþi> face, presence -- face
of, for -- to
andwairþi -- strong noun, neuter; accusative singular of <andwaírþi> face, presence -- face
nu -- adverb; <nu> now, therefore -- now
wait -- preterite present verb; rst person singular of <*witan> to know -- I know
dailai -- strong noun, feminine; dative singular of <dáils> share, portion -- part
þan -- conjunction; <þan> when, as (long as); then, at that time; but, and, however -- then
ufkunna -- weak verb class 3; rst person singular of <ufkunnan> to know, to recognize -- shall I
know
Lesson Text
13:1 - .... aiþþau klismo klismjandei. 2 - jah jabai habau praufetjans jah witjau allaize
runos jah all kunþi jah habau alla galaubein, swaswe fairgunja miþsatjau, iþ friaþwa ni
habau, ni waihts im. 3 - jah jabai fraatjau allos aihtins meinos, jah jabai atgibau leik mein
ei gabrannjaidau, iþ friaþwa ni habau, ni waiht botos mis taujau. 4 - friaþwa usbeisneiga
ist, sels ist: friaþwa ni aljanoþ; friaþwa ni flauteiþ, ni ufblesada, 5 - ni aiwiskoþ, ni sokeiþ
sein ain, ni ingramjada, nih mitoþ ubil, 6 - nih faginoþ inwindiþai, miþfaginoþ sunjai; 7 -
allata þulaiþ, allata galaubeiþ, all weneiþ, alla gabeidiþ. 8 - friaþwa aiw ni gadriusiþ, iþ
jaþþe praufetja gatairanda jaþþe razdos gaƕeiland jaþþe kunþi gataurniþ. 9 - suman
kunnum jah suman praufetjam. 10 - biþe qimiþ þatei ustauhan ist, gataurniþ þatei us
dailai ist. 11 - iþ þan was niuklahs, swe niuklahs rodida, swe niuklahs froþ, swe niuklahs
mitoda; biþe warþ wair, barniskeins aflagida. 12 - saiƕam nu þairh skuggwan in frisahtai,
iþ þan andwairþi wiþra andwairþi; nu wait us dailai, iþ þan ufkunna ...
Translation
13:1 (Though I speak with the tongues of men and of angels, and have not charity, I am become as
sounding brass,) or a tinkling cymbal. 2 And though I have the gift of prophecy, and understand all
mysteries, and all knowledge; and though I have all faith, so that I could remove mountains, and
have not charity, I am nothing. 3 And though I bestow all my goods to feed the poor, and though I
give my body to be burned, and have not charity, it pro teth me nothing.
4 Charity suffereth long, and is kind; charity envieth not; charity vaunteth not itself, is not puffed up, 5
Doth not behave itself unseemly, seeketh not her own, is not easily provoked, thinketh no evil; 6
Rejoiceth not in iniquity, but rejoiceth in the truth; 7 Beareth all things, believeth all things, hopeth all
things, endureth all things.
8 Charity never faileth: but whether there be prophecies, they shall fail; whether there be tongues,
they shall cease; whether there be knowledge, it shall vanish away. 9 For we know in part, and we
prophesy in part. 10 But when that which is perfect is come, then that which is in part shall be done
away. 11 When I was a child, I spake as a child, I understood as a child, I thought as a child: but when
I became a man, I put away childish things. 12 For now we see through a glass, darkly; but then face
to face: now I know in part; but then shall I know ...
Grammar
46 Introduction to Crimean Gothic
Crimean Gothic (CG) is the name given to the language thought to be the dying throes of the East
Germanic branch of languages. All that remains of this language is some hundred words copied in a letter
of the diplomat Ogier Ghislain de Busbecq. The words so transmitted are similar enough to those of the
Biblical Gothic (BG) of Wul la's translation that scholars are in general agreement that the language in
question is indeed Gothic, but there are some differences which suggest it may not be the later surviving
form of BG itself. It may have formed a separate member of the East Germanic family, perhaps
representing the language of another of the many Gothic tribal factions, but one whose literary records
have not survived to the present day.
Busbecq himself was a highly educated man of Flanders, born in 1522 in the town of Comines (Komen).
His father was a nobleman and secured for him an excellent education. He began at the University of
Louvain in Brabant when he became thirteen, and then continued his education in Paris, Venice, Bologna,
and Padua.
Busbecq eventually accepted an appointment in 1554 as an ambassador of Ferdinand I of Austria, who

was later to become Holy Roman Emperor (1558-1564). In this appointment, Busbecq was charged with
negotiating a peace treaty with the Ottoman Sultan Suleiman I, 'the Magni cent'. In early 1555 Busbecq
travelled to the Ottoman empire, and returned to Vienna that summer to deliver a letter from Suleiman I to
Charles V, then Holy Roman Emperor. He subsequently returned to Constantinople in 1556 and remained
in the region for the next seven years as Ferdinand I succeeded to the throne of the Holy Roman empire.
He eventually negotiated a treaty with the Ottoman empire and returned to Vienna in 1562, then
continuing to Frankfurt to present the treaty to Ferdinand.
Busbecq was subsequently knighted and continued to serve the imperial family in various political roles.
In late 1592, then working in France, Busbecq took some time away from his service to visit his homeland.
As he travelled through Normandy, he was seized by a group of soldiers, but set free the next day.
Unfortunately, he quickly took ill and died on the 28th of October, 1592.
Busbecq had the reputation of being a man of many languages. Some biographers claim he had a native
command of Flemish, Latin, Italian, Spanish, French, German, and 'Slavic'. What is meant by the last is not
exactly clear. Flemish was of course his native tongue, and his education evidently provided for a rm
grasp of Latin, as the letter shows. He spent time at universities in Italy, where he was likely to have
developed a command of Italian; and it is certain from surviving letters in French that he had a command
of that language as well. Early in his career he was attaché to Ferdinand's representative Pedro de
Castilla, so it is likely that he acquired some pro ciency in Spanish. We also know that, while in Turkey,
Busbecq had a habit of copying Greek and Latin inscriptions. It is therefore likely that he was acquainted
with Classical Greek, though evidently not with Modern Greek. He also explains some Turkish words in his
letters, so he may have had an acquaintance with this language as well. It is also quite possible that he
had learned German while in service in Vienna.
Sometime during his second and longer stay in Constantinople, Busbecq had occasion to meet with two
envoys from the Crimea. One was evidently a native speaker of a Germanic language of the region, the
other a native Greek speaker who had learned the Germanic language in question. From what Busbecq
says, it appears that the Germanic speaker had lost much of his ability with his native tongue due to
constant interaction with Greek speakers, and the Greek speaker evidently turned out to be the more
competent in the Germanic language. From the letter it is unfortunately unclear as to which one of the
gentlemen actually supplied the linguistic data. Most scholars are of the opinion that it was the native
Greek speaker, a source of much consternation to present-day linguists because of the fact that his native
tongue presumably interfered with his ability in the Germanic language. Neither is it clear what medium
was employed in the interview: whether Busbecq interrogated the gentlemen directly (what language
would he use for this?), or by means of interpreters (presumably via Greek). The letter raises as many
questions as it answers.
Busbecq was certainly no newcomer to linguistic pursuits, and his letter clearly shows that he had an
interest in investigating rare linguistic gems should occasion arise. Some of the modern scholarly
literature has faulted Busbecq for his poor habits as a 'linguistic eldworker', failing to employ a
phonetically accurate orthography, failing to be consistent in orthographic practice, failing to identify the
recorded forms clearly, failing to note the circumstances and method of his linguistic interview -- the list
continues. But this should not be a surprise, since the data was collected sometime between 1555 and
1562, centuries before the advent of modern linguistic practices. For a man who was actually employed to
negotiate a peace treaty between empires, we are lucky that he took the time he did to produce what may
be the last surviving record of the East Germanic family of languages.
47 The Corpus of Crimean Gothic

The totality of primary texts concerning Crimean Gothic occupies roughly four manuscript pages. Of
these, the bulk of the linguistic data proper occupies two pairs of columns, each column containing a
word or, rarely, phrase of Crimean Gothic followed immediately by a Latin translation. There also appears
a three-line song, or cantilena given space of its own, but which lacks the Latin gloss one would have
hoped for. There are a few other words of Crimean Gothic set within the Latin text itself.
The entire corpus is short enough that it is worth reproducing here in full. Below, where there is
continuous Latin text, this is placed to the left of its English translation. Where there are columns of
Crimean Gothic with accompanying Latin, these have been set in three columns, the rst Crimean Gothic,
the next Latin, and nally an English translation of the Latin. The cantilena has no accompanying Latin
translation, and so there is no English translation. The English translation is intended to be close to the
Latin, word for word if possible, while at the same time making decent sense. No attempt is made at
polished English prose.
Latin Text English Text

Non possum hoc loco praeterire, quae de I cannot pass over what I have learned about a
gente accepi, quae etiamnum incolit Tauricam race which still inhabits the Crimea, which I had
Chersonesum, quam saepe audiveram often heard to resemble a Germanic origin in
sermone, moribus, ore denique ipso et speech, customs, in features even and in bodily
corporis habitu, originem Germanicam referre. appearance.
For a while now the desire has held me of seeing

Itaque me diu cupiditas tenuit videndi ab ea someone from this race, and if it be possible to
gente aliquem, et si fieri posset inde eruendi bring about, of eliciting from this one something
aliquid quod ea lingua scriptum esset, sed hoc which is written in that language, but this I was
consequi non potui. Casus tamen utcunque unable to achieve. Nevertheless happenstance
desiderio meo satisfecit. eventually ful lled my desire.
Cum essent duo huc illinc delegati, qui nescio Since there were here two delegates from that
quas querelas nomine eius gentis ad place, who were conducting I know not what
principem deferrent, meique interpretes in eos business in the name of that race, and as my
incidissent, memores quid eis mandassem si interpreters had chanced upon them, mindful of
id usu veniret, ad prandium illos ad me what I had charged them if such should come
adduxerunt. about, they therefore led them to me for a lunch.

Alter erat procerior, toto ore ingenuam One of them was taller, displaying in his overall
quandam simplicitatem praeferens, ut Flander appearance a certain native simplicity, so that he
videretur aut Batavus: looked like a Fleming or Dutchman:
alter erat brevior, compactiore corpore, colore the other was shorter, with a stouter body, a
fusco, ortu et sermone Graecus, sed qui swarthy color, Greek in origin and speech, but who
frequenti commercio non contemnendum eius with frequent interaction had a not disrespectable
linguae usum haberet, nam superior vicinitate, command of that language; for the rst one on
et frequenti Graecorum consuetudine sic account of proximity and frequent dealings with
eorum sermonem imbiberat, ut popularis sui Greeks had so taken in their speech as to have
esset oblitus, interrogatus de natura et forgotten that of his own people; though when
moribus illorum populorum, congruentia asked about the nature and customs of those
respondebat. peoples, he responded sensibly.
Aiebat gentem esse bellicosam, quae He was saying that the race was a warlike one
complures pagos hodieque incoleret, ex which inhabited many villages even today, from
quibus Tartarorum regulus, cum expediret, which the commander of the Tartars, when he
octingentos pedites sclopetarios scriberet, would set out, would enlist eight hundred infantry
praecipuum suarum copiarum firmamentum: armed with rearms, the primary foundation of his
primarias eorum urbes, alteram Mancup own forces; and that of their main cities, one was
vocari, alteram Sciuarin. called Mancup, the other Sciuarin.
To this he added many things about the Tartars

Ad haec multa de Tartaris eorumque barbarie: and their barbarism, but among whom he
in quibus tamen singulari sapientia non recounted not few were gifted with particular
paucos reperiri memorabat. Nam de rebus insight. For when they were asked about the most
gravissimis interrogatos, breviter atque serious matters, they would respond concisely
apposite respondere. and to the point.

Ea de caussa non temere dictitare Turcas, For this reason the Turks say not casually that,
reliquas quidem nationes scriptam in libris though other nations have wisdom written in
habere sapientiam, Tartaros libros suos books, the Tartars have devoured their books, and
devorasse, ideo in pectoribus eam habere have it so stored in their breast, and produce it as
reconditam, quam promat cum opus sit, et the occasion warrants, that they issue something
veluti divina fundant oracula. like divine oracles.
These same ones have the most terrible habits: if

Eosdem esse perquam immundis moribus: si some soup is placed on the table, they require no
iurulentum aliquid apponatur in mensa, nulla spoon, but rather the custom is to eat with the
requirere coclearia, sed ius vola manus palm of the hand. They devour the meat of dead
haurire. Enectorum equorum carnem devorare, horses, served with no ame, but only lay out the
nullo foco admotam, offas tantum sub pieces under a horse's saddle, and thus warmed
equestri sella explicare, quibus equino calore by the horse's heat they eat them as if they were
tepefactis tanquam opipare conditis vesci. lavishly spiced.
Gentis regulum e mensa argentea cibum

capere, primum inferri ferculum caput equi, ut The chief of this people takes his food from a
et postremum, quemadmodum apud nos silver table; the head of a horse is brought in as
primo novissimoque loco honos habetur the rst dish, and also the last, just as with us the
butyro. honor of the rst and last dish is held by butter.

Now I will write down a few words of the many

Nunc adscribam pauca vocabula de multis which sounded Germanic; for no less had many a
quae Germanica reddebat, nam haud minus form clearly different from ours, either because
multorum plane diversa a nostris erat forma: the nature of the language might cause this, or
sive quod eius linguae natura id ferat, sive because his memory escaped him and he was
quod eum fugiebat memoria et peregrina cum mixing foreign words with native ones. Indeed, he
vernaculis mutabat: omnibus vero dictionibus would place the article tho or the before all his
praeponebat articulum tho aut the. words.
Those the same as ours or little different were the

Nostratia aut parum differentia haec erant following:

Crimean Gothic Latin English

Broe. Panis. Bread.
Plut. Sanguis. Blood.
Stul. Sedes. Seat.
Hus. Domus. Home.
VVingart. Vitis. Vine branch.
Reghen. Pluvia. Rain.
Bruder. Frater. Brother.
Schuuester. Soror. Sister.
Alt. Senex. Old.
VVintch. Ventus. Wind.
Siluir. Argentum. Silver.
Goltz. Aurum. Gold.
Kor. Triticum. Grain.
Salt. Sal. Salt.
Fisct. Piscis. Fish.
Hoef. Caput. Head.
Thurn. Porta. Door.
Stein. Stella. Star.
Sune. Sol. Sun.
Mine. Luna. Moon.

Tag. Dies. Day.
Oeghene. Oculi. Eyes.
Bars. Barba. Beard.
Handa. Manus. Hand.
Boga. Arcus. Bow.
Miera. Formica. Ant.
Rinck sive[.] (or)
Ringo. Annulus. Ring.
Brunna. Fons. Fountain.
VVaghen. Currus. Wagon.
Apel. Pomum. Apple.
Schieten. Mittere sagittam. To shoot an arrow.
Schlipen. Dormire. To sleep.
Kommen. Venire. To come.
Singhen. Canere. To sing.
Lachen. Ridere. To laugh.
Eriten. Flere. To cry.
Geen. Ire. To go.
Breen. Assare. To roast.
Schuualth. Mors. Death.


Knauen tag was for him 'Good day'; Knauen

Knauen tag erat illi Bonus dies: Knauen meant 'good', and he would use many other terms
bonum dicebat et pleraque alia cum nostra not agreeing well enough with our language, such
lingua non satis congruentia usurpabat, ut as


Iel. Vita sive sanitas. Life or health.
Ieltsch. Vivus sive sanus. Living or healthy.
Iel vburt. Sit sanum. May it be well.
Marzus. Nuptiae. Marriage.
Schuos. Sponsa. Fiancee.
Statz. Terra. Land.
Ada. Ovum. Egg.
Ano. Gallina. Hen.
Telich. Stultus. Foolish.
Stap. Capra. She-goat.
Gadeltha. Pulchrum. Beautiful.
Atochta. Malum. Bad.
VVichtgata. Album. White.
Mycha. Ensis. Sword.

Baar. Puer. Boy.
Ael. Lapis. Stone.
Menus. Caro. Meat.
Rintsch. Mons. Mountain.
Fers. Vir. Man.
Lista. Parum. Too little.
Schediit. Lux. Light.
Borrotsch. Voluntas. Desire.
Cadariou. Miles. Soldier.
Kilemschkop. Ebibe calicem. Drink up your cup.
Tzo Vvarthata. Tu fecisti. Thou hast made.
Ies Varthata. Ille fecit. He made.
Ich malthata. Ego dico. I say.


Jussus ita numerabat. Ita, tua, tria, fyder, fyuf, When asked he counted thus: Ita, tua, tria,
seis, sevene, prorsus, ut nos Flandri. Nam vos fyuf, seis, sevene, just as we Flemings do. For
Brabanti, qui vos Germanice loqui facitis, hic you men of Brabant, who fancy that you speak
magnifice vos efferre, et nos soletis habere German, are accustomed to magnify yourselves
derisui, ac si istam vocem pronunciemus and take us for a joke, if we should pronounce
rancidius, quam vos Seuen effertis. horribly what you say as Seuen.
He continued from there Athe, nyne, thiine,

Prosequebatur delude Athe, nyne, thiine, thiinita, thunetua, thunetria, etc. He said
thiinita, thunetua, thunetria etc. Viginti dicebat stega for 'twenty', treithyen for 'thirty',
stega, triginta treithyen, quadraginta furdeithien for 'forty', sada for 'one hundred',
furdeithien, centum sada, hazer mille. Quin hazer for 'one thousand'. Moreover he recited a
etiam cantilenam eius linguae recitabat, cuius song from this language, whose beginning was
initium erat huiusmodi: like this:

Crimean Gothic

Wara wara ingdolou

Seu te gira Galtzou
Hoemisclep dorbiza ea.


Hi Gothi an Saxones sint, non possum Whether these be Goths or Saxons is not possible to
diiudicare. discern.
Si Saxones, arbitror eo deductos tempore If Saxons, I suspect that they were brought down in
Caroli magni, qui eam gentem per varias the time of Charles the Great, who scattered that
orbis terrarum regiones dissipavit. Cui rei people through the various parts of the world. As a
testimonio sunt urbes Transilvaniae testament to this fact there are Transilvania towns
hodieque Saxonibus incolis habitatae. which even today are inhabited by Saxon settlers.
Atque ex iis ferocissimos fortasse longius And so perhaps it seemed tting to move the most
etiam summoveri placuit in Tauricam usque erce of these even farther, all the way to the Crimea,
Chersonesum, ubi quidem inter hostes where even among enemies they still retain the
religionem adhuc retinent Christianam. Christian religion.
Quod si Gothi sunt, arbitror iam olim eas But if they are Goths, I suspect that they have held
sibi sedes tenuisse Getis proximas. Nec these regions for themselves beside the Getae for a
erraturum fortasse, qui sentiat maiorem long time already. Perhaps he would not be mistaken,
partem eius intervalli, quod est inter if one thought that the greater part of that expanse
Gothiam insulam et Procopiam, quam hodie which exists between the island Gotland and what
vocant, a Gothis aliquando insessam. Hinc they now call Perekup was once settled by Goths.
diversa Gothorum, Westgothorum et From here came the various names of the Goths, the
Ostrogothorum nomina: hinc peragratus West Goths and the Ostrogoths; from here a traversal
orbis victoriis et seminarium ingens of the world through victories and the great nursery
barbaricae multitudinis. of the barbaric horde.
Habes quae de Taurica Chersoneso ex his Now you have what I learned about the Crimea from
Procopiensibus didici. these men of Perekup.
In the course of subsequent copying and typesetting, it is possible that errors may have crept into the
text. For example, some suggest that in setting one of the columns of the word lists, some letters may
have fallen out and been incorrectly replaced. In this way, CG Thurn received the nal n which properly
belonged to CG Kor, and CG Fisct received the nal t which properly belonged to CG Hoef. The proper
words should thus be: CG *Thur, *Korn, *Fisc, *Hoeft. Others also suggest that the gloss Ego dico 'I
say' for CG Ich malthata is an error for Ego dixi 'I said'; similarly the gloss Voluntas 'wish' for CG
Borrotsch is a misprint for Voluptas 'pleasure'. Stearns (1978) proposes the following emendations:
Original Meaning Emendation

Bars 'beard' *Bart

Broe 'bread' *Broet
Eriten 'to cry' *Criten, *Kriten, or *Griten
Fisct ' sh' *Fisch

fyuf ' ve' *fynf
Hoef 'bread' *Hoeft
Kor 'grain' *Korn
Menus 'meat' is incorrectly printed for *Mem(m)s or Menns
Schuos ' ancee' *Schnos
Stein 'star' *Stern
thunetria 'thirteen' *thiinetria
thunetua 'twelve' *thiinetua
Varthata '(he) made' *VVarthata
vburt 'may it be...' *vvurt
Vvarthata 'hast made' *VVarthata
VVichtgata 'white' *VVitgata
VVintch 'wind' *VVintsch
48 Phonology
The phonology of Crimean Gothic is both the primary avenue of investigation into the language and the
greatest source of consternation. The di culty stems from the manner in which the linguistic data was
gathered and transmitted. Interpretation of the phonology of the corpus as received suffers from three
basic problems:
1. the informant: Whichever of the two gentlemen from the Crimea provided the linguistic data, he
was either a Greek by birth, or a native speaker of Crimean Gothic more competent in Greek than in
his own native tongue. In either scenario, one may be certain that the pronunciation of Crimean
Gothic words was colored by some degree of interference from Greek phonology of the region and
period.
2. the eldworker: Busbecq himself was known to be competent in several languages. Nevertheless,
his native language presumably colored his understanding of the sounds he heard. In addition, as
is clear from the letter, Busbecq had already formed preconceptions as to the nature of the
language and its possible origin. This, coupled with his competence in other languages, perhaps
resulted in his amendment of certain words to conform with those of languages he knew and to
which he believed the language of the informants to be related.
3. the transmission: Busbecq's original letter appears to have suffered from both scribal emendation
and error, introducing a certain degree of uncertainty in some instances as to what it was that
Busbecq intially wrote.

Corrections which may be due to the last point have been touched upon in the preceding section. Below
we discuss issues related to the informant's linguistic skills and Busbecq's own skills and practices.
48.1 Informant Interference

Most scholars interpret Busbecq's letter as suggesting that it was in fact the native Greek speaker who
was the primary source of the Crimean Gothic material. If so, it is especially important to understand the
sounds of his native language, since we expect that he will be more apt to preserve those phonological
distinctions of Crimean Gothic which are paralleled in his own language than those which are not
distinguished in his native tongue. What then was the phonological structure of the Greek which the
informant spoke?
Stearns (1978) suggests the following line of reasoning. We may presume that, because of the Greek
speaker's familiarity with the region, he may have been born in or near the Crimea and probably spoke the
Greek found in that region at that time. We may call this language Crimean Greek of the 16th century.
Inasmuch as there is scant evidence for the exact nature of this variety of Greek during this period, we
must look for some indirect method to discover its characteristics.
It turns out that in the late 18th century the Tartars persecuted the Christians of the Crimea, and these
Christians requested from Catherine II permission to settle in Russian territory. This was granted, and
many of them, among them a large number of Greek speakers, eventually settled in the city of Mariupol
(Zhdanov) in the Ukraine, beside the sea of Azov. The dialect of these Greek speakers, which we may term
Mariupol Greek (MGk), survived into the 20th century. As it ultimately stems from the Greek spoken by
natives of the Crimea, we may tentatively equate Mariupol Greek with Crimean Greek (CGk). We then
further assume that MGk, hence CGk, has undergone little change in the centuries between the gathering
of current linguistic data and the time period of Busbecq's visit to the Crimea. These assumptions are all
speculative, but provide at least some starting point for an assessment of the pertinent phonology.
From studies of Mariupol Greek, we nd that this dialect does in fact differ from standard Modern Greek
in some ways. The consonants of Mariupol Greek, and thus Crimean Greek, are given in the chart below:
CGk Consonants Labial Dental Palatal (Alveolar) Velar

Stops
Voiceless: /p/ /t/, /t'/ /k/
Voiced: /b/ /d/ [g] = /k/
Fricatives
Voiceless: /f/ /þ/ /x/
Voiced: /v/ /ð/ /ḡ/
Sibilants
Voiceless: /s/
Voiced: /z/
Affricates
Voiceless: /c/ = [ts] /š/
Voiced: /ž/

Nasals /m/ /n/ [ŋ] = /n/

Liquids
Continuant: /l/
Trilled: /r/
Semi-Vowels /j/
Here the symbol þ is used rather than the more usual theta in keeping with our focus on Gothic. There
does not appear to be any distinction between long and short consonants in MGk. In addition, MGk
preserves the distinction of voiced and voiceless consonants, and word- nal consonants do not undergo
devoicing.
The vowels of Mariupol Greek, and so Crimean Greek, are shown in the following chart:
CGk Vowels Front Back
Unrounded Rounded Unrounded Rounded
[i] [u.]
High /i/ /u/
[ɨ] [u]

[e] [o.]
Middle /e/ [ej] /o/
[je] [o]

Low /a/
A period immediately following a vowel indicates a tense pronunciation. MGk apparently does not
phonemically distinguish vowel length. Several of the phonemes had allophonic variants, indicated in
square brackets in the column following the phoneme. In particular, the phoneme /e/ had phonetic
variants including palatal on- and off-glides. MGk [je] appears for /e/ in initial position, so that [jéma]
corresponds to Modern Greek [éma]; likewise MGk [ej] occurs for /e/ in one-syllable words, so that MGk
[psejs] corresponds to Modern Greek [pses].
We may now consider a few examples of how our knowledge of MGk phonology, and hence CGk
phonology, provides us with a method by which to interpret the Crimean Gothic corpus.
We are in a position to determine the re ex of PGmc *e in Crimean Gothic. Consider the word Busbecq
transcribes as seis. The diphthong may be Busbecq's rendering of what the Greek-speaking informant
pronounced as [sejs]. This mid-front vowel with palatal off-glide, however, is the Greek informant's
allophone for /e/ in monosyllabic words. Hence we expect the informant's [sejs] to correspond to CG
/ses/. Thus CG /e/ corresponds to PGmc *e. Compare BG saíhs, ON sex, OHG sehs.
Consider also the initial the initial ie of the words written Iel, Ies. Some scholars have taken ie to
represent long [ī]. This is possible, but the allophones of CGk /e/ provide an alternate explanation. Since
the CG ie appears in initial position, we might expect this to represent a palatal on-glide introduced by the
informant. Thus the informant's [jes] may represent CG /es/. Compare Runic eR, OHG er from PGmc *es.
In addition, since CGk does not distinguish vowel length, we may suspect that CGk /e/ represents a
possible CG /ē/. Then we nd in initial position [je] < CG /ē/, which is perhaps the CG re ex of the PGmc
diphthong *ai. Then CG Iel = /ēl/, for which compare BG háils and OHG heil 'well', with loss of initial h-.
As regards consonants, we may recall that nal voiced consonants in CGk are not devoiced. In this
context we note the following correspondences:
Meaning Old English Old Saxon Crim. Goth.

'blood' blōd blōd Plut

'old' eald ald Alt
'ring' hring hring Rinck
The nal consonants in the CG re exes are clearly devoiced, and this devoicing cannot be presumed to be
a result of interference from the informant's native language. Thus we nd that devoicing of nal PGmc
consonants is a feature of CG itself.
The initial p in CG Plut 'blood' poses an interesting challenge. In this position we expect the voiced plosive
b, as in BG blōþ, since other words give us no indication that an initial PGmc *b should be treated
specially. Compare the following: CG Broe 'bread' (cf. OE brēad, OHG brōt), CG Bruder 'brother' (cf. BG
brōþar), CG Boga 'bow' (cf. ON bogi, OS, OHG bogo), CG Bars 'beard' (cf. OE beard, OHG bart), CG
Brunna 'fountain' (cf. BG brunna). Given that Plut is the sole exception, it is quite possible that the p is
simply a misprint. If not, we must seek another explanation. Since the informant's native tongue
distinguishes voiced and voiceless consonants in all positions, we must assume that this represents a
true CG [p]. It is then possible that CG had two allophones for /b/, one strongly voiced [b], and one weakly
voiced [p]. The latter occurred in initial position when followed by /l/.
A similar explanation may apply to the unexpected occurrence of t in Tag 'day' and th in Thurn 'door'.
These presumably represent the same voiceless plosive [t], where we would otherwise expect [d] from
PGmc *d, cf. BG dags, OS duri, OHG turi. The PGmc *d in fact occurs as CG [d] in other places: Handa
(cf. BG handus, ON hǫnd, OS hand) and CG fyder (cf. BG fidwor, fidur-). As with CG /b/, we may
assume that CG /d/ < PGmc d had two allophones. One was lightly voiced and equivalent to [t], occurring
for initial /d/; the other was voiced, and occurred for /d/ between sonorants, i.e. resonants and vowels.
An unfortunate property of the CGk phonemic inventory is that it lacks the glottal fricative /h/, which we
would expect to develop at some stage in the history of CG from PGmc *x if the other Germanic
languages are any indication. If such a phoneme was in fact present in CG, we would expect the Greek-
speaking informant to substitute either [x] or zero. Unfortunately we nd the confusing situation in which
the CG corpus shows both the expected h in certain words and zero in others:
Crim. Old Old Old High Old

Change Goth. Gothic English Saxon German Norse Meaning

*x > h Hus hūs hūs hūs hūs 'house'
Hoef háubiþ hēafod hōbid houbit 'head'
Handa handus hand hand hant hǫnd 'hand'

*x >
zero Ano hana hana hano hano hane 'cock'
Ieltsch háils hāl hēl heil heill 'well'
This could be an idiosyncracy of the informant, employing [x] in some words, zero in others. Perhaps
more likely, however, is that PGmc *x was in fact lost in CG, and that it was Busbecq's own knowledge of
Dutch and German orthography which lead him to write an h in words which were in fact pronounced
without [x]. Note that the words with h, Hus, Hoef, Handa, appear in the list of those words which
Busbecq believed to be quite similar to his own, while Ano and Ieltsch appear in the list of words which
sounded fairly dissimilar to the Germanic languages with which he was familiar.
48.2 Fieldworker Interference

Busbecq was uent in a number of languages, and familiar with still others. Therefore the number of
different language sounds with which he was familar must have been considerable. Some scholars have
suggested, however, that Busbecq was not entirely familiar with [þ], hearing the sound instead as [ts], and
therefore transcribing tz. Consider the following examples: CG Goltz 'gold' (cf. BG gulþ), CG Statz 'land'
(cf. BG dat. sg. staþa, OS stað, OHG stad, stado 'shore'), and CG Tzo 'thou' (cf. BG þu, OE þu, ON þú).
However this same familiarity with a number of languages may have been a hindrance in the area of
orthography. It is clear from the letter that Busbecq already had certain preconceived notions of the
relationship the language under investigation had to other Germanic languages. It appears that in certain
respects he allowed his transcription of the informant's words to be colored by the orthographic
conventions of other languages, particularly Netherlandic and German writing conventions.
Busbecq's transcription ie may have represented the long vowel ī, since this was the practice in Middle
Netherlandic and Early New High German. This is likely the intention in the transcription Meira 'ant' and
Schieten 'shoot', which mimic Middle Netherlandic miere and schieten. Given the lack of phonemic
distinction between long and short vowels in CGk, however, the informant likely pronounced a short
vowel. We have also discussed above how the ie found in CG Ies, Iel, and Ieltsch likely represents the
palatal on-glide of the informant's initial [je], and not the monophthong [ī]. If this is true, it shows that
Busbecq suffered some inconsistency in employing letters for transcription.
As discussed in the preceding subsection, h is particularly problematic. Its apparent inconsistency on

Proto-Germanic grounds is likely the result of Busbecq's own orthographic habits. This letter appeared in
the Middle Netherlandic words huus, hovet, hant and in Early New High German haus, haupt, hand(t).
What is more, Busbecq was accustomed to writing this letter in initial position before a vowel, since in his
native Flemish [h] was lost in just this position, though inconsistently retained in the writing. This
strengthens the argument outlined above, that [h] was lost in initial position in Crimean Gothic, but
Busbecq inserted the letter in the writing of those words closest to those of the Germanic languages with
which he was familiar.
Scholarly opinion varies on what the transcription tz actually represents. This digraph only occurs in
places where one expects PGmc *þ, though *þ also appears as t, th, and d. It could of course be a
misprint, but the correspondences with *þ are not chance, so that this is not likely. As mentioned above,
Busbecq may have misunderstood [þ] as [ts] and thus written tz. On the other hand, he may have been
attempting to transcribe the voiced fricative [ð]. But since the informant would have distinguished [ð] and
[þ], he may have pronounced [ð] in CG Tzo 'thou', but it is less likely in Goltz and Statz. In the end,
Busbecq likely heard CG [þ] correctly, but was confounded in how to transcribe it. Perhaps tz was his
solution to this dilemma.
49 Morphology
Unfortunately Busbecq has left us with few complete phrases with which to analyze syntactic relations
and the morphology which marks those relations. Instead what we have are for the most past isolated
forms devoid of context. This leaves any identi cation of morphological form tentative at best.
49.1 Substantives
Scholars generally agree that Crimean Gothic distinguished gender, case, and number, though it is di cult
to tell from the data available just to what degree. If we are correct in interpreting both s and sch as
representations of CG /s/, then several words may show that CG retained the PGmc nominative singular
masculine ending -z as CG /s/. Consider the following examples: CG VVintch 'wind' (if a misprint for
*VVintsch, cf. BG winds), CG Fers 'man' (cf. BG faírƕus), CG Rintsch 'mountain', CH Borrotsch 'desire'.
The CG phrase Knauen tag may display the ending of the accusative masculine singular. Compare the
accusative singular BG dag, ON dag, OE dæg, OS dag, OHG tag. Only CG Oeghene 'eyes' has a plural
gloss. This perhaps represents a nominative or accusative plural form, as with BG áugōna, ON augo, OE
ēagen, OS ōgun, OHG ougun.
The phrases preserve some of the CG pronouns. In particular we nd CG Ich 'I' (cf. BG ik, ON ek, OE ic, OS
ik, OHG ih), as well as CG Tzo 'thou' (cf. BG þu, ON þú, OE þū, OS þū, OHG dū). We also have the
masculine third person pronoun CG Ies 'he' (cf. BG is, ON er). The letter may also provide examples of the
accusative singular of a third person neuter enclitic pronoun CG -(a)ta, if it is correct to interpret phrases
like Ich malthata as 'I say it'. Compare BG ita, OS it, OHG iz. A different interpretation takes the pronoun
to be a demonstrative CG thata, so that Ich malthata would mean 'I say that'. Compare BG þata, ON þat,
OE þæt, OS that, OHS daz.
Among adjectives, CG Ieltsch 'healthy' may employ the transcription sch to re ect a strong nominative
singular masculine ending CG /s/, and is thus equivalent to BG háils. The adjectives CG Alt 'old' and
Telich 'foolish', lacking either transcription s or sch, may show strong neuter nominative/accusative
singular endings, similar to BG blind. The pronominal alternate ending for this form, akin to BG blindata,
may also be in evidence in the transcriptions -ta and -tha of the following adjectives: CG Atochta 'bad'
(Lat. Malum), CG VVichtgata 'white' (perhaps misprinted for *VVitgata; Lat. Album), CG Gadeltha
'beautiful' (Lat. Pulchrum). Each of the Latin glosses shows the neuter nominative/accusative singular
form. The adjective CG Knauen 'good' likely represents the strong masculine accusative singular ending,
akin to BG blindan.
49.2 Verbs
Busbecq's data provides us with a number of in nitive verb forms, all ending in CG -en: CG Schieten 'to
shoot an arrow' (written in the manuscript with a lift over the e, rather than the n itself; Lat. Mittere
sagittam), CG Schlipen 'to sleep' (Lat. Dormire), CG Kommen 'to come' (Lat. Venire), CG Singhen 'to
sing' (Lat. Canere), etc.
The two verb forms CG Vvarthata and Varthata (both likely representing *VVarthata) are glossed with
the Latin perfect indicative, rst and second person singular, respectively. These could be disyllabic
preterite forms, analogous to the plural forms of BG, e.g. nasidēdum 'we saved'; this would then show
that such disyllabic forms were extended to the singular in CG. However, such a conclusion might be
obviated by reading the nal sequence -(a)ta or -thata as neuter accusative pronouns. In this regard, the
manuscript glosses the phrase CG Ich malthata as 'I say' (Lat. Ego dico). Since this form appears the
same as the preceding, and those are glossed as preterites, most scholars take Lat. Ego dico 'I say' to be
a misprint for Ego dixi 'I said'. However, reading the nal two syllables as a neuter direct object allow the
manuscript reading to stand, and perhaps this shows the rst person singular, present indicative active.
The phrase CG Kilemschkop 'drink up your cup' is glossed as a Latin imperative. Reading the nal
syllable -kop as the CG word for 'cup', then that leaves Kilemsch as a second person singular imperative.
The phrase CG Iel vburt 'may it be well' is glossed with the Latin present subjunctive. The form CG vburt,
perhaps for *vvurt, may be a third person singular past subjunctive (optative): cf. OHG wurti from
werdan.
50 Syntax
There are a meagre few phrases in the Crimean Gothic corpus from which we can even hope to begin a
study of the language's syntax. Most regrettably, the cantilena (song)
Wara wara ingdolou

Seu te gira Galtzou
Hoemisclep dorbiza ea.
does not even contain a gloss. This is a particular blow, because this is the only possible passage which
may have contained multiple clauses, or at least one extended clause. What we are left with, then, are the
following phrases:

Knauen tag Bonus dies good day
Iel vburt (*vvurt) Sit sanum may it be well
Tzo Vvarthata Tu fecisti thou hast made, done
Ies Varthata Ille fecit he made, did
Ich malthata Ego dico I say
Kilemschkop Ebibe calicem drink up your cup
If we take CG -thata to be a pronoun, then we may make the following analysis:
Subject Verb Object Meaning

Tzo Vvar -thata thou hast made that
Ies Var -thata he made that
Ich mal -thata I say that
Assuming the informant made no syntactic errors, then it appears that CG is tentatively a Subject-Verb-
Object (SVO) language. Such an identi cation must be quali ed, however, by the structure of the phrase
CG Knauen tag '(I bid you) good day'. This presumably shows an attributive adjective preceding the noun
it modi es, which is a feature generally associated with SOV languages. If similar to other Germanic
languages of a similar time period, Crimean Gothic was likely an SVO language which retained remnants
of an earlier period of SOV word order.
If the phrase CG Kilemschkop 'drink up your cup' is actually to be analyzed as an imperative Kilemsch
and direct object -kop, then it appears imperative forms occupy rst position in an utterance. This order
need not hold, however, if the verb is subjunctive: CG Iel vburt 'may it be well' appears to be verb nal.
Gothic Online
Selected Annotated Bibliography
Todd B. Krause
Texts
There are few available editions of the Gothic corpus as a whole, the most accessible sources being the
reading excerpts contained in the grammars listed in the next section. There are, however, two
outstanding editions of Gothic texts listed below. The rst is unforunately long out of print, and the
second is reprinted periodically.
Gerhard H. Balg, The First Germanic Bible. Milwaukee: self-published, 1891. This work contains
the Gothic text of the Bible, as well as the other main remains of the Gothic language. One of
the few editions in English, particularly amusing for employing a reformed spelling of Modern
English (e.g. tho for though). It contains a complete dictionary of the language. An even more
striking feature is a remarkably extensive treatment of syntax, though more along the lines of
standard grammars of Latin and Greek (e.g. focusing on clauses of various types such as
result clauses and purpose clauses), rather than in step with modern notions of syntax. In
short an amazingly useful reference.
Wilhelm Streitberg, Die gotische Bibel. Heidelberg: Carl Winter Universitaetsbuchhandlung,

1960. Two volumes. Simply put, this is the standard edition of the Gothic Bible by which all
others are judged. Streitberg put considerable effort into reconstructing the form of the Greek
Bible on which the Gothic translation was based, and the result is set on pages facing the
accompanying Gothic. The second volume is a complete dictionary of the Gothic language,
particularly interesting for its labelling of verbs as perfective or imperfective as per Streitberg's
description of such terms in his Elementarbuch.
Grammars
There are a number of grammars of the Gothic language. Most of them are reference grammars and
therefore not a user-friendly introduction to the language, Bennett's book being a notable exception. In
addition, few of the grammars are in English.
Wilhelm Braune, Gotische Grammatik: mit Lesestuecken und Worterverzeichnis. Tuebingen:

Niemeyer, 1973. One of the standard references in German. Includes readings and a glossary.
Wilhelm Streitberg, Gotisches Elementarbuch. Heidelberg: Carl Winter

Universitaetsbuchhandlung, 1910. Perhaps the single most useful reference grammar on
Gothic. It stands out among all others by virtue of its lengthy treatment of syntax, given short
shrift elsewhere. Includes reading passages and a glossary. In German.
Joseph Wright, Grammar of the Gothic Language. London: Oxford University Press, 1954. A
nice, clear reference grammar, with a number of readings and glossaries. A thorough
treatment of morphology, though some of the analysis is a little dated. A few pages of syntax
are added as an afterthought. One of the few reference works available in English.
Wolfgang Krause, Handbuch des Gotischen. Munich: Beck, 1968. A reference grammar, with
little attention given to matters of syntax. In German.
William H. Bennett, An Introduction to the Gothic Language. New York: Modern Language
Association of America, 1980. This is an extremely useful introduction and a welcome
departure from all other books this author has seen, they being mainly reference grammars
with readings added as an afterthought. Bennett's book is a pedagogical introduction, though
at times a little more terse than one would like. As nice feature is that at the nal sections of
most of the chapters, taken together, form a concise introduction to Germanic historical
linguistics in general. Includes readings for each chapter and a self-contained glossary. In
English.
Dictionaries
The text editions listed above, namely Balg's and Streitberg's, contain full dictionaries of the corpus
(Balg's into English, Streitberg's into German). From the perspective of historical linguistics, the following
work stands out.
Winfred P. Lehmann, A Gothic Etymological Dictionary. Leiden: E. J. Brill, 1986. As noted in the
work, this is based on the third edition of the Vergleichendes Woerterbuch der Gotischen
Sprache by Sigmund Feist. In short, this is perhaps the single most useful work on the Gothic
language besides the texts themselves. In a sense a topical dictionary, in that words
etymologically related are generally listed under the same head word. It can, however, be used
as a companion dictionary to the texts by employing the Gothic index near the back. Each
head word is given a short discussion citing scholarly literature which is collected in the
bibliography. Examples of etymologically related words from other languages are cited, and
the index contains lists of all words referenced from languages Indo-European and not,
grouped by language and family or subfamily. In English.
Linguistic History
The rst source listed below is a book giving a general survey of the older Germanic languages and is a
suitable introduction for the non-specialist. The articles that follow are scholarly works treating speci c
matters of Gothic, Germanic, and Indo-European historical linguistics.
Orrin W. Robinson, Old English and its Closest Relatives. London: Routledge, 1992. A truly fun
and entertaining book to read, while at the same time scholarly and informative. A rare gem.
Each of the major archaic Germanic languages is treated in a separate chapter, highlighting
the way in which each differs from basic common Germanic characteristics as outlined in an
early chapter. A short reading and accompanying glossary (with translations into English at
the end of the book) are given in each chapter; when possible these are parallel versions of the
Parable of the Sower and the Seed, to afford easy comparison between languages. The
chapter on Gothic, as is to be expected in a work of this nature, is more super cial than these
lessons. It is nevertheless informative for gaining perspective on how Gothic ts into the
Germanic family. In English.
Winfred P. Lehmann, "The Indo-European dh-Determinative in Germanic," Language Vol. 18, No.
2, Apr-Jun 1942, 125-132.
Winfred P. Lehmann, "The Indo-European dh-Determinative as Germanic Preterite Formant,"

Language Vol. 19, No. 1, Jan-Mar 1943, 19-26.
Vyacheslav V. Ivanov, "Indo-European Syntactic Rules and Gothic Morphology," Indo-European

Studies Vol. 1, 1999. The article is available for download on the University of California Press
website.
Frederick Kortlandt, The Origin of the Goths, 2000. Available for download on the author's web
page.
History
The works listed below treat the history of the Gothic people. Two of the works give broad overviews and
interpretation of a vast amount of primary and secondary literature treating more or less the entire course
of documented Gothic history. The work by Heather and Matthews, by contrast, is more limited in
timespan and unique in providing primary source material in translation.
Peter Heather, The Goths. Cambridge, Mass: Blackwell, 1996. A well-written study of the Goths,
particularly useful for its attempt to distinguish between different Gothic tribes in the period
leading up to the advent of the Visigoths and Ostrogoths. Contains enlightening dicussions of
the relation between archaeology and ethnicity. In English.
Peter Heather and John Matthews, The Goths in the Fourth Century. Liverpool: Liverpool
University Press, 1991. A singularly useful text, being a rare resource for actual primary texts
concerning the Goths in English translation. Short and to the point, though with a broad range
of coverage from archaeology, history, and language.
Herwig Wolfram, History of the Goths, translated from German by Thomas J. Dunlap. Berkeley:
University of California Press, 1988. The English version of this German text is actually a
wonderful read. The author keeps the narrative owing at a brisk pace, though pausing at
times for interesting asides and analyses. Though a history text, this generally reads more like
a novel, albeit with less character development. Unfortunately the asides, which look both
forward and backward in time, can make following the sequence of events a little di cult at
times. This makes the book's use as a reference a little more limited.
Crimean Gothic
The following work has become a standard on the topic of Crimean Gothic, both providing the primary
material and a useful summary of scholarship up to the point of publication.
MacDonald Stearns, Jr., Crimean Gothic: analysis and etymology of the corpus. Saratoga, Calif:
Anma Libri, 1978. A particularly thorough study of Crimean Gothic. At times going against
previous scholarly opinion, a generally well-reasoned and solid account of the language and
problems with its interpretation. Extremely informative, containing Busbecq's letter in
facsimile, transcription, and translation, as well as a discussion of pertinent ancilliary
materials. In English.

Gothic

Uploaded by

Document Informationclick to expand document information

Copyright:

Available Formats

Gothic

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Gothic

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

22/11/2018 The Linguistics Research Center

1. Location of the Goths

2. Position of Gothic in the Germanic Family

2.1.1 Phonological Characteristics

Gothic Sound Gothic Old High Old Old Meaning

*e1 > ē qēmun kāmun cwōmon kvāmu 'they came'

mēna māno mōna māne 'moon'

Gothic Sound Gothic Old High Old Old Meaning

*ww > ggw triggws triuwi trīewe tryggr 'true, faithful'

glaggwus glau glēaw gluggr 'accurate; wise'

*jj > ggj twaddjē zwei(i)o twēg(e)a tveggja 'of two'

-waddjus veggr 'wall'

Gothic Sound Gothic Old High Old Old Meaning

*z > z láisjan lēren lǣran 'teach'

huzd hort hord hodd 'hoard'

wēsun wārun wǣron váru 'they were'

Gothic Gothic Old High Old Old Meaning

*fl- > þl- þliuhan fliohan flēon flýja ' ee'

*þlahsjan flīeman flæma 'frighten, drive, chase'

*fl- > fl- flōdus flōt flōd flōð ' ood'

flōkan fluohhōn flōcan flōkinn 'bewail, strike, curse,

PGmc Gothic Old High Old Old Meaning

*gastiz gasts gast giest gestr 'stranger, guest'

*nasjan nasjan nerren nerian 'save'

*handus handus hant hond hǫnd 'hand'

2.1.2 Morphological Characteristics

PGmc Gothic Old High Old Old Meaning

*dagaz dags tac dæg dagr 'day'

*gastiz gasts gast giest gestr 'stranger, guest'

PGmc Gothic Old High Old Old Meaning

*dagans dagans taga dagas daga 'days' (acc. pl.)

Verb Type Gothic Old High Old Old Meaning

Strong namt nāmi nōme namt 'thou didst take'

Preterite-Pres. þarft darft þearft þarft 'thou needest'

2.2 Gothic and the Germanic Family Tree

1. sharpening of *ww and *jj;

2. the sound change *ngw > ng;

3. a number of verbs of the -nan class;

4. a 2nd person singular preterite ending -t;

6. the lack of a gerund.

3. The Gothic Corpus

Related Language Courses at UT

East Germanic Resources Elsewhere

Our Web Links (https://liberalarts.utexas.edu/lrc/extras/links.php) page includes pointers to East

Visigoths: 1 the greater part of the Tervingi

2 the Greuthungi under Ermenaric

3 Goths led by Radagaisus

Ostrogoths: 4 Amal-led Goths

5 Goths under Theodoric Strabo

7 Greuthungi led by Farnobius

8 Greuthungi led by Odotheus

9 Goths under Bigelis

10 Goths under Dengizich

12 Goths near the Sea of Azov

In 399 the Roman poet Claudian wrote (In Eutropium, 2.152-153):

Ostrogothis colitur mixtisque Gruthungis Phryx ager

Reading and Textual Analysis

3 - jah iddjedun allai, ei melidai weseina, ƕarjizuh in seinai baurg.

1. sharpening of ww and jj;